HISTORICAL MANUALS

 
 
                                           UNIVERSITY OF KENTUCKY
                                           COMPUTING CENTER
 
                                           CMS Reference
 
                                           VM/SP Release 3
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                           UU  U KK  K   CCCC  CCCC
                                           UU  U KK K   CC    CC
                                           UU  U KKK    CC    CC
                                           UU  U KK  K  CC    CC
                                            UUU  KK   K  CCCC  CCCC
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
         Fifth Edition, Revision 0 (March 1984)
 
         Users of this manual are encouraged to report
         any errors or ambiguities, and to make
         suggestions for improvements.  The author can
         be contacted at the address below.
 
         Technical changes made to the contents of this
         manual are indicated by a vertical bar to the
         left of the change.
 
         University of Kentucky
         Computing Center
         72 McVey Hall
         Lexington, KY  40506-0045
         Phone: 606/257-2900
 
         Processed March 6, 1984-Waterloo SCRIPT - Version 82.2 (09/26/83)
 
         Prepared by Dave Elbon
 
 
 
 
                                                                        PREFACE
 
 
         This manual is designed to be used as a reference.  It contains
         detailed command syntax and usage notes for many of the commands
         (including XEDIT and its subcommands) available under the IBM Virtual
         Machine System Product (VM/SP) Conversational Monitor System (CMS)
         through the facilities of the University of Kentucky Computing Center.
         Introductory information for new users can be found in several of the
         manuals listed in the Bibliography.
 
       | Not all commands available under VM/SP are documented in this manual.
       | The intention is to cover the most commonly used commands (or at least
       | their most commonly needed functions) and commands not documented
       | elsewhere.  Most commands not included here are covered in detail in
       | either the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro Reference or the VM/SP HPO CP
       | Command Reference for General Users.
 
       | This manual reflects changes and additions made to VM/SP at the UKCC
       | that aren't described in the IBM documentation.  When there is a
       | discrepancy between this manual and IBM documentation this manual is
       | usually correct.  Documentation for all commands is available online
       | through the HELP command, and since the online information can be
       | updated faster than printed manuals, HELP is usually the most accurate
       | source.
 
       | Refer to the Bibliography at the end of this manual for a list of
       | other manuals that may be of interest.  (Note: Some publications refer
       | to software and hardware not available under CMS at the UKCC.)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                  Preface     i
 
 
 
 
                                                             Summary of Changes
 
 
 
         Fifth Edition, February 1984
 
            · This edition replaces the UKCC CJS Reference and the UKCC CMS
              Programming Supplement.
            · Numerous changes have been made to reflect the new features
              available with Release 3 of VM/SP.
            · The default settings of PF10, PF11, and PF12 under XEDIT have
              changed.
            · XEDIT no longer supports EDGAR simulation mode, and the EDGAR and
              ECOMMAND commands are no longer available.
            · Minor changes and additions have been made to the XEDIT default
              characteristics for some filetypes.  Refer to Appendix A.
            · The naming convention for XEDIT AUTOSAVE files has changed.
            · Documentation has been added for several new commands, including
              HI, PASSWORD, SAS, SSORT (SyncSort), and YCALC.
            · The EXECIO command can be used in EXEC programs to perform a
              number of functions.  Since EXECIO is a nucleus resident
              function, it is much more efficient than the equivalent function
              performed by CMSDIO or one of the STKxxx commands.  The LISTFILE
              and QUERY commands now have stacking options and are both now
              nucleus resident also.  These should be used when possible
              instead of the STKxxx commands.
            · Because of the unwieldy size this manual has become, descriptions
              of the following seldom used or obsolete commands have been
              removed:  BIGFILES, CMSPUN, NEWFILES, OPTANAL, RETCODE, SETUFLG,
              STKCP, STKFILE and STKUFLG.  The commands (and online help for
              them) are still available.
            · Minor editorial changes have been made throughout the manual.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                      Summary of Changes     ii
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       CONTENTS
 
 
 
 
         Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  i
 
         Summary of Changes  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
 
         Section 1.  Command Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1
 
            1.A Functional Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1
 
            1.B CMS Commands for EXEC Writers  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8
 
         Section 2.  Command Descriptions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  9
 
         Section 3.  Command Return Codes  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  345
 
         Section 4.  Communicating With Asynchronous ASCII Terminals . . .  346
 
            4.A Asynchronous Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  346
 
            4.B ASCII Typewriter Mode  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  347
 
            4.C ASCII Display Mode Using S3270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  348
 
            4.D Exchanging Files With Personal Computers . . . . . . . . .  350
 
         Appendix A.  XEDIT Default Filetype Attributes  . . . . . . . . .  352
 
         Appendix B.  Character Translation for ASCII Communication  . . .  354
 
         Appendix C.  Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  359
 
         Bibliography  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  363
 
         Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  366
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                               Contents     iii
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         Section 1:  Command Summaries
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
         1.A Functional Summary
 
         The tables on the following pages list the most frequently needed
         functions available under CMS and some of the commands that can
         perform them.  More information about these commands can be found in
         Section 2 of this manual.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Creating CMS Disk Files                                         |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    XEDIT     Create a CMS disk file from data entered at your      |
         |              terminal or copied from other CMS disk files.         |
         |    FCOPY     Create a CMS disk file by copying data from an        |
         |              existing CMS disk file.                               |
         |    ACCEPT    Create a CMS disk file by copying data from a reader  |
         |              spool file.                                           |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Examining CMS Disk Files                                        |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    XEDIT     Examine (and modify, if necessary) a CMS disk file.   |
       | |    LEDIT     Examine and modify a very large CMS disk file.        |
         |    BROWSE    Examine a CMS disk file (for 3270-type display        |
         |              terminals only).  Unlike XEDIT, BROWSE can be used    |
         |              to examine files of any size.                         |
         |    TYPE      Type the contents of a CMS disk file at your terminal.|
         |    MATCH     Compare two CMS disk files and determine the changes  |
         |              necessary to make the first file match the second.    |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Modifying CMS Disk Files                                        |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    XEDIT     Examine and modify a CMS disk file.                   |
       | |    LEDIT     Examine and modify a very large CMS disk file.        |
       | +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     1
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       | +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Printing CMS Disk Files                                         |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    PRINT     Generate a spool file for printing from the contents  |
         |              of a CMS disk file.  You must use the SETPRT command  |
         |              to select a destination and other printing options    |
         |              before issuing the PRINT command.                     |
         |    SCRIPT    Format a document using text and control information  |
         |              in a CMS disk file.  SCRIPT can produce a spool file  |
         |              for printing, type directly at your terminal, or      |
         |              create a CMS disk file containing the formatted text. |
         |              Use SETPRT before generating a spool file for         |
         |              printing.                                             |
         |    TPRINT    Type the contents of a CMS disk file on your terminal |
         |              using carriage control characters in the file.        |
         |    LABELS    Format labels using text in a CMS disk file.          |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Producing a List of CMS Disk Files                              |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    FLIST     Produce a menu describing selected CMS disk files.    |
         |              Commands using the files may be issued from the FLIST |
         |              menu.  This command can be used only on 3270-type     |
         |              display terminals.                                    |
         |    LISTFILE  Produce a list of selected CMS disk files and the     |
         |    or LISTX  attributes of each.  Output may be directed to your   |
         |              terminal, a spool file, or a CMS disk file.           |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Erasing CMS Disk Files                                          |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    BURN      Erase a selected CMS disk file (or files).            |
         |    ERASE     Erase a selected CMS disk file (or files).            |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Word Processing                                                 |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    SCRIPT    Format a document using text and control information  |
         |              in a CMS disk file.  (see "Printing CMS Disk Files")  |
         |    XEDIT     Create, examine, and modify a CMS disk file.          |
         |    SPELLFIX  Check the spelling of words in a CMS disk file, and   |
         |              suggest alternatives for misspelled words.            |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     2
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Other CMS Disk File Manipulations                               |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
       | |    SSORT     Sort the contents of a CMS disk file based on the data|
         |              in selected columns.                                  |
         |    CODETRAN  Translate the contents of a CMS disk file to and from |
         |              EBCDIC, ASCII, or user specified codes.               |
         |    COPYFILE  Copy one or more CMS disk files and optionally perform|
         |              specified manipulations.                              |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Sharing CMS Disk Files with Other Users                         |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    Two or more users may simultaneously have access to a CMS disk  |
         |    and read the files it contains.  Only one user should ever have |
         |    write-access to a CMS disk.  If two or more users have write-   |
         |    access to a CMS disk, the disk file directory may be corrupted  |
         |    and the files permanently lost.                                 |
         |                                                                    |
         |    AUTOLINK  Authorize other users to LINK to your CMS disk.       |
         |    LINK and  Gain access to another user's CMS disk.  The other    |
         |    ACCESS    user must have used AUTOLINK to authorize the LINK.   |
         |              After a successful LINK, you must use the ACCESS      |
         |              command before you can actually use the files.        |
         |    DROP      Release a minidisk and drop the link.                 |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Creating Plots                                                  |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    PLOT      Send a CMS disk file containing Zeta Graphic Machine  |
         |              Language (GML) instructions to be plotted on the Zeta |
         |              plotter in the UKCC Computer Room.  GML data files    |
         |              are generated by the standard plotting subroutines    |
       | |              in ZETALIB.                                           |
         |    OUTPUT    Send a reader spool file containing Zeta GML in-      |
         |              structions to be plotted in the UKCC Computer Room.   |
         |    PLOTAJ    Produce a plot on an Anderson Jacobson 832 or 833     |
         |              terminal.  The input is a CMS disk file containing    |
         |              GML instructions.  This will produce a plot with      |
         |              relatively low resolution.                            |
         |    PLOTHP    Produce a plot on a Hewlett Packard 2647a graphics    |
         |              terminal.  The input is a CMS disk file containing    |
         |              GML instructions.                                     |
         |    PLOTTEK   Produce a plot on a Tektronix (or compatible)         |
         |              graphics terminal.  The input is a CMS disk file      |
         |              containing GML instructions.                          |
       | |    SAS       The Statistical Analysis System can produce several   |
       | |              kinds of plots on supported terminals.                |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     3
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Communicating With Other CMS Users                              |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    SENDFILE  Send a CMS disk file to one or more users.            |
         |    or SFILE                                                        |
         |    NOTE      Create (using XEDIT) a note and send it to one or     |
         |              more users.                                           |
         |    OUTPUT    Send a reader spool file to another user.             |
         |    TELL      Send a brief (one line) message to one or more        |
         |              logged on users.                                      |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Examining Reader Spool Files                                    |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    PEEK      Examine a reader spool file with XEDIT.               |
         |    RBROWSE   Examine a reader spool file (for 3270-type display    |
         |              terminals only).                                      |
         |    RXEDIT    Examine a reader spool file with XEDIT.               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Printing Reader Spool Files                                     |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    OUTPUT    Send a reader spool file to be printed.               |
         |    GATHER    Gather several reader spool files into a single file. |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Producing a List of Reader Spool Files                          |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    RDRLIST   Produce a menu describing selected reader spool files.|
         |    or RLIST  This command is similar to FLIST and FILELIST and is  |
         |              most useful on a 3270-type display terminal.          |
         |    RDRCOST   Produce a list of selected reader spool files and the |
         |              attributes and estimated cost of each.                |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Erasing Reader Spool Files                                      |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    BURN      Erase (purge) a reader spool file.                    |
         |    PURGE     Erase (purge) a reader spool file or files.           |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     4
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
       | |    Programming Languages                                           |
       | |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    A number of programming languages are available under CMS.  The |
         |    names of the commands generally begin with four or five letters |
         |    to indicate the language and end with one or two letters to     |
         |    indicate the function of the command.  "C" means compile, "CG"  |
         |    means compile and execute (go), and "G" means execute (go).     |
         |                                                                    |
         |    Some of the available language processors are no longer         |
         |    supported.  This means that the organization that originally    |
         |    supplied it will no longer investigate or correct problems, and |
         |    that the UKCC probably will not be able to supply consulting    |
         |    assistance.  These languages can still be used successfully,    |
         |    but if you encounter a problem you are on your own.  Use them   |
         |    at your own risk!                                               |
         |                                                                    |
         |    Assembler                                                       |
         |    ASMXC     IBM Assembler XF                                      |
         |    ASMXCG                                                          |
         |    ASMXG                                                           |
         |                                                                    |
         |    BASIC                                                           |
         |    BASIC     IBM CALL/OS BASIC interpreter  (BASIC is no longer    |
         |              supported by IBM.  WBASIC is recommended.)            |
         |    WBASIC    Waterloo BASIC interpreter                            |
         |                                                                    |
         |    COBOL                                                           |
         |    COBDC     IBM VS COBOL (with Interactive Debug)                 |
         |    COBDCG                                                          |
         |    COBDG                                                           |
         |    COBVC     IBM VS COBOL                                          |
         |    COBVCG                                                          |
         |    COBVG                                                           |
         |                                                                    |
         |    FORTRAN                                                         |
         |    FORTGC    IBM FORTRAN G  (FORTRAN G is no longer supported by   |
         |    FORTGCG   IBM.  VS FORTRAN is recommended.)                     |
         |    FORTGG                                                          |
         |    FORTVC    IBM VS FORTRAN  (VS FORTRAN conforms to the standard  |
         |    FORTVCG   known as FORTRAN 77.)                                 |
         |    FORTVG                                                          |
         |    FORTXC    IBM FORTRAN H Extended                                |
         |    FORTXCG                                                         |
         |    FORTXG                                                          |
         |    WATFIV    Waterloo FORTRAN interpreter                          |
         |                                                                    |
         |    LISP                                                            |
         |    LISP      Partial implementation of the Utah LISP interpreter.  |
         |              (not supported)                                       |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    (Continued on the next page...)                                 |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     5
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
       | |    Programming Languages (Continued)                               |
       | |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    Pascal                                                          |
         |    PAS4C     P4 Pascal  (not supported)                            |
         |    PAS4CG                                                          |
         |    PAS4G                                                           |
         |    PW        Waterloo Pascal interpreter                           |
         |    P8000     AAEC Pascal 8000  (not supported)                     |
         |                                                                    |
         |    PL/I                                                            |
         |    PLC       Cornell PL/CT interpreter                             |
         |    PLIXC     IBM PL/I Optimizer                                    |
         |    PLIXCG                                                          |
         |    PLIXG                                                           |
         |    PLIC      IBM PL/I Checkout                                     |
         |    PLICR                                                           |
         |                                                                    |
         |    SPITBOL                                                         |
         |    SPITBOL   IIT SPITBOL  (not supported)                          |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
       | |    Disk and Processor Storage                                      |
       | |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    STORAGE   Redefine the amount of processor storage available    |
         |              to programs running on your userid.  Some programming |
         |              languages and packages may require more storage than  |
         |              the initial (512K) storage size.                      |
         |    TDISK     Define a temporary CMS minidisk.  TDISK space is      |
         |              discarded when you DROP it, when you log off, when    |
         |              the system is shut down, or if there is a system      |
         |              failure.  TDISK is often needed to supply work space  |
         |              for programming language compilers.                   |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    CMS Batch                                                       |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    BATCH     Send a CMS disk file or files containing control      |
         |              statements and CMS commands to the CMS batch system   |
         |              for processing.  The BATCH command can help you       |
         |              create a CMS batch job interactively.  Output from    |
         |              your batch job can be routed back to your userid in a |
         |              reader spool file, or printed.                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     6
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    OS Batch                                                        |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    SUBMIT    Send a CMS disk file or files containing JCL and data |
         |              to the OS batch system.  Output from your batch job   |
         |              can be routed back to your userid in a reader spool   |
         |              file, or printed.                                     |
         |    STATUS    Display the status of your OS batch jobs.             |
         |    CANCEL    Cancel an OS batch job.                               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Communicating with Personal Computers                           |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    The section on Asynchronous Communication contains more         |
         |    information about personal computers.                           |
         |                                                                    |
         |    TERMINAL  Set terminal communication options.                   |
       | |    KERMIT    Communicate with a personal computer or other system  |
       | |              running KERMIT.  KERMIT supports two-way file         |
       | |              exchange.  KERMIT is available (without charge) for   |
       | |              several systems, including the IBM PC.                |
         |    HOSTCM    Communicate with a personal computer acting as your   |
         |              CMS terminal.  HOSTCM supports two-way file exchange. |
         |              The personal computer must be using the Waterloo      |
         |              Computing Systems microSoftware.                      |
         |    FSEND     Send a file to a personal computer acting as your CMS |
         |              terminal.                                             |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Other Functions                                                 |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    HELP      Display documentation at your terminal.               |
         |    MANUAL    Display (at a 3270-type display) or print a manual.   |
         |    CALC      Desk calculator.                                      |
       | |    NEWS      Display online news.                                  |
       | |    KYREG     Display the online version of the Kentucky Register,  |
       | |              the UKCC's monthly newsletter.                        |
       | |    RATES     Display the current charging rates.                   |
       | |    GRIPE     Send a complaint to the UKCC User Services Group.     |
       | |    YCALC     Spreadsheet calculator.                               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     7
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         1.B CMS Commands for EXEC Writers
 
         Some commands are intended primarily for use from an EXEC (some can be
         used only from an EXEC).  The following table is a summary of these
       | commands.  Refer to the description of the EXEC command in this manual
       | for more information about REXX, EXEC 2, and EXEC.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         | Command  | Function                                                |
         |----------|---------------------------------------------------------|
         | CHECKBUF | Determine the number of lines in a stack buffer         |
         | CLEAR    | Clear the screen of a display terminal                  |
         | CMDCALL  | Execute a command with a CMS extended p-list            |
         | CMSCMSG  | Write a message on the command line of a 3270 display   |
         | CMSPMSG  | Write a prompt message on the terminal                  |
         | CMSREAD  | Read and stack a line from the terminal                 |
         | CMSTIO   | Determine if a device exists                            |
         | CONWAIT  | Wait for terminal I/O to complete                       |
         | DESBUF   | Clear all console and stack buffers                     |
         | DROPBUF  | Destroy one or more CMS program stack buffers           |
         | ENVIRON  | Determine the current environment                       |
         | EXec     | Execute another EXEC                                    |
         | EXECIO   | Perform various functions from an EXEC                  |
       | | EXECOS   | Reset the OS simulation environment                     |
       | | GETFMODE | Get an available filemode (ACCESS) letter               |
       | | GETVADDR | Get an available virtual device address                 |
         | GLOBALV  | Set and examine global variables                        |
         | IDentify | Stack your userid, the date, and other information      |
       | | IMMCMD   | Establish and cancel immediate commands                 |
       | | LISTFILE | Use the STACK option to get information about files     |
         | MAKEBUF  | Create a CMS program stack buffer                       |
         | MENUEXEC | Display an XMENU panel                                  |
         | NAMEFind | Retrieve information from a NAMES file                  |
       | | QUERY    | Use the STACK option to get CMS and CP information      |
         | RANDOM   | Generate a random number                                |
         | RDR      | Determine the format of a reader spool file             |
         | SELECT   | Select records from a CMS disk file                     |
         | SENTRIES | Determine the number of lines in the CMS program stack  |
         | SPELLCHK | Check the spelling of words from file or stack          |
         | STATE    | Verify the existence of a CMS disk file                 |
         | STATEW   | Verify a file on a read/write CMS disk                  |
         | STKDATE  | Stack day, date, and time                               |
         | STKDISK  | Stack information about an accessed disk                |
         | STKID    | Stack system and userid information                     |
         | STKRDR   | Stack reader spool file numbers                         |
         | STKTERM  | Stack terminal information                              |
         | STKTIME  | Stack timing information                                |
         | STKXRDR  | Stack detailed reader spool file information            |
         | VERIFY   | Issue a message and read a yes/no response              |
         | WAITRDR  | Wait for a reader spool file to arrive                  |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     8
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         Section 2:  Command Descriptions
 
 
 
 
         This section contains detailed descriptions of many of the commands
         available under CMS.  The conventions used in the descriptions are
         similar to those used in the IBM VM/SP publications.  Command and
         option names use uppercase and lowercase to indicate minimum
         abbreviations; parts shown in uppercase must be entered as shown.
         Brackets are used to mark optional parameters or a list of choices,
         and default values are underlined.
 
         This section includes CMS commands, CP commands, and XEDIT subcommands
         (grouped under XEDIT).  EXEC's and CP commands are marked as such to
         aid EXEC writers, since this distinction can be important.
 
       | The information in this section is available at your terminal from the
       | HELP command.  To get help for most commands just enter
 
       |      help [command]
 
       | where [command] is the name of the command.  For XEDIT subcommands,
       | and for cases when there are several commands with the same name, you
       | must specify a qualifier with the command name:
 
       |      help xedit [subcommand]
 
       |      or
 
       |      help cp [command]
 
         For commands not described in this section refer to the IBM
         documentation or online HELP for more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                         Section 2:  Command Descriptions     9
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                        ? (CMS Recall Function)
 
         Use the ? function to display the previous command entered from your
         terminal or through the CMS program stack.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | ?         |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Anything following the question mark on the command line is
              ignored.
 
          2.  Commands entered while in CP mode, the ? and = functions, and the
              CMS immediate commands (HT, HX, etc.) cannot be recalled with
              this function.  Users of 3101 and 3270-type display terminals may
              use the CP RETRIEVE PF key function to display and reissue
              previously entered lines, including those not available from the
              ? function.
 
          3.  On a 3270-type display terminal the command is displayed in the
              command input area at the bottom of the screen.  The command line
              may then be modified and may be reissued by pressing ENTER.
 
          4.  The ? function may be entered only from the keyboard (including
              Program Function keys) or through the CMS program stack.  It may
              not be directly executed from an EXEC.  The CMS editors support ?
              subcommands with similar functions.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     10
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                        & (CMS Retain Function)
 
         Use the & function to execute a command and leave the command line in
         the input area of your 3270-type display terminal.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | &         | [command line]                                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         command line
                   is the command line to be executed.  The entire line
                   (including the ampersand) remains in the input area.  It may
                   be modified and may be reissued by pressing ENTER.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The command line may not use the retain (&) function.  In other
              words, no more than one ampersand is allowed on a command line.
 
          2.  The ampersand is ignored on all terminals other than 3270-type
              displays.
 
          3.  Some commands (such as CMSCMSG and the ? function) alter the
              command input line and overwrite the retained command.
 
          4.  The & function may be entered only from the keyboard (including
              Program Function keys) or through the CMS program stack.  It may
              not be directly executed from an EXEC.  Some CMS editors support
              an & subcommand with a similar function.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     11
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                         = (CMS Reuse Function)
 
         Use the = function to reissue the previous command entered from your
         terminal or through the CMS program stack.  You may follow the equal
         sign with an additional CMS command (including an equal sign) on the
         same line.  This additional command will be issued before the previous
         command is repeated.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | =         | [command line]                                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         command line
                   is an optional additional command or function.  This is
                   issued before the previous command is repeated.  The = and ?
                   functions may be used.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Commands entered while in CP mode, the ? and = functions, and the
              CMS immediate commands (HT, HX, etc.) cannot be reissued with
              this function.  Users of 3101 and 3270-type terminals may use the
              CP RETRIEVE PF key function to display and reissue previously
              entered lines, including those not available from the = function.
 
          2.  Entering multiple equal signs on one line will cause the previous
              command to be repeated once for each equal sign entered.
 
          3.  The = function may be entered only from the keyboard (including
              Program Function keys) or through the CMS program stack.  It may
              not be directly executed from an EXEC.  The CMS editors support =
              subcommands with similar functions.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     12
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  ACCEPT (EXEC)
 
         Use the ACCEPT command to copy a reader spool file into a CMS disk
         file.  The reader file is purged.  ACCEPT can process any input format
         (NETDATA, print, etc.) and can be used to receive files sent with the
         NOTE and SENDFILE commands.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                +                                     |
         | ACCEPT    | |spoolid [* [fm]]|  [( options... [)]]                 |
         |           | |name [type [fm]]|                                     |
         |           | |*     *     A1  |                                     |
         |           | +                +                                     |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the reader spool file to be
                   processed.  The default is "*", the first file in your
                   reader.
 
         name [type]
                   select an input file by spool file name and type rather than
                   number.  (Not all spool files have names and types.)  The
                   default type is "*," the first file that matches the
                   specified name.
 
         fm        is the filemode used for the created CMS disk file.  The
                   default is "A1."  The filemode is ignored if the input file
                   is in DISK DUMP format.
 
         options   Depending on the data format, ACCEPT uses INPUT, RECEIVE,
                   DISK, or READCARD to process the file, and ACCEPT options
                   are passed to the command used.  Refer to the descriptions
                   of these commands for more information.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The parameters used to select an input spool file are handled by
              the INPUT command.  ACCEPT can use any of the parameters of the
              INPUT command.
 
          2.  When processing files in NETDATA format (used by NOTE and
              SENDFILE), ACCEPT returns an acknowledgment if one was requested
              by the originating user.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSACP024E File "[fn ft fm]" already exists.  RC=28
         DMSACP655E Reader file [n] does not exist, or is in hold.  RC=28
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     13
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  ACCEPT (EXEC)
 
         DMSACP687E File [n] is a dump file and cannot be processed.  RC=1
       | DMSACP999E Reader not ready or not operational.  RC=100
       | DMSACP999E Weird result from RDR command.  RC=100
 
         Messages may also be produced by DISK, INPUT, READCARD, and RECEIVE.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     14
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         ACCESS
 
         Use the ACCESS command to identify a minidisk to CMS and establish a
         filemode letter for the files on the disk.  This is a partial
         description of the ACCESS command; other options are available.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                              +                       |
         | ACcess    | |disk mode[/ext [fn [ft [fm]]]]| [( options... [)]]    |
         |           | |191  A          *   *   *     |                       |
         |           | |                              |                       |
         |           | +                              +                       |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [NOIMSG]   [NOPROF]                                    |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         disk      is the virtual device address of the minidisk to be
                   accessed.  The default value is 191.
 
         mode      is the one-character filemode letter assigned to all files
                   on the disk being accessed.  If "disk" is not specified, a
                   default mode of "A" is supplied.  You should generally not
                   access disks as modes W, X, Y, or S, since these modes are
                   reserved for system use.
 
         /ext      indicates that the disk is to be a read-accessed extension
                   to the disk accessed as mode "ext".  The slash must not be
                   preceded or followed by a blank.
 
         fn [ft [fm]]
                   defines a subset of the files on the specified disk that
                   will be made accessible.  An asterisk coded in any of these
                   fields indicates that all filenames, filetypes, or filemode
                   numbers (except mode number 0) are to be included.  You may
                   also specify general forms using an asterisk suffix.  You
                   must specify both a letter and a number for the filemode.
                   This feature may not be used when accessing OS disks.
 
         Options
 
         NOIMSG    suppresses most informational messages.
 
         NOPROF    suppresses execution of the PROFILE EXEC file.  This option
                   is valid only if the ACCESS command is the first command
                   entered after you IPL CMS.  On subsequent ACCESS commands
                   the NOPROF option is ignored.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     15
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         ACCESS
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  When you log on (or when you IPL CMS), a number of disks are
              accessed automatically by CMS.  All CMS users have a write-
              accessed A-disk (191) for storing files.  Some users also have a
              D-disk (192).  The shared system S-disk (190) and Y-disk (19E)
              are accessed also.  These disks contain system files necessary
              for the operation of CMS and should not be accessed in any other
              way.  You should not issue the ACCESS command using modes S, W,
              X, or Y.
 
          2.  The Public disk is accessed with the PUBLIC command.  It is
              accessed as the Z-disk by default.
 
          3.  You can force your A-disk to read-only status by accessing it as
              an extension of itself or another disk;  for example:
 
                   access 191 a/a
 
          4.  Files on a read-accessed disk with a filemode number of 0 ("B0,"
              for example) normally are not accessible.  The documentation of
              the RENAME command discusses filemode numbers in more detail.
 
          5.  The RELEASE and DROP commands make an accessed disk inaccessible.
              DROP also drops your link to a disk, requiring you to LINK to the
              disk to make it accessible again.
 
       |  6.  If a user with write-access to a minidisk updates a file and
       |      other users with read-access then try to read that same file, the
       |      other users will get the older version of the file, garbled
       |      records, or CMS file system errors (most often "DMSxxx104S ERROR
       |      3 READING FILE").  The users with read-access should issue the
       |      ACCESS command again to use the updated file directory.  Using
       |      filemode number 6 for shared files can eliminate this problem in
       |      some applications.
 
          7.  The OSDISK command will access the OS volumes containing user
              data sets.  These disks are accessed starting with mode H, and
       |      you should not access other disks using modes H through V if you
       |      use OS data sets from CMS.  You should not access the OS disks by
              issuing ACCESS yourself; always use the OSDISK command to be
              certain that all of the current user volumes are available to
              you.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     16
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   AJ833 (EXEC)
 
         Use the AJ833 command to prepare an Anderson Jacobson model 833
         terminal with the High Speed Option for printing SCRIPT and other text
         output.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | AJ833     | [On|OFF]                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         On        prepares both the terminal and VM/SP to use some of the
                   special features of an Anderson Jacobson 833 terminal.
 
         OFF       stops use of the special features.
 
         Usage Note
 
         AJ833 changes the CMS output translate table to properly produce
         boxes.  IDLE characters are translated to NULL to increase printing
         speed.  ETX/ACK protocol, which allows the terminal to receive data at
         1200 baud, is enabled.  This requires the High Speed Option of the AJ
         833 terminal.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         AJ833 may produce messages from the CMS SET command and the CP
         TERMINAL command.  Attempting to issue this command from other than an
         asynchronous ASCII terminal will result in an error message and a non-
         zero return code.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     17
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   ASMXC (EXEC)
 
         Use the ASMXC command to assemble a program with the IBM VM Assembler
         (Assembler XF).
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | ASMXC     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the
                   assembler source program.  The filetype of the file must be
                   "ASSEMBLE," and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte
                   records.  This filename will be used for the TEXT and
                   LISTING files, if they are created.
 
         options   are assembler options.  The assembler has options to control
                   its output, listings produced, and other functions.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  ASMXC uses the default macro libraries for CMS: CMSUKCC, DMSSP,
              CMSLIB, XMENU, OSMACRO, and TSOMAC.  You cannot use ASMXC if you
              need other macro libraries.
 
          2.  Refer to the description of the ASSEMBLE command for more
              information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     18
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  ASMXCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the ASMXCG command to assemble (using the IBM VM Assembler) and
         execute a program.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | ASMXCG    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the
                   assembler source program.  The filetype of the file must be
                   "ASSEMBLE," and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte
                   records.  This filename will be used for the TEXT and
                   LISTING files, if they are created.
 
         options   are assembler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  ASMXC uses the default macro libraries for CMS: CMSUKCC, DMSSP,
              CMSLIB, XMENU, OSMACRO, and TSOMAC.  You cannot use ASMXC if you
              need other macro libraries.
 
          2.  The default subroutine libraries are used: ZETALIB and CMSLIB.
              If you need to use additional libraries or load additional object
              files you must use the ASMXG command to execute your program.
 
          3.  The assembled program is loaded and executed.  Refer to the
              descriptions of the ASSEMBLE and LOAD commands for more
              information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     19
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   ASMXG (EXEC)
 
         Use the ASMXG command to execute a previously assembled program.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | ASMXG     | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the
                   object program.  The filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  ZETALIB and CMSLIB.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the executed program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the ASMXC and ASSEMBLE commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     20
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       ASSEMBLE
 
         Use the ASSEMBLE command to assemble a program with the IBM VM
         Assembler (Assembler XF).  The ASMXCG, ASMXC, and ASMXG commands also
         are available for use with assembler programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | Assemble  | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the
                   assembler source program.  The filetype of the file must be
                   "ASSEMBLE," and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte
                   records.  This filename will be used for the TEXT and
                   LISTING files, if they are created.
 
         options   are assembler options.  ASSEMBLE has options to control its
                   output, listings produced, and other functions.
 
         Usage Note
 
          1.  Detailed descriptions of the assembler options are available in
              the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro Reference and from the HELP
              command.  A description of the assembler language can be found in
              the OS/VS-DOS/VSE-VM/370 Assembler Language manual.  The language
              is an extended version of that used by OS Assembler F.
 
          2.  When writing programs to run under CMS, the following macro
              libraries should be specified on a GLOBAL MACLIB command (in this
              order):
 
                   CMSUKCC DMSSP CMSLIB
 
              Depending on your application, you may also need the XMENU,
              OSMACRO, and TSOMAC libraries.  Use OSMACRO for programs that use
              OS simulation or are to be run under the OS batch system.  You
              can create your own macro libraries with the MACLIB command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     21
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                AUTOLINK (EXEC)
 
         Use the AUTOLINK command to authorize other users to access your CMS
         disk files.  Once authorized by you, another user can use the LINK and
         ACCESS commands to gain access to your CMS disk files.  AUTOLINK can
         also be used to revoke authorizations, examine existing authorization
         rules, and assign another user to act as your proxy.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | AUTOLINK  | function [( option [)]]                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Functions:                                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | ASSIGN proxy                                           |
         |           | AUTH disk level rule1 [| rule2 [| rules] ... ]         |
         |           | DELete disk rulenumber                                 |
         |           | Display disk [rulenumber|ALL]                          |
         |           | DROP proxy                                             |
         |           | EXClude disk level rule1 [| rule2 [| rules] ... ]      |
         |           | FOR userid function                                    |
         |           | LOCK disk                                              |
         |           | Query [disk [ALL]|SYSTEM]                              |
         |           | SENDLog disk                                           |
         |           | SET LOG disk level logmode                             |
         |           | UNLOCK disk                                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [MSG | NOMSG | SMSG]                                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ASSIGN proxy
                   designates a user who may act as your proxy.  The designated
                   user (or users) may use the AUTOLINK FOR function to issue
                   AUTOLINK commands for you.  Use the AUTOLINK DROP function
                   to drop a proxy designation.
 
         AUTH disk level rule1 [| rule2] ...
                   authorizes one or more users to LINK to your minidisk with
                   virtual address "disk."  The "level" parameter specifies the
                   level of access allowed: R (read), W (write if no other
                   links), M (write if no write links), or X (write even if
                   other write links).  Warning! You should not specify level
                   X.  If two or more users simultaneously have write-access to
                   a CMS minidisk (even if they do not modify any files) the
                   disk file directory for that minidisk may be destroyed and
                   the files permanently lost.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     22
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                AUTOLINK (EXEC)
 
                   The simplest kind of rule is "USER userid," which grants
                   access to a single user.  More complex rules are discussed
                   in the Usage Notes.
 
         DELete disk rulenumber
                   deletes the specified authorization rule for the specified
                   minidisk.  The AUTOLINK DISPLAY function can be used to
                   display existing rules.
 
         Display disk [rulenumber|ALL]
                   displays the complete history of a specific authorization
                   rule or a brief list of all rules for a particular minidisk.
 
         DROP proxy
                   revokes a proxy granted with the AUTOLINK ASSIGN function.
 
         EXClude disk level rule1 [| rule2] ...
                   defines exclusion rules for a minidisk.  Use AUTOLINK
                   EXCLUDE to exclude users from a group defined with the
                   AUTOLINK AUTH function.  The syntax of this function is the
                   same as that of the AUTOLINK AUTH function.  Refer to the
                   Usage Notes for more information.
 
         FOR userid function
                   is used to issue an AUTOLINK function for another user.
                   Before you can use this function, the other user must have
                   used AUTOLINK ASSIGN to make your userid a proxy.  A proxy
                   may not issue the ASSIGN, DROP, or FOR functions for another
                   user.
 
         LOCK disk
                   temporarily prevents any links to the specified minidisk
                   from any users except the owner or the proxy who issued the
                   AUTOLINK LOCK.  Use the AUTOLINK UNLOCK function to allow
                   access by authorized users.  Locking a minidisk will not
                   affect any existing links.
 
         Query [disk [ALL] | SYSTEM]
                   displays information about the specified minidisk, or about
                   the AUTOLINK system.
 
         SENDLog disk
                   causes the access log for the specified minidisk to be sent
                   to you in a spool file.  The system clears the log after
                   sending a copy.  Use the AUTOLINK SET LOG function to enable
                   access logging.
 
         SET LOG disk level logmode
                   enables access logging for the specified minidisk.  The
                   "level" may be specified as R (read), W (write), or M
                   (mult).  The "logmode" may be specified as NONE, AUTH, FAIL,
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     23
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                AUTOLINK (EXEC)
 
                   or ALL.  Use the AUTOLINK SENDLOG function to retrieve the
                   access log.
 
         UNLOCK disk
                   unlocks a minidisk after AUTOLINK LOCK has been used.
 
         Options
 
         MSG       causes AUTOLINK responses to be sent to you with a heading
                   and time-stamp.
 
         NOMSG     suppresses AUTOLINK responses.
 
         SMSG      causes AUTOLINK responses to be sent using the SMSG
                   interface.  The last line will contain "===> END OF RESPONSE
                   <===."  This option is provided for special purposes and
                   should not be specified by CMS users.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Once authorized by you, another user can access your CMS disk
              files with the LINK and ACCESS commands.  You can restrict
              another user to read-access, or permit write-access.  You should
              not allow X-level access (which permits MW links) because CMS
              does not support write-access to a minidisk from more than one
              user.  If two or more users simultaneously have write-access to a
              minidisk, the disk file directory may be destroyed and the files
              permanently lost.  For more information about sharing CMS disk
              files refer to the descriptions of the LINK and ACCESS commands.
 
          2.  The rule definitions used by the AUTOLINK AUTH and EXCLUDE
              functions allow you to authorize or exclude a single userid, or a
              group of userids, and restrict access by date, time, and number
              of LINKs.  The following forms can be used:
 
                  Form                 Defines
                  ---------------      -------------------------------------
                  USER userid          A single userid
                  USER pattern*        Any userid that begins with "pattern"
                  FROM time            Time limits using day, date, and time
                  TO time              Time limits using day, date, and time
                  COUNT n              Number of times the rule may be used
 
              Time limits may be specified using a day of the week, a time
              (hh:mm[:ss]), or a date [mm/dd[/yy]), or any combination
              specified in any order.
 
          3.  Unless NOMSG or SMSG is specified, AUTOLINK uses CP messages to
              return responses to you.  If you have SET MSG OFF these responses
              will be suppressed.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     24
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                BALANCE
 
         Use the BALANCE command to obtain the allocation and balance for your
         userid.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                       +     +                          |
         | BALANCE   |  [target]  [( [Type]  |Stack|  [QUIET] [)]]            |
         |           |                       |Lifo |                          |
         |           |                       |Fifo |                          |
         |           |                       +     +                          |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         target    is the userid or project number to be checked.  The default
                   is your userid.  If you specify a userid or project number
                   for which you are not authorized the balance will not be
                   returned and the system will record the attempt.
 
         Options
 
         Fifo      puts the data in the stack (first-in, first-out).
 
         Lifo      is a synonym for STACK.
 
         QUIET     suppresses all error messages.  If an error occurs the
                   return code indicates the nature of the error.  This option
                   is intended for use in an EXEC.
 
         Stack     puts the data in the stack (last-in, first-out).
 
         Type      displays the data on the terminal.  This is the default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The allocation and balance returned are for the userid or project
              number specified.  If the target does not have an allocation the
              information will be from the userid or project containing the
              allocation used by the target.  The balance is not available for
              some userids and project numbers.
 
          2.  The stacking options (STACK, LIFO, and FIFO) put a single line
              containing the following data on the program stack:
 
               1. An asterisk (*)
               2. If no target was specified, the four-digit department number
                  If a target was specified, four asterisks (****)
               3. If no target was specified, the five-digit project number
                  If a target was specified, five asterisks (****)
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     25
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                BALANCE
 
               4. Balance (dollars)
               5. Balance (cents)
               6. Allocation (dollars)
               7. Allocation (cents)
               8. Userid or project containing allocation used by the target
               9. Allocation
              10. Balance
              11. Logon-time allocation
              12. Logon-time balance
              13. Disk space allocation
              14. Disk space balance
 
          3.  The balance is updated for OS batch jobs and printed output when
              they occur, CMS sessions are charged at the end of each day
              (after midnight), and plotting and other charges are added at the
              end of each month.
 
          4.  In a CMS Batch job the default target is the project number to
              which the job will be charged.  CMS Batch jobs cannot obtain the
              balance for other userids or project numbers.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         In case of an error, the return code will be the message number.
 
         OUIBAL001E "[string]" is an extraneous parameter.
         OUIBAL001E "[string]" is not a valid parameter.
         OUIBAL002E "[string]" is not an option.
         OUIBAL011E You are not authorized for this service.
         OUIBAL011E This attempt has been recorded.
         OUIBAL012E Sorry, but this transaction cannot be completed at this
                    time.
         OUIBAL012E Try again later.
         OUIBAL013E No record found for [target].
         OUIBAL014E You are not authorized to access data for [target].
         OUIBAL014E This attempt has been recorded.
         OUIBAL020E The balance is not available for [target].
         OUIBAL100E Error code [code] from an IUCV function.
         OUIBAL101E An IUCV handler already exists for service name.
                    Communication cannot be established.
         OUIBAL102E An IUCV DECLARE BUFFER has already been issued. CMS IUCV
                    support cannot be initialized.
         OUIBAL103E Service is shutting down and cannot accept requests; try
                    again later.
         OUIBAL104E IUCV message limit exceeded.
         OUIBAL105E IUCV priority messages are not allowed.
         OUIBAL106E Service is not available; try again later.
         OUIBAL107E Service is not running; try again later.
         OUIBAL108E Maximum number of IUCV connections exceeded for your
                    userid.
         OUIBAL109E No service connections are available; try again later.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     26
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                BALANCE
 
         OUIBAL110E Not enough storage available.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     27
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BASIC
 
         Use the BASIC command to run a program with CALL/OS BASIC.  CALL/OS
         BASIC is not supported; Waterloo BASIC (WBASIC) generally should be
         used for new programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | BASIC     | filename [( [LONG] [)]]                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the file containing the BASIC program.
                   The filetype must be "BASIC," and it must contain fixed-
                   length records.
 
         LONG      causes long precision floating-point to be used.  Short
                   floating-point is used by default.
 
         Statements
 
         CHAIN   DIM     GOSUB   LET     PAUSE   REM     STOP
         CLOSE   END     GOTO    MAT     PRINT   RESET   USE
         DATA    FOR     IF      NEXT    PUT     RESTORE
         DEF     GET     INPUT   OPEN    READ    RETURN
 
         Arithmetic Functions
 
         ABS abs. value  CSC cosecant     INT int. part   SEC secant
         ACS arccosine   DEG rad-to-deg   LGT log 10      SGN sign
         ASN arcsine     EXP natural exp  LOG log e       SIN sine
         ATN arctangent  HCS hyper. cos.  LTW log 2       SQR square root
         COS cosine      HSN hyper. sin.  RAD deg-to-deg  TAN tangent
         COT cotangent   HTN hyper. tan.  RND random
 
         Usage Note
 
          1.  Line numbers are required only if needed as the target of a GOTO.
 
          2.  BASIC supplies the following built-in constants: &E (2.718282),
              &PI (3.141593), and &SQR2 (1.414214).
 
          3.  No additional information is available.
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     28
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BATCH
 
         The BATCH command is your interface with the CMS Batch system.  It can
         submit jobs (and assist in their preparation), change job parameters
         after submission, cancel jobs, hold and release jobs, and query the
         CMS Batch system for information.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |         |                                                          |
         | BATch   | [function  [( options...  [)]]                           |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         | Functions:                                               |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         | macroname [parms]                                        |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         | Submit  [fileid [fileid2...]]                            |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         |         +      +                                         |
         |         |         |jobid |                                         |
         |         | CAncel  |ACTIVE|                                         |
         |         |         |ALL   |                                         |
         |         |         |QUEUE |                                         |
         |         |         +      +                                         |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         |         +               +                                |
         |         |         |All            |                                |
         |         |         |Current        |                                |
         |         | Query   |Job jobid      |                                |
         |         |         |User userid | *|                                |
         |         |         |System         |                                |
         |         |         +               +                                |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         | CHange  [jobid]                                          |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         |         +     +                                          |
         |         | Hold    |jobid|                                          |
         |         | Release |ALL  |                                          |
         |         |         +     +                                          |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         | Options:                                                 |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         | +       +  +     +  +            +                       |
         |         | |Clear  |  |Long |  |Msgcount n  |                       |
         |         | |NOClear|  |Short|  |         100|                       |
         |         | +       +  +     +  +            +                       |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     29
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BATCH
 
         Functions
 
         CAncel    cancels the specified jobs, before or during execution.
 
         CHange    permits you to change the parameters (/SET, etc.)  of a job
                   which has already been submitted but has not yet begun
                   execution.  Changes are made interactively; the BATCH
                   command will prompt you for required information.
 
         Hold      places the specified jobs on hold.  CMS Batch will not
                   schedule held jobs for execution.
 
         macroname executes the specified batch macro.  The filetype must be
                   "BATCH."  CMS Batch macros may contain EXEC 2 statements,
                   BATCH command functions, batch jobs, and CMS commands.  Each
                   line in the file is treated as a command until a line
                   containing /JOB is encountered, indicating the start of a
                   batch job.  Additional commands may follow the /* at the end
                   of the job.
 
         Query     displays information about your CMS Batch jobs.  QUERY
                   CURRENT, the default, displays all of your jobs currently in
                   the system.
 
         Release   releases the specified jobs so they can be scheduled for
                   execution.  This will not release a job held by the
                   operator.
 
         Submit    initiates job preparation and submission.  If no fileid is
                   included, BATCH assumes that you want assistance preparing a
                   job; otherwise, the files specified are submitted as one
                   batch job.  If a fileids is specified BATCH will not prompt
                   for additional information.
 
                   The first file specified must contain all of the job control
                   statements for the job.  Any additional files are included
                   as data files for use by the job.  If only one fileid is
                   specified (which is the usual case), you need only supply a
                   filename, and the default filetype ("BATCH") and filemode
                   ("*") are used.  When submitting a single file you can omit
                   the keyword "SUBMIT."
 
         Parameters
 
         ACTIVE    specifies that all of your active jobs will be affected by
                   the function.
 
         ALL       specifies that all of your jobs in the batch system will be
                   affected by the function.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     30
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BATCH
 
         Current   specifies that all of your jobs in the batch system are to
                   be checked.
 
         fileid    is the filename, filetype, and filemode of a CMS disk file.
                   The filetype and filemode are optional when only one fileid
                   is specified.
 
         jobid     is a job identifier.  All jobs submitted to the CMS Batch
                   system are assigned an identifying number.  (When you use
                   this number you need not enter any leading zeros.)  You also
                   have the option of providing your own identifier when you
                   submit a job, or adding an identifier with the CHANGE
                   function.
 
         Job       indicates that you want a history of activity for a
                   specified job.  This history does not include any job
                   parameters.  Use the change function if you want to see job
                   characteristics.
 
         parms     are parameters that are passed to the specified macro.
 
         QUEUE     specifies that all of your jobs waiting in the queue will be
                   affected by the function.
 
         System    indicates that you want general information about the batch
                   system's activities.  This includes queue lengths and
                   scheduling criteria.
 
         User      indicates that you want to query current status for all jobs
                   owned by a specified user.
 
         userid    specifies a particular userid.  You may use an asterisk to
                   indicate your own userid.
 
         Options
 
         Clear     causes the BATCH command to clear the terminal screen at
                   appropriate times.  This is the default.
 
         Long      causes BATCH to use long prompts when operating in
                   interactive mode.  This is the default.
 
         Msgcount n
                   is the maximum number of messages that will be returned by a
                   QUERY function (not including header lines).  The default is
                   100.  MSGCOUNT 0 will suppress all QUERY responses.
 
         Noclear   inhibits the screen clearing normally done by the BATCH
                   command.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     31
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BATCH
 
         Short     causes BATCH to use short prompts when operating in
                   interactive mode.
 
         Job Status Codes
 
         The following job status codes are used by the BATCH QUERY function:
 
         ABN  Abnormal termination           RST  Restart in progress
         ACT  Active                         RUN  Waiting in queue (hi prio)
         CMP  Completed normally             S/U  Held by user and operator
         CRS  System crash and RESTART=NO    SKD  Selected for execution
         DSP  Dispatched, but not started    SQU  Waiting in queue (chained)
         JCE  JCL error                      SYS  Held by operator
         NUL  Null job (no commands)         TPW  Waiting for tape drive
         MCN  Cancelled by batch monitor     UAB  Abended by BATKILL command
         NOT  Not a job                      UCN  Cancelled by user
         OCN  Cancelled by operator          UNK  Unknown
         QUE  Waiting in queue               USR  Held by user
 
         Job Control Statement Summary
 
         /*   marks the end of the job or an in-stream (/FILE) file.
 
         // comment
              is a comment.  This is allowed only in batch macros.
 
         CHAIN jobid1 [jobid2 ... jobid8]
              is used to specify a list of jobs that must successfully complete
              before this job can execute.
 
         /ERROR PRINT=destination
              causes a diagnostic listing of the job control statements in the
              job to be produced.
 
         /FILE filename filetype
              marks the beginning of an in-stream data file.  The file will be
              given the specified name.  The data must be terminated with a /*
              statement.
 
         /HOLD
              causes the job to be placed in USER hold.  The BATCH RELEASE
              command is used to release the job for execution.
 
         /IDENT jobname
              assigns a user job name.  This is only required for use with job
              chaining (/CHAIN).
 
         /INCLUDE filename filetype
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     32
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BATCH
 
              causes the specified file to be copied to the batch server's
              temporary working disk.  Since your batch job has read-access to
              your A-disk and D-disk, files on these disks can usually be
              accessed directly.  /INCLUDE is only necessary when the file
              might change while the job is executing, or if the file is
              modified by the job.
 
         /JOB [userid username]
              is required at the beginning of each CMS Batch job.  The userid
              and name are optional.
 
         /QUERY PRINT=destination
              specifies that you want a system status and history listing.
 
         /SET CARDS=[5000|limit]
              DUMP=[NO|YES]
              LINES=[2000|limit]
              NOTIFY=[YES|NO]
              PRINT=destination[=HOLD]
              PUNCH=destination[=HOLD]
              RATE=[DAY|NIGHT|WEEKEND|HOLIDAY]
              RESTART=[YES|NO]
       |      SIZE=[1|2|3]
              TIME=[10|seconds]
              sets job parameters.  CARDS, LINES, and TIME are limits for the
              job.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  A CMS batch job is executed by a special CMS userid called a
              "batch server."  It is logged on to execute a single job and logs
              off when the job is completed.  The batch server has read-access
              to the files on your A-disk (and D-disk, if you have one) and
       |      write-access to a 500 kilobyte temporary disk.  One, two, or
       |      three megabytes of virtual storage are provided.
 
          2.  Because of limitations in CMS disk file management, you should
              not change the files on your disks that are being used by an
              executing CMS Batch job.  (You will receive a message from the
              batch system when your job begins execution.)  Since the batch
              server has only read-access to your files there is no danger of
              damage to the files involved, but changing a file that is being
              used as input by a batch job will almost certainly cause the
       |      batch job to fail or produce incorrect results.  (Using filemode
       |      number 6 can eliminate this problem in some applications.) You
       |      may alter or erase any of your files that are not in use by a
              batch job.
 
          3.  The BATCH command operates either interactively or non-
              interactively.  Interactive mode is used when you do not supply a
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     33
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BATCH
 
              function or all required parameters on the command line.  This
              mode can be used to create all job control statements.  When the
              BATCH command is in interactive mode you can respond to any
              prompt with a ? if you need more information.
 
          4.  CMS batch jobs require only two control statements: /JOB at the
              beginning and /* at the end.  For example:
 
                   /JOB
                   SCRIPT MYFILE ( PRT
                   /*
 
              would process a file named "MYFILE SCRIPT" on your A-disk and
              send the formatted output back to your userid in a spool file.
 
          5.  Batch macros are similar to XEDIT macros.  Anything that is
              allowed in an EXEC 2 file is allowed in a macro, and the BATCH
              command functions (SUBMIT, QUERY, CANCEL, etc.) can all be used
              as subcommands within a macro.  Each causes a return code to be
              set.  The SUBMIT function sets the variables &SYSJOBID and
              &USRJOBID.  A QUERY function for a specific job sets the &JOBSTAT
              variable with a job status code.
 
          6.  More information about the CMS Batch system is available in the
              UKCC CMS Batch User's Guide and from the HELP command.  Try HELP
              BATCH MENU for more information about job control statements.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     34
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        BATKILL
 
         Use the BATKILL command in a CMS Batch job to terminate the job.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | BATKILL   |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  BATKILL is intended for use in an EXEC that is executed in a
              batch job.  The EXEC could check for errors or unusual conditions
              and issue the BATKILL command if further processing would be
              wasted.  Jobs terminated with BATKILL are not considered to have
              completed normally by the CMS Batch job chaining facility.
 
          2.  If used outside of a CMS Batch job, BATKILL sets a return code of
              zero and has no further effect.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     35
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         BROWSE
 
         Use the BROWSE command to examine a CMS disk file from a 3270-type
         terminal.  BROWSE cannot be used to modify a file (although it can be
         used to erase a file); but unlike XEDIT, it can be used to examine any
         file, regardless of size.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |           +          +        ++                       |
         | BRowse    | filename  |filetype  |filemode|| [( [options...] [)]]  |
         |           |           | *        | *      ||                       |
         |           |           +          +        ++                       |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
       | |           | [Bottom]  [Noclear]  [Member membername]               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Help fn]  [Profile [([fn [ft [fm [)]]]]]]             |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the file to be examined.
 
         filetype  is the filetype of the file to be examined.  If no filetype
                   is specified, the first file with the correct filename will
                   be used.
 
         filemode  is the filemode of the file to be examined.  The default
                   value is "*".
 
         Options
 
       | Bottom    causes BROWSE to initially display the last (bottom) part of
       |           the file.  Without this option the top of the file is
       |           displayed initially.
 
         Help fn   specifies the name of an EXEC to be called by the HELP
                   subcommand.  The default name is "HBROWSE".
 
         Member membername
                   displays the specified member of a CMS library immediately
                   at entry to BROWSE.
 
         Noclear   specifies that the screen is not to be cleared by BROWSE.
 
         Profile (fn ft fm)
                   specifies a file to be used as the BROWSE  profile.  The
                   default is "BROWSE $PROFILE *".
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     36
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         BROWSE
 
         Keyboard Functions
 
         PA1       will transfer control to CP and clear the screen.  A CP READ
                   status will be displayed.  Enter BEGIN to return to BROWSE.
 
         PA2       will transfer control to CMS subset and clear the screen.  A
                   VM READ or RUNNING status will be displayed.  Enter RETURN
                   to return to BROWSE.
 
         PFnn      will execute the subcommand defined for the Program Function
                   key that is pressed.  The PF key definitions are contained
                   in the BROWSE profile (see below).  Use the DSPF subcommand
                   to display their current settings.
 
         BROWSE Subcommands
 
         BROWSE is a read-only editor and supports subcommands for searching,
         examining, and erasing a file.  The following subcommands can be
         entered on the command line at the top of the display area:
 
         n         makes record "n" the top line in the current level.
 
         =         repeats the last command for this level.
 
         ?[?]      displays the last command entered for this level.  The
                   command will be executed only if you press the ENTER key.
                   If two question marks are entered, the second most recent
                   command entered for this level is displayed.
 
         &         can be used as a prefix for BROWSE subcommands to leave the
                   subcommand on the command line after execution; this allows
                   repeated execution of a command by just pressing ENTER.
 
         Backward n
                   scrolls the screen window backwards (toward the top of the
                   file) "n" screens.  The default is one screen.
 
         BOttom    displays the last screen of a file or CMS library member.
 
       | BURN      erases the current file and ends the current level.
 
         Case x    controls translation of character strings used with the
                   locate (/) subcommand.  Specify "U" (for uppercase) to
                   ignore case during comparisons, or "M" (for mixed case) if
                   case is significant.  The default is "U".
 
       | CP ...    executes a specified CP command.
 
         DIct      displays the names of the members in a CMS library.
 
       | DISCARD   erases the current file and ends the current level.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     37
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         BROWSE
 
         Down n    moves the screen window down (toward the end of the file)
                   "n" lines.  The default is one line.
 
         DSpf      displays the current settings of the PF keys.
 
         Enter [fn|* [ft|* [fm|*]]]
                   creates a new BROWSE level within the current file or a
                   split-screen display of a file not currently displayed.  The
                   screen will be split the first time a new level is created.
 
         Forward n scrolls the screen window forward (toward the end of the
                   file) "n" screens.  The default is one screen.
 
       | LAst      is a synonym for BOTTOM.
 
         Left n    scrolls the screen window "n" columns to the left.  The
                   default is the width of the screen.
 
         Member [membername]
                   displays a member within a CMS library.  If "membername" is
                   unspecified, the last selected member is redisplayed.  If a
                   member is found, member-select mode is entered and the
                   member name is displayed after the filename in the level
                   header.  Scroll and locate subcommands will be applied to
                   the selected member only.  Use the DICT or QUIT subcommands
                   or the PF key function END to leave member-select mode.  If
                   member-select mode was entered through the MEMBER
                   subcommand, the PF key function END and the QUIT subcommand
                   will display the dictionary.  If entered through the MEMBER
                   option, the level is terminated.
 
         Next n    is a synonym for DOWN.
 
         QQuit     is a synonym for QUIT.
 
         Quit      ends the current level (or displays the dictionary if
                   member-select mode was entered with a MEMBER subcommand).
 
         Right n   scrolls the screen window "n" columns to the right.  The
                   default is the width of the screen.
 
         Set [Hex On|OFf|Char] [Numbers On|OFf]
                   controls the display of line numbers and the screen data
                   format.  HEX ON displays data in hexadecimal.  HEX CHAR
                   displays data in both hexadecimal and character forms.  The
                   initial settings are HEX OFF and NUMBERS OFF.  If no
                   parameters are specified, the current settings are
                   displayed.
 
         Top       displays the first screen of a file or CMS library member.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     38
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         BROWSE
 
         Up n      moves the screen window up (toward the top of the file) "n"
                   lines.  The default is one line.
 
         View n    displays the specified column of the input records in column
                   one of the screen.  If no parameter is specified, the
                   current column setting is displayed.
 
         /string[/n [m]]
                   (Locate) searches for "string" in the current level and, if
                   found, makes the located line the top line for the level.
                   If CASE U (the default) is in effect, the case of the
                   letters in the string and in the data is ignored.  Column
                   boundaries for the search may be specified with the "n" and
                   "m" arguments.  Note that the closing delimiter is only
                   required if boundaries are given.
 
         The BROWSE Profile
 
         A search is made at initialization for the BROWSE profile.  The
         profile is a CMS file named "BROWSE $PROFILE *" (or a specified
         substitute) that is used to set PF key functions and specify special
         options.  The profile may contain either variable or fixed-length
         records up to 132 bytes long.  After processing the profile, any lines
         in the CMS stack are processed as if they were also profile records.
 
         The profile may contain the following types of records:
 
         *OPTION options
                   The only option is "EXITCLR."  This causes BROWSE to clear
              the screen before terminating, which is useful if BROWSE is
              invoked from another environment that uses full-screen support.
 
         *PFKEYS nn function
                   Define Program Function key "nn" as "function."  The
              following functions can be used here (those marked with an
              asterisk can be used only from PF keys):
 
               Name  Description
               BOT   Display the last page of a file or member.
              *BRN   Erase the file and end the level.
              *CAN   Cancel all levels.
              *CCL   Make the line indicated by the cursor the top line.
              *DSPC  Display cursor position (record number and column).
              *END   End level containing the cursor.
              *RPTF  Repeat the last locate function.
              *SCB   Scroll backward (toward top of file).
              *SCF   Scroll forward (toward end of file).
              *SCL   Scroll left the screen width.
              *SCR   Scroll right the screen width.
              *SPL   Move the split to the line indicated by the cursor.
               TOP   Display first page of a file or member.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     39
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         BROWSE
 
         Usage Note
 
         Characters that cannot be displayed on a 3270-type display screen are
         represented by dots.  Use SET HEX CHAR or SET HEX ON to determine the
         actual character in such a case.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         BROWSE does not issue error messages, but can generate the following
         return codes:
 
            1  Console not a 3270-type terminal.
            2  Insufficient free storage available.
           28  File not found.
         1xxx  Error xxx reading input file (see CMSDIO command
               for meaning of "xxx").
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     40
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                    BURN (EXEC)
 
         Use the BURN command to erase a CMS disk file or purge a reader spool
         file.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                            +                         |
         | BURN      | |filename filetype [filemode]|                         |
         |           | |spoolid                     |                         |
         |           | +                            +                         |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of a file to be erased.
 
         filetype  is the filetype of the file.
 
         filemode  is the filemode of the file.  The default filemode is "A."
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of a reader file to be purged.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  BURN can be issued from virtually any environment under CMS.
              BURN is accepted by XEDIT, FLIST, PEEK, FILELIST, RLIST, BROWSE,
              and RBROWSE.  If the file identifier is not specified when
              issuing BURN as a subcommand from one of these environments, the
              current file is erased or purged, and the editors will also QUIT.
 
          2.  When purging a reader spool file in NETDATA format (used by the
              NOTE and SENDFILE commands), BURN will issue an acknowledgment if
              one was requested by the originating user.
 
          3.  BURN supports all of the options of the ERASE command.  Refer to
              the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro Reference or online Help for
              details on other features of the ERASE command.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSBRN001E No file specified.  RC=24
         DMSBRN920E Reader file [n] could not be found.  RC=28
 
         Messages may also be produced by the ERASE, PURGE, and RECEIVE
         commands.
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     41
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           CALC
 
         The CALC command provides desk calculator functions by placing you in
         calculator mode, allowing assignment statements and CALC subcommands
         to be processed.  Use the QUIT subcommand to leave calculator mode.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CALC      |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         CALC Subcommands
 
         var = expression
                   is the CALC assignment statement.  CALC variables are
                   identified by single letters.  The syntax of the expression
                   is like that used by the FORTRAN and BASIC programming
                   languages, accepting arithmetic operators (+, *, etc.) and
                   functions (LOG, SIN, SQRT, etc.).
 
         Clear var ...
                   sets one or more variables to zero.  All 26 variables (A
                   through Z) are initially set to zero.
 
         Display   causes the result of each assignment statement to be
                   displayed.  This is the initial setting.
 
         Integer var ...
                   makes one or more variables integers and sets them to zero.
                   Variables I through N are initially integers.
 
         Nodisplay suppresses the display of the result of assignments.
 
         Perform filename
                   reads and executes commands from a CMS disk file.  The
                   filetype of the file must be "CALC" and all subcommands in
                   the file must be in uppercase.  The PERFORM subcommand
                   cannot be executed from a file.
 
         Quit      ends CALC.
 
         Real var ...
                   makes one or more variables real (floating point) and sets
                   them to zero.  Variables A through H and O through Z are
                   initially real.
 
         Type var ...
                   displays the current value of one or more variables.
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     42
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           CALC
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  CALC uses a question mark to prompt for commands.
 
          2.  The following example illustrates how CALC could be used to make
              a few simple calculations.  Commands from the user are in
              lowercase; responses from CALC and CMS are in uppercase.
 
                     calc
                     ?
                     r=10.75*40
                     R=430.0
                     ?
                     f=r*.067
                     F=28.810
                     ?
                     s=r*52
                     S=22360.0
                     ?
                     quit
                     R;  $0.01 15:22:44
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         CALC produces warning messages when it detects errors, but doesn't
         terminate until the QUIT subcommand is issued.  CALC always sets a
         return code of zero.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     43
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         CANCEL
 
         Use the CANCEL command to cancel OS batch jobs and HASP printed output
         submitted from your userid.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CANCEL    | jobnumber                                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         jobnumber is the job number of the OS batch job or HASP print job to
                   be canceled.  The job number is the last three digits of the
                   runid, but must be entered without leading zeroes.
 
         Usage Note
 
         If the specified job or output is found and was submitted from your
         userid, the job will be canceled and a message will be sent confirming
         that the CANCEL command was accepted.  Only the current job activity
         is canceled when you issue CANCEL.  For example, if your job was
         executing or waiting for execution, some printed output will still be
         produced.  A second CANCEL will delete the printed output in such a
         case.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSCAN070E "[name]" is not a parameter.  RC=24
         DMSCAN923E A job number was not specified.  RC=24
         DMSCAN930E [batch] is not available.  RC=101
       | DMSCAN943E Error "[code]" from VMCF [function].  RC=100
 
         Responses may also be sent by HASP and the OS batch system.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     44
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           CASE
 
         Use the CASE command to force all CMS terminal output to uppercase or
         lowercase.  This is valuable if your terminal cannot display lowercase
         characters or displays special symbols in place of lowercase
         characters.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +         +                                            |
         | CASE      | |Mixedcase|                                            |
         |           | |Uppercase|                                            |
         |           | |Lowercase|                                            |
         |           | +         +                                            |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Mixedcase allows CMS terminal output to be produced in mixed case.
                   This is the initial condition and the default parameter.
 
         Uppercase forces all CMS terminal output to be produced in uppercase.
                   All lowercase alphabetic characters are translated to
                   uppercase.
 
         Lowercase forces all CMS terminal output to be produced in lowercase.
                   All uppercase alphabetic characters are translated to
                   lowercase.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The CASE setting affects all CMS terminal output, including
              output from SCRIPT and XEDIT.  Terminal output from CP commands
              and the text of messages from other users are not affected,
              however.
 
          2.  The CASE command has no effect on terminal input.
 
          3.  The CASE command and the CMS SET OUTPUT command alter the same
              output translation table.  Issuing one can change or override the
              other.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSCAS070E "[name]" is not a parameter.  RC=24
         DMSCAS109S Insufficient storage available to create the output
                    table.  RC=41
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     45
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                             CC (CMS Immediate Command)
 
         Use the CC (Current command Cost) to display the cost and resources
         used by the currently executing CMS command or program.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CC        |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  CC displays the cost, CPU time, and I/O count used since the
              currently executing command or program started.  The output is
              displayed with the CP MESSAGE command, so it is suppressed by the
              CP SET MSG OFF command.
 
          2.  CMS immediate commands are accepted only from the terminal.  They
              cannot be issued from an EXEC.
 
          3.  The SET IMMEDIATE command can be used to disable CMS immediate
              commands.  QUERY IMMEDIATE to determine the current setting.  The
              initial setting is SET IMMEDIATE ON.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     46
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       CHECKBUF
 
         Use the CHECKBUF command to determine the number of lines in the
         current CMS program stack buffer.  The return code is set to the
         number of lines.  Use the SENTRIES command to determine the total
         number of lines in all the program stack buffers.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CHECKBUF  |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Program stack buffers can be created with the MAKEBUF command and
              destroyed with the DROPBUF command.  Lines entered from your
              terminal are not placed in the program stack.
 
          2.  If there are no program stack buffers the return code is zero.
 
       |  3.  When CHECKBUF is executed in an EXEC with an &ERROR or SIGNAL ON
       |      ERROR trap in effect the error action is performed if the current
              program stack buffer contains one or more lines.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         CHECKBUF produces no messages.  The return code is set to the number
         of lines in the current CMS program stack buffer.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     47
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        CJSPREP
 
         Use the CJSPREP command to convert a file in SUBMIT command INCLUDE V
         format to its original format.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CJSPREP   | ifileid ofileid  [(options... [)]]                     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [REPlace]    [Counts]                                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ifileid   is the fileid of the input file.
 
         ofileid   is the fileid of the output file.
 
         Options
 
         REPlace   allows an existing file to be replaced.
 
         Counts    specifies that a count of the input and output records is to
                   be displayed at the completion of the command.
 
         Usage Notes
 
         The input file must contain fixed-length, eighty-byte records in the
         format produced by the SUBMIT command INCLUDE-V function.  The output
         file will always contain variable-length records.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSPRP001E No filename specified.  RC=24
         DMSPRP002E File not found.  RC=28
         DMSPRP003E "[string]" is not an option.  RC=24
         DMSPRP007E File "[fn ft fm]" does not contain fixed, 80-byte records.
                    RC=32
         DMSPRP023E No filetype specified.  RC=24
         DMSPRP024E File "[fn ft fm]" already exists; specify "REPLACE".  RC=28
         DMSPRP056E Record [n] in file "[fn ft fm]" is not valid.  RC=32
         DMSPRP062E Invalid "*" in fileid.  RC=20
         DMSPRP070E "[string]" is not a parameter.  RC=24
         DMSPRP104S Error "[code]" reading file "[fn ft fm]" from disk.  RC=100
         DMSPRP105S Error "[code]" writing file "[fn ft fm]" from disk.  RC=100
         DMSPRP932I [count] records read, [count] records written.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     48
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          CLEAR
 
         Use the CLEAR command to clear the screen of a display terminal.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CLEAR     |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
         The CLEAR command is functional on all 3270-type terminals, 3066
         terminals, and ASCII terminals that will clear their screens when a
         Form Feed control character is received.  Some printing ASCII
         terminals will eject a page when a Form Feed is received.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         CLEAR produces no messages or non-zero return codes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     49
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        CMSCMSG
 
         Use the CMSCMSG command to write a message in the command area of a
         3270-type display terminal.  CMSCMSG performs no function on any other
         type of terminal.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CMSCMSG   | [text...]                                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
       | text      is one or more words of data to be written.  When called
       |           from EXEC (not REXX or EXEC 2), the text will be tokenized
       |           and the eight-character tokens concatenated.   The text will
                   be truncated to a length of 130 characters.  If no text is
                   specified, a blank line is written.
 
         Usage Notes
 
         The text is written into the command (input) area at the bottom of the
         display screen.  This text may then be entered as a command.  The user
         may modify the text before pressing ENTER.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         CMSCMSG produces no error messages or non-zero return codes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     50
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         CMSDIO
 
       | Use the CMSDIO command to perform CMS disk file operations from an
       | EXEC.  The EXECIO command provides most of the functions of CMSDIO.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +      +       +   +     +       +    ++++             |
         | CMSDIO    | |Read  | fn ft |fm |line |format |size|||| [([data...]]|
         |           | |Write |       |A1 |0    |V      |    ||||             |
         |           | |Point |       +   +     +       +    ++++             |
         |           | |RPoint|                                               |
         |           | |WPoint|                                               |
         |           | |Close |                                               |
         |           | |TRunc |                                               |
         |           | +      +                                               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Read      reads a line from the file and puts it in the stack.
 
         Write     writes a line into the file.
 
         Point     sets the read and write pointers to the specified line.
 
         RPoint    sets the read pointer to the specified line.
 
         WPoint    sets the write pointer to the specified line.
 
         Close     closes the file.
 
         TRunc     truncates the file at the specified line.  All lines from
                   the line specified to the end of the file are deleted.
                   Truncating at line 1 erases the file.  The TRUNC function
                   cannot be used if the file is on an 800-byte block format
                   minidisk.
 
         fn        is the filename of the file to be accessed.
 
         ft        is the filetype of the file to be accessed.
 
         fm        is the filemode of the file to be accessed.  If unspecified,
                   "A1" is assumed.
 
         line      is a line number in the file.  The lines are numbered from 1
                   to n for a file with n lines.  An item number of 0 causes
                   the next sequential line to be read or written.  Reading
                   begins with line 1 unless a POINT or RPOINT has selected
                   another line.  For a new file, an item number of zero causes
                   line 1 to be written.  For existing files, the line is
                   written after the last existing line or after the last line
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     51
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         CMSDIO
 
                   selected with a POINT or WPOINT function.  Subsequent writes
                   using line 0 cause lines to be read or written sequentially
                   until a CLOSE, POINT, or WPOINT is issued.  The default line
                   number is 0.
 
         format    is the record format of the file.  It may be either "F" for
                   fixed-length or "V" for variable-length.  "V" is assumed for
                   new files.  The actual format is always used for existing
                   files.
 
         size      is the length of the line.  If unspecified, the default
                   value is the actual data length for variable-length records.
                   The default for fixed-length records is the actual record
       |           length of the file for existing files, or 255 for new files.
       |           The maximum value is 255.
 
         data      represents data to be written to the file (used only with
                   the WRITE function).  A blank line is written if the
                   parenthesis is present with no data.  If the parenthesis is
                   not present the data is read from the stack.  Data items on
       |           the command line are tokenized if CMSDIO is called from EXEC
       |           (but not REXX or EXEC 2).
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Rewriting a variable-length record with a longer line causes any
              following lines in the file to be discarded.
 
          2.  Data may be lost if a file is not closed after new lines have
              been written.
 
       |  3.  Lines read by CMSDIO are truncated to 255 bytes.  Lines lines
       |      written are limited by the command line (130 bytes) or stack
       |      width (about 500 bytes).
 
          4.  If an I/O error is encountered a special return code will be
              produced without a message.  The return codes and their meanings
              are:
 
                1001  File not found
                1002  Invalid buffer address
                1003  Permanent I/O error
                1004  First character of filemode is invalid
                1005  Number of lines to be read is less than or equal to
                      zero, or is greater than 32,768 for an 800-byte block
                      format disk, or filemode number is invalid (WRITE)
                1006  File not open (CLOSE), or line number too large
                1007  Invalid record format (READ), or attempt to skip
                      unwritten V-format item (WRITE)
                1008  Incorrect length or buffer size not specified
                1009  Read from a file open for output or write to a file open
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     52
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         CMSDIO
 
                      for input on an 800-byte block formatted disk
                1010  Maximum number of files reached
                1011  Number of lines greater than one for a V-format file
                      (READ), or record format not F or V (WRITE)
                1012  End of file, or line number greater than number of
                      lines in file
                1013  V-format line has an invalid displacement in active
                      file table (READ), or disk full (WRITE)
                1014  Invalid character in filename, or number of bytes to be
                      written not integrally divisible by the number of
                      lines to be written
                1015  Invalid character in filetype, or length of F-format
                      item not the same as the previous item (WRITE)
                1016  Record format specified does not match that of the file
                1019  Maximum number of data blocks reached
                1020  Invalid character in fileid
                1021  Invalid character in filetype
                1022  Virtual storage capacity exceeded
                1024  Invalid filemode
                1025  Insufficient free storage available for file
                      management control areas
                1026  Requested item number is negative or exceeds file
                      system capacity
                1036  Disk not accessed, or access is read-only (WRITE)
                1040  Error closing file
                1044  File system pointers invalid
                1050  Not an EDF disk
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSDIO001E No filename specified.  RC=24
         DMSDIO023E No filetype specified.  RC=24
         DMSDIO047E No function specified.  RC=24
         DMSDIO048E Invalid mode "[mode]".  RC=24
         DMSDIO070E "[string]" is not a parameter.  RC=24
 
         Refer to the Usage Notes for a description of the special I/O error
         return codes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     53
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        CMSPMSG
 
         Use the CMSPMSG command to write a prompt message on the terminal.  On
         terminals other than 3270-type displays the cursor or carriage will
         remain on the space following the message text.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CMSPMSG   | [text...]                                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
       | text      is the text of the message.  The text is truncated to a
       |           length of 130 characters.  When called from an EXEC (but not
       |           REXX or EXEC 2) the text is tokenized.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         CMSPMSG produces no error messages or non-zero return codes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     54
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        CMSREAD
 
         Use the CMSREAD command to read a line from the terminal or stack and
         place the data in the stack.  The input may be masked.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CMSREAD   | [Mask]                                                 |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Mask      specifies that the input is to be masked.  On 3270-type
                   terminals the entire input line is set to non-display mode.
                   On other types of terminals the first eight characters of
                   the line will be concealed by overstriking with a mask
                   string.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The input is limited to 130 characters from the terminal or 255
              characters from the program stack.  Lines read from the terminal
              are not translated to uppercase (when using EXEC 2, &CASE M will
              be needed to prevent translation to uppercase), but any CMS SET
              INPUT translations will be performed.  Lines read from the
              terminal are also subject to logical editing under the control of
              the CP TERMINAL and SET LINEDIT commands.
 
          2.  Lines entered when the MASK parameter is used will not be
              recorded on your console log and cannot be recalled or displayed
              with either the CP PF key function RETRIEVE or the CMS ?
              function.
 
          3.  You should not use a CMSREAD MASK command immediately following a
              CMSPMSG command unless you are using a 3270-type terminal.  On
              other kinds of terminals, the mask will overstrike part of the
              message.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSCRD070E "[string]" is not a parameter.  RC=24
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     55
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         CMSTIO
 
         Use the CMSTIO command to determine if a virtual device exists.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CMSTIO    | [address]                                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         address   is the virtual device address of the device to be tested.
                   If omitted, the terminal will be tested.  The virtual
                   address is specified as a hexadecimal value.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         CMSTIO produces no messages.  It uses the following return codes:
 
           0   Device exists
           1   Invalid parameter
           3   Device doesn't exist
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     56
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   COBDC (EXEC)
 
         Use the COBDC command to compile a program with the IBM VS COBOL
         compiler using the TEST option.  The program then can be executed
         using COBOL Interactive Debug.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COBDC     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the COBOL
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "COBOL,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are COBOL compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The filename of the COBOL file should be the same as the name on
              the PROGRAM-ID line in the program.
 
          2.  COBDC is an EXEC that uses the COBOL command to compile a COBOL
              program.  The object program produced can be executed with the
              COBDG or COBVG command.  Refer to the descriptions of the COBOL
              and TESTCOB commands for more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     57
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  COBDCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the COBDCG command to compile a program using the IBM VS COBOL
         compiler and then execute the program with COBOL Interactive Debug.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COBDCG    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the COBOL
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "COBOL,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are COBOL options.  The TEST option is supplied.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The filename of the COBOL file must be the same as the name on
              the PROGRAM-ID line in the program.
 
          2.  You must define any DD names that you use before issuing the
              COBDCG command.  For example:
 
                   FILEDEF SYSPRINT TERMINAL ( PERM
                   FILEDEF SYSOUT TERMINAL ( PERM
                   FILEDEF DATAFILE DISK DATA FILE A (PERM
                   COBDCG program
 
          3.  COBDCG is an EXEC that uses the COBOL command to compile a COBOL
              program.  The object program produced is then executed using
              COBOL Interactive Debug.  Refer to the descriptions of the COBOL
              and TESTCOB commands for more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     58
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   COBDG (EXEC)
 
         Use the COBDG command to execute a program using COBOL Interactive
         DEBUG.  The program must have been compiled with the IBM VS COBOL
         compiler with the TEST option.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COBDG     | filename                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the COBOL
                   object program produced by the VS COBOL compiler.  The
                   filetype of the file must be "TEXT."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The filename of the TEXT file must be the same as the name on the
              PROGRAM-ID line in the source program.
 
          2.  You must define any DD names that you use before issuing the
              COBDG command.  For example:
 
                   FILEDEF SYSPRINT TERMINAL ( PERM
                   FILEDEF SYSOUT TERMINAL ( PERM
                   FILEDEF DATAFILE DISK DATA FILE A (PERM
                   COBDG program
 
          3.  Refer to the descriptions of the COBOL and TESTCOB commands for
              more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     59
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          COBOL
 
         Use the COBOL command to compile a program with the IBM VS COBOL
         compiler.  The COBVCG, COBVC, COBVG, COBDCG, COBDC, and COBDG commands
         are available for use with VS COBOL programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CObol     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the COBOL
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "COBOL,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         Options
 
         ACEn      is the same as SPACEn.
 
         ADV       specifies that records for files with WRITE...ADVANCING need
                   not reserve the first byte for the control character.  This
                   is the default.
 
         APOst     specifies that apostrophes are used to delimit literals.
                   The default is QUOTE.
 
         BATch     specifies that the source file contains multiple programs or
                   subprograms.  The default is NOBATCH.
 
         BUF n     is the amount of storage used for buffers during
                   compilation.  The default is (SIZE-96K)/4+4K if SIZE is
                   specified, 4K otherwise.
 
         CDEck     causes COPY statements to be expanded in the reformatted
                   deck produced with the FDECK option.  The default is
                   NOCDECK.
 
         CLIst     produces a condensed listing of the generated object code.
                   The default is NOCLIST.
 
         CNT n     is the same as LINECNT.
 
         COUnt     causes code to be generated to produce verb execution
                   summaries at the end of program execution.  This output is
                   directed to SYSCOUNT.  The default is NOCOUNT.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     60
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          COBOL
 
         CSYNtax   suppresses object code generation if E-level or higher
                   messages are produced during compilation.  The default is
                   NOCSYNTAX, which allows compilation to complete with errors.
 
         DECk      sends the object program to the spooled punch.  The default
                   is NODECK.
 
         DIsk      writes the program listing to a disk file named "filename
                   LISTING."  This is the default.
 
         DMAp      lists the glossary, global tables, literal pools, and
                   register assignments.  NODMAP is the default.
 
         DUMp      causes an abnormal termination when a disaster situation
                   occurs.  NODUMP is the default.
 
         DYNam     causes subprograms to be dynamically loaded when called,
                   rather than statically loaded when the main program is
                   loaded.  NODYNAM is the default.
 
         ENDjob    causes clean-up to be done when a GOBACK is executed in a
                   main program, or when a STOP RUN is executed in any program.
                   NOENDJOB is the default.
 
         FDEck     sends a reformatted listing to SYSPUNCH.  FDECK is used with
                   the LSTONLY or LSTCOMP options.  NOFDECK is the default.
 
         FLAGE     suppresses compiler warning messages.  FLAGW is the default.
 
         FLAGW     allows all compiler warning and error messages to be listed.
                   This is the default.
 
         FLOw n    causes a formatted trace of "n" procedures to be listed if
                   an abnormal termination occurs.  NOFLOW is the default.
 
         LAG       is the same as FLAGE.
 
         LAGW      is the same as FLAGW.
 
         LANGLVL n specifies the COBOL dialect used by the compiler.  LANGLVL 2
                   (the default) is ANS X3.23-1974; LANGLVL 1 is the older ANS
                   X3.23-1968 standard.  Both dialects include IBM extensions.
 
         LCOLn     controls the reformatted Procedure Division listing.  LCOL1
                   causes single-column output; LCOL2 causes double-column
                   output.  LCOL2 is the default.
 
         LIB       allows COPY and BASIS statements to be used.  NOLIB is the
                   default.
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     61
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          COBOL
 
         LINECNT n is the number of lines on each page of compiler listing
                   output (ranging from 1 to 99).  The default is LINECNT 60.
 
         LOAd      writes the object program to a disk file named "filename
                   TEXT."  This is the default.
 
         LSTComp   causes the lister to be used and the source program to be
                   compiled.  NOLST is the default.
 
         LSTOnly   causes the lister to be used, but the program is not
                   compiled.  NOLST is the default.
 
         LVLx      specifies how deviations from ANS COBOL are to be flagged.
                   FIPS levels A, B, C, or D may be specified.  NOLVL is the
                   default.
 
         L120      specifies that the reformatted listing will have 120
                   characters per line.
 
         L132      specifies that the reformatted listing will have 132
                   characters per line.  This is the default.
 
         NAMe      causes NAME records to be included in the generated TEXT
                   file.  NONAME is the default.
 
         NOADV     See the ADV option.
 
         NOLOAd    See the LOAD option.
 
         NOPRInt   suppresses listing output.  See the DISK and PRINT options.
 
         NOSEQ     See the SEQ option.
 
         NOSOUrce  See the SOURCE option.
 
         NOTERm    See the TERM option.
 
         NOVERB    See the VERB option.
 
         NOZWB     See the ZWB option.
 
         NUM       causes line numbers on the input records to be used.  NONUM
                   is the default.
 
         OLn       is the same as LCOLn.
 
         OPTimize  causes optimized code to be generated.  OPTIMIZE is implied
                   by the SYMDMP option.  NOOPT is the default.
 
         OSDeck    specifies that the object program will be executed under OS,
                   or is a subprogram for OS or CMS.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     62
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          COBOL
 
         PMAp      lists the global tables, literal pools, register
                   assignments, and assembler language expansion of the source
                   program.  NOPMAP is the default.
 
         PRInt     sends the compiler listing to the spooled printer.  DISK is
                   the default.
 
         QUOte     specifies that double quotes will be used to delimit
                   literals.  This is the default.
 
         RESident  causes the COBOL Library Management feature to dynamically
                   load at execution time.  NORES is the default.
 
         SEQ       causes the compiler to check the sequence of the source
                   statements.  This is the default.
 
         SIZE n    indicates the amount of storage available to the compiler
                   (from 128K to 9999999).  The default is 128K.  See also the
                   BUF option.
 
         SOUrce    produces a source listing.  This is the default.
 
         SPACEn    specifies single, double, or triple spacing in the source
                   listing.  The default is SPACE1 (single spacing).
 
         STAte     causes the statement number and verb executing at the time
                   of an abnormal failure to be listed.  NOSTATE is the
                   default.
 
         SUPmap    suppresses object listing and generation if an E-level or D-
                   level message is produced.  NOSUPMAP is the default.
 
         SXRef     produces a sorted cross-reference listing.  NOSXREF is the
                   default.
 
         SYMdmp    causes a formatted dump of the data area to be produced if
                   the program terminates abnormally.  SYMDMP implies the
                   OPTIMIZE option.  NOSYMDMP is the default.
 
         SYNtax    causes the syntax of the source program to be checked, but
                   not compiled.  NOSYNTAX, the default, specifies syntax
                   checking and compilation.
 
         SYSx      causes SYSOUx to be used for debugging and DISPLAY output.
                   The default is SYST, which causes SYSOUT to be used.  An
                   appropriate FILEDEF must be issued before execution for
                   names other than SYSOUT.
 
         TERm      displays compiler statistics and messages at the terminal.
                   This is the default.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     63
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          COBOL
 
         TEST      is used with COBOL Interactive Debug (TESTCOB).  NOTEST is
                   the default.
 
         TRUnc     causes computational (binary) items to use the PICTURE
                   clause specification when moved.  NOTRUNC is the default.
 
         VBRef     produces a cross-reference of verbs.  NOVBREF is the
                   default.
 
         VBSum     produces a summary of the verbs used in the program.
                   NOVBSUM is the default.
 
         VERB      includes the names of procedures and verbs in the object
                   program listing.  This option is significant only if CLIST
                   or PMAP is specified.
 
         XREf      produces an unsorted cross-reference.  The default is
                   NOXREF.
 
         ZWB       causes the compiler to generate code to strip the sign from
                   a signed external decimal field when it is compared to an
                   alphanumeric field.  This is the default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  More information about VS COBOL can be found in the IBM VM/370
              CMS User's Guide for COBOL.  The VS COBOL compiler and language
              are documented in IBM VS COBOL for OS/VS and the IBM OS/VS COBOL
              Compiler and Library Programmer's Guide.  COBOL Interactive Debug
              is described in IBM OS COBOL Interactive Debug Terminal User's
              Guide and Reference.
 
          2.  If you use COPY statements in your COBOL program, you must define
              the libraries to be searched before you issue the COBOL command.
              Members to be copied may be in CMS MACLIB's or OS partitioned
              data sets (or both).  To use a CMS MACLIB, use the following
              commands:
 
                   GLOBAL MACLIB libname
                   FILEDEF SYSLIB DISK libname MACLIB *
 
              To use an OS PDS, issue the following commands:
 
                   OSDISK
                   FILEDEF SYSLIB DISK SYSLIB MACLIB * DSN data.set.name
                   GLOBAL MACLIB SYSLIB
                   COBOL filename
 
              Refer to the description of the GLOBAL and MACLIB commands for
              more information.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     64
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          COBOL
 
          3.  Before loading your COBOL program, you must define any subroutine
              libraries required (including the VS COBOL libraries).  For
              example:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB PTF8LIB COBOLVS
                   LOAD filename ( START
 
              If your program performs any input or output operations you must
              use FILEDEF commands to define the files or devices to be used
              before execution.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     65
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   COBVC (EXEC)
 
         Use the COBVC command to compile a program with the IBM VS COBOL
         compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COBVC     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the COBOL
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "COBOL,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are COBOL compiler options.
 
         Usage Note
 
         COBVC is an EXEC that uses the COBOL command to compile a COBOL
         program.  The object program produced can be executed with the COBVG
         command.  Refer to the description of the COBOL command for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     66
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  COBVCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the COBVCG command to compile and execute a program using the IBM
         VS COBOL compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COBVCG    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the COBOL
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "COBOL,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are COBOL compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The default VS COBOL subroutine libraries are used: PTF8LIB and
              COBLIBVS.  If you need to use additional libraries or load
              additional object files you must use the COBVG command to execute
              your program.
 
          2.  COBVCG is an EXEC that uses the COBOL command to compile a COBOL
              program.  The object program produced is then executed.  Refer to
              the description of the COBOL command for more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     67
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   COBVG (EXEC)
 
         Use the COBVG command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the IBM VS COBOL compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COBVG     | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the VS
                   COBOL (or VS COBOL compatible) object programs.  The
                   filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  PTF8LIB and COBLIBVS.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the executed program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the COBVC and COBOL commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     68
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       CODETRAN
 
         Use the CODETRAN command to perform character code and case
         conversions on CMS disk files.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CODETRAN  | ifileid [ofileid] [( options ... [)]]                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +       +   +       +                                  |
         |           | |ATOE   |   |NEWFile|                                  |
         |           | |ETOA   |   |REPlace|                                  |
         |           | |LOwcase|   +       +                                  |
         |           | |UPcase |                                              |
         |           | |USer fn|                                              |
         |           | +       +                                              |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ifileid   is the file identifier (filename, filetype, and filemode) of
                   the input file.  The filemode may be specified as "*," or
                   may be omitted if the output file identifier is not
                   specified.  The default is "*."
 
         ofileid   is the file identifier (filename, filetype, and filemode) of
                   the output file.  An equal sign (=) may be coded for any of
                   the output file identifier fields.  If unspecified, the
                   default is "= = =," which causes the input file to be
                   replaced.
 
         Options
 
         ATOE      converts from ASCII to EBCDIC.
 
         ETOA      converts from EBCDIC to ASCII.
 
         LOwcase   converts EBCDIC uppercase to EBCDIC lowercase.
 
         NEWFile   specifies that the output file must not exist prior to the
                   execution of the command.  This is the default unless the
                   output file is the same as the input file.
 
         REPlace   causes the output file to be replaced if it already exists.
                   This is the default if the output file is the same as the
                   input file.
 
         UPcase    converts EBCDIC lowercase to EBCDIC uppercase.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     69
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       CODETRAN
 
         USer fn   causes translation to use a table in the specified CMS disk
                   file.  The filetype of the file must be "CODETRAN" and the
                   file must contain at least 16 records of 32 characters.  A
                   translation table consists of 256 hexadecimal values (00
                   through FF).
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  A few characters do not translate properly when going back and
              forth between ASCII and EBCDIC.  Refer to the Appendix on
              character sets for more information.
 
          2.  The following files are available as guides for making your own
              translation tables:
 
                   ATOE    CODETRAN Y2  (ASCII to EBCDIC)
                   ETOA    CODETRAN Y2  (EBCDIC to ASCII)
                   LOWCASE CODETRAN Y2  (EBCDIC lowercase to EBCDIC uppercase)
                   UPCASE  CODETRAN Y2  (EBCDIC uppercase to EBCDIC lowercase)
                   NONE    CODETRAN Y2  (Each character to itself, no change)
 
          3.  With an appropriate pair of translation tables, CODETRAN could be
              used as part of a simple substitution-type cipher system.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSCOD002E Input file "file" not found.  RC=28
         DMSCOD003E "string" is not an option.  RC=24
         DMSCOD007E Insufficient storage to initialize i/o buffer.  RC=28
         DMSCOD024E File "file" already exists, specify "replace".  RC=28
         DMSCOD042E No fileid(s) specified.  RC=24
         DMSCOD044E Record length incorrect in "file".  RC=32
         DMSCOD048E Invalid mode "mode".  RC=24
         DMSCOD054E Incomplete fileid.  RC=24
         DMSCOD062E Invalid "*" in fileid.  RC=20
         DMSCOD062E Invalid character in fileid "file".  RC=20
         DMSCOD069E Disk mode "mode" not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSCOD070E "string" is not a parameter.  RC=24
         DMSCOD104S Error n reading file "file".  RC=100
         DMSCOD105S Error n writing file "file".  RC=100
         DMSCOD106E Output disk not accessed r/w.  RC=100
         DMSCOD930E Invalid character in user translate record.  RC=4
         DMSCOD931E Multiple translate options specified.  RC=4
         DMSCOD932E No translate option specified.  RC=12
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     70
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       COPYFILE
 
         Use the COPYFILE command to make a copy of a CMS disk file.  Use the
         FCOPY command to copy one or more files if the only options required
         are TYPE or OLDDATE.  FCOPY is as much as ten times faster (and
         cheaper) than COPYFILE.  This is a summary of the most frequently
         needed options and functions of the COPYFILE command, not a complete
         description.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COPYFILE  | ifileid  [ofileid]  [( [options...] [)]]               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                    +       +  +      +  +       +      |
         |           | [Type]  [OLDDate]  |APPend |  |PACK  |  |RECfm V|      |
         |           |                    |REPlace|  |UNPACK|  |      F|      |
         |           | [TRUnc]            +       +  +      +  +       +      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ifileid   is the filename, filetype, and filemode of the input file.
                   Any part of the fileid may be specified as "*" to indicate a
                   group of files matching the other parts of the fileid.
 
         ofileid   is the filename, filetype, and filemode of the output file.
                   If any part of "ifileid" contains an "*", the corresponding
                   part of "ofileid" must be specified as "=".  The default
                   output fileid is "= = =".
 
         Options
 
         APPend    adds the input file to the end of an existing output file.
                   A new file is created it does'n exist.
 
         OLDDate   uses the date of the input file for the output file.  The
                   date may be examined with the FLIST, LISTX or LISTFILE
                   "DATE" option, and is used with the sorting options of
                   FLIST, LISTX, LISTFILE, and FILELIST.
 
         PACK      writes the output file in packed format.  Refer to the PACK
                   command description for more information.
 
         RECfm x   specifies the record format of the output file.  RECFM may
                   be specified as "V" (variable-length records) or "F" (fixed-
                   length records).  The default is the format of the input
                   file.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     71
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       COPYFILE
 
         REPlace   replaces an existing file with the output file.  This is the
                   default if the output fileid is "= = =" (the default value).
 
         TRUnc     is used when converting files to variable-length format.  It
                   removes trailing blanks from output lines.
 
         Type      displays the fileid of each file copied.
 
         UNPACK    writes the output file in normal, unpacked format.  The
                   input file must be in packed format.  Refer to the UNPACK
                   command description for more information.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  COPYFILE can be used to convert a file in fixed-length record
              format to variable-length format.  This often results in a
              considerable savings of disk space.  To perform this procedure,
              use the following command:
 
                 copyfile filename filetype filemode ( RECFM V TRUNC OLDDATE
 
              Warning: Do not perform this procedure on a file in packed
              format.  Packed files must be in fixed-length format.
 
          2.  COPYFILE has many other options and capabilities, including a
              SPECS option that can be used to manipulate the data in specified
              columns as the file is copied.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS Command
              and Macro Reference or the online HELP command for details.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     72
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           COST
 
         Use the COST command to obtain the cost of a terminal session.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |            +     +                                     |
         | COST      | [(  [Type] |Stack| [Nohdr]  [)]]                       |
         |           |            |Lifo |                                     |
         |           |            |Fifo |                                     |
         |           |            +     +                                     |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Options
 
         Type      displays the cost on the terminal.  This is the default.
 
         Stack     puts the cost in the stack (last-in, first-out).
 
         Lifo      is the same as STACK.
 
         Fifo      puts the cost in the stack (first-in, first-out).
 
         Nohdr     suppresses the typed header line.
 
         Usage Notes
 
       |  1.  COST displays the total charge for the terminal session during
       |      the current rate period.  Also displayed are the CPU time and the
       |      I/O operation count.  The header line contains the elapsed time
       |      of this terminal session during the current rate period.
 
          2.  The stacking options of COST (STACK, LIFO, and FIFO) put a single
              line containing the following data on the program stack:
 
              1. An asterisk (*)
              2. Cost (dollars)
              3. Cost (cents)
              4. Four-digit department number
              5. Five-digit project number
              6. Milliseconds of CPU time used
              7. Count of I/O operations (only non-spooled disk
                 operations are counted
       |      8. Elapsed time (hours:minutes:seconds)
       |      9. Cost (dollars and cents)
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
       | DMSCST003E "[string]" is not an option.  RC=24
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     73
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                        DEFAULTS (EXEC)
 
         Use the DEFAULTS command to customize the default options for the
         commands listed below.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                      +                               |
         | DEFAULTS  | |Set command options...|                               |
         |           | |List [command]        |                               |
         |           | +                      +                               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Set       sets default options for the specified command.
 
         List      lists the current default options for the specified command
                   or for all commands supported by DEFAULTS (if no command is
                   specified).
 
         Supported Commands and Options
 
         Command    Options
         Filelist   Profile [fn|PROFFLST]  Filelist
                                           NOFilelist
         Note       Profile [fn|PROFNOTE]  Short  LOG    NOAck
                                           LONg   NOLog  Ack
                    NOTebook [fn|ALL|*]
                    NONOTebook
         Peek       Profile [fn|PROFPEEK]  FRom recno  FOr numrec
         RDrlist    Profile [fn|PROFRLST]
         Receive    Log    Olddate  NOTebook [fn|ALL|*]
                    NOLog  NEwdate
         Sendfile   New  NOType  NOFilelist  Log    NOAck
                    Old  Type    Filelist    NOLog  Ack
         TDISK      SIZE [nK|nM|200K]
         Tell       MSGCMD [MSG|SMSG]
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro Reference or online HELP for
         more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     74
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                    DROP (EXEC)
 
         Use the DROP command to drop a link to a minidisk.  (DROP combines the
         RELEASE and DETACH commands.)  After dropping a link it is necessary
         to use the LINK and ACCESS commands to make the files on the dropped
         minidisk accessible again.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | DROP      | disk [disk...]                                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         disk      is a filemode letter or a virtual device address.  More than
                   one can be specified.  Filemode letters are assigned with
                   the ACCESS command, and virtual device addresses are
                   assigned with the LINK command.  You cannot drop "190,"
                   "19E," "S," or "Y."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  It is possible to drop your own A-disk, D-disk, and links to the
              OS rental volumes.  This doesn't destroy any files, but it makes
              them temporarily inaccessible.  The following commands would re-
              establish your A-disk:
 
                   link * 191 191
                   access 191 a
 
              You can also log off and log on again to re-establish your normal
              links.
 
       |  2.  You must DROP a disk that you have write-access to if you want to
       |      allow another user to write on that disk.  Refer to the
       |      descriptions of the AUTOLINK, LINK, and ACCESS commands for more
       |      information.
 
       |  3.  If you DROP a temporary disk (TDISK), DROP attempts to estimate
       |      the charge for the disk space.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSDRP070E No devices specified.
         DMSDRP070E "disk" cannot be dropped.
         DMSDRP070E "disk" is not a valid mode or address.
         DMSDRP113S Device "disk" does not exist.
 
         Messages may also be produced by the RELEASE and DETACH commands.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     75
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        DROPBUF
 
         Use the DROPBUF command to destroy the most recently created CMS
         program stack buffer or buffers.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | DROPBUF   | [n]                                                    |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         n         is the number of the first buffer to be dropped.  All
                   buffers created after the specified buffer will also be
                   dropped (these will have higher numbers).  If "n" is not
                   specified, the most recently created buffer is dropped.
 
         Usage Note
 
         The CHECKBUF, MAKEBUF, and SENTRIES commands are also useful when
         manipulating the stack.  All of these commands are intended to be used
         from EXEC's.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DROPBUF produces no messages, but can produce the following return
         codes:
 
           1  The buffer number was not valid.
           2  The specified buffer does not exist.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     76
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        ENVIRON
 
         The ENVIRON command provides information about the CMS environment by
         setting a return code.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +          +                                           |
         |           | |BATch     |                                           |
         | ENVIRON   | |DISConnect|                                           |
         |           | |DISPlay   |                                           |
         |           | |SUBset    |                                           |
         |           | |system    |                                           |
         |           | +          +                                           |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
       | BATch     checks for the CMS Batch environment.
 
         DISConne  checks for disconnected terminal status.  This is the
                   default.
 
         DISPlay   checks for a display (3270-type) terminal.
 
         SUBset    checks for CMS SUBSET mode.
 
       | system    checks the IPL system name or device address.  This usually
                   will be "CMS."
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         ENVIRON will check for the specified condition and set the return code
         to zero if true, one if false.  For example, issuing ENVIRON DISPLAY
         while you are using a 3270-type terminal will return a zero.  Issuing
         ENVIRON DISC from a 3270-type terminal will return a one.
 
         ENVIRON produces no messages.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     77
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          ERASE
 
         Use the ERASE command to delete a CMS disk file.  This is a
         description of the most frequently used function of the ERASE command;
         other functions are available.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                   +        +                           |
         | ERASE     | filename filetype |filemode| [( [TYPE] [)]]            |
         |           |                   |A       |                           |
         |           |                   +        +                           |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of a CMS disk file to be erased.
 
         filetype  is the filetype of the file.
 
         filemode  is the filemode of the file.  The default is "A."
 
         Options
 
         TYPE      types the fileid of each erased file.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The BURN command also provides this function.
 
          2.  ERASE has other options and capabilities.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS
              Command and Macro Reference or online HELP for details.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     78
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           EXEC
 
         Use the EXEC command to execute commands and control statements
       | contained in the specified CMS disk file.  The filetype of the file
       | must be "EXEC."  If the first line of the program contains a comment
       | beginning with "/*" it is processed by REXX; if it contains an
       | "&TRACE" control statement it is processed by EXEC 2; otherwise EXEC
       | is used.  REXX is recommended for new applications.
 
       | For more detailed information about REXX (the Restructured Extended
       | Executor), consult the VM/SP System Product Interpreter Reference and
       | the VM/SP System Product Interpreter User's Guide.
 
       | For more detailed information about EXEC 2, consult the VM/SP EXEC 2
       | Reference.
 
       | For more information about EXEC, consult the VM/SP CMS Command and
       | Macro Reference.
 
       | Online information is available for all three EXEC languages; enter:
 
       |      help rexx   -or-   help exec2   -or-   help exec
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | [EXec]    | filename [arguments...]                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename    is the name of the EXEC.
 
         arguments   are arguments passed to the EXEC.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Any command issued from the terminal ordinarily is assumed to be
              the name of an EXEC.  This is controlled by the CMS command SET
              IMPEX (implied EXEC); SET IMPEX OFF to disable the automatic EXEC
              search.  If no EXEC exists a search is made for a module or CMS
              nucleus command.  If neither is found, the command is passed to
              CP for execution.  This is controlled with the CMS command SET
              IMPCP (implied CP); SET IMPCP OFF to disable this process.
 
              When issuing commands from within XEDIT, XEDIT will first assume
              that the command is an XEDIT subcommand.  If this is not the case
              a check for an XEDIT macro is made (this is under the control of
              the XEDIT subcommand SET MACRO).  If no macro is found, the
              command is passed through the normal CMS command search (under
              the control of the XEDIT subcommand SET IMPCMSCP).
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     79
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           EXEC
 
              Both CMS and XEDIT have facilities for user-defined command
              synonyms and abbreviations.  For more information, refer to the
              description of the CMS command SYNONYM in the VM/SP CMS Command
              and Macro Reference, and to the description of the XEDIT
              subcommand SET SYNONYM in this manual.
 
       |  2.  REXX supports the full CMS command search (refer to the REXX
       |      ADDRESS function for more information).  This is not true of
       |      EXEC 2 and EXEC, however.  To execute another EXEC program from
       |      one of these languages use the "EXEC" command.  For example, to
       |      execute an EXEC named "SAMPLE" from one named "TEST," the TEST
              EXEC would contain the line "EXEC SAMPLE."  Similarly, to execute
              a CP command from within an EXEC, it must be preceded by the
              command "CP" ("CP LINK...," for example).
 
          3.  Two special EXEC programs are used by CMS at IPL (which occurs
              automatically when you log on).  A system profile EXEC is
              executed, and it calls a user-supplied EXEC named "PROFILE EXEC."
              You can use this EXEC to tailor the CMS environment to your own
              requirements.  The following example illustrates some of the
              things that you might use in a PROFILE:
 
       |           /* A Sample Profile EXEC */
       |           "set emsg on"
       |           "setcon to *"
 
              See the UKCC CMS User's Guide for more information about the
              PROFILE EXEC.
 
       |  4.  REXX and EXEC 2 also process XEDIT macros.  An XEDIT macro is
       |      similar to an EXEC and may contain XEDIT subcommands in addition
              to the other functions allowed in an EXEC.  All XEDIT macros have
              a filetype of "XEDIT" and may only be used from within XEDIT.
              Refer to the XEDIT command Usage Notes for more information.
 
       |  5.  Use the HI (Halt Interpretation) command to stop all currently
       |      executing REXX and EXEC 2 programs and macros.  HI halts
       |      execution without destroying the environment as HX does.
 
          6.  Contrary to the IBM-supplied documentation, the predefined EXEC 2
              variables &DATE and &TIME return the local date and time in
              Lexington, Kentucky, rather than the true date and time "on the
              primary meridian, Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)."  This would be the
              Mean Solar Time at Greenwich, which is roughly equivalent to
       |      standard Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).  The REXX DATE and
       |      TIME functions also return the local date and time in Lexington.
 
              Lexington local time is either Eastern Standard Time (EST) or
              Eastern Daylight Time (EDT).  EST is five hours earlier than GMT,
              and EDT is six hours earlier than GMT.  The time is usually
              correct to within a few minutes.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     80
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 EXPLAIN (EXEC)
 
         Use the EXPLAIN command to display an explanation of the most recently
         issued error message.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | EXPLAIN   |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Note
 
         EXPLAIN can properly handle all CMS error messages (DMS prefix), and
         all CP error messages (DMK prefix) resulting from CP commands entered
         from CMS.  It will not work for CP informational and warning messages,
         or CP messages resulting from commands issued from CP mode, or with a
         #CP.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Messages may be generated by the CMS HELP command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     81
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FCOPY
 
         Use the FCOPY command to copy CMS disk files.  FCOPY is considerably
         more efficient than COPYFILE, but does not allow packing, unpacking,
         or other file manipulations during the copy.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FCOPY     | ifileid ofileid [ (options... [)]]                     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +      +  +       +  +        +                        |
         |           | |Type  |  |NEWDate|  |UPdirt  |                        |
         |           | |NOType|  |OLDDate|  |NOUPdirt|                        |
         |           | +      +  +       +  +        +                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ifileid   is the fileid of the input file.  Patterns may be specified
                   using asterisks in the fileid (as with the LISTFILE
                   command).
 
         ofileid   is the fileid of the output file or files.  Equal signs must
                   be used for the filename, filetype, or filemode if the
                   corresponding part of the input fileid contains an asterisk.
 
         Options
 
         Type      displays the fileids of the copied files.  This is the
                   default if any part of the input fileid contains an
                   asterisk.
 
         NOType    suppresses the fileid list.
 
         NEWDate   uses the current date as the creation date of the output
                   file or files.  This is the default.
 
         OLDDate   uses the creation date of the input file or files as the
                   creation date of the output file or files.
 
         UPdirt    uses normal file directory updating during the copy.  This
                   is the default.
 
         NOUPdirt  causes file directory updating to be bypassed until all
                   files have been copied.  This is much faster than the
                   default mode if many files are to be copied.  The NOUPDIRT
                   option is overridden when an existing file is replaced.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     82
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FCOPY
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Unlike the COPYFILE command, FCOPY will always replace an
              existing output file.  FCOPY does not have a NOREPLACE or NEWFILE
              option.  Use care to avoid unintentionally destroying existing
              files.
 
          2.  You should always use FCOPY instead of COPYFILE when you do not
              need the functions that only COPYFILE provides.  FCOPY is as much
              as ten times faster (and cheaper) than COPYFILE.
 
         Messages and return codes
 
         DMSCPY002E Files not found.  RC=28
         DMSCPY003E "name" is not an option.  RC=24
         DMSCPY030E File "fileid" was active. it has been closed.
         DMSCPY032E Invalid filename or filetype.  RC=24
         DMSCPY037E Disk "mode" is read-only.  RC=32
         DMSCPY048E Invalid mode "mode".  RC=24
         DMSCPY054E Incomplete fileid specified.  RC=24
         DMSCPY062E Invalid "char" in fileid.  RC=20
         DMSCPY069E Disk "mode" is not accessed.  RC=32
         DMSCPY070E "name" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
         DMSCPY104S Error n reading file "fileid" from disk.  RC=100
         DMSCPY105S Error n writing file "fileid" to disk.  RC=100
         DMSCPY703I File "fileid" copied.
         DMSCPY985E Insufficient storage for fcopy.  RC=25
         DMSCPY993E [record|block] count for file "fileid" is too large
                    For disk mode.  RC=100
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     83
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FLIST
 
         Use the FLIST command to view a list of selected CMS disk files on a
         3270-type terminal.  FLIST creates a menu display that may be used to
         issue any CP or CMS command or EXEC (BURN or XEDIT, for example) by
         entering the command in the input area immediately to the right of a
         fileid on the screen.  You can also issue FLIST subcommands to sort
         the displayed data  or to enter a new FLIST level that displays
         another set of files.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +    +    +  +++                                       |
         | Flist     | |fn  |ft  |fm|||   [( [options...] [)]]                |
         |           | |*   |*   |A |||                                       |
         |           | +    +    +  +++                                       |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Help fn]  [Menu]  [Profile ([fn [ft [fm]]])]          |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Noclear]  [Stack]  [One [(recno)]]                    |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [PROTect]  [SOrt fn]  [Use [([fn [ft [fm [)]]]]]]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        is the filename or general form of the filename of the files
                   for which information is to be collected.  The default is
                   "*".
 
         ft        is the filetype or general form of the filetype of the files
                   for which information is to be collected.  The default is
                   "*".
 
         fm        is the filemode or general form of the filemode of the files
                   for which information is to be collected.  The default value
                   is "A".
 
         General Forms for File Identifiers
 
         Portions of file identifiers (name, type, and mode) may use asterisks
         (*) and plus signs (+) either alone or combined with other characters
         for matching purposes.  Each asterisk will match any number of any
         character.  Each plus sign will match a single occurrence of any
         character.
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     84
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FLIST
 
         Options
 
         Help fn   specifies the name of an EXEC to be called by the /HELP
                   subcommand.  The default name is "HFLIST".
 
         Profile (fn ft fm)
                   specifies an alternate file to be used as the FLIST profile.
                   The default is "FLIST $PROFILE *".
 
         Noclear   specifies that FLIST is not to clear the screen.
 
         Stack     stacks one line for each input area used:
 
                   *FLIST nnnnn filename filetype filemode input
                     |      |     |        |        |        |
                     |      |     |        |        |        user input
                     |      |     |        |        the displayed filemode
                     |      |     |        the displayed filetype
                     |      |     the displayed filename
                     |      the file (entry) number in the list
                     to make it a comment, in case CMS reads it
 
         One (recno)
                   causes the first selected input line to be stacked.  If
                   "recno" is specified, display starts at recno.  The ONE
                   option implies the STACK option.
 
         SOrt fn   specifies an alternate EXEC to be called when a subcommand
                   (/Sx) is issued and the "USE" option was specified.  The
                   default name is "FLISTS".
 
         PROTect   allows input fields to be used only once, after which they
                   are protected to prevent entry of another command.
 
         Use (fn ft fm)
                   specifies display of the named file (which must be in CMS
                   EXEC format) rather than FLIST's file listing.  If no fileid
                   is specified, "CMS EXEC *" is used.  The data from file
                   columns 8-27 is placed in screen columns 1-19.  The
                   remainder of the data columns are placed in the appropriate
                   columns of the display following the user input areas.  This
                   means that the LISTX DATE or LABEL options should be used
                   when the input file is created.
 
         Menu      is used with the USE option to prevent formatting of the
                   screen to the right of the input areas.  When MENU is
                   specified, the text from input file columns 8-27 is placed
                   in screen columns 1-19, and text from file columns 29-64 is
                   moved intact to the right of the input areas.
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     85
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FLIST
 
         Keyboard Functions
 
         PA1       will transfer control to CP mode.  Enter BEGIN to return to
                   FLIST.
 
         PA2       will transfer control to CMS subset.  Enter RETURN to return
                   to FLIST.
 
         PFnn      will execute the command defined for the Program Function
                   key pressed.  The PF key definitions are contained in the
                   FLIST profile.
 
         FLIST Subcommands
 
         The following subcommands are available after you enter the FLIST
         environment (abbreviations are shown in uppercase):
 
         /Bottom   displays the last page of the current FLIST level.
 
         /Cancel   cancels all active FLIST levels without processing any other
                   commands that are entered after the /CANCEL command.
 
         /Dspf     displays the PF key definitions.
 
         /Enter fn ft fm (options)
                   enters another FLIST level.  This is the same as the /LEVEL
                   subcommand.
 
         /Help     displays information on the use of the FLIST facility.
 
         /Level fn ft fm (options)
                   enters another FLIST level.  The /LEVEL subcommand operands
                   are the same as those used for the FLIST command.  If no
                   parameters are specified, the next logical level will
                   replace the level from which the command was entered.  If a
                   new level is required, at least a filename should be
                   specified.  When creating the second level, the screen will
                   be split into two equal parts.  Use the SPL PF key function
                   to move the split.  The profile is only processed on
                   initialization of the first level.
 
         /Omit command
                   is used to issue a CP or CMS command without appending the
                   fileid to the command.  /, /N, /T, and /M may be used within
                   the command to insert all or part of the fileid.
 
         /Quit     ends the current FLIST level after processing commands
                   entered for the level.
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     86
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FLIST
 
       | /Refresh  builds a new file display, removing lines for deleted files
       |           and adding lines for new files.
 
         /Sx       sorts the entries in the current level.  The sort code "x"
                   specifies how the sorting is to be done.  After sorting, the
                   level is redisplayed from the top.  If any files have been
                   erased, the empty lines are removed during the sort.  The
                   following sorts are supported:
 
                        Code Sort
       |                 B   Block Count and Fileid (same as S)
                         D   Date, Time, and Fileid (descending date and time)
                         L   Record Length (descending order) and Fileid
                         M   Filemode, Filename, and Filetype
                         N   Filename, Filetype, and Filemode
       |                 S   File Size (descending order) and Fileid
                         T   Filetype, Filename, and Filemode
 
         /Top      displays the first (top) page for the current level.
 
         /n        positions the indicated line on the top line of the current
                   level.  If "n" is not specified, the line on which the
                   command is entered becomes the top line.
 
         =         repeats the last command for the current level.  Except for
                   /ENTER, /LEVEL, and /OMIT, FLIST subcommands cannot be
                   repeated.
 
         ?         displays the last command for the current level (what would
                   execute if = were entered).  Press ENTER or a PF key to re-
                   execute the displayed command.  This command can be used
                   from a PF key to provide a convenient command recall
                   function.
 
         The FLIST Profile
 
         At initialization, a search is made for the FLIST profile.  The
         profile is a CMS file named "FLIST $PROFILE *" (or a specified
         substitute) that is used to set PF key functions and override the
         default top and bottom titles.  The file may contain either fixed or
         variable-length records up to 132 bytes long.  After processing the
         profile, any lines in the CMS stack will be processed as profile
         records.
 
         The profile may contain any of the following records:
 
         *HEADER header-text
                   The first 50 characters following *HEADER will replace the
                   level title line.  The text will be centered.
 
         *PFKEYS nn [(btd)] function
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     87
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FLIST
 
                   PF key "nn" will be defined as "function".  The optional
                   bottom title data, "btd", is used on the default bottom
                   title to explain the PF key.  The text must appear between
                   parentheses, and must be three characters long.  If "btd" is
                   not specified, the first three characters of the function
                   are used.  Some special FLIST functions may be used as PF
                   key definitions (these functions are allowed only on PF
                   keys):
 
                     Function  Description
                       %%      Clear the definition for this PF key.
                       >I      Widen command input area to end of line.
                       BRW     Invoke BROWSE.
                       CAN     Cancel all levels.
                       END     Terminate the level containing the cursor.
                       SCB     Scroll backward (toward the top of the file).
                       SCF     Scroll forward (toward the end of the file).
                       SPL     Split the screen at the cursor position.
 
                   A record containing no keyword may be placed at the end of
                   the profile.  The contents of this record will replace the
                   default bottom title line of the display.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  FLIST creates a display of fileids and related information (much
              like the LISTX command output) on the screen.  Each line contains
              an input field that may be used for commands or FLIST
              subcommands.  If a command is placed in an input field, the
              corresponding fileid is passed to it.  For example, placing
              "BURN" in the input field of the line for "A FILE A1" would cause
              the command "BURN A FILE A1" to be executed.  Any CP or CMS
              command or EXEC may be used.  The special indicator / can be used
              in the input area:
 
                   /   Insert the complete fileid.
                   /n  Insert the filename.
                   /t  Insert the filetype.
                   /m  Insert the filemode.
                   /o  Omit the fileid (must be first item on line).
 
              Any combination of "n", "t" and "m" is valid to a maximum of
              seven characters.  If not explicitly specified, FLIST will append
              the entire fileid to the input text.  The /o indicator can be
              placed at the beginning of the line to suppress this.
 
              After executing a command, the CMS stack is processed.  Input
              starting with a / will replace the original command and be
              processed as if entered by the user.  Input not starting with a /
              will be passed to CMS without any change to the contents of the
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     88
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FLIST
 
              line.  If the stack is empty, the next input field is processed.
              When all input fields are processed, the screen is redisplayed
              and the input fields are marked to indicate the result of the
              commands:
 
                   *   indicates that the command completed normally
                       (return code zero).
                   ¬nn Indicates that the command returned a non-zero
                       return code (nn).
                   ?   Indicates that no command with that name exists.
                   +   Indicates that no FLIST subcommand with that
                       name exists.
 
          2.  Never re-access a disk which is displayed on one of the levels.
              Do not erase files displayed on any level with an EXEC or with an
              "ERASE * filetype filemode" command.  Do not erase a file which
              is displayed on more than one level.  These situations cannot
              always be detected by FLIST and the results are unpredictable.
 
          3.  The input areas on each display line may be made wider with the
              >I PF key function.  The supplied FLIST $PROFILE sets PF9 to this
              function.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         FLIST produces no messages, but can produce the following return
         codes:
 
            1  Console not a 3270-type terminal.
            2  Insufficient storage available.
           24  Invalid filemode specified.
           28  File not found.
           36  Disk not accessed.
         1xxx  Disk I/O error.  See the CMSDIO command return codes for a
               detailed list.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     89
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FORTG
 
         Use the FORTG command to compile a program with the IBM FORTRAN G
         compiler.  FORTRAN G is not supported;  VS FORTRAN generally should be
         used for new programs.  The FORTGCG, FORTGC, and FORTGG commands are
         available for use with FORTRAN G programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTG     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         Options
 
         BCD       permits the use of BCD characters rather than EBCDIC in the
                   source program.  This option exists to support non-EBCDIC
                   keypunches.  Further details can be found in the
                   Programmer's Guide.  EBCDIC is the default option.
 
         DECK      causes the object program to be written to the disk file
                   "filename TEXT."  This is the default.
 
         EBCDIC    specifies that the source program contains EBCDIC
                   characters.  This is the default.
 
         ID        specifies that internal statement numbers (ISN's) are to be
                   generated for statements that call subroutines or contain
                   external function references.  This information is used in
                   the traceback produced if an error occurs in the called
                   subprogram.  This is the default.
 
         LINECNT n is the number of lines on each page of compiler listing
                   output (ranging from 1 to 99).  The default is LINECNT 56.
 
         LIST      produces a listing of the object program.  The default is
                   NOLIST.
 
         MAP       produces a table of names.  NOMAP is the default.
 
         NAME name assigns a name to the object program.  The default name of a
                   main program is MAIN, the name of a subprogram is always the
                   name used on the SUBROUTINE or FUNCTION statement.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     90
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FORTG
 
         NODECK    suppresses generation of an object program.
 
         NOID      See the ID option.
 
         NOPrint   suppresses the compiler listing.
 
         NOTerm    See the TERM option.
 
         Print     sends the compiler listing to the spooled printer.  The
                   default is to write the listing into a disk file named
                   "filename LISTING."
 
         SOURCE    produces a source listing.  This is the default.
 
         Term      displays compiler diagnostic messages at the terminal.  This
                   is the default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The FORTRAN language supported by the FORTRAN G compiler is
              described in the IBM System/360 and System/370 FORTRAN IV
              Language manual, and more information about the compiler can be
              found in the IBM System/360 OS FORTRAN IV (G and H) Programmer's
              Guide.
 
          2.  Before loading your FORTRAN program, you must define any
              subroutine libraries required (including the FORTRAN G library).
              If your program performs any input or output operations, you may
              also need to define the files to be used.  All unit numbers are
              defined to be disk files named "FILE FTnnF001" by default (and
              input files must contain 80-byte, fixed-length records).  To
              associate a FORTRAN unit number with a device, use a DD name in
              the form FTnnF001 (nn is the unit number), or just the number on
              a FILEDEF command.  For example:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB FORTGLIB
                   FILEDEF 5 TERMINAL
                   FILEDEF 6 PRINTER
                   LOAD filename ( START
 
              defines unit 5 as the terminal (for keyboard input) and unit 6 as
              the spooled printer.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     91
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  FORTGC (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTGC command to compile a program with the IBM FORTRAN G
         compiler.  FORTRAN G is not supported; VS FORTRAN generally should be
         used for new programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTGC    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are FORTG compiler options.
 
         Usage Note
 
         FORTGC is an EXEC that uses the FORTG command to compile a FORTRAN
         program.  The object program produced can be executed with the FORTGG
         command.  Refer to the description of the FORTG command for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     92
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 FORTGCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTGCG command to compile and execute a program using the IBM
         FORTRAN G compiler.  FORTRAN G is not supported; VS FORTRAN generally
         should be used for new programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTGCG   | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are FORTG compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The default FORTRAN G subroutine libraries are used: ZETALIB,
              FORTGLIB, and CMSLIB.  If you need to use additional libraries or
              load additional object files you must use the FORTGG command to
              execute your program.
 
          2.  FORTGCG is an EXEC that uses the FORTG command to compile a
              FORTRAN program.  The object program produced is then executed.
              Refer to the description of the FORTG command for more
              information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     93
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  FORTGG (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTGG command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the IBM FORTRAN G compiler.  FORTRAN G is not supported; VS FORTRAN
         generally should be used for new programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTGG    | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the
                   FORTRAN G (or FORTRAN G compatible) object programs.  The
                   filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  ZETALIB, FORTGLIB, and CMSLIB.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the executed program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the FORTGC and FORTG commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     94
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         FORTHX
 
         Use the FORTHX command to compile a program with the IBM FORTRAN H
         Extended compiler.  The FORTXCG, FORTXC, and FORTXG commands are
         available for use with FORTRAN H Extended programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTHX    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         Options
 
         AD        is the same as AUTODBL.
 
         ALC       controls the alignment of data items in storage and is used
                   with the AUTODBL option.  Refer to the discussion of the
                   Automatic Precision Increase (API) facility in the
                   Programmer's Guide for more information.  NOALC is the
                   default.
 
         ANSF      causes the compiler to recognize only ANS built-in and
                   library functions.  NOANSF is the default.
 
         AUTODBL(value|NONE)
                   controls the Automatic Precision Increase (API) facility.
                   Refer to the Programmer's Guide for more information.  The
                   default is AUTODBL(NONE).
 
         BCD       permits the use of BCD characters rather than EBCDIC in the
                   source program.  This option exists to support non-EBCDIC
                   keypunches.  Further details may be found in the
                   Programmer's Guide.  EBCDIC is the default option.
 
         DECK      sends the object program to the spooled punch.  NODECK is
                   the default.
 
         DIsk      writes the compiler listing into a CMS disk file named
                   "filename LISTING."  This is the default.
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     95
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         FORTHX
 
         DUMP      produces a dump if the compiler terminates abnormally.
                   NODUMP is the default.
 
         EBCDIC    specifies that the source program contains EBCDIC
                   characters.  This is the default.
 
         FLAG(I|E|S)
                   indicates the lowest level of diagnostic messages produced.
                   You can specify I (informational), E (error), or S (severe).
                   FLAG(I) is the default.
 
         FMT       is the same as FORMAT.
 
         FORMAT    produces a structured listing if OPTIMIZE(2) is in effect.
                   The default is NOFORMAT.
 
         GOSTMT    specifies that internal sequence numbers (ISN's) are to be
                   generated for statements that call subroutines or contain
                   external function references.  This information is used in
                   the traceback produced if an error occurs in the called
                   subprogram.  NOGOSTMT is the default.
 
         LC        is a synonym for LINECOUNT.
 
         LINECOUN (n|60)
                   is the number of lines on each page of compiler listing
                   output (ranging from 1 to 99).  The default is LINECOUN(60).
 
         LIST      produces a listing of the object program.  The default is
                   NOLIST.
 
         MAP       produces a table of names.  NOMAP is the default.
 
         NAME(name)
                   assigns a name to the object program.  The default name of a
                   main program is MAIN.  The name of a subprogram is always
                   the name used on the SUBROUTINE or FUNCTION statement.
                   Names are limited to six characters.
 
         NOOBJect  See the OBJECT option.
 
         NOPrint   suppresses the compiler listing.  The default is DISK.
 
         NOSource  See the SOURCE option.
 
         NOTERMin  See the TERMINAL option.
 
         OBJect    produces an object program.  This is the default.
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     96
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         FORTHX
 
         OPTimize(0|1|2)
                   is the optimization level.  The default is OPTIMIZE(0),
                   which is the same as NOOPTIMIZE.
 
         Print     sends the compiler listing to the spooled printer.  DISK is
                   the default.
 
         SIZE(n)   controls the use of storage by the compiler, and may range
                   from 160K to 9999K.  The default is SIZE(MAX).  FORTHX
                   requires at least an 800K virtual machine to operate.
 
         SOURCE    produces a source listing.  This is the default.
 
         Terminal  displays compiler statistics and diagnostic messages at the
                   terminal.  This is the default.
 
         XL        allows the extended language features (STRUCTURE statement
                   and logical operations).  These features are documented in
                   the compiler logic manual.  NOXL is the default.
 
         XREF      produces a cross-reference listing.  NOXREF is the default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The FORTRAN language supported by the FORTRAN H Extended compiler
              is described in the IBM System/360 and System/370 FORTRAN IV
              Language manual, and more information about the compiler can be
              found in the IBM OS FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Programmer's Guide.
              The extended language (XL) features are documented in the IBM
              FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler for OS and VM/370 (CMS) Program
              Logic manual.
 
          2.  The FORTHX compiler will not operate in a virtual machine smaller
              than 800K, but compiled programs can run in smaller machines.
              Use the STORAGE command to change your virtual machine size.
 
          3.  Before loading your FORTRAN program, you must define any
              subroutine libraries required (including the FORTRAN libraries).
              If your program performs any input or output operations using
              units other that 5 and 6 you must also define the files or
              devices to be used before execution.  To associate a FORTRAN unit
              number with a device, use a DD name in the form FTnnF001 (nn is
              the unit number), or just the number on a FILEDEF command.
              (Units 5 and 6 are assigned to the terminal by default.)  For
              example:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB FORTLIB FORTEEH
                   FILEDEF 10 DISK DATA FILE A
                   LOAD filename ( START
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     97
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  FORTVC (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTVC command to compile a program with the IBM VS FORTRAN
         compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTVC    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are FORTVS compiler options.
 
         Usage Note
 
         FORTVC is an EXEC that uses the FORTVS command to compile a FORTRAN
         program.  The object program produced can be executed with the FORTVG
         command.  Refer to the description of the FORTVS command for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     98
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 FORTVCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTVCG command to compile and execute a program using the IBM
         VS FORTRAN compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTVCG   | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are FORTVS compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The default VS FORTRAN subroutine libraries are used: VALTLIB,
              VFORTLIB, and CMSLIB.  If you need to use additional libraries or
              load additional object files you must use the FORTVG command to
              execute your program.
 
          2.  FORTVCG is an EXEC that uses the FORTVS command to compile a
              FORTRAN program.  The object program produced is then executed.
              Refer to the description of the FORTVS command for more
              information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     99
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  FORTVG (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTVG command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the IBM VS FORTRAN compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTVG    | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the VS
                   FORTRAN (or VS FORTRAN compatible) object programs.  The
                   filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  VALTLIB, VFORTLIB, and CMSLIB.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the executed program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the FORTVC and FORTVS commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     100
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         FORTVS
 
         Use the FORTVS command to compile a program with the IBM VS FORTRAN
         compiler.  The FORTVCG, FORTVC, and FORTVG commands are available for
         VS FORTRAN programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTVS    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         Options
 
         CHARLEN(n|500)
                   is the maximum length for CHARACTER variables.  The default
                   is 500.
 
         CI(list)  are the id numbers of the INCLUDEs to be processed.
 
         CL        is a synonym for CHARLEN.
 
         DC(list)  are the COMMON blocks to be allocated at execution time.
                   library functions.
 
         Deck      sends the object program to be sent to the spooled punch.
                   NODeck is the default.
 
         DIsk      writes the compiler listing into a CMS disk file named
                   "filename LISTING."  This is the default.  DISK cannot be
                   specified on a  PROCESS statement.
 
         FIPS(F|S)  controls standard language flagging.  You can specify F
                   (full) or S (subset).  NOFIPS is the default.  FIPS is
                   ignored when LANGLVL(66) is specified.
 
         FIXED     specifies fixed-format source.  This is the default.  See
                   also FREE.
 
         FLAG(I|W|E|S)
                   indicates the lowest level of diagnostic messages produced.
                   You can specify I (informational), W (warning), E (error),
                   or S (severe).  FLAG(I) is the default.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     101
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         FORTVS
 
         FREE      specifies free-format source.  FIXED is the default.
 
         GOSTMT    specifies that internal sequence numbers (ISN's) are to be
                   generated for statements that call subroutines or contain
                   external function references.  This information is used in
                   the traceback produced if an error occurs in the called
                   subprogram.  NOGOSTMT is the default.
 
         GS        is a synonym for GOSTMT.
 
         LANGLVL(66|77)
                   specifies the FORTRAN dialect used by the compiler.  77 (the
                   default) is ANS X3.9-1978, ISO 1539-1980 (known as FORTRAN
                   77); 66 is the older ANS X3.9-1966, ISO R1539-1972 standard.
                   Both dialects include IBM extensions.
 
         LC        is a synonym for LINECOUNT.
 
         LINECOUNT(n|60)
                   is the number of lines on each page of compiler listing
                   output (ranging from 1 to 32765).  The default is
                   LINECOUNT(60).
 
         List      produces a listing of the object program.  The default is
                   NOLIST.
 
         MAP       produces a table of names.  NOMAP is the default.
 
         NAME(name)
                   for old FORTRAN programs only, assigns a name to the object
                   program.  The default name of a main program is MAIN.  The
                   name of a subprogram is always the name used on the
                   SUBROUTINE or FUNCTION statement.
 
         NOOBJect  See the OBJECT option.
 
         NOPrint   suppresses the compiler listing.  The default is DISK.
 
         NOSDump   suppresses generation of symbolic dump information.
 
         NOSource  See the SOURCE option.
 
         NOSRCFLG  See the SRCFLG option.
 
         NOTERMinal
                   See the TERMINAL option.
 
         NOTRMFLG  See the TRMFLG option.
 
         OBJect    produces an object program.  This is the default.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     102
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         FORTVS
 
         OPTimize(0|1|2|3)
                   specifies the optimization level.  The default is
                   OPTIMIZE(0), which is the same as NOOPTIMIZE.
 
         Print     sends the compiler listing to the spooled printer.  DISK is
                   the default.  PRINT cannot be specified on a  PROCESS
                   statement.
 
         SF        is a synonym for SRCFLG.
 
         Source    produces a source listing.  This is the default.
 
         SRCFLG    includes error messages in the source listing.  This is the
                   default.
 
         SYM       produces SYM information for the object program.  NOSYM is
                   the default.
 
         TERMinal  displays compiler diagnostic messages at the terminal.  This
                   is the default.
 
         TEST      is used with FORTRAN Interactive Debug.  NOTEST is the
                   default.
 
         TRMFLG    displays statements in error and the associated messages at
                   the terminal.  This is the default.
 
         Xref      produces a cross-reference listing.  NOXREF is the default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The FORTRAN language supported by the VS FORTRAN compiler is
              described in the VS FORTRAN Application Programming: Language
              Reference.  Other VS FORTRAN manuals are listed in the
              Bibliography.
 
          2.  Before loading your FORTRAN program, you must define any
              subroutine libraries required (including the FORTRAN libraries).
              If your program performs any input or output operations using
              units other that 5 and 6 you must also define the files or
              devices to be used before execution.  To associate a FORTRAN unit
              number with a device, use a DD name in the form FTnnF001 (nn is
              the unit number), or just the number on a FILEDEF command.
              (Units 5 and 6 are assigned to the terminal by default.)  For
              example:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB VALTLIB VFORTLIB CMSLIB
                   FILEDEF 10 DISK DATA FILE A
                   LOAD filename ( START
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     103
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  FORTXC (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTXC command to compile a program with the IBM FORTRAN H
         Extended compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTXC    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are FORTHX compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  FORTXC is an EXEC that uses the FORTHX command to compile a
              FORTRAN program.  The object program produced can be executed
              with the FORTXG command.  Refer to the description of the FORTHX
              command for more information.
 
          2.  FORTXC will not operate in a virtual machine smaller than 800K,
              but compiled programs can run in smaller machines.  You can use
              the STORAGE command to redefine your storage size if necessary.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     104
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 FORTXCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTXCG command to compile and execute a program using the IBM
         FORTRAN H Extended compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTXCG   | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are FORTHX compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The default FORTRAN HX subroutine libraries are used: FORTEEH,
              FORTLIB, and CMSLIB.  If you need to use additional libraries or
              load additional object files you must use the FORTXG command to
              execute your program.
 
          2.  FORTXCG will not operate in a virtual machine smaller than 800K.
              You can use the STORAGE command to redefine your storage size if
              necessary.
 
          3.  FORTXCG is an EXEC that uses the FORTHX command to compile a
              FORTRAN program.  The object program produced is then executed.
              Refer to the description of the FORTHX command for more
              information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     105
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  FORTXG (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTXG command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the IBM FORTRAN H Extended compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTXG    | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the
                   FORTRAN HX (or FORTRAN HX compatible) object programs.  The
                   filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  FORTEEH, FORTLIB, and CMSLIB.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the executed program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the FORTXC and FORTHX commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     106
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FSEND
 
         Use the FSEND command to send all or part of a CMS disk file to a
         personal computer or other system that is acting as your CMS terminal.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |       +  + +      +   ++                               |
         | FSEND     | fn ft |fm| |start |end|| [( [options...] [)]]          |
         |           |       |* | |1     |*  ||                               |
         |           |       +  + +      +   ++                               |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Cr]   [Lf]   [Nl]   [Eofstring string]                |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Prompt x]  [Repeat x]                                 |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        is the filename of the file to be sent.
 
         ft        is the filetype of the file to be sent.
 
         fm        is the filemode of the file to be sent.  The default is "*,"
                   which searches all accessed disks.
 
         start     is the line number of the first line to be sent.  If "start"
                   is greater than the number of lines in the file an immediate
                   end-of-file occurs.  The default value is "1."
 
         end       is the line number of the last line to be sent.  The default
                   value is "*," the last line in the file.
 
         Options
 
         Cr        adds a carriage return character to the end of each line
                   sent to the terminal.
 
         Eofstring string
                   specifies a string to be sent after the last line in the
                   file.  This string is sent as a separate line, and is sent
                   even if no lines are sent from the file.  The string can
                   contain up to eight characters.
 
         Lf        adds a line feed character to the end of each line sent to
                   the terminal.
 
         Nl        causes a carriage return and a line feed character to be
                   added to the end of each line sent to the terminal.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     107
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FSEND
 
         Prompt x  specifies the character used by the personal computer to
                   signal that the next line should be sent from the file.
                   FSEND pauses and waits for this character before sending
                   each line.  The default character is a carriage return.  The
                   PROMPT may be specified as a single character, two hex
                   digits, or one of the special names CR, DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4,
                   ESC, LF, NAK, NUL, or STX.  An empty line (carriage return
                   with no other data) is always recognized as a PROMPT.  Note
                   that all lines sent from an ASCII terminal must be ended
                   with a carriage return.
 
         Repeat x  specifies the character used by the personal computer to
                   signal that the most recent line should be sent again.  This
                   character is used in place of the PROMPT to indicate that a
                   line must be repeated.  The default character is a negative
                   acknowledgement (NAK).  REPEAT may be specified as a single
                   character, two hex digits, or one of the special names CR,
                   DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4, ESC, LF, NAK, NUL, or STX.  Note that
                   all lines sent from an ASCII terminal must be ended with a
                   carriage return.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Consult the section on ASCII Communication elsewhere in this
              manual for more information.
 
          2.  If the specified file is not found, it is treated as an immediate
              end-of-file.  No error message is produced.
 
          3.  All lines sent from an ASCII terminal must be ended with a
              carriage return character.
 
       |  4.  The KERMIT command also performs this function, and in addition
       |      provides error checking and other features.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSFSE001E No input data file was specified.  RC=24
         DMSFSE003E "string" is not an option.  RC=24
         DMSFSE029E No argument specified for the "option" option.  RC=24
         DMSFSE054E Incomplete fileid beginning with "string".  RC=24
         DMSFSE066E "PROMPT" and "REPEAT" are set to the same character.  RC=24
         DMSFSE070E "string" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
         DMSFSE104S Error n occurred while reading the file "file".  RC=100
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     108
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  GATHER (EXEC)
 
         Use the GATHER command to create a printer spool file from one or more
         files in your reader, retaining the original carriage control
         information.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | GATHER    | [spoolid...]                                           |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is one or more spool file numbers.  The specified reader
                   files will be combined into a single print file.  If no
                   spoolid's are specified, all of your PRT (print) and CON
                   (console) reader files (except those in hold) will be
                   gathered.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The file created by the GATHER command is sent to the current
              printer destination set with the SETPRT command.  The name of the
              print file will be the name of the first reader file in the
              group.
 
          2.  GATHER processes only PRT (print) and CON (console) files.  It
              can't handle PUN, DMP, or RDR files.
 
          3.  GATHER is an EXEC and uses the REPRINT command to process the
              reader files.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSGAT920E No files in reader.  RC=28
         DMSGAT920E File [nnnn] does not exist or is in hold.  RC=28
         DMSKXR070E "string" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     109
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       GETFMODE
 
       | Use the GETFMODE command to put the next available filemode letter
       | into a REXX or EXEC 2 variable.  The format of the command is:
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | GETFMODE  | variable                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
       | variable  is the name of a REXX or EXEC 2 variable.  (For EXEC 2, do
                   not include the initial ampersand in the variable name.  If
                   the name begins with an ampersand, the value of the variable
                   is used as the variable name.)
 
         Usage Notes
 
         GETFMODE puts the first available filemode letter into the specified
         variable.  Searching begins with mode A and continues through Z.  If
         all filemode letters are in use the variable is not set and a non-zero
         return code is set.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         If an error occurs, the return code is set to the message number:
 
       | UKCGFM100E GETFMODE can only operate when called from REXX or EXEC 2.
         UKCGFM102E Error accessing variable "name".
         UKCGFM103E No variable name was specified.
         UKCGFM105E Unable to set result variable.
         UKCGFM106E No filemodes are available.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     110
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       GETVADDR
 
       | Use the GETVADDR command to put the next available virtual device
       | address into a REXX or EXEC 2 variable.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | GETVADDR  | variable                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
       | variable  is the name of a REXX or EXEC 2 variable.  (For EXEC 2, do
                   not include the initial ampersand in the variable name.  If
                   the name begins with an ampersand, the value of the variable
                   is used as the variable name.)
 
         Usage Notes
 
         GETVADDR puts the first available virtual device address into the
       | specified variable.  Searching begins with address 195 and continues
       | through FFF.  If all addresses in the range are in use the variable is
         not set and a non-zero return code is set.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         If an error occurs, the return code is set to the message number:
 
       | UKCGVA100E GETVADDR can only operate when called from REXX or EXEC 2.
         UKCGVA102E Error accessing variable "name".
         UKCGVA103E No variable name was specified.
         UKCGVA105E Unable to set result variable.
         UKCGVA106E No device addresses are available.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     111
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                           GRIPE (EXEC)
 
         Use the GRIPE command to prepare a note for transmission to the UKCC
         User Services Group.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | GRIPE     |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Note
 
         GRIPE uses the NOTE command to create and transmit your message.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     112
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           HELP
 
         The HELP command displays detailed documentation for commands,
         explanations of CMS and CP messages, and other information.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | Help      | [topic]                                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         topic     is the name of the topic you are interested in.  This can be
                   a command name, a message identifier, or a general topic.
                   If you don't specify a topic, HELP displays a menu of
                   topics.
 
         Usage Notes
 
       |  1.  By default, the HELP command uses the Yale HELP (YHELP) system.
       |      If you want to use the standard IBM HELP command, then enter
       |      "YHELP OFF" to disable YHELP.  The HELP information supplied with
       |      CMS cannot be displayed with the IBM HELP command, but you can
       |      use it to display your own HELP files.
 
       |  2.  HELP information is available for all commands and error
       |      messages.  To display information about a message, enter only the
       |      first three letters of the prefix (usually DMS or DMK), the
       |      three-digit number, and the final letter (E, W, S, etc.).  Use
       |      the EXPLAIN command for information about the most recent error
       |      message.
 
       |      If you want information about a command that exists in several
       |      environments (like QUERY, which can be CMS, CP, or XEDIT), you
       |      may need to specify the environment name on the HELP command
       |      ("HELP CP QUERY," for example).  XEDIT subcommands require that
       |      XEDIT be specified ("HELP XEDIT SET PREFIX") unless the HELP
       |      command is entered from XEDIT.
 
       |  3.  The RH (Resume HELP) command can be used to return to where you
       |      left off in the HELP system during a terminal session.
 
       |  4.  HELP information is preformatted and kept in files with a
       |      filetype beginning "HELP."  If you want to create your own HELP
       |      information files, consult the information available online from
       |      the HELP command.
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     113
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                             HI (CMS Immediate Command)
 
         Use the HI (Halt Interpretation) command to stop all currently
         executing REXX and EXEC 2 programs and macros.  HI halts execution
         without destroying the environment as HX (Halt Execution) does.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | HI        |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  HI is useful for stopping an XEDIT macro without terminating
              XEDIT.
 
          2.  In a REXX program you can use a SIGNAL ON HALT statement to trap
              the HI interruption.
 
          3.  CMS immediate commands are only accepted from the terminal.  They
              may not be issued from an EXEC.  In some cases it may be
              necessary to cause an attention at the terminal before issuing an
              immediate command.
 
          4.  The SET IMMEDIATE command can be used to disable the CMS
              immediate commands.  QUERY IMMEDIATE to determine the current
              setting.  The initial setting is SET IMMEDIATE ON.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         One of these messages is usually produced as a result of HI:
 
         DMSEXE085E ERROR IN [fileid], LINE [n] - PROGRAM INTERRUPTED.
         DMSREX452E Error 4 running [fileid], line [n]: Program interrupted
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     114
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  HOSTCM (EXEC)
 
         Use the HOSTCM command to communicate with a personal computer system
         that is acting as your CMS terminal.  The personal computer must be
         running the Waterloo Computing Systems microSoftware.  HOSTCM and the
         microSoftware support two-way file transmission and allow CMS disk
         files to be accessed by programs running on the personal computer
         system.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | HOSTCM    |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The Waterloo Computing Systems microSoftware is currently
              available for the IBM Personal Computer, the Commodore SuperPET,
              and the Northern Digital microWAT.  An editor and a number of
              language processors (APL, BASIC, COBOL, FORTRAN, and Pascal) are
              available for these systems.  HOSTCM allows programs running on
              these systems to read and write CMS disk files, and to pass
              commands to CMS.
 
          2.  Terminate HOSTCM by entering "QUIT" at your terminal.
 
          3.  More information is available in the section on asynchronous
              ASCII communications.  Detailed specifications for HOSTCM are
              available online from the MANUAL command.
 
       |  4.  The KERMIT command also performs most of the functions of HOSTCM.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     115
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                     HT (CMS Immediate Command)
 
         Use the HT (Halt Typing) command to suppress terminal output from a
         CMS command.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | HT        |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Execution of the command continues and you can use the RT (Resume
              Typing) command to resume normal terminal output.  The HT command
              is only in effect for the duration of the current command.  The
              ready message is displayed when the command completes.
 
          2.  CMS immediate commands are only accepted from the terminal.  They
              can not be issued from an EXEC.  In some cases it may be
              necessary to cause an attention at the terminal before issuing an
              immediate command.
 
          3.  The SET CMSTYPE HT command can be used from within an EXEC to
              halt terminal output.  Terminal output will be suppressed until
              the end of the EXEC, or until enabled with an RT or SET CMSTYPE
              RT command.
 
          4.  Severe error messages (severity code S or T) are not suppressed
              by HT.
 
          5.  The SET IMMEDIATE command can be used to disable the CMS
              immediate commands.  QUERY IMMEDIATE to determine the current
              setting.  The initial setting is SET IMMEDIATE ON.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     116
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                     HX (CMS Immediate Command)
 
         Use the HX (Halt Execution) command to stop the execution of a CMS
         command.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | HX        |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Execution of the command terminates immediately.  Output to the
              terminal will continue until the output buffers have been
              emptied.  HX will also close all open files and clear existing
              FILEDEF definitions (including those made with the PERM option).
              Entering HX from CMS Subset terminates the command from which
              Subset was entered (XEDIT, for example) and returns to normal CMS
              mode.
 
       |      The HI (Halt Interpretation) command stops all currently
       |      executing REXX and EXEC 2 programs and macros without destroying
       |      the environment.  For example, HI will stop an XEDIT macro
       |      without terminating XEDIT.
 
          2.  CMS immediate commands are only accepted from the terminal.  They
              may not be issued from an EXEC.  In some cases it may be
              necessary to cause an attention at the terminal before issuing an
              immediate command.
 
          3.  The SET IMMEDIATE command can be used to disable the CMS
              immediate commands.  QUERY IMMEDIATE to determine the current
              setting.  The initial setting is SET IMMEDIATE ON.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Some commands and programs may produce a message when halted with HX.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     117
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          INPUT
 
         Use the INPUT command to copy a reader spool file to a CMS disk file.
         The ACCEPT command is a more general way of performing this function.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                          +                           |
         | INPUT     | |spoolid [* [fm [fn [ft]]]]|  [( options... [)]]       |
         |           | |name [type [fm [fn [ft]]]]|                           |
         |           | | *      *   A1  =   =     |                           |
         |           | +                          +                           |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +       +     +     +    +      +  +       +           |
         |           | |Disk   |     |All  |    |Nohold|  |NOCc   |           |
         |           | |APpend |     |Data |    |Hold  |  |CCPrint|           |
         |           | |Replace|     |Jcl  |    +      +  |CCPrt  |           |
         |           | |DStack |     |Log  |              |Cc     |           |
         |           | |Xedit  |     |NOJcl|              +       +           |
         |           | |SELect |     |NOLog|                                  |
         |           | +       +     +     +                                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +          +  +       +                                |
         |           | |Truncate n|  |RECfm V|  [NOMsg]   [Stack]             |
         |           | |SPLit n   |  |      F|                                |
         |           | +          +  +       +                                |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the reader spool file to be
                   processed.  The default is "*", the first file in your
                   reader.
 
         name [type]
                   are used to specify an input file by spool file name and
                   type rather than number.  Spool files do not necessarily
                   have names and types.  The default type is "*," the first
                   file that matches the specified name.
 
         fm        is the filemode used for the output file.  If omitted, the
                   default is "A1."
 
         fn        is the filename used for the output file (if any).  If
                   omitted, the default is "=," which will use the spool file
                   name.
 
         ft        is the filetype used for the output file (if any).  If
                   omitted, the default is "=," which will use the spool file
                   type.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     118
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          INPUT
 
         Options
 
         All       copies the entire input file without OS batch output
                   editing.  This is the default.
 
         APpend    appends the output data to an existing CMS disk file.  If
                   the file does not exist, it is created.
 
         Cc        retains the carriage control information from the input
                   file.  The carriage control information placed into the
                   output will be American National Standard (ANS) carriage
       |           control characters added at the beginning of each line
       |           (refer to the PRINT command for a description of these
                   characters).  Lines containing only carriage control
                   information may be generated.  Carriage control will be
                   generated for input files that do not contain it already.  A
                   file created with this option can be printed with the CC
                   option of the CMS commands PRINT and TPRINT.
 
         CCPrint   retains the carriage control information from the input file
                   if the input file is a print (PRT) file.  Other files are
                   read as is, and no carriage control is generated.
 
         CCPrt     is a synonym for CCPRINT.
 
         Data      can be specified when the input file is printed output from
                   an OS batch job.  DATA excludes the JCL, system messages,
                   accounting box, and HASP log to be excluded from the output.
                   DATA is the same as NOJCL and NOLOG.
 
         DIsk      writes the output into a CMS disk file.  This is the
                   default.
 
         DStack    stacks the input spool file.  The first line in the stack
                   will be a line in the format produced by the STACK option,
                   followed by the lines of data.  The stack has a limited
                   capacity, and execution stops if the entire file cannot be
                   stacked.  Part of the file may be stacked, and the header
                   line may be missing.  DSTACK implies ALL and STACK.
 
         Hold      retains the file in the reader when processing is complete.
 
         Jcl       includes JCL, system messages, and the accounting box in the
                   output.  This option is for use with output from an OS batch
                   job.
 
         Log       includes the HASP system log in the output.  This option is
                   for use with output from an OS batch job.
 
         NOCc      ignores carriage control in the input file.  This is the
                   default.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     119
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          INPUT
 
         Nohold    purges the file from the reader when processing successfully
                   completes.  This option is ignored if an error occurs during
                   processing.  This is the default.
 
         NOJcl     excludes JCL, system messages, and the accounting box from
                   the output.  This option is for use with output from an OS
                   batch job.
 
         NOLog     excludes the HASP system log from the output.  This option
                   is for use with output from an OS batch job.
 
         NOMsg     suppresses the message that is normally issued to describe
                   the selected input reader spool file.
 
         RECfm x   specifies the record format of the CMS disk file created.
                   The default is RECFM V, which produces a file with variable-
                   length records.  You can specify RECFM F to create a file
                   with fixed-length records.  The RECFM option is ignored when
                   the output is appended to an existing file.
 
         Replace   writes the output into a CMS disk file, replacing an
                   existing file.
 
         SELect    suppresses data output.  This is used to determine if the
                   specified reader file exists and may be used with the STACK
                   option in an EXEC to identify the next file to be processed.
                   The selected file becomes the first file in the reader.
 
         SPlit n   breaks output lines into one or more additional lines at the
                   specified column.  The minimum column is two when NOCC is in
                   effect, three when CC is in effect.
 
         Stack     stacks a line in the following format:
 
                    *  fn  ft  fm  NOCC  spool-number  spool-type  origin
                                   CC
 
                   If message 922I (empty output file) is issued, an empty line
                   is stacked.  If errors are found in the command parameters
                   or options, or if the input file is not found, or if no
                   output disk is available, the line is not stacked.
 
         Truncate n
                   truncates the output lines to the specified length.  The
                   minimum length is one when NOCC is in effect, two when CC is
                   in effect.
 
         Xedit     passes output lines to XEDIT.  No disk storage is used.
                   This option may only be specified from XEDIT.  The XEDIT
                   option implies ALL, CCPRINT, and NOMSG.  Refer to the XEDIT
                   macro RINPUT for more information.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     120
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          INPUT
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  If you specify the HOLD option to retain a reader spool file, be
              certain to purge the file when it is no longer needed.  Reader
              files are purged with the "BURN nnnn" command ("nnnn" is the
              spool file number).  You are charged for each spool file based on
              its size and age.  VM/SP automatically purges spool files when
              they are one week old.
 
          2.  If the spool file is output from an OS batch job, its spool file
              name will be the job name, and the spool file type will be the
              runid.
 
          3.  Unless otherwise specified, the disk file created by the INPUT
              command is given a filename and filetype to match the spool file
              name and type of the input file.  If the spool name and type are
              not valid as a CMS fileid, the filename will be the kind of file
              processed ("PRT," "PUN," or "CON"), and the filetype will be
              "FILE."  Some errors cause the name "INPUT CMSUT1" to be used for
              the output file.
 
          4.  If the input file is a print or console spool file, the CMS disk
              file can contain lines up to 151 bytes long.  Punch spool files
              can contain lines up to 80 bytes long.
 
          5.  Unless NOMSG is specified INPUT displays a message in the
              following format when a file is selected for processing:
 
                FILE nnnn type x mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss nnn RECORDS; name1 name2
 
                nnnn        is the spool file number,
                type x      is the spool type and class, such as "PRT A",
                mm/dd/yy    is the creation date,
                hh:mm:ss    is the creation time,
                nnn RECORDS is the number of input lines,
                name1       is the spool file name, and
                name2       is the spool file type.
 
              If the input file is printed output from an OS batch job, the
              accounting line from the end of the job will also be displayed.
 
          6.  Held spool files cannot be processed by INPUT.  Attempting to
              INPUT a held spool file will result in message 920E (reader file
              not found) being issued.
 
          7.  If message 922I (no output lines) is received, try the command
              again without editing options (JCL, LOG, NOJCL, and NOLOG).
 
          8.  A successfully selected file is ordered to the front of the
              reader files if it is retained (HOLD or SELECT specified).
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     121
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          INPUT
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSINP003E Invalid option "option".  RC=24
         DMSINP024E File "fn ft fm" already exists -- erase or specify
                    "REPLACE".  RC=28
         DMSINP029E Invalid parameter "xxx" in the RECFM option.  RC=24
         DMSINP066E Only one output destination may be specified.  RC=24
         DMSINP069E Disk "mode" not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSINP070E Invalid parameter "parameter".  RC=24
         DMSINP105S Error "nn" writing file "fn ft fm" to [disk|xedit].
                    RC=100
         DMSINP702I Reader file name not a valid disk fileid.  following
                    Id assumed:
         DMSINP702I Input cmsut1 fm
         DMSINP920E Reader file "id1 id2" not found.  RC=28
         DMSINP922I No output lines.  Reader file retained.
         DMSINP935E Bad reader spool block.  RC=100
         DMSINP942E XEDIT option can only be specified under XEDIT.  RC=88
         DMSINP946E I/O error (description) from device at address xxx.
                    RC=100
         DMSINP949E Files of type [type] cannot be processed by input.  RC=25
         DMSINP985E Insufficient storage to stack more data.  RC=25
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     122
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       IPL (CP)
 
         Use the IPL command to simulate an Initial Program Load function.
         This command is ordinarily issued automatically when you log on, and
         need not be used again except in unusual circumstances.  This is a
         summary of the most frequently needed and function of the IPL command,
         not a complete description.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | Ipl       | system  [PARM [parameters...]]                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         system    is the name of the system to be loaded.  You will normally
                   specify "CMS."
 
         PARM parameters
                   specifies up to 64 bytes of parameters to be passed to the
                   loaded system.  All of the characters on the command line
                   after the keyword "PARM" (excluding the first blank) are
                   treated as data.  The only parm that you might want to use
                   with CMS is "AUTOCR," which suppresses the initial CMS
                   prompt.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  IPL simulates the LOAD button or function found on the console of
              real Central Processing Units.
 
          2.  If the IPL is successful the loaded system will respond.  The
              first response from CMS is a line that describes the current
              version and prompts you to press ENTER or RETURN.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     123
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                 KERMIT
 
         Use the KERMIT (KL10 Error-free Reciprocal Micro Interface Transfer)
         command to communicate with a personal computer or other system that
         is acting as your CMS terminal.  The other system must be running its
         version of KERMIT.  KERMIT supports two-way file transmission.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | KERMIT    |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         KERMIT Subcommands
 
         CMS ...   issues the specified CMS command.
 
         CP ...    issues the specified CP command.
 
         EXIT      ends KERMIT and returns control to CMS.
 
         HELP      displays a list of KERMIT commands.
 
         QUIT      is a synonym for EXIT.
 
         RECEIVE   receives a file or group of files from the remote system.
                   If an incoming fileid is not legal an attempt is made to
                   transform it to a similar legal name.  If the file already
                   exists, KERMIT appends the new file to the existing file if
                   their record formats are the same.
 
         SEND fileid
                   sends a file or group of files to the remote system.  The
                   names of the files are passed to the other system so that it
                   can store them with the same names.  Wildcard characters (*)
                   are allowed in the fileid.
 
         SET       sets various parameters, such as maximum packet length,
                   logical record length, record format, etc.
 
         SHOW      displays the current setting of the SET command parameters.
 
         STATUS    displays information about the previous file transfer.
 
         Usage Note
 
         More information is available in the section on asynchronous ASCII
         communications.  Detailed specifications for KERMIT are available
         online from the MANUAL command.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     124
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                           KYREG (EXEC)
 
         Use the KYREG command to examine this month's Kentucky Register, the
         Computing Center's monthly newsletter.  The online edition is the
         complete Register, with the exception of the statistics and
         illustrations.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +      +                                               |
         | KYREG     | |Browse|                                               |
         |           | |Xedit |                                               |
         |           | |Type  |                                               |
         |           | +      +                                               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Browse|    displays the Register with the BROWSE command (for
                   3270-type display terminals only).  BROWSE is the default
                   for 3270 displays.
 
         Type      types the Register on your terminal.
 
         Xedit     displays the Register with XEDIT.  This is the default if
                   you are not using a 3270 display.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSREG002E Sorry, the newsletter is not available at this time.  RC=28
         DMSREG070E Missing or invalid parameter.  RC=24
 
         Messages and return codes can also be produced by the CMS commands
         BROWSE, TYPE, and XEDIT.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     125
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  LABELS (EXEC)
 
         Use the LABELS command to print labels at your terminal, or produce a
         spool file for printing.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |               +     +                                  |
         | LABELS    | filename  [(  |Print|  [Copies n]  [Route dest] [)]]   |
         |           |               |Prt  |  [Forms x]                       |
         |           |               +     +                                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | filename  [(  Terminal  [)]]                           |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the name of a SCRIPT file containing the information for
                   the labels.  The filetype of this file must be "SCRIPT."
 
         Options
 
         Copies n  is a SETPRT option that specifies the number of copies to be
                   printed.  Multiple copy requests are ignored for output
                   routed HOT (labels cannot be printed on the HOT printer).
                   The maximum value is 255, the default value is 1.  This
                   option is ignored in TERMINAL mode (repeat the LABELS
                   command for additional copies).
 
         Forms x   is a SETPRT option that specifies the forms to be used for
                   printing.  For output routed CENTRAL the default forms are
                   LT (3 1/2 by 15/16 inch labels with the mixed case print
                   train).  FORMS 5106 may be specified for labels with
                   uppercase-only printing.  Output not routed CENTRAL should
                   not use FORMS LT or 5106.  All output routed HOT is forced
                   to standard forms, and remote sites should be consulted in
                   advance before requesting any special forms.  An additional
                   charge to pay for the labels is added to the printing cost
                   for output using LT or 5106 forms.
 
         Print     sends the output to be printed.  The default routing is
                   CENTRAL, which will cause the labels to be printed in the
                   UKCC Computer Room.  If you are using the PRINT mode you may
                   also specify options for the SETPRT command.  PRINT is the
                   default.
 
         Prt       is a synonym for PRINT.
 
         Terminal  types the labels on the terminal.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     126
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  LABELS (EXEC)
 
         Route dest
                   is a SETPRT option that specifies the destination of the
                   printed output when using PRINT mode.  Output may be routed
                   to the HOT printer at the UKCC, to a HASP remote site
                   (RMTnn), to an RSCS site (Pnnnn), or CENTRAL (the default).
                   Only standard forms are available on the HOT printer.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The LABELS command is not compatible with the Waterloo SYSLABEL
              macro package.  Refer to the Waterloo SCRIPT User's Guide for a
              description of SYSLABEL.
 
          2.  The labels used at the UKCC, designated form LT or 5106, are
              3 1/2 by 15/16 inches.  This allows five lines of 34 characters
              on each label, with a single line space between the labels (this
              assumes printing 6 lines/inch and 10 characters/inch).  When
              printing labels at a terminal you should use labels of the same
              vertical size.
 
          3.  A copy for proofreading purposes may be printed by specifying the
              "FORMS STD." and "SPACE S" options.  This will cause the label
              data to be printed on standard forms.  If you specify ROUTE HOT,
              standard forms will always be used.  When SPACE S is used the
              label data will be printed without intervening blank lines.
              SPACE W will cause the data for each label to print on a separate
              page.
 
          4.  LABELS will use the SCRIPT command to process the file containing
              the label information.  This file should contain the data for the
              labels (up to five lines each) separated by a blank line.  A
              blank line will cause the text on the following line to print at
              the top of a new label.  Use the SCRIPT control word .SP to
              include blank lines within the text on a label.  You can cause
              all blank input lines to print as blank output lines by placing
              the following line at the beginning of your file:
 
                     .dm nl /.sp/
 
              If you use this method, you must place a .PA control word before
              the data for each label, or provide exactly five lines of data
              followed by a single blank line for each label.  Your file may
              contain SCRIPT control words, but the page length and heading and
              footing definitions should not be altered.  Control words named
              .NM and .PH are defined and are currently treated as comments.
              These control words may be used at a later date as part of a
              mailing and telephone list system.
 
          5.  When in PRINT mode, LABELS will use the SETPRT command to set the
              FORMS, ROUTING, and other options.  The destination userid (TO
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     127
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  LABELS (EXEC)
 
              option) is not changed.  A print file containing labels may be
              sent to your reader; such a file may be printed with the OUTPUT
              command using the LABELS option.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSLAB001E You must specify a filename.  RC=24
         DMSLAB002E File "fn SCRIPT" could not be found.  RC=28
         DMSLAB070E Extraneous parameters follow the filename.  RC=24
 
         Messages and return codes may also be produced by the SCRIPT and
         SETPRT commands.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     128
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                  LEDIT
 
         Use the LEDIT command to edit files which are too large for
         conventional editors like XEDIT.  It is also much faster than XEDIT
         when you need to only make a few changes to a large file.  LEDIT has
         some limitations, so check the Usage Notes before you use it.  Changes
         made with LEDIT are written to the file as soon as you press the ENTER
         key.  LEDIT can be used only on 3270 display terminals.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | LEDIT     | filename [filetype [filemode]]                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the file to be edited.
 
         filetype  is the filetype of the file to be edited.  "*" is the
                   default.
 
         filemode  is the filemode of the file to be edited.  "*" is the
                   default.
 
         LEDIT Subcommands
 
         n         moves down n lines toward the end of the file.
 
         +n        moves down n lines toward the end of the file.
 
         -n        moves up n lines toward the top of the file.
 
         :n        makes line n the current line.
 
         /string   locates the next occurrence of the specified string.
 
         =         re-executes the last subcommand.
 
         ADD [TOP] [n]
                   adds "n" lines after the current (highlighted) line or at
                   the top of the file.  The ADD subcommand is relatively
                   expensive.  If you are adding several lines to a large file,
                   you should use the MARK subcommand.
 
         BAckward  scrolls back one screen toward the top of the file.
 
         Bottom    makes the last line in the file the current line.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     129
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                  LEDIT
 
         CASE [U|M]
                   controls the way mixed-case letters are handled.  CASE M
                   (the default) allows mixed-case letters.  String searches
                   must match the case in this mode.  When you are in CASE U,
                   all data entered will be translated to upper case before any
                   changes are made to the file and before any subcommands are
                   interpreted.
 
         Change/string1/string2/
                   changes "string1" to "string2" on the current line.  The
                   strings must be the same length.
 
         CMS ...   executes the specified CMS command.  The command must be
                   valid in CMS subset.  If no command is specified, CMS subset
                   mode is entered.
 
         CURline n sets the current line position on the screen.  The default
                   is a line near the middle of the display.
 
         DELete [n|*]
                   deletes one or more lines, beginning at the current line.
                   The DELETE subcommand is relatively expensive.  If you are
                   deleting several lines from a large file, you should use the
                   MARK subcommand.
 
         Down [n]  moves down n lines toward the end of the file.
 
         FOrward   scrolls forward one screen toward the end of the file.
 
         Help      displays this information with the CMS HELP command.
 
         HEX       displays the current line in hexadecimal and EBCDIC.  Non-
                   displayable characters appear as dots.
 
         INFo      types a brief description of the file, including the number
                   of data blocks, and the date and time it was last updated.
 
         LAST      displays the last full screen of data in the file.  The
                   current line will be adjusted based on the CURLINE setting
                   and the number of lines on the screen.
 
         LEFT n    moves the display n characters to the left.  This is only
                   useful when the file has lines longer than will fit on one
                   display line.
 
         LRECL n   increases the logical record (line) length of a file with
                   variable-length records.
 
         MARK [n|ADD|DEL|CAN]
                   is used when several lines are to be added or deleted.
                   Enter MARK when a line to be marked is the current line, or
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     130
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                  LEDIT
 
                   press PF11 when the cursor is on a line to be marked.
                   Entering MARK DEL will delete all marked lines.  MARK ADD
                   will add a line after each marked line.  MARK CAN will un-
                   mark all marked lines.  You can use QUERY MARK to determine
                   which lines are currently marked.
 
         Menu      is the same as HELP.
 
         Next [n]  is a synonym for DOWN.
 
         Query [CASE|CURline|LRECL|MARK|Verify|Zone]
                   displays current settings.
 
         QUIT      ends LEDIT.  Unlike most editors, this does not cause
                   changes to be discarded since all changes are written to
                   disk as they are made.
 
         Right n   moves the display n columns to the right.  This is only
                   useful when the file has lines longer than will fit on one
                   display line.
 
         SERial [*|n [*]]
                   causes serial numbers to be written if the file contains
                   fixed-length, eighty-byte records.  The increment may be
                   specified as n (the default is 10).  If "*" is not
                   specified, the first three characters of the filename are
                   placed in columns 73 through 75, and the default increment
                   is 1000.  The first line of the file is numbered n.
 
         Top       makes the first line in the file the current line.
 
         TYpe [n]  types n lines from the file.
 
         Up [n]    moves up n lines toward the top of the file.
 
         Verify n  makes column n the first column displayed on the screen.
                   This can only be used if the file contains lines longer than
                   the display lines.
 
         XC string1 string2
                   will change string1 to string2 on the current line.  Both
                   strings must be the same length and are specified in
                   hexadecimal.
 
         XL string locates the specified string (specified in hexadecimal).
 
         Zone n m  are the starting and ending columns for the locate
                   functions.
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     131
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                  LEDIT
 
         Program Function (PF) Keys
 
         PF1   Displays this information.
         PF2   Adds a line to the file following the cursor.
         PF3   Ends LEDIT.
         PF4   Tabs forward 10 spaces.
         PF5   Tabs backward 10 spaces.
         PF6   Discards changes typed on the screen since ENTER was pressed.
         PF7   Scroll up towards the top of the file.
         PF8   Scroll down towards the bottom of the file.
         PF9   Reuse last subcommand.
         PF10  Make the line under the cursor the current line.
         PF11  Mark the line under the cursor.
         PF12  Move the cursor to the beginning of the current line.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Non-displayable characters are represented on the screen by dots.
              Any non-displayable characters on a line will be changed to dots
              if the line is changed.
 
          2.  You cannot change the length of a line in the file, even if the
              file contains variable-length records.  LEDIT does not remove
              trailing blanks from lines.
 
          3.  The verify columns refer to the columns of the file which are
              being displayed on the screen.  For example, VERIFY 1 displays
              columns 1 through 79.  The VERIFY, RIGHT, and LEFT subcommands
              affect the verify columns.
 
          4.  Most PF keys cause changes typed on the screen to be discarded.
              That is, if you make changes to the screen and then press any PF
              key (except PF4, PF5, and PF12) the changes are lost.  Changes
              are actually saved when you press ENTER.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSLED001E No filename specified.  RC=1
         DMSLED004E File not found.  RC=28
         DMSLED012E Disk filemode is read-only.  RC=12
         DMSLED013E Disk filemode is full.  RC=13
         DMSLED030E Work file $LEDIT$ $LEDIT$ exists.  Erase before using
                    LEDIT.  RC=32
         DMSLDT104S Error n reading from disk.  RC=100
         DMSLDT105S Error n writing to disk.  RC=100
         DMSLED109S Not enough storage.  RC=104
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     132
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                      LINK (CP)
 
         Use the LINK command to gain access to a minidisk belonging to another
         user (if the other user has authorized the link with AUTOLINK).  The
         CMS command ACCESS must be used after LINK to identify the new
         minidisk to CMS.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | LINK      | [To] userid disk1 [As] disk2 [level]                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         [To] userid
                   is the userid whose minidisk "disk1" is to be linked.  You
                   may use an asterisk to refer to your own userid.
 
         disk1     is the virtual device address of the minidisk.  This is the
                   address that user "userid" uses to refer to the minidisk.
                   Virtual device addresses are expressed as three-digit
                   hexadecimal values.
 
         [As] disk2
                   is the virtual device address you will use to refer to the
                   minidisk.  This address must not already be defined in your
                   userid.  The virtual device address that you assign may be
                   any unused value up to 5FF (hexadecimal).
 
         level     is the kind of link requested.  Links may be read-only or
                   read/write.  You may request a primary and secondary level;
                   the secondary will be used if the primary link fails.  In
                   order for any link to succeed, the userid that owns the
                   minidisk must have authorized you to link at the level you
                   are requesting.  The following levels may be requested:
 
                   Level  Meaning
                    R     Read-only.  Fails if another user has a write-link
                          to the minidisk.  This is the default when linking
                          to a minidisk that belongs to another userid.
                    RR    Read-only.  Disregards existing links.
                    W     Write.  Fails if another user has any link to the
                          minidisk.
                    WR    Write or read.  Read-link is made if another user has
                          a link to the minidisk.
                    M     Write.  Fails if another user has a write-link.
                    MR    Write or read.  Read-link is made if another user has
                          a write-link.
                    MW    Write.  Disregards existing links.  If two or more
                          users have write-links to the same minidisk, the disk
                          file directory may be corrupted and the files lost.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     133
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                      LINK (CP)
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Links made with the LINK command last only until you log off, or
              are logged off by the system.  You can drop a link with the DROP
              command.
 
          2.  An example may clarify the way links can be used.  Suppose the
              files on user XYZ101's A-disk (191) were to be shared with XYZ102
              and USR101.  User XYZ101 would first use AUTOLINK to authorize
              the links:
 
                   autolink auth 191 r user xyz102 | user usr101
 
              This need only be done once.  Users XYZ102 and USR101 would issue
              the following commands to make the files on XYZ101's A-disk
              available to them:
 
                   link xyz101 191 193 rr
                   access 193 b/a
 
              XYZ101's 191 (A-disk) would then be available as 193 (B-disk) to
              XYZ102 and USR101.  These commands could be placed in a PROFILE
              EXEC.
 
          3.  CMS supports only simultaneous read-access sharing of minidisks.
              If two or more users simultaneously have write-access to the same
              minidisk the disk file directory will almost certainly be
              corrupted and the files on the minidisk permanently lost.
 
       |  4.  If a user with write-access to a minidisk updates a file and
       |      other users with read-access then try to read that same file, the
       |      other users will get the older version of the file, garbled
       |      records, or CMS file system errors (most often DMSxxx104S: "ERROR
       |      3 READING FILE").  The users with read-access should issue the
       |      ACCESS command again to read the updated file directory.  Using
       |      filemode number 6 for shared files can eliminate this problem in
       |      some applications.
 
          5.  All CJS users have a minidisk at virtual address 191 (the default
              A-disk), and some users also have a minidisk at 192 (the default
              D-disk).  All users share (read-access) several CMS system
              minidisks, including some or all of 190, 19C, 19D, and 19E.  OS
              volumes occupy virtual device addresses in the 120's.  Other
              virtual devices generally occupy addresses below 100.  Unused
              addresses in the 19x range should be used first when making links
              to other users minidisks.
 
          6.  You can use the CP command QUERY LINKS to determine which users
              have links to one of your minidisks.  For example:
 
                   q links 191
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     134
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                      LINK (CP)
 
          7.  Refer to the descriptions of the ACCESS and AUTOLINK commands for
              more information about sharing CMS disk files.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
       | If a numbered message is issued, the return code is set to the message
         number; otherwise, the return code is zero.
 
         DASD disk2 LINKED R/O
         DASD disk2 LINKED R/W
         DASD disk2 LINKED R/O; R/W BY [n USERS[; R/O BY n USERS]]
         DASD disk2 LINKED R/W; R/O BY [n USERS]
         DASD disk2 LINKED R/W; R/W BY [n USERS[; R/O BY n USERS]]
 
         DMKLNC999E userid disk1 NOT LINKED; NOT AUTHORIZED
         DMKLNC999E userid disk1 NOT LINKED; LOCKED BY owner SINCE time
         DMKLNC999E userid disk1 NOT LINKED; AUTOLINK UNAVAILABLE
         DMKLNC999E userid disk1 NOT LINKED; AUTOLINK QUIESCED
         DMKLNC999E userid disk1 NOT LINKED; AUTOLINK BUSY -- TRY AGAIN
         DMKLNC999E userid disk1 NOT LINKED; AUTOLINK SHUTDOWN/REIPL IN
                    PROGRESS -- TRY LATER
         DMKLNK020E USERID MISSING OR INVALID
         DMKLNK022E disk MISSING OR INVALID
         DMKLNK052E ERROR IN CP DIRECTORY
         DMKLNK053E userid NOT IN CP DIRECTORY
         DMKLNK101W DASD disk2 FORCED R/O; R/O BY nnn USERS
       | DMKLNK103W DASD disk2 FORCED R/O; R/W BY nnn USERS
       | DMKLNK106E userid disk1 NOT LINKED[; R/W BY nnn USERS]
       |            [; R/O BY nnn USERS]
         DMKLNK116E USERID userid NOT LINKED; CP DIRECTORY IN USE
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     135
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                   LISP
 
         An experimental partial implementation of the Utah LISP interpreter is
         available under CMS.  It is not supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | LISP      | [filename]                                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the name of an input file.  The filetype of this file
                   must be "LISP," and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte
                   records.  If no filename is given, input and output will use
                   the terminal.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Some internal LISP functions are available:
 
                   PRBUFFER(T)          causes input records to be printed.
                   VERBOS(NIL)          suppresses garbage collection messages.
 
          2.  LISP uses OS simulation input and output.  The following DD names
              are defined by default:
 
                   LISPIN     Input (disk or terminal)
                   LISPOUT    Printed Output (disk or terminal)
 
          3.  Some additional information about the OS version of the Utah LISP
              interpreter is available in the UKCC Consulting Room in McVey
              Hall.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     136
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         LISTDS
 
         Use the LISTDS command to display information about data sets residing
         on accessed OS disks.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +      +                                               |
         | LISTDS    | |dsname| fm [(options...[)]]                           |
         |           | |?     |                                               |
         |           | +      +                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +      +  +     +                                      |
         |           | |FOrmat|  |PRINT|  [LIKE root]                         |
         |           | |PDS   |  |STACK|                                      |
         |           | |EXtent|  +     +                                      |
         |           | |FREE  |                                               |
         |           | +      +                                               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         dsname    is an OS data set name.  The qualifiers may be separated by
                   either dots or spaces, and the final qualifier may end with
                   an asterisk to indicate a matching pattern.
 
         ?         indicates that the data set name should be read from the
                   terminal.  A prompt will be issued.  The data set name must
                   use dots to separate qualifiers.
 
         fm        is the filemode of the disk to be searched for the specified
                   file.  Use an asterisk to search all accessed OS disks.
 
         Options:
 
         EXtent    displays the allocated extents for the specified data sets.
 
         FOrmat    displays information describing the specified data sets.
 
         FREE      displays the free space extents on the specified OS volume.
                   You may not specify a dsname when you use the FREE option.
 
         LIKE root is used with the PDS option to restrict the display to
                   members with names beginning "root".
 
         PDS       displays the names of the members in the specified
                   partitioned data sets.  The FORMAT option may also be
                   specified with the PDS option.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     137
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         LISTDS
 
         PRINT     causes the output of the LISTDS command to be directed to a
                   spooled print file instead of the terminal.
 
         STACK     causes the output of the LISTDS command to be directed to
                   the CMS program stack instead of the terminal.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Use the OSDISKS command to access the OS volumes containing user data
         sets.  The first OS volume will be accessed as the H-disk.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSLDS002E Data set not found.  RC=28
         DMSLDS003E Invalid option "option".  RC=24
         DMSLDS048E Invalid mode "mode".  RC=24
         DMSLDS069E Disk "mode" not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSLDS117E Invalid extent found for "dsname" on "fm" disk.  RC=24
         DMSLDS221E Invalid data set name.  RC=24
         DMSLDS222E I/O error reading "dsname" from [fm|OS|DOS] disk.  RC=28
         DMSLDS223E No filemode specified.  RC=24
         DMSLDS226E No data set name allowed with FREE option.  RC=24
         DMSLDS227W Invalid extent found for "dsname" on [fm|OS|DOS] disk.  RC=4
         DMSLDS231E I/O error reading vtoc from [fm|OS|DOS] disk.  RC=28
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     138
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          LISTX
 
       | Use the LISTX command to obtain specified information about CMS files
       | residing on accessed disks.  LISTX supports most of the features of
       | the LISTFILE command and some additional features.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +    +    +  +++                                       |
         | LISTX     | |fn  |ft  |fm|||  [(options... [)]]                    |
         |           | |*   |*   |A |||                                       |
         |           | +    +    +  +++                                       |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +      +  +           +  +              +  +         + |
         |           | |FName |  |Sort Type  |  |COntrol CMs   |  |TRace ALl| |
         |           | |FType |  |     Name  |  |        OFf   |  |      ERr| |
         |           | |FMode |  |     Dtype |  |        ALl   |  |      OFf| |
         |           | |FOrmat|  |     DName |  |        ERror |  |      ON | |
         |           | |ALloc |  |     Rtype |  |        NOMsg |  +         + |
         |           | |Date  |  |     RName |  |        PAck  |              |
         |           | |Label |  |     Brtype|  |        NOPack|              |
         |           | +      +  |     BRName|  |        TIme  |              |
         |           |           +           +  |        NOTime|              |
         |           |                          +              +              |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +        +               +                +            |
         |           | |TERMINAL|   [DEScend]   |Before  mm/dd/yy|            |
         |           | |PRint   |               |AFter           |            |
         |           | |Exec    |   [TODay]     |FRom            |            |
         |           | |APpend  |               |THRough         |            |
         |           | |DIsk    |   [SYStem]    +                +            |
         |           | |STAck   |                                             |
         |           | +        +                                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +        +                                             |
         |           | |Header  |   [PREfix nn]  [SUFfix nn]                  |
         |           | |NOHeader|                                             |
         |           | +        +                                             |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        is the filename or general form of the filename of the files
                   for which information is to be collected.
 
         ft        is the filetype or general form of the filetype of the files
                   for which information is to be collected.
 
         fm        is the filemode or general form of the filemode of the files
                   for which information is to be collected.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     139
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          LISTX
 
         General Forms for File Identifiers
 
         *         All values of the specified parameter.
 
         [string]* All values of the specified parameter that begin with the
                   characters [string].
 
         *[string] All values of the specified parameter that end with the
                   characters [string].
 
         [string1]*[string2]
                   All values of the specified parameter that begin with the
                   characters [string1] and end with the characters [string2].
                   Question marks in [string1] and [string2] will stand for
                   non-blank characters only.
 
         A question mark (?) may be imbedded in a fileid parameter to indicate
         a character which need not match.  If more than one asterisk is
         specified in a parameter, then asterisks preceding the final asterisk
         will be interpreted as question marks.  The last asterisk will be
         interpreted as a question mark if it is not the last non-blank
         character in the parameter.
 
         A blank as the second character of a filemode specification will
         always be interpreted as a question mark.  Asterisks in filemode
         specifications are always interpreted as question marks.
 
         Fileid specifications may be preceded by a logical not indicator (¬)
         which will cause all files matching the specified portions of the
         identifier to be excluded from information collection.  The indicator
         must appear as a separate item on the command line.
 
         Output Format Options
 
         Header    includes column headings in the listing.  HEADER is the
                   default when ALLOC, DATE, or LABEL is specified.
 
         NOHeader  does not include headings.
 
         COntrol type
                   causes an "&CONTROL" record to be put at the beginning of
                   the file created with the EXEC or DISK options.  The allowed
                   values for "type" are:
 
                        ALl    ERror   NOPack   OFf    TIme
                        CMs    NOMsg   NOTime   PAck
 
                   Only one value may be specified for "type".
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     140
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          LISTX
 
         TRace type
                   causes an "&TRACE" record to be put at the beginning of the
                   file created with the EXEC or DISK options.  This will cause
                   the generated EXEC to be processed by EXEC 2.  The values
                   for "type" are:
 
                        ALl    ERr     OFf      ON
 
                   Only one value may be specified for "type".
 
         PREfix n  controls the number of "&nn" EXEC variables that are placed
                   before the data on each line of the file created by the
                   APPEND, DISK, and EXEC options.  The default is two.
 
         SUFfix n  similar to the PREFIX option, but the variables are placed
                   after the data.
 
         Output Disposition Options
 
         APpend    appends output to a file named "CMS EXEC A1".  If the file
                   does not exist, one will be created.
 
         DIsk      creates an output file like the one generated by the EXEC
                   option, except that PREFIX is given a default value of zero.
 
         Exec      creates a file named "CMS EXEC A1" containing one record for
                   each of the files that satisfy the given file identifier.
                   The data in each record will be preceded by the number of
                   EXEC argument tokens specified by PREFIX and followed by the
                   number specified by SUFFIX.  The default value for PREFIX is
                   two and the default value for SUFFIX is zero.
 
         PRint     causes output to be directed to the spooled virtual printer.
 
         STAck     causes output to be directed to the CMS program stack.
 
         TERMinal  causes output to be directed to the terminal.
 
         The APPEND, DISK, and EXEC options are mutually exclusive.  Any other
         combinations may be specified.
 
         Information Request Options
 
         Only one information request option may be specified.  Each option
         includes the information given by the options that precede it on the
         list.  The options and the information they display are:
 
         FName     Filename
         FType     Filetype
         FMode     Filemode
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     141
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          LISTX
 
         FOrmat    Record Format and Record Length
         ALloc     Number of Records and Disk Blocks
         Date      Date and Time Last Changed
         Label     Label of the Disk Containing the File
 
         Sorting and Selection Options
 
         Sort type causes the output to be sorted in the specified manner.  The
                   SORT types are:
 
                        BRName  Block Count, Record Count, Filename, Filetype
                        Brtype  Block Count, Record Count, Filetype, Filename
                        DName   Creation Date, Filename, Filetype
                        Dtype   Creation Date, Filetype, Filename
                        Name    Filename, Filetype
                        RName   Record Count, Filename, Filetype
                        Rtype   Record Count, Filetype, Filename
                        TIme    Creation Date, Time, Filetype, Filename
                        Type    Filetype, Filename
 
                   Only one sort type may be specified.
 
         AFter mm/dd/yy
                   list only those files created after the specified date.
 
         Before mm/dd/yy
                   list only those files created before the specified date.
 
         FRom mm/dd/yy
                   list only those files created on or after the specified
                   date.
 
         THRough mm/dd/yy
                   list only those files created up to and including the
                   specified date.
 
         Only one or two date-related selection options may be specified on a
         single command.  Each part of the date must have two digits.
 
         TODay     lists only those files created on the current date.  TODAY
                   may not be specified with any of the other time related
                   selection options.
 
         SYStem    causes the S, X, Y, and Z disks to be searched when a
                   filemode of "*" is specified.
 
         Usage Notes
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     142
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          LISTX
 
          1.  The creation date is the date (and time) that the file was
              created or last modified.
 
       |  2.  On EDF disks there are two pseudo-files that are listed by LISTX.
              These pseudo-files have filenames that are not valid for CMS
              files (eight asterisks), and filetypes of DIRECTOR and ALLOCMAP.
              The DIRECTOR represents the space taken by the CMS file directory
              on the disk.  The ALLOCMAP represents the space taken by the disk
              allocation map and will be found only on disks that are write-
              accessed.  These pseudo-files cannot be examined, altered, or
              erased.  The date and time on the ALLOCMAP is the time the disk
              was last modified (a file was written or erased), and its LRECL
              is the physical block size of the disk.  The number of records in
              the DIRECTOR is the number of files on the disk, including the
              ALLOCMAP and DIRECTOR.
 
       |  3.  Message 002E (file not found) will not be issued if LISTX is
       |      invoked from REXX or EXEC 2.  The message is issued from EXEC if
       |      &CONTROL MSG is in effect.
 
       |  4.  The output file created by the EXEC and DISK options is limited
       |      to 80 characters per line.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSLSX002E File not found.   RC=28
         DMSLSX003E Invalid option -- option.  RC=24
         DMSLSX022E Invalid '¬' specification.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E Invalid control - control.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E Invalid sort - sort.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E Invalid date - date.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E Invalid prefix - prefix.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E Invalid suffix - suffix.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E Conflicting options - option1 + option2.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E PREFIX+DISPLAY+SUFFIX is more than 80 characters.  RC=24
         DMSLSX062E Invalid fileid - fn ft fm.  RC=24
         DMSLSX069E A-disk not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSLSX105E Error n writing cms exec.  RC=100+n
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     143
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  LOGOFF (EXEC)
 
         Use the LOGOFF command to end a terminal session and disconnect from
         the VM/SP system.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | LOGoff    | [Yes|No] [Hold]                                        |
         | LOGout    |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Hold      retains the connection for a switched communication line.
                   This enables you to log on again without redialing the
                   system.  This parameter has no effect on locally attached
                   terminals (such as 3270-type displays), or remote terminals
                   using non-switched communication lines.
 
         No        causes your console log to be purged.  This parameter has no
                   effect if you are not spooling your console.
 
         Yes       causes your console log to be retained.  This parameter has
                   no effect if you are not spooling your console.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Console spooling is controlled with the SETCON command.  If you
              are spooling your console and you do not specify YES or NO with
              the LOGOFF command, a prompt will be issued to determine the
              disposition of the console log.
 
          2.  LOGOFF displays a list of your reader spool files (including an
              estimate of the charge for each) and asks which, if any, should
              be purged.
 
       |  3.  LOGOFF displays the cost of your terminal session during the
       |      current rate period and your current balance (if available).
 
          4.  Respond "ESCAPE" to any prompt from the LOGOFF command to cancel
              the log off.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSLOG070E "string" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
 
         Messages may also be produced by the BALANCE, COST, CP LOGOFF, PURGE,
         and RDRCOST commands.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     144
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                     LOGON (CP)
 
         Use the LOGON command to identify yourself to the VM/SP system and
         begin a terminal session.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                      +    +            |
         | Logon     | userid  [password]  [Mask]  [Noipl]  |Apl |            |
         | Login     |                                      |APLT|            |
         |           |                                      +    +            |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         userid    is the identifier assigned to you by the Computing Center.
 
         password  is the password you requested to be associated with your
                   userid.  If the password is not specified, a special prompt
                   with a security mask will be issued to read the password.
                   It is recommended that the password not be placed on the
                   command line because it would be visible on your terminal.
 
         Mask      specifies that a security mask is desired for entering the
                   password.  This option need not be specified; it is the
                   default when the password does not appear on the command
                   line.
 
         Noipl     specifies that the automatic IPL command should not be
                   issued by the system after logon.
 
         Apl       indicates that you are logging on with a terminal using the
                   APL character set and that the TERMINAL APL ON mode should
                   be in effect immediately.  APL should be specified when
                   using a correspondence or EBCD code terminal (such as an IBM
                   2741) or a bit-paired ASCII APL code.
 
         APLT      indicates that you are logging on with a terminal using the
                   APL character set and that the TERMINAL APL ON mode should
                   be in effect immediately.  APLT should be specified when
                   using a typewriter-paired ASCII APL terminal, such as a
                   DECwriter.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  APL is not available under CMS at the UKCC.  The APL and APLT
              options are provided to support terminals that have only an APL
              character set.
 
          2.  The LOGON command name may not contain line-editing symbols, but
              its operands may use these symbols if needed.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     145
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                     LOGON (CP)
 
          3.  Logging on after a disconnect (because of a hardware malfunction
              or the DISCONNECT command) is a called reconnecting.  When you
              reconnect the system will reset some CP SET and CP TERMINAL
              options based on the kind of terminal you are using.  You can use
              the CP QUERY SET and CP QUERY TERMINAL commands to determine the
              current values.  The initial values of some CMS SET options will
              depend on the type of terminal you are using when CMS is IPL'ed
              (this is done automatically when you log on, but not when you
              reconnect).
 
              The settings that cause the most trouble are CP TERMINAL
              LINESIZE, and CMS SET AUTOREAD and SET BLIP.  When using an ASCII
              terminal, you will probably want SET AUTOREAD ON and may want SET
              BLIP ON.  On a 3270-type terminal SET AUTOREAD OFF and SET BLIP
              OFF will be more useful.
 
              After reconnecting you may want to re-execute your PROFILE EXEC
              if you have one that sets any of these characteristics.  To do
              this, issue the command "PROFILE" (after entering "BEGIN"), or
              "IPL CMS" to reinitialize CMS and execute your profile.  If you
              intend to continue a terminal session using another kind of
              terminal (moving from a 3270-type terminal to an ASCII
              typewriter, for example), it may be easier to logoff rather than
              disconnect.
 
          4.  When you log on or reconnect, the system will display the number
              of spool files that you own (if you own any).  Reader spool files
              may contain notes or files sent to you from other users, or
              output from batch jobs.
 
          5.  The UKCC CMS User's Guide contains more information about logging
              on.
 
         Responses
 
         ENTER PASSWORD:
         LOGMSG - hh:mm:ss zone day mm/dd/yy
         * online news banner
         FILES: n RDR, n PRT, n PUN
 
         LOGON AT hh:mm:ss zone day mm/dd/yy
          -or-
         RECONNECTED AT hh:mm:ss zone day mm/dd/yy
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     146
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        MAKEBUF
 
         Use the MAKEBUF command to create a new CMS program stack buffer.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | MAKEBUF   |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The return code from the MAKEBUF command is the number of the
              buffer just created (this may later be used with a DROPBUF
       |      command).  When MAKEBUF is executed in an EXEC with an &ERROR or
       |      SIGNAL ON ERROR in effect, the non-zero return code causes the
              error action to be taken.
 
          2.  Each buffer contains a new program stack.  Commands that read
       |      from the stack (like the REXX PULL and EXEC &READ function) will
       |      read lines from the MAKEBUF buffers, beginning with the buffer
              most recently created.  When the MAKEBUF buffers are exhausted,
              input lines will come from the console input buffer.  When this
              is exhausted a line will be read directly from the terminal.
              MAKEBUF creates a stack of stacks.
 
          3.  MAKEBUF is used in an EXEC to insure that stacked lines from a
              command are read immediately:
 
       |           /* MAKEBUF Example */
       |           "makebuf"
       |           "stkdate"
       |           pull . . day .
       |           say "Today is" day
       |            .
       |            .
       |            .
       |           "dropbuf"
 
          4.  Buffers created with MAKEBUF may be deleted with the DESBUF and
              DROPBUF commands.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         MAKEBUF produces no messages.  See Usage Note 1 for the return codes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     147
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  MANUAL (EXEC)
 
         Use the MANUAL command to examine or print documentation.  Some UKCC
         manuals and documents are available online and can be examined (from a
         3270-type terminal) or printed.  A menu of available documents is
         available.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |        | +                                                      +  |
         | MANUAL | |Menu                                                  |  |
         |        | |Browse name                                           |  |
         |        | |                                                      |  |
         |        | |             +        +  +             +  +          +|  |
         |        | |Print  name  |Copies n|  |Route dest   |  |Forms xxxx||  |
         |        | |             |       1|  |      Central|  |      NT  ||  |
         |        | |             +        +  +             +  +          +|  |
         |        | |                                                      |  |
         |        | |Tprint name  [STop]                                   |  |
         |        | +                                                      +  |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Browse    displays the specified manual with the BROWSE command.  This
                   can only be used on 3270-type terminals.
 
         Menu      displays a menu of available manuals.  This is the default.
 
         Print     prints the selected manual.  Use the COPIES, ROUTE, and
                   FORMS options if desired.  These options are SETPRT command
                   options; other SETPRT command options can be specified.
 
         Tprint    prints the selected manual on your terminal.  You may
                   specify STOP or other TPRINT command options.  Refer to the
                   description of the TPRINT command for more information.
 
         Options
 
         Copies n  is the number of copies requested.  Multiple copy requests
                   are ignored for output routed HOT.  The maximum value is
                   255, the default value is 1.
 
         Forms xxxx
                   specifies the forms to be used for printing.  The default
                   form is "NT", narrow unlined paper with the TN print train
                   (uppercase and lowercase letters).  Other valid forms for
                   CENTRAL routing are 5162 and T.  Forms requests are ignored
                   with HOT routing, and may be restricted at remote sites.  A
                   remote site should be consulted in advance before requesting
                   special forms.  Specify "FORMS STD." for printing on
                   standard forms.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     148
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  MANUAL (EXEC)
 
         Route dest
                   specifies the destination of the printed output.  Any of the
                   following may be specified:  "RMTnn" for a HASP remote site,
                   "HOT" for the hands-on printer at the UKCC, "CENTRAL" for
                   the UKCC Computer Room, "Pnnnn" for an RSCS remote site, or
                   "TERMINAL" for the user's terminal (reader spool file).  The
                   default is "CENTRAL."  Note that output routed HOT or
                   TERMINAL will be limited to about 1600 lines.
 
         STop      specifies that output at your terminal will stop before each
                   page is printed to allow for manual forms positioning.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  See the description of the SETPRT command for more information
              about printing options and special forms.
 
          2.  The MANUAL PRINT function will leave the printer spooled back to
              your reader (SETPRT TO *).
 
          3.  You will be charged for printing a manual, just as for any other
              printed output.  The cost will be determined by the number of
              lines in the manual, the number of copies printed, and the
       |      routing.  For example, printing one copy of the UKCC CMS
       |      Reference at the Computing Center costs about $8.50 (internal day
              rate) for the CPU time, I/O operations, and output lines.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSMAN001E No manual name specified.  RC=24
         DMSMAN002E There is no manual named "name".  RC=28
         DMSMAN070E Missing or invalid parameter.  RC=24
 
         Messages and return codes may also be produced by the CMS commands
         BROWSE, HELP, PRINT, and TPRINT.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     149
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          MATCH
 
         Use the MATCH command to compare two CMS disk files and describe the
         changes needed to make the first file match the second file.  The
         output from the MATCH command may be a typed or printed list of
         changes, or a CMS disk file in CMS UPDATE format.  The MATCH command
         replaces the less useful COMPARE command.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | MATCH     | fileid1 fileid2 [updateid]  [( [options...] [)]]       |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | BUFsize  n      +         +     +        +             |
         |           | COLumns  n m    |DATAstrea|     |HEADer  |             |
         |           | ISEQuence n m   |MSGstream|     |NOHEADer|             |
         |           | LINecount n     |UPDstream|     +        +             |
         |           | NSEQuence n m   +         +                            |
         |           | PREcision n                                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +        +      +        +      +        +             |
         |           | |INCZero |      |INSZero |      |SEQuence|             |
         |           | |NOINCZer|      |NOINSZer|      |NOSEQuen|             |
         |           | +        +      +        +      +        +             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +        +      +        +      +        +             |
         |           | |TRAILer |      |TYPE    |      |UPDCtl  |             |
         |           | |NOTRAILe|      |TERMinal|      |NOUPDCtl|             |
         |           | +        +      |PRInter |      +        +             |
         |           |                 |PRT     |                             |
         |           |                 +        +                             |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fileid1   is the file identifier of the base (original) file.  The
                   filemode may be specified as "*".
 
         fileid2   is the file identifier of the second (modified) file.  Any
                   part of the fileid may be specified as "=", and the filemode
                   may be specified as "*".
 
         updateid  is the file identifier of the optional output file.  Any
                   part of this fileid may be specified as "=", and the
                   filemode may be specified as "*".  This file will be in CMS
                   UPDATE format.  Specifying this parameter implies the
                   options UPDSTREAM, NOINCZERO, NOINSZERO, and UPDCTL.
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     150
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          MATCH
 
         Options
 
         BUFsize   specifies the size of the input and output buffers, in
                   records, to be used for fixed-length record files (usually,
                   variable-length record files are read and written a single
                   record at a time).  A value of "*" (the default) may be used
                   to specify that the buffer is to hold as many records as
                   will fit in 4096 bytes (one page) or one record, whichever
                   value is greater.
 
         COLumns   specifies the columns of the input file records which
                   contain data to be compared.  The starting and ending column
                   values must both be specified.  See the Usage Notes for more
                   information.  The default value is "COL 1 *".
 
         DATAstre  specifies that output is to consist of a series of control
                   messages together with the deleted and inserted data lines.
                   This option is the default when the update file identifier
                   is omitted from the command line.
 
         HEADer    specifies that a header message describing the files being
                   compared is to be typed at the terminal before the
                   comparison operation begins.  This option is the default at
                   all times.
 
         INCZero   specifies that sequence increments of zero on CMS UPDATE
                   control statements are allowed.  This option and NOINCZERO
                   are meaningful only when the UPDSTREAM option is in effect.
 
         INSZero   specifies that records may be inserted at the beginning of a
                   file (after sequence number or "record number" zero).  This
                   option is the default when either the DATASTREAM or
                   MSGSTREAM options are in effect.
 
         ISEQuenc  specifies the columns of the input file records which
                   contain sequence numbers.  The starting column number and
                   length must both be specified.  See the Usage Notes for more
                   information.  The default value is "ISEQ * 8"
 
         LINecoun  specifies the number of lines on each page of printed
                   output.  A value of zero may be specified to suppress both
                   pagination and the printing of a title line on the first
                   page (to print the title line and treat output as a single
                   page only, use a very large value, like 99999).  The default
                   value is 55.
 
         MSGstrea  specifies that output is to consist of a series of control
                   messages only.  The deleted and inserted data lines are not
                   written.
 
         NOHEADer  specifies that no header message is to be typed.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     151
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          MATCH
 
         NOINCZer  specifies that sequence increments of zero on CMS UPDATE
                   control statements are not allowed.  When this option is in
                   effect, insertion or replacement blocks will be expanded
                   into larger replacement blocks (gathering non-updated
                   records from the input file) until a sequence range is found
                   which will generate a nonzero sequence increment.  This
                   option is the default when a CMS UPDATE stream is being
                   created.
 
         NOINSZer  specifies that records may not be inserted at the beginning
                   of a file.  Instead, the first record of the file will be
                   replaced with a block consisting of the inserted records
                   followed by the first record.  This option is the default
                   when the UPDSTREAM option is in effect, since the CMS UPDATE
                   command cannot insert records at the beginning of a file.
 
         NOSEQuen  specifies that input records do not contain sequence numbers
                   and output records are not to contain sequence numbers.
                   This option is the default when the base input file contains
                   anything other than fixed-length, eighty-character records.
                   See the Usage Notes for more information.
 
         NOTRAILe  specifies that no trailer messages are to be typed.
 
         NOUPDCtl  specifies that CMS UPDATE control statements in the input
                   files are not processed specially.  These records take part
                   in the comparison operation just as do all other records in
                   the files.  This option is the default when either the
                   DATASTREAM or MSGSTREAM option is in effect.
 
         NSEQuenc  specifies how new sequence numbers are to be generated, if
                   needed.  Both a starting sequence number and an increment
                   value must be specified.  This option applies both to the
                   process of generating sequence numbers when none are present
                   in the input file and to the adding of new records at the
                   end of the file (when a low sequence number is available,
                   but no high sequence number limit is available).  The
                   default is "NSEQ 1000 1000".
 
         PREcisio  specifies the precision to be used in the hash comparison
                   algorithm.  The value must be from 10 to 25.  The default
                   value is 15.
 
         PRInter   specifies that output is to be written to the printer.  If
                   an update fileid is specified this option is ignored.  You
                   should issue a SETPRT command before using this option.
 
         PRT       is the same as the PRINTER option.
 
         SEQuence  specifies that input records contain sequence numbers and,
                   when possible, output records are to contain sequence
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     152
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          MATCH
 
                   numbers.  This option is the default when the base input
                   file consists of fixed-length, eighty-character records.
                   See the Usage Notes for more information.
 
         TERMinal  specifies that output is to be typed at the console.  This
                   is the default if the update fileid is omitted.  If an
                   update fileid is specified this option is ignored.
 
         TRAILer   specifies that one or more trailer messages describing the
                   results of the file comparison are to be typed at the
                   terminal after the comparison operation completes.  This
                   option is the default at all times.
 
         TYPE      is the same as the TERMINAL option.
 
         UPDCtl    specifies that CMS UPDATE control statements (any record
                   beginning "./") found in the input files are not to take
                   part in the comparison operation.  Update statements found
                   in the base file will be ignored.  Update statements found
                   in the second file will be written intact.  This option is
                   the default when the UPDSTREAM option is in effect.
 
         UPDstrea  specifies that output is to consist of control statements
                   suitable for use by the CMS UPDATE facility.  Inserted data
                   lines are written after insert or replace statements.
                   Deleted data lines are not written.  This option is the
                   default when an update file identifier is supplied on the
                   command line.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The two input files used by this program may have any record
              format and length.  The output file will contain variable-length
              records if either of the two input files contain variable-length
              records.  If both of the two input files contain fixed-length
              records, then the output file will also contain fixed-length
              records.  In either case, the maximum output record length will
              be the maximum of the two input record lengths.
 
          2.  Note that the two input files must be similarly sequenced, in the
              sense that the COLUMNS and ISEQUENCE options must apply to both
              files.  Sequence numbers (if any) on the second file's records
              are ignored; however, the sequencing may affect the data
              positions (if "COL n *" or "COL * n" were in effect).
 
          3.  The COLUMNS and ISEQUENCE options control the positions and
              lengths of both the data columns and the sequence numbers in a
              record.  The NOSEQUENCE option may be used to specify that input
              records do not contain sequence numbers (if necessary, sequence
              numbers will be generated based on the value of the NSEQUENCE
              option).
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     153
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          MATCH
 
              Sequence number columns are specified as "S1 SL", where S1 is the
              starting sequence number column and SL is the length of the
              sequence number field.  Data columns are specified as "C1 C2",
              where C1 is the starting data column and C2 is the ending data
              column.
 
              If the starting sequence column, S1, is specified as an asterisk,
              then sequence numbers are assumed to lie at the end of the
              record; S1 is calculated to be [record length]-SL+1.
 
              If the sequence number length, SL, is specified as an asterisk,
              then sequence numbers are assumed to be of variable length; the
              value of SL is calculated by scanning up from S1 to the start of
              the sequence number (first non-blank) and then scanning up to the
              end of the sequence number (first blank).
 
              If the starting data column number, C1, is specified as an
              asterisk, then the record data is assumed to follow the sequence
              number field (or lie at the start of the record if no sequence
              numbers are present); the value of C1 is calculated to be S1+SL
              (or 1).
 
              If the ending data column number, C2, is specified as an
              asterisk, then the record data is assumed to extend up to, but
              not including, the start of the sequence number field (or up to
              the end of the record if no sequence numbers are present); the
              value of C2 is calculated to be S1-1 (or the record length).
 
              If the value of S1+SL-1 is greater then the current record
              length, then SL is set to the [record length]-S1+1.
 
              If the value of C2 is greater then the current record length,
              then C2 is set to the record length.
 
              Note that S1=* implies that sequence numbers follow the data on a
              record and that C1=* implies that data follows the sequence
              numbers on a record.  Hence, several combinations are not allowed
              and will result in an error message.  These are:
 
                   If S1=*, then SL and C1 cannot be * (C2=* allowed).
                   If SL=*, then S1 and C2 cannot be * (C1=* allowed).
                   If C1=*, then S1 and C2 cannot be * (SL=* allowed).
                   If C2=*, then SL and C1 cannot be * (S1=* allowed).
 
              In general, it is advisable to use the option combinations listed
              below, where "s" is the length of the sequence number field and
              "r" is the length of the record:
 
                   COL 1 * ISEQ * s (sequencing at record end)
                   COL * r ISEQ 1 s (fixed sequencing at record start)
                   COL * r ISEQ 1 * (variable sequencing at record start)
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     154
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          MATCH
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSMAT002E File "fileid" does not exist.  RC=28
         DMSMAT003E "name" is not a valid option.  RC=24
         DMSMAT006E No read/write disks accessed.  RC=32
         DMSMAT019E Identical input files: "fileid".  RC=24
         DMSMAT029E "name" is not a valid operand.  RC=24
         DMSMAT029E Missing or invalid operand for the name option.  RC=24
         DMSMAT032E Invalid filename or filetype.  RC=24
         DMSMAT037E Disk "mode" is read-only.  RC=32
         DMSMAT048E Invalid mode "mode".  RC=24
         DMSMAT054E Incomplete fileid specified.  RC=24
         DMSMAT062E Invalid "char" in fileid.  RC=20
         DMSMAT069E Disk "mode" is not accessed.  RC=32
         DMSMAT070E [extraneous|missing] parameters.  RC=24
         DMSMAT104S Error n reading file "fileid" from disk.  RC=100
         DMSMAT105S Error n writing file "fileid" to disk.  RC=100
         DMSMAT179I Comparing "fileid" with "fileid".
         DMSMAT211E Invalid or incomparable column numbers.  RC=24
         DMSMAT938E Error n from cms name function.  RC=100
         DMSMAT970E File "fileid" could not be opened (code n).  RC=100
         DMSMAT985E Insufficient storage for match.  RC=25
         DMSMAT991I Files match.
         DMSMAT991I n records deleted starting at record number n...
         DMSMAT991I n records inserted after record number n...
         DMSMAT991I n records replaced starting at record number n...
         DMSMAT991I n replacement records...
         DMSMAT991I n smallest sequence number generated was n.
         DMSMAT991I n update records created.
         DMSMAT991I No sequence number increments were generated.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     155
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  MATLAB (EXEC)
 
         MATLAB provides a "laboratory" for matrix computations.  Use the EXIT
         subcommand to leave MATLAB.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | MATLAB    |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  MATLAB may not function in a virtual machine smaller than 600K.
              You can use the STORAGE command to redefine your storage size if
              necessary.
 
          2.  For more information enter HELP while in MATLAB or see the MATLAB
              User's Guide (available from the MANUAL command).
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     156
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       MENUEXEC
 
       | MENUEXEC is used to provide REXX, EXEC 2, EXEC and program support for
         display panels created with the XMENU command.  MENUEXEC can display
         panels on a 3270-type display terminal and accept input data from the
         user at the terminal.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | MENUEXEC  | menuname [(options... [)]]                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [LIB library]  [ALARM]       [CURSOR fieldname]        |
         |           | [UPCASE]       [EMSG]        [NOWAIT]                  |
         |           | [NONULLS]      [STACK LIFO|FIFO]                       |
         |           | [TEST]         [CLEAR]       [NOXVARS|XVARS]           |
         |           | [MAP]          [PA1]         [SKIP]                    |
         |           | [MDT]          [CURPOINT]    [FILE filename]           |
         |           | [WAIT limit]   [SMSG]        [RDR]                     |
         |           | [DEV address]                                          |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         menuname  specifies the name of the MENU file to be displayed.
 
         Usage Note
 
       | Refer to the XMENU and DMSCVT User's Guide or online HELP for details.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Unless EMSG is specified, MENUEXEC produces no messages.  Errors are
         indicated by a non-zero return code which is the same as the
         corresponding message number.  The text of the MENUEXEC messages can
         be found in a file named "MENUEXEC MESSAGES Y2."
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     157
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           NEWS
 
         Use the NEWS command to display the online news.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +         +                                            |
         |           | |CHECK    |                                            |
         | NEWS      | |Headlines|                                            |
         |           | |Summary  |                                            |
         |           | |Type     |                                            |
         |           | |Xedit    |                                            |
         |           | +         +                                            |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         CHECK     checks for news, but does not display it.  If news is
                   available, the return code is zero; if there is no news, the
                   return code is 1, and a message is issued.  This option is
                   intended for use in an EXEC.
 
         Headlines displays the news headlines.
 
         Summary   displays a summary of the news.  This currently has the same
                   effect has the HEADLINES option.
 
         Type      types the news at your terminal.
 
         Xedit     inserts the news text into an XEDIT file.  This is the
                   default if NEWS is entered under XEDIT.  The XEDIT option is
                   valid only under XEDIT.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  By default, the NEWS command displays the news with XEDIT in a
              file named "Online News."
 
          2.  NEWS is implemented as an EXEC and a module.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSNEW070E "parm" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
         DMSNEW105S Error nn writing file to xedit.  RC=100
         DMSNEW942E The "XEDIT" option is only valid under XEDIT.  RC=88
         DMSNEW973E Sorry, no news today.  RC=1
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     158
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                    NOTE (EXEC)
 
         Use the NOTE command to prepare a note with XEDIT for transmission to
         one or more users.  This is a description of the simplest form of the
         NOTE command; other features and options are available.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | NOTE      | name [names...] [CC: name [names...]]                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         name      is the name of a user to receive the note.  A "name" may be
                   a userid or a nickname (from a NAMES file).  You may specify
                   more than one name, and a nickname may refer to more than
                   one userid.
 
         CC: name  is the name of a user to receive a complimentary copy.  The
                   rules for these names are the same as those for the
                   principle recipients.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The note created by the NOTE command is sent as a reader spool
              file to the designated users.  The file will be in the NETDATA
              format.  The recipients may examine the note with the PEEK
              command, or copy the note to a permanent CMS disk file with the
              ACCEPT command.
 
          2.  The NOTE command supports a number of options, including ACK and
              NOACK options similar to those of the SENDFILE command.  The
              default options of the NOTE command can be changed with the
              DEFAULTS command.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro
              Reference or to the online HELP command for more information.
 
          3.  The nicknames used by the NOTE command are kept in a CMS disk
              file named "userid NAMES", where "userid" is your userid.  This
              file can be maintained with the NAMES command, or edited directly
              with XEDIT.  The NAMES file is also used by the TELL, SENDFILE,
              and NAMEFIND commands.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro
              Reference or to the online HELP command for more details about
              these commands.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     159
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 OSDISKS (EXEC)
 
         Use the OSDISK command to access the OS rental disks that contain user
         data sets.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                        +                             |
       | | OSDISKs   | | ON | ACCess | LINK     |                             |
       | |           | | OFF | RELease | DETach |                             |
         |           | +                        +                             |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
       | ON        links and accesses the OS rental volumes.  This is the
       |           default.  ACCESS and LINK are synonyms for ON.
 
       | OFF       releases the OS rental volumes.  RELEASE and DETACH are
       |           synonyms for OFF.
 
         Usage Note
 
         OSDISKS accesses the OS rental volumes beginning with mode H.  Use the
         QUERY DISK command to display the names of the currently accessed
         disks, both OS and CMS.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSOSD070E The correct format is OSDISKS ON or OSDISKS OFF.  RC=24
 
         Messages may also be produced by the CMS command ACCESS.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     160
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 OSXEDIT (EXEC)
 
         Use the OSXEDIT command to examine an OS disk data set with the System
         Product editor (XEDIT).  The OS data set cannot be modified, but it
         can be saved as a CMS disk file, with or without modifications.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | OSXEDIT   | dsname [(member [)]]                                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         dsname    is the name of the OS data set.  Each part (qualifier) of
                   the data set name is limited to eight characters, with a
                   blank or a period between each.
 
         member    is an optional member name.  The member name is only used
                   when editing a member of a partitioned data set (PDS).
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  OSXEDIT uses a fileid of "OS DATASET A1" for the file.  You can
              save the file on disk under another name by issuing the SAVE or
              FILE subcommand with a fileid ("FILE SAMPLE DATA," for example).
 
          2.  The OSDISKS command is issued by OSXEDIT to access the OS rental
              disks if it has not already been issued.
 
          3.  Attempting to edit a member of a PDS that does not exist will
              cause the following messages to be issued:
 
                   DMSSOP036E OPEN ERROR CODE '08' ON 'SYSIN '.
                   DMSXDS591E OPEN ERROR ON SYSIN.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSOSX001E No data set name specified.  RC=24
         DMSOSX002E OS data set not found.  RC=28
         DMSOSX070E Incorrectly specified data set or member name.  RC=24
 
         Messages may also be generated by the FILEDEF, STATE, and XEDIT
         commands.
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     161
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         OUTPUT
 
         Use the OUTPUT command to print or plot a reader spool file (such as
         output returned from a batch job), or to send a reader spool file to
         another VM/SP user.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +           +                                          |
         | OUTPUT    | |spoolid [*]|  [( options... [)]]                      |
         |           | |name [type]|                                          |
         |           | | *     *   |                                          |
         |           | +           +                                          |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +                 +   +        +   [Copies n]          |
         |           | |PLot             |   |DOCument|                       |
         |           | |Route destination|   |LABels  |   [Pagesize n]        |
         |           | |To userid        |   +        +                       |
         |           | |User userid      |                [Forms xxxx]        |
         |           | +                 +                                    |
         |           |                                    [Space x]           |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the reader spool file to be
                   processed.  The default is "*," the first file in your
                   reader.
 
         name [type]
                   are used to specify a file by spool file name and type
                   rather than number.  Spool files do not necessarily have
                   names and types.  The default type is "*," the first file
                   that matches the specified name.
 
         Options
 
         Copies n  is the number of copies to be printed.  The default is one
                   copy.  This option only applies to output routed to a HASP
                   printer (except the HOT printer).
 
         DOCument  will cause PAGESIZE 0 and FORMS NT to be used (the normal
                   settings for printing SCRIPT output).  This option only
                   applies to output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         Forms xxxx
                   is the printer forms designation.  The default is standard
                   (STD.) forms.  Refer to the Usage Notes for more
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     162
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         OUTPUT
 
                   information.  Specifying the special forms implies the SPACE
                   W option.  This option only applies to output routed to a
                   HASP printer.
 
         K         is a synonym for PAGESIZE.
 
         LABels    will cause PAGESIZE 0 and FORMS LT to be used.  This option
                   is used for printing labels and only applies to output
                   routed to a HASP printer.
 
         Linect    is a synonym for PAGESIZE.
 
         N         is a synonym for COPIES.
 
         Pagesize n
                   is the number of lines per page.  The default is 61 and the
                   maximum is 255.  If zero is specified, automatic page
                   skipping is not provided.  This option applies only to
                   output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         PLot      sends the reader file to be plotted on the Zeta plotter in
                   the UKCC Computer Room.  This option should only be
                   specified for spool files containing plot output in Zeta
                   Graphics Machine Language (GML) format as produced by the
                   standard plotting routines.
 
         Route destination
                   specifies the destination of the output.  Any of the
                   following may be used:
 
                   Central   HASP Printer in the UKCC Computer Room
                   Hot       HASP Hands-on (HOT) Printer at the UKCC
                   Local     Synonym for CENTRAL (This option isn't recommended
                             and is included only for compatibility with old
                             applications.)
                   Pnnnn     RSCS Remote Printer "nnnn"
                   RMTnn     HASP Remote Site "nn"
                   Terminal  Your Userid (Reader Spool File)
                   userid    Any VM/SP Userid (Reader Spool File)
 
         Space n   determines the carriage control used.  SPACE S causes single
                   spacing of output, SPACE W allows normal carriage control.
                   The default is SPACE S unless special forms are used.  This
                   option applies only to output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         To userid will cause the reader file to be sent to the specified
                   userid rather than to be printed or plotted.  This can be
                   used to send a file to another user, who could then use
                   ACCEPT, PEEK, OUTPUT, etc.
 
         User      is a synonym for TO.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     163
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         OUTPUT
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  A message will be sent to you when the file is received for
              printing or plotting.  This message will contain the identifier
              assigned by the system that will be processing the output (HASP,
              RSCS, or the plotting system).  If your output was routed to the
              HASP HOT printer in McVey Hall you will receive another message
              when it begins printing.  If you have SET MSG OFF, these messages
              will be suppressed.
 
          2.  Output routed HOT is limited to 1600 lines, and the multiple
              copies option will be ignored for output routed to either HOT or
              TERMINAL.
 
          3.  There are restrictions on the use of special FORMS.  The FORMS
              option is ignored for output routed HOT or TERMINAL.  Since each
              remote site controls its own special forms, a site should be
              consulted in advance before requesting any special forms.  Output
              routed CENTRAL can use any of the following special forms:
 
                 LT     Labels (3 1/2" by 15/16"), TN (mixed case) Print Train
                 NT     Narrow Unlined Paper, TN (mixed case) Print Train
                 STD.   Regular Paper, PN (uppercase) Print Train
                 T      Regular Paper, TN (mixed case) Print Train
                 5106   Labels (3 1/2" by 15/16"), PN (uppercase) Print Train
                 5162   Narrow Unlined Paper, PN (uppercase) Print Train
 
              There is an additional charge for printing on labels (forms LT
              and 5106) routed CENTRAL.
 
          4.  Note that "PAGESIZE 0", which suppresses automatic page skipping,
              should be specified when printing SCRIPT output, since SCRIPT
              will control page skipping itself.  The DOCUMENT and LABELS
              options set "PAGESIZE 0".
 
          5.  A held reader file cannot be processed by OUTPUT.  Any attempt to
              do so will result in message 920E being issued.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSOUT003E Invalid option "option".  RC=24
         DMSOUT029E Invalid parameter "parm" in the option "option" field.
                    RC=24
         DMSOUT070E Invalid parameter "parameter".  RC=24
         DMSOUT920E Reader file "identifier" not found.  RC=28
         DMSOUT921E Error "nn" from reader.  RC=100
         DMSOUT935E Bad reader spool block.  RC=100
 
         Messages may be produced by the CP commands TAG and TRANSFER.  HASP,
         RSCS, and the plotting system will send messages to acknowledge
         receipt of a file.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     164
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                    PACK (EXEC)
 
         Use the PACK command to convert a CMS disk file to packed format.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |     +    +    +    +    +   +++++                      |
         | PACK      | ifn |ift |ifm |ofn |oft |ofm|||||                      |
         |           |     |*   |A   |=   |=   |=  |||||                      |
         |           |     +    +    +    +    +   +++++                      |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ifn       is the filename of the CMS disk file to be packed.
 
         ift       is the filetype of the input file.
 
         ifm       is the filemode of the input file.  The default is "A."
 
         ofn       is the filename of the packed output file.  The default is
                   "=," the input filename.
 
         oft       is the filetype of the output file.  The default is "=," the
                   input filetype.
 
         ofm       is the filemode of the output file.  The default is "=," the
                   input filemode.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Packed files are kept on disk in a special compressed format that
              usually requires much less disk space than normal format.  Once a
              file has been packed, it can no longer be processed by most CMS
              commands (such as PRINT, SCRIPT, SUBMIT, etc.).  Only COPYFILE,
              DISK, UNPACK, and XEDIT should be used with packed files.  Only
              XEDIT should be used to modify or examine a file in packed
              format.  Modifying a packed file improperly will make it
              impossible to unpack the file or recover the data.
 
          2.  Use the UNPACK command to convert a packed file to normal format.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Messages may be generated by the CMS COPYFILE command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     165
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PASCAL
 
         Use the PASCAL command to compile a program with the P4 Pascal
         compiler.  P4 Pascal is not supported.  The PAS4CG, PAS4C, and PAS4G
         commands are available for use with P4 Pascal programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PASCAL    | filename  [( options... [)]]                           |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the Pascal
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "PASCAL."
                   This filename will be used for the TEXT, LISTING, EXEC, and
                   P4ASSEM files, if they are created.
 
         Options
 
         If conflicting options are specified the last option given is used.
 
         ATtribute specifies that an attribute table is to be generated.  This
                   option sets the value of the compiler directive A to A+.
                   This is the default.
 
         COErce    specifies that less rigorous type checking is to be
                   performed.  This option provides compatibility with the
                   level of type checking performed by the CDC 6000 compilers.
                   This option sets the value of the compiler directive C to
                   C+.  NOCOERCE is the default.
 
         CONcat    allows the compilation of a program which is held in several
                   files.  The named file ("filename PASCAL") contains a list
                   of these files, with one fileid (filename and filetype) per
                   line.  The source appears as a continuous stream to the
                   compiler.
 
         DEbug     causes the compiler to generate code to check array bounds,
                   assignments to sub-range types, line number tracing, etc.
                   This option sets the initial value of the compiler directive
                   D to D+.  This is the default.
 
         DIsk      will send the output listing to a disk file named "filename
                   LISTING A1."  This is the default.
 
         EXec      causes the generation of an EXEC named "filename EXEC A1"
                   which can be used to execute the object program.  NOEXEC is
                   the default.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     166
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PASCAL
 
         EXtern    will force the compiler to use the first eight characters of
                   a procedure or function name as the external name to be used
                   by the CMS loader, instead of the unique internal name that
                   would ordinarily be used.  In order to be used successfully,
                   all names must be unique (only the first seven characters
                   being considered).  EXTERN is most useful for generating
                   program libraries.  This option sets the value of the
                   compiler directive E to E+.  The default is NOEXTERN.
 
         INstore   causes the intermediate P-code to be held in storage between
                   the compile and assembly stages.  INSTORE implies the OBJECT
                   option.
 
         KEepasm   will cause the P-code generated by the compiler to be kept
                   on disk in a file named "filename P4ASSEM A1."  KEEPASM
                   implies the ONDISK option.
 
         LInecoun n
                   sets the number of lines on each page of compiler listing
                   (must be greater than 9).  The default is LINECOUNT 55.
 
         NOATtribu See the ATTRIBUTE option.
 
         NODEbug   See the DEBUG option.
 
         NOOBject  See the OBJECT option.
 
         NOPRint   will suppress the output listing.  The default is DISK.
 
         NOSEGmen  See the SEGMENT option.
 
         NOSEQuen  suppresses margin marking and causes the compiler to check
                   the entire input record (up to the limit of 130 bytes).
                   SEQUENCE is the default.
 
         NOTerm    See the TERM option.
 
         NOXRef    See the XREF option.
 
         OBject    causes the object program to be put into a disk file named
                   "filename TEXT A1".  This is the default.
 
         ONdisk    will cause the compiler intermediate code to be written on
                   disk.  This option reduces the storage requirements of the
                   compiler by 384K, but increases compilation time.  ONDISK
                   implies the OBJECT option.
 
         PRint     will send the output listing to the virtual printer.  The
                   default is DISK.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     167
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PASCAL
 
         REsword   causes reserved words to be bold-printed and converted to
                   lowercase.  This option sets the initial value of the R
                   compiler directive to R+.  NORESWORD is the default.
 
         SEGment   causes the PASCAL command to attempt to use the PASCAL
                   shared segment.  This is the default, but no shared segment
                   is available at this time.
 
         SEQuence  causes the compiler to examine only the first 72 characters
                   of each input record, allowing sequence numbers to appear
                   afterward, and causes the margins of the input record
                   examined to be marked on the program listing with a vertical
                   bar.  This option sets the I and U compiler directives to I+
                   and U+.  This is the default.
 
         TErm      causes diagnostic messages to be displayed on the terminal.
                   This is the default.
 
         WArn      causes warnings to be issued for non-standard features used
                   and sets the initial value of the compiler directive W to
                   W+.  NOWARN is the default.
 
         XRef      causes generation of a program cross-reference listing and
                   sets the initial value of the X compiler directive to X+.
                   This is the default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The P4 Pascal compiler accepts the language described in the
              Pascal User Manual and Report, with several extensions and
              restrictions.  The UKCC CMS P4 Pascal User's Guide (available
              from the MANUAL command) describes the compiler in detail.
 
          2.  The P4 Pascal compiler will not operate in a virtual machine
              smaller than 600K, but compiled programs can execute in smaller
              machines.  You can use the STORAGE command to redefine your
              storage size if necessary.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     168
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                               PASSWORD
 
         Use the PASSWORD command to change your logon password.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PASSWORD  | [target] [( [NOPRompt]  [QUIET] [)]]                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         target    is the userid or project number to be affected.  The default
                   is your userid.  If you specify a userid or project number
                   for which you are not authorized the password will not be
                   changed and the system will record the attempt.
 
         Options
 
         NOPRompt  suppresses the prompt messages.  The prompts are suppressed
                   also if data is available in the program stack or console
                   input buffer.
 
         QUIET     suppresses all error messages.  If an error occurs the
                   return code indicates the nature of the error.  This option
                   is intended for use in an EXEC.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  PASSWORD prompts you to enter your current password, and then
              asks for the new password twice (the two must match).  The
              passwords are masked during input, so the new password is read
              twice to reduce the chances of a typing error.
 
              You cannot display your current password or change your password
              if you do not know it, so be careful when entering the new
              password.  If you forget your password contact the person
              authorized to maintain your userid or project number (instructor,
              etc.) or the Computing Center office.  No one can determine your
              current password, but a new password can be set for you.  The
              Computing Center office is open from 8:00 am to 4:30 pm (EST),
              Monday through Friday; it is closed on university holidays.
 
          2.  A password can be from two through eight characters long.
              Letters, numbers, and special characters can be used; lowercase
              letters are converted to uppercase.  Control characters cannot be
              used.  Extra care will be needed to use one of the CP line
              editing characters.  (The defaults are #, @, and ".  Refer to the
              description of the TERMINAL command for more information.)  A
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     169
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                               PASSWORD
 
              password cannot be entirely blank, contain imbedded blanks, or
              begin with "NOLOG."
 
          3.  The system automatically makes a permanent record of all
              unauthorized attempts to alter the password of a userid or
              project number.  The record includes the date and time, and the
              userid making the attempt.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         In case of an error, the return code will be the message number.
 
         OUIPAS001E "[string]" is an extraneous parameter.
         OUIPAS001E "[string]" is not a valid parameter.
         OUIPAS002E "[string]" is not an option.
         OUIPAS011E You are not authorized for this service.
         OUIPAS011E This attempt has been recorded.
         OUIPAS012E Sorry, but this transaction cannot be completed at this time.
         OUIPAS012E Try again later.
         OUIPAS013E No record found for [target].
         OUIPAS014E You are not authorized to access data for [target].
         OUIPAS014E This attempt has been recorded.
         OUIPAS016E That is not the correct password.
         OUIPAS017E Password cannot be blank.
         OUIPAS018E Password contains invalid characters.
         OUIPAS019E Passwords can be from two through eight characters long.
         OUIPAS021E New passwords don't match; try again.
         OUIPAS100E Error code [code] from an IUCV function.
         OUIPAS101E An IUCV handler already exists for service name.
                    Communication cannot be established.
         OUIPAS102E An IUCV DECLARE BUFFER has already been issued. CMS IUCV
                    support cannot be initialized.
         OUIPAS103E Service is shutting down and cannot accept requests; try
                    again later.
         OUIPAS104E IUCV message limit exceeded.
         OUIPAS105E IUCV priority messages are not allowed.
         OUIPAS106E Service is not available; try again later.
         OUIPAS107E Service is not running; try again later.
         OUIPAS108E Maximum number of IUCV connections exceeded for your
                    userid.
         OUIPAS109E No service connections are available; try again later.
         OUIPAS110E Not enough storage available.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     170
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        PASXREF
 
         Use the PASXREF command to create a cross-reference of a P8000 Pascal
         program.  PASXREF is not supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PASXREF   | filename                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the source program file.  The filetype of
                   this file must be "PASCAL."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The cross-reference is written into a disk file called "filename
              CROSSREF."
 
          2.  PASXREF may work with programs written for compilers other that
              AAEC P8000.  Some compilers can produce a cross-reference during
              compilation.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     171
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   PAS4C (EXEC)
 
         Use the PAS4C command to compile a program with the P4 Pascal
         compiler.  P4 Pascal is not supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PAS4C     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the Pascal
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "PASCAL."
                   This filename will be used for the TEXT, LISTING, and
                   P4ASSEM files, if they are created.
 
         options   are PASCAL compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  PAS4C is an EXEC that uses the PASCAL command to compile a Pascal
              program.  The object program produced can be executed with the
              PAS4G command.  Refer to the description of the PASCAL command
              for more information.
 
          2.  The PAS4C command will not operate in a virtual machine smaller
              than 600K, but compiled programs can execute in smaller machines.
              You can use the STORAGE command to redefine your storage size if
              necessary.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     172
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  PAS4CG (EXEC)
 
         Use the PAS4CG command to compile and execute a program using the P4
         Pascal compiler.  P4 Pascal is not supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PAS4CG    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the Pascal
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "PASCAL."
                   This filename will be used for the TEXT, LISTING, and
                   P4ASSEM files, if they are created.
 
         options   are PASCAL compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The default P4 Pascal subroutine libraries are used: ZETALIB,
              PASLIB, and CMSLIB.  If you need to use additional libraries or
              load additional object files you must use the PAS4G command to
              execute your program.
 
          2.  The PAS4CG command will not operate in a virtual machine smaller
              than 600K.  You can use the STORAGE command to redefine your
              storage size if necessary.
 
          3.  PAS4CG is an EXEC that uses the PASCAL command to compile a
              Pascal program.  The object program produced is then executed.
              Refer to the description of the PASCAL command for more
              information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     173
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   PAS4G (EXEC)
 
         Use the PAS4G command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the P4 Pascal compiler.  P4 Pascal is not supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PAS4G     | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the P4
                   Pascal (or P4 Pascal compatible) object programs.  The
                   filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  ZETALIB, PASLIB, and CMSLIB.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the executed program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the PAS4C and PASCAL commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     174
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           PEEK
 
         Use the PEEK command to examine a reader spool file with the System
         Product editor (XEDIT).  The spool file cannot be modified, but it can
         be saved as a CMS disk file, with or without modifications.  PEEK can
         be used with reader files in any format, and can be used to examine
         files sent with the NOTE and SENDFILE commands.  PEEK by default
         displays only the first 200 lines of the file (except for files in
         NETDATA or DISK DUMP format which must be displayed in their
         entirety).  This is not a complete description of the functions and
         options available.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PEEK      | [spoolid]  [( [options...] [)]]                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [FRom line]   [FOr lines]                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the file to be examined.  The
                   default is the first file in your reader.
 
         Options
 
         FRom line is the first record to be displayed.  The default is one.
 
         FOr lines is the number of records to be read from the file.
                   Specifying an asterisk causes the entire file to be read.
                   The default is to read up to 200 records.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  PEEK will use a fileid of "spoolid PEEK A0" for the file.  You
              can save the file on disk under another name by issuing the SAVE
              or FILE subcommand with a fileid (e.g., "FILE SAMPLE DATA").
 
          2.  You can use the subcommands BURN and DISCARD to purge the reader
              file and end PEEK.  Both subcommands will send an acknowledgment
              to the originating user if one was requested.
 
          3.  Files in DISK DUMP or NETDATA format are reformatted so that they
              are readable.  However, the entire file must be displayed and it
              must have a logical record length of less than 256 in order to be
              reformatted.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     175
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                            PLC
 
         Use the PLC command to run a program written in PL/I using the Cornell
         PL/CT system.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLC       | in-list [( options... [)]]                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         in-list   is a list of input sources.  This may include fileids and
                   asterisks (which indicate terminal input).  "PLC" is assumed
                   for omitted filetypes, and "*" is assumed for missing
                   filemodes.  "*DATA" and "*PROCESS" may be inserted in the
                   list to indicate the type of information to follow.  The
                   default is input from the terminal.
 
         Options
 
         In addition to the following options, options valid on the *PL/C
         statement may also be specified on the command line.
 
         DISK      causes all output to be written into a disk file named "PLC
                   LISTING".  TERM is the default.
 
         NOSAVE    inhibits saving of source listing lines.
 
         PAUSE     to have your program enter debug mode just prior to program
                   execution.  It is equivalent to pressing "ATTN" just as
                   program execution begins (which is hard to do).  This will
                   give you the opportunity to set PAUSEs in the program prior
                   to execution.
 
         SAVE n    to have PL/CT save a copy of the source listing for display
                   during execution.  Only the first n lines will be saved; if
                   omitted, n defaults to 100.  This feature uses extra
                   storage.
 
         TERM      causes all output to be sent to the terminal.  This is the
                   default.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to PL/CT - User's Guide to the CMS Version (available from the
         MANUAL command) for more information.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     176
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                   PLIC
 
         Use the PLIC command to compile and execute a program with the OS PL/I
         Checkout Compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLIC      | filename [ft [fm]]  [( [options] [/ parameters] [)]]   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the primary input file.
 
         ft        is the filetype of the input file.  The default is "PLI" or
                   "PLIOPT."
 
         fm        is the filemode.  The default is "*."
 
         options   are PL/I Checkout options.
 
         parameters
                   is a character string that is passed to the main procedure
                   of the PL/I program when it is executed.  It is truncated to
                   100 characters and broken into 8-character tokens.
 
         PL/I Checkout Subcommands
 
         ABOVE                Set breakpoints, insert debugging code
         AT                   Set breakpoints, insert debugging code
         CHANGE               Change text in source or logic unit
         CMS                  Enter CMS subset to execute CMS commands
         CORRECT              Make syntax corrections
         COUNT                Count statement executions
         DELETE               Remove text from source
         EDIT                 Enter edit mode
         END                  End edit mode
         ERASE                Remove source statements
         FIND                 Find text in source or logical unit
         GO                   Continue processing
         GROUP                Create logical unit
         HELP                 Help information
         INCREMENT            Specify increment between statements
         insert/replace       Insert or replace source code
         LIST                 Type source code, mods, logical units
         LISTCOUNT            Type the count information
         MONITOR              Copy file output to the terminal
         NOCOUNT              End counting
         NOMONITOR            End monitoring
         NOVERIFY             End verifying
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     177
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                   PLIC
 
         OFF                  Remove breakpoints
         OPTIONS              Change or examine compiler options
         QUALIFY              Change scope of immediate input
         REFERENCE            Obtain attributes, cross reference
         RENUMBER             Renumber the source
         RESUME               Continue processing
         RETRANSLATE          Retranslate and execute
         SAVE                 Save current version as a CMS file
         STEP                 Specify number of statements to execute
         VERIFY               Have effects of CHANGE, CORRECT, DELETE,
                              and FIND typed at the terminal
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  For more information about the PL/I Checkout Compiler, see the OS
              PL/I Checkout Compiler CMS User's Guide.  A summary is available
              online from the MANUAL command.
 
          2.  Use the PLICR command to execute a program previously compiled
              with either the Checkout or Optimizing compiler.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     178
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                  PLICR
 
         Use the PLICR command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the PL/I Checkout or Optimizing compiler.  PLICR uses the Checkout
         debugging facilities.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLICR     | filename [filename...] [( [options] [/ parameters] [)]]|
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is one or more filenames of TEXT files produced by the PL/I
                   Checkout or Optimizing compiler.
 
         options   are PL/I Checkout options.
 
         parameters
                   is a character string that is passed to the main procedure
                   of the PL/I program when it is executed.  It is truncated to
                   100 characters and broken into 8-character tokens.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  PLICR provides the same subcommands as the PLIC command.
 
          2.  For more information about the PL/I Checkout Compiler, see the OS
              PL/I Checkout Compiler CMS User's Guide.  A summary is available
              online from the MANUAL command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     179
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLIOPT
 
         Use the PLIOPT command to compile a program with the IBM PL/I
         Optimizing Compiler.  The PLIXCG, PLIXC, and PLIXG commands are
         available for use with PL/I programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLIOPT    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the PL/I
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "PLI" or
                   "PLIOPT."  This filename will be used for the TEXT and
                   LISTING files, if they are created.
 
         Options
 
         A [(FULL|SHORT)]
                   controls the production of an attribute listing.  NA is the
                   default.
 
         AG        causes the production of an aggregate length table.  NAG is
                   the default.
 
         CHARSET ([48|60] [EBCDIC|BCD])
                   specifies the character set used in the source program.
                   Refer to the PL/I User's Guide for more information.  The
                   default is CHARSET(60 EBCDIC).
 
         Compile   causes the compiler to continue unless an unrecoverable
                   error is encountered.  NC(S) is the default.
 
         CONTROL ('password')
                   allows deleted options to be specified.  Refer to the PL/I
                   User's Guide for more information.
 
         COUNT     causes code to be generated that will count the times each
                   statement is executed.  COUNT implies GONUMBER or GOSTMT.
                   NOCOUNT is the default.
 
         CS        is the same as CHARSET.
 
         CT        is the same as COUNT.
 
         Deck      causes the object program to be sent to the virtual punch.
                   NODECK is the default.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     180
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLIOPT
 
         DIsk      causes the compiler listing to be written into a file named
                   "filename LISTING".  This is the default.
 
         DUmp      causes a dump to be produced if the compiler terminates
                   abnormally.  NODUMP is the default.
 
         ESD       causes an external symbol dictionary to be produced.  NOESD
                   is the default.
 
         Flag [(I|W|E|S)]
                   indicates the level of diagnostic messages to be produced.
                   FLAG (W), the default, allows warning, error, and severe
                   error messages to be produced.  FLAG (E) allows only error
                   and severe error messages.  FLAG (S) allows only severe
                   error messages.  FLAG (I) allows informational messages to
                   be produced along with all other classes.
 
         FLOW [(n m)]
                   controls the tracing of flow of control during execution.
                   The two arguments specify the number of transfers of control
                   that will be listed for statements and for procedures.
                   NOFLOW is the default.
 
         GONUMBER  causes source program statement numbers to be included in
                   execution-time messages.  GONUMBER implies the NUMBER
                   option.  NGN is the default.
 
         GOSTMT    is similar to GONUMBER, but implies the STMT option.  NGS is
                   the default.
 
         IMP       generates extra code to correctly handle imprecise
                   interruptions on IBM 360/91, 360/195, and 370/195
                   processors.  NIMP is the default.
 
         INClude   allows %INCLUDE statements to appear in the source program
                   without the overhead of the full preprocessor.  The MACRO
                   option overrides INCLUDE.  NINC is the default.
 
         INSOURCE  causes a source listing (including preprocessor statements)
                   to be generated.  This only applies when MACRO is specified.
                   This is the default.
 
         INT       allows ATTENTION on-units to function.  NINT is the default.
 
         LC (n)    indicates the number of lines on each page of compiler
                   listing output (ranging from 1 to 32767).  The default is LC
                   (55).
 
         LIST [(m n)]
                   causes the generated object code to be listed.  A range of
                   statement numbers may be specified with "m" and "n."  NOLIST
                   is the default.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     181
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLIOPT
 
         LMESSAGE  causes long-form messages to be produced.  SMESSAGE is the
                   default.
 
         Macro     causes the preprocessor to be used.  NOMACRO is the default.
 
         MAP       causes a storage map to be generated.  NOMAP is the default.
 
         MARGINI ('c')
                   causes the margins to be marked in the listing with the
                   specified character.  NMI is the default.
 
         MARgins (l r [c])
                   are the left and right margins on source records.  The third
                   parameter is the column that contains ANS carriage control
                   characters.  The default for source files with fixed-length
                   records is MARGINS (2 72 1); for files with variable-length
                   records the default is MARGINS (10 100 0).
 
         MDeck     causes the output of the preprocessor to be sent to the
                   virtual punch.  NOMDECK is the default.
 
         NA        See the A (attributes) option.
 
         NAG       See the AG (aggregate) option.
 
         NAME ('name')
                   causes the object program to be assigned the specified name.
                   Names are limited to six characters.  There is no default
                   value.
 
         NC [(W|E|S)]
                   causes compilation to stop if a warning, error, or severe
                   error is detected.  NC (S) is the default.  Also see the
                   COMPILE option.
 
         NEST      causes nesting levels to be indicated on the listing.
                   NONEST is the default.
 
         NONUMBER  See the NUMBER option.
 
         NOOBJECT  See the OBJECT option.
 
         NOPRInt   suppresses the compiler listing.  DISK is the default.
 
         NOPT      See the OPTIMIZE option.
 
         NSEQ      See the SEQUENCE option.
 
         NSYN [(W|E|S)]
                   causes syntax checking to stop if a warning, error, or
                   severe error is detected.  NSYN (S) is the default.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     182
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLIOPT
 
         NTERM     suppresses output to the terminal during compilation.
 
         NUMber    causes sequence numbers on the source records to be used as
                   statement numbers.  This is the default.  Also see the
                   SEQUENCE option.
 
         OBJect [(filename)]
                   causes the object program to be written to a disk file named
                   "filename TEXT".  The default filename is the filename of
                   the source file.  OBJECT is the default.
 
         OFfset    causes a table of offsets to be produced.  NOOFFSET is the
                   default.
 
         OPTimize (TIME|0|2)
                   specifies the optimization level (0 or 2).  TIME is the same
                   as 2.  The default is OPTIMIZE (0), which is the same as
                   NOOPTIMIZE.
 
         OPtions   causes a complete list of options to be included in the
                   compiler listing.  NOP is the default.
 
         OSDeck    specifies that the object program will be executed under OS
                   rather than CMS.
 
         PRInt     causes the compiler listing to be sent to the virtual
                   printer.  DISK is the default.
 
         SEQuence (m n)
                   specifies that sequence numbers are included on source
                   program records.  The default for source files with fixed-
                   length records is SEQUENCE (73 80); for files with variable-
                   length records the default is SEQUENCE (1 8).
 
         SIZE (n|nK|MAX)
                    controls the use of storage by the compiler.  The default,
                   SIZE (MAX), should be used.
 
         SMESSAGE  causes short-form messages to be produced.  This is the
                   default.
 
         Source    causes the source program to be included in the compiler
                   listing.  NOSOURCE is the default.
 
         STMT      causes the actual statement numbers rather than input
                   sequence numbers to be used to number statements.  NOSTMT is
                   the default.  STMT is implied by NONUMBER and GOSTMT.
 
         STORAGE   causes storage requirements to be included in the compiler
                   listing.  NSTG is the default.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     183
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLIOPT
 
         SYNtax    causes the compiler to continue syntax checking unless an
                   unrecoverable error is encountered.  NSYN (S) is the
                   default.
 
         TERMinal [(options)]
                   is used to direct output from selected options to the
                   terminal.  The default is to display diagnostic messages.
 
         TYpe      causes the compiler listing to be directed to the terminal.
                   DISK is the default.
 
         Xref [(FULL|SHORT)]
                   causes a cross-reference to be generated.  XREF(SHORT)
                   causes unreferenced identifiers to be omitted.  NOXREF is
                   the default.
 
         Usage Note
 
          1.  Detailed information about using the PL/I Optimizer can be found
              in the OS PL/I Optimizing Compiler: CMS User's Guide.  The PL/I
              language is described in the OS and DOS PL/I Language Reference
              Manual.
 
          2.  If you use %INCLUDE statements in your PL/I program, you must
              define the libraries to be searched before you issue the PLIOPT
              command.  Members to be copied may be in CMS MACLIB's or OS
              partitioned data sets (or both).  To use a CMS MACLIB, use the
              following command:
 
                   GLOBAL MACLIB libname
 
              You must specify either INCLUDE or MACRO on the PLIOPT command.
              If you use the form "%INCLUDE libname member" rather than
              "%INCLUDE member," you must also issue a FILEDEF:
 
                   FILEDEF libname DISK libname MACLIB *
                   GLOBAL MACLIB libname
 
              Refer to the description of the GLOBAL and MACLIB commands for
              more information.
 
          3.  Before loading your PL/I program, you must define any subroutine
              libraries required (including the PL/I Optimizer library).  For
              example:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB PLILIB
                   LOAD filename ( START
 
              The PL/I standard files SYSIN, SYSPRINT, and PLIDUMP are defined
              by the PL/I run-time system.  SYSIN and SYSPRINT are assigned to
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     184
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLIOPT
 
              the terminal, and PLIDUMP is assigned to the printer.  If your
              program performs any input or output operations with other files
              you must use FILEDEF commands to define the files or devices to
              be used before execution.
 
          4.  You can create modules from PL/I programs using the following
              commands:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB PLILIB
                   LOAD filename
                   GENMOD name ( FROM PLISTART
 
              The FROM PLISTART option must be specified on the GENMOD command.
              Since some library routines are loaded dynamically, the PLILIB
              TXTLIB must be available when the module is executed.
 
          5.  Parameters can be passed from the command line to the PL/I run-
              time environment and to the PL/I program with the START command:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB PLILIB
                   LOAD filename
                   START * execution-time options / program parameters
 
              All blanks are removed from the parameters before they are passed
              to the program.  The execution-time options are described in the
              PL/I User's Guide.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     185
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   PLIXC (EXEC)
 
         Use the PLIXC command to compile a program with the IBM PL/I
         Optimizing compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLIXC     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the PL/I
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "PLI" or
                   "PLIOPT."  This filename will be used for the TEXT and
                   LISTING files, if they are created.
 
         options   are PLIOPT compiler options.
 
         Usage Note
 
         PLIXC is an EXEC that uses the PLIOPT command to compile a PL/I
         program.  The object program produced can be executed with the PLIXG
         command.  Refer to the description of the PLIOPT command for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     186
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  PLIXCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the PLIXCG command to compile and execute a program using the IBM
         PL/I Optimizing compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLIXCG    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the PL/I
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "PLI" or
                   "PLIOPT."  This filename will be used for the TEXT and
                   LISTING files, if they are created.
 
         options   are PLIOPT compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The default PL/I Optimizer subroutine libraries are used: PLILIB
              and CMSLIB.  If you need to use additional libraries or load
              additional object files you must use the PLIXG command to execute
              your program.
 
          2.  PLIXCG is an EXEC that uses the PLIOPT command to compile a PL/I
              program.  The object program produced is then executed.  Refer to
              the description of the PLIOPT command for more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     187
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   PLIXG (EXEC)
 
         Use the PLIXG command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the IBM PL/I Optimizing compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLIXG     | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the PL/I
                   Optimizer (or PL/I Optimizer compatible) object programs.
                   The filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  PLILIB and CMSLIB.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the PL/I execution
                   environment and the executed program.  Use a "/" to mark the
                   start of the parameters for the program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the PLIXC and PLIOPT commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     188
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           PLOT
 
         Use the PLOT command to send a CMS disk file containing Zeta Graphic
         Machine Language (GML) instructions to be plotted on the Zeta plotter
         in the UKCC Computer Room.  The GML data file may be produced with the
         standard plotting subroutines.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         | PLOT      | |fn   |ft   |fm|||  [(options... [)]]                  |
         |           | |LAST |PLOT |* |||                                     |
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +         +                                            |
         |           | |Zeta     |                                            |
         |           | |Type     |                                            |
         |           | |Terminal |                                            |
         |           | |TO userid|                                            |
         |           | +         +                                            |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        specifies the filename of a file to be plotted.  "LAST" is
                   the default.
 
         ft        specifies the filetype of the file.  "PLOT" is the default.
 
         fm        specifies the filemode of the file.  "*" is the default.
 
         Options
 
         Terminal  is a synonym for TYPE.
 
         TO userid sends the data to a user rather than plotting.
 
         Type      displays the data at the terminal rather than plotting.
 
         Zeta      sends the data to be plotted on the Zeta plotter at the UK
                   Computing Center.  This is the default.  Plotter output may
                   be picked up at the UKCC Data Center. (The runid is required
                   to claim output.)
 
         PLOT Control Statements
 
         Control statements must be in uppercase and begin in column one.
 
          ..*      is a comment.  PLOT discards this line.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     189
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           PLOT
 
          ..END    marks the end of the data in a file.  PLOT will not read
                   past this point in the file.
 
          ..EOF    is the same as END.
 
          ..INClude fn [ft [fm]]
                   includes another file in the output.  The default filetype
                   and filemode are taken from the including file.  The
                   specified file is inserted into the output at the point
                   where the INCLUDE statement is found.  The CMS disk files
                   are not altered.  This is used to combine several plots in
                   separate CMS disk files into a single plotted output.
 
          ..READ   reads a single line from your terminal when the statement is
                   encountered.  The data read from the terminal is discarded.
 
          ..TYPE text
                   displays the text at your terminal.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Data from the input files is truncated to 80 characters.  The
              Zeta plotter uses only the first 64 characters of each line.
 
          2.  More information about plotting at the University of Kentucky
              Computing Center can be found in the UKCC Plotting Manual (Third
              Edition), available at the University Bookstore in the Student
              Center on the Lexington campus.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSPLT002E Input file "fileid" not found.  RC=28
         DMSPLT003E "name" is not a valid option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT029E Missing parameter for the name option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT070E "name" is not a parameter.  RC=24
         DMSPLT104S Error n reading file "fileid".  RC=100
         DMSPLT911E Include statement in error:  RC=99
         DMSPLT946E I/O error (code n) writing to punch.  RC=100
         DMSPLT984E Attempt to include an included file from "fileid".  RC=24
 
         Messages will also be sent by the plotting system to acknowledge
         receipt of your file.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     190
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLOTAJ
 
         Use the PLOTAJ command to draw a plot on an Anderson Jacobson 832 or
         833 terminal with the Ultraplot option.  The input file must contain
         Zeta Graphic Machine Language (GML) instructions, as produced by the
         standard plotting subroutines.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         | PLOTAJ    | |fn   |ft   |fm||| [( options... [)]]                  |
         |           | |LAST |PLOT |* |||                                     |
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
       | |           | [Xstart x]   [Ystart y]   [Height h]                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        specifies the filename of the file to be plotted.  If not
                   specified, "LAST" will be assumed.
 
         ft        specifies the filetype of the file to be plotted.  If not
                   specified, "PLOT" will be assumed.
 
         fm        specifies the filemode of the file to be plotted.  If
                   omitted, the default value is "*".
 
         Options
 
         The XSTART, YSTART, and HEIGHT options may be specified, but are
         ignored.  These options are supported by the PLOTHP and PLOTTEK
         commands.  No clipping is done by PLOTAJ.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  If you are using an Anderson Jacobson 833 terminal you should
              issue the AJ833 command before using PLOTAJ.
 
          2.  The data file may contain either fixed-length or variable-length
              records.  Only the first 64 characters of each record will be
              used.
 
          3.  The plotted output may be interrupted with the HT and HX
              commands, but doing so will leave the terminal in plot mode.
              Type ESC (escape) N to return to normal mode.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     191
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLOTAJ
 
          4.  More information about plotting at the University of Kentucky
              Computing Center may be found in the UKCC Plotting Manual (Third
              Edition), available at the University Bookstore in the Student
              Center on the Lexington campus.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSPLT002E File "fileid" does not exist.  RC=28
         DMSPLT003E "name" is not a valid option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT029E Invalid value "value" in the name option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT069E Disk "mode" not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSPLT070E "name" is an extraneous parameter.  RC=24
         DMSPLT938E Error n from FILEDEF.  RC=n
         DMSPLY988I PLOTAJ starting...
         DMSPLY989I PLOTAJ finished: Min X=n Max X=n Min Y=n Max Y=n
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     192
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLOTHP
 
         Use the PLOTHP command to draw a plot on a Hewlett Packard 2647a
         graphics terminal.  The input file must contain Zeta Graphic Machine
         Language (GML) instructions, as produced by the standard plotting
         subroutines.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         | PLOTHP    | |fn   |ft   |fm||| [( options... [)]]                  |
         |           | |LAST |PLOT |* |||                                     |
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
       | |           | [Xstart x]   [Ystart y]   [Height h]                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        specifies the filename of the file to be plotted.  If not
                   specified, "LAST" will be assumed.
 
         ft        specifies the filetype of the file to be plotted.  If not
                   specified, "PLOT" will be assumed.
 
         fm        specifies the filemode of the file to be plotted.  If
                   omitted, the default value is "*".
 
         Options
 
       | Height h  gives the length that will be scaled to fit the height of
                   the screen.  Vectors above YSTART+HEIGHT or to the right of
                   XSTART+2*HEIGHT will be clipped.  If not specified, +12.0 is
                   assumed.
 
       | Xstart x  specifies the minimum X value to be plotted.  Vectors to the
                   left of this value will be clipped.  If not specified, 0.0
                   is used.
 
       | Ystart y  specifies the minimum Y value to be plotted.  Vectors below
                   this value will be clipped.  If not specified, 0.0 is used.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The data file may contain either fixed or variable-length
              records.  Only the first 64 characters of each record will be
              used.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     193
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLOTHP
 
          2.  XSTART, YSTART, and HEIGHT should be specified in inches.
              Together they define the clipping window.  The default values
              will draw a section of the plot 12 inches high by 24 inches wide
              on the screen.  If the plot is longer than this, use the XSTART
              option to view the next section (e.g., XSTART 24).
 
          3.  More information about plotting at the University of Kentucky
              Computing Center may be found in the UKCC Plotting Manual (Third
              Edition), available at the University Bookstore in the Student
              Center on the Lexington campus.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSPLT002E File "fileid" does not exist.  RC=28
         DMSPLT003E "name" is not a valid option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT029E Invalid value "value" in the name option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT069E Disk "mode" not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSPLT070E "name" is an extraneous parameter.  RC=24
         DMSPLT938E Error n from FILEDEF.  RC=n
         DMSPLY988I PLOTHP starting...
         DMSPLY989I PLOTHP finished: Min X=n Max X=n Min Y=n Max Y=n
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     194
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        PLOTTEK
 
         Use the PLOTTEK command to draw a plot on a Tektronix graphics
         terminal.  The input file must contain Zeta Graphic Machine Language
         (GML) instructions, as produced by the standard plotting subroutines.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         | PLOTTEK   | |fn   |ft   |fm||| [( options... [)]]                  |
         |           | |LAST |PLOT |* |||                                     |
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
       | |           | [Xstart x]   [Ystart y]   [Height h]                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        specifies the filename of the file to be plotted.  If not
                   specified, "LAST" will be assumed.
 
         ft        specifies the filetype of the file to be plotted.  If not
                   specified, "PLOT" will be assumed.
 
         fm        specifies the filemode of the file to be plotted.  If
                   omitted, the default value is "*".
 
         Options
 
       | Height h  gives the length that will be scaled to fit the height of
                   the screen.  Vectors above YSTART+HEIGHT or to the right of
                   XSTART+1.31*HEIGHT will be clipped.  If not specified, +12.0
                   will be used.
 
       | Xstart x  specifies the minimum X value to be plotted.  Vectors to the
                   left of this value will be clipped.  If not specified, 0.0
                   is used.
 
       | Ystart y  specifies the minimum Y value to be plotted.  Vectors below
                   this value will be clipped.  If not specified, 0.0 is used.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The data file may contain either fixed or variable-length
              records.  Only the first 64 characters of each record will be
              used.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     195
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        PLOTTEK
 
          2.  XSTART, YSTART, and HEIGHT should be specified in inches.
              Together they define the clipping window.  The default values
              will draw a section of the plot 12 inches high by 15.72 inches
              wide on the screen.  If the plot is longer than this, use the
              XSTART option to view the next section (e.g., XSTART 15.73).
 
          3.  At the end of the plot, PLOTTEK will sound the alarm, then
              "sleep" until RETURN is pressed.  It will then print the
              termination message and exit.
 
          4.  More information about plotting at the University of Kentucky
              Computing Center may be found in the UKCC Plotting Manual (Third
              Edition), available at the University Bookstore in the Student
              Center on the Lexington campus.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSPLT002E File "fileid" does not exist.  RC=28
         DMSPLT003E "name" is not a valid option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT029E Invalid value "value" in the name option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT069E Disk "mode" not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSPLT070E "name" is an extraneous parameter.  RC=24
         DMSPLT938E Error n from FILEDEF.  RC=n
         DMSPLY988I PLOTTEK starting...
         DMSPLY989I PLOTTEK finished: Min X=n Max X=n Min Y=n Max Y=n
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     196
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  PRHELP (EXEC)
 
         Use the PRHELP command to generate a printer spool file from a CMS
         HELP file.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PRHELP    | topic                                                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         topic     is the HELP file to be printed.  It is specified exactly the
                   same as for the HELP command.
 
         Usage Note
 
         The SETPRT command should be issued before you use PRHELP, to set the
         destination and attributes of the printed output.  For example:
 
              SETPRT FORMS NT
              PRHELP topic
 
         will cause the HELP file to be printed in the UKCC Computer Room using
         narrow, unlined paper.  A group of files could be printed together by
         issuing the commands:
 
              SETPRT GROUP
              PRHELP first
              PRHELP second
               .
               .
               .
              SETPRT ENDGROUP FORMS NT
              SETPRT
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
       | Messages may be produced by the CMS commands STATE, EXECIO, and PRINT.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     197
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          PRINT
 
         Use the PRINT command to generate a printer spool file from a CMS disk
         file.  This is only a summary of the most frequently needed options
         and functions of the PRINT command, not a complete description.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                   +        +                           |
         | PRINT     | filename filetype |filemode|  [( [options...] [)]]     |
         |           |                   |A       |                           |
         |           |                   +        +                           |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +    +                                                 |
         |           | |NOCC|                                                 |
         |           | |CC  |                                                 |
         |           | +    +                                                 |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the file to be printed.
 
         filetype  is the filetype of the file to be printed.
 
         filemode  is the filemode of the file to be printed.  The default is
                   "A."
 
         Options
 
         CC        causes the first character of each record from the file to
       |           be interpreted as a carriage control character (see the
       |           Usage Notes).  CC is the default if the filetype is
                   "LISTING."
 
         NOCC      will not use carriage control information from the file.
                   The PRINT command will control spacing and will print page
                   headings for each file printed.  NOCC is the default unless
                   the filetype is "LISTING."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The CMS SETPRT command should be issued before the PRINT command
              to set routing and other options.  For example, to print a file
              on the UKCC hands-on (HOT) printer, enter the commands:
 
                   SETPRT ROUTE HOT
                   PRINT a file
 
          2.  A group of files can be printed together with the commands:
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     198
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          PRINT
 
                   SETPRT GROUP
                   PRINT first file
                   PRINT second file
                    ...
                   SETPRT ENDGROUP CLOSE SPACE W ROUTE HOT
                   SETPRT
 
              The "SPACE W" option causes each file to begin on a new listing
       |      page.  Groups of files may also be printed with the aid of the
       |      LISTFILE or LISTX "EXEC" option.  These commands would print all
              files modified since the beginning of 1981:
 
                   SETPRT GROUP
                   LISTX ( FROM 01/01/81 EXEC
                   CMS PRINT
                   SETPRT ENDGROUP SPACE W ROUTE HOT
                   SETPRT
 
              Note that any SETPRT options specified with the GROUP option are
              overridden when SETPRT is later issued with the ENDGROUP option.
 
          3.  Both American National Standard (ANS) and IBM machine carriage
              control characters are allowed.  Invalid carriage control
              characters have unpredictable results.  The following are valid
              ANS control characters under CMS:
 
              Graphic  Hex Value  Meaning
              [blank]     40      Space 1 line before printing.
                 0        F0      Space 2 lines before printing.
                 -        60      Space 3 lines before printing.
                 +        4E      Space no lines before printing (overprint).
                 1        F1      Skip to channel 1 before printing (new page).
 
          4.  PRINT has additional options and functions.  Refer to the VM/SP
              CMS Command and Macro Reference or online HELP for details.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     199
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  PUBLIC (EXEC)
 
       | Use the PUBLIC command to link and access the Public disk.  After you
         have issued the PUBLIC command, you may issue "HELP PUBLIC MENU" for a
         list of things available on the disk.  Nothing on the Public disk is
         supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PUBLIC    | [mode]                                                 |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         mode      is the mode used to access the Public disk.  The default
                   mode is "Z."  The mode may be specified as with the ACCESS
                   command.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The Public disk contains EXEC's, XEDIT macros, and other
              contributions from users.  Items on the Public disk are not
              subjected to extensive testing by the UKCC, and the UKCC will not
              provide any support for them.  You should evaluate an item before
              using it.  Each item on the Public disk is required to have a
              Help file which will identify the contributor.  The contributor
              should be contacted if you have suggestions or complaints about
              an item.  Contact the User Services Group at the UKCC for
              information on contributing to the Public disk.
 
          2.  If it is present, the PUBLIC MEMO is typed at the terminal by the
              PUBLIC command.  The PUBLIC MEMO is used to alert you to
              important information about the Public disk.
 
          3.  If you regularly use files on the Public disk you may want to
              have it accessed automatically when you log on.  This can be done
              by placing "EXEC PUBLIC" in your PROFILE EXEC.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Messages may be issued by the ACCESS command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     200
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                             PW
 
         Use the PW command to run a program with Waterloo Pascal.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PW        | [-D] filename                                          |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         -D        indicates that the interactive debugger is to be used.  When
                   this is specified the interactive debugger will take control
                   immediately before your program begins execution.  The
                   subcommands supported by this facility are listed in the
                   Usage Notes.
 
         filename  is the filename of the input file.  The filetype of this
                   file must be "PASCAL."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Refer to the Waterloo Pascal User's Guide and Language
              Description (available from the MANUAL command) for more
              information.
 
          2.  The interactive debugger supports the following subcommands (only
              the first letter of each subcommand need be entered):
 
                   Breakpoint List
                   Breakpoint Reset [id]
                   Breakpoint Set [line-range | routine | *]
                   Display [variable | *]
                   Go
                   Help
                   Quit
                   Single Reset
                   Single Set
                   Trace List
                   Trace Reset [id]
                   Trace Set [line-range | routine | *]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     201
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          P8000
 
         Use the P8000 command to compile a program using the AAEC P8000 Pascal
         compiler.  P8000 is not supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | P8000     | filename [(options... [)]]                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the input file.  The filetype of this
                   file must be "PASCAL."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Execution requires the following libraries:
 
                   P8000 FORTLIB FORTEEH TSOLIB CMSLIB
 
          2.  No additional information is available at this time.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     202
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                             QUERY (CMS and CP)
 
         Use the QUERY command to gather information about your userid and the
         setting of various options.  There are distinct CMS and CP QUERY
         commands, but the CMS QUERY command will pass unrecognized parameters
         to the CP QUERY command if IMPCP is ON.  In most cases QUERY can be
         considered to be a CMS command.  This description includes the most
         often needed parameters of both commands.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | Query     | function [( option [)]]                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | CP Functions:               CMS Functions:             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Files                       ABBREV                     |
         |           | Links address               DISK [*|mode|R+W|MAX]      |
         |           | LOGmsg                      FILEDEF                    |
       | |           | Names                       IMMEDIATe                  |
         |           | PF[nn]                      IMPCP                      |
       | |           | RATE                        IMPEX                      |
         |           | Rdr [ALL]                   INPUT                      |
         |           | Reader [ALL]                OUTPUT                     |
         |           | Set                         SEARCH                     |
         |           | TERMinal                    SYNONYM [SYSTEM|USER|ALL]  |
         |           | Time                                                   |
         |           | USERID                                                 |
         |           | Users [userid]                                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +                 +                                    |
         |           | |STACK [FIFO|LIFO]|                                    |
         |           | |FIFO             |                                    |
         |           | |LIFO             |                                    |
         |           | +                 +                                    |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         (Each function is marked "CMS" or "CP" to indicate the command used.)
 
         ABBREV    (CMS) checks whether abbreviations are accepted for CMS
                   command names.  The initial setting is "ON".  This is
                   controlled with the SET ABBREV command.
 
         DISK [*|mode|R/W|MAX]
                   (CMS) displays information about accessed minidisks.  The
                   default (*) is to display all accessed minidisks.  You may
                   specify a single access mode letter, "R/W" (for all writable
                   minidisks), or "MAX" (for the writable minidisk with the
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     203
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                             QUERY (CMS and CP)
 
                   most available space).  The ACCESS command is used to
                   control the accessibility of minidisks.
 
         FILEDEF   (CMS) displays information about file definitions made with
                   the FILEDEF command.
 
         Files     (CP) displays the number of spool files owned by your
                   userid.
 
         IMMEDIATE (CMS) checks whether the CMS immediate commands (HT, HX,
                   etc.)  will be recognized.  The initial setting is "ON".
                   This is controlled with the SET IMMEDIATE command.
 
         IMPCP     (CMS) checks whether commands not recognized by CMS are
                   implied to be CP commands.  The initial setting is "ON".
                   When IMPCP is off, CP commands must be prefixed with "CP",
                   or be issued from the CP environment.  CP commands in an
                   EXEC file must be prefixed by "CP" regardless of the IMPCP
                   setting (except for QUERY with a stacking option specified).
                   IMPCP is controlled with the SET IMPCP command.
 
         IMPEX     (CMS) checks whether all commands are implied to be EXEC
                   names.  The initial setting is "ON".  When IMPEX is off,
                   EXEC names must be prefixed with "EXEC".  Regardless of the
                   IMPEX setting, all EXEC names must be prefixed with "EXEC"
                   when called from another EXEC.  IMPCP is controlled with the
                   SET IMPCP command.
 
         INPUT     (CMS) displays any input translations in effect.  The
                   initial setting is to have no input translations.  This is
                   controlled with the SET INPUT command.
 
         Links address
                   (CP) displays the userids that currently have links to your
                   minidisk with virtual device address "address".  Other users
                   use the LINK command to link to your minidisks.  You use the
                   AUTOLINK command to authorize and control these links.
 
         LOGmsg    (CP) displays the current system log messages.  These
                   messages are set by the system support staff to announce
                   system changes and specially scheduled down-time.  A very
                   brief summary of the current log messages is displayed at
                   your terminal each time you log on or reconnect to the
                   system.  The log message will be empty if there are no
                   announcements.  The NEWS command displays this information
                   in a more useful form.
 
       | Names     (CP) displays a list of all logged-on users along with the
       |           addresses (real or logical) of their terminals.
       |           Disconnected users are indicated by DSC.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     204
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                             QUERY (CMS and CP)
 
         OUTPUT    (CMS) displays any existing output translations.  The
                   initial setting is no output translations.  This is
                   controlled with the CASE and SET OUTPUT commands.
 
         PF[nn]    (CP) displays the current setting of the Program Function
                   keys, or a single specified PF key.  All undefined PF keys
                   will function as if set to the RETRIEVE command.  Only
                   3270-type and 3101 terminals have PF keys that are supported
                   by VM/SP.  PF keys are set with the SET PFnn command.
 
       | RATE      (CP) displays the current rate period: DAY, NIGHT, WEEKEND,
       |           or HOLIDAY.  Additional text (like the name of a holiday)
       |           may follow the rate indicator.  The RATES command displays
       |           the rate period and the rate actually charged.
 
         Reader [ALL]
         Rdr [ALL] (CP) displays a list of reader spool files.  The ALL
                   parameter causes more extensive information to be displayed
                   for each file.
 
         SEARCH    (CMS) displays the accessed minidisks in the search order.
                   This information is a subset of that displayed by the QUERY
                   DISK command.
 
         Set       (CP) displays the current values of the CP SET command.
 
         SYNONYM [SYSTEM|USER|ALL]
                   (CMS) displays the defined CMS command synonyms.  Synonyms
                   may be defined with the SYNONYM command.
 
         TERMinal  (CP) displays the current setting of the CP TERMINAL
                   command.
 
         Time      (CP) displays the current date and time (Lexington, Kentucky
                   local time).
 
         USERID    (CP) displays your userid and the node name of the computer
                   system (if a node name has been assigned).
 
         Users [userid]
                   (CP) displays either the number of users logged on to the
                   system, or the current status of a particular userid.
 
         Options:
 
         Options are accepted by the CMS QUERY command, but not by the CP QUERY
         command.  However, if the parameters are passed to CP by the CMS QUERY
         command the options will be honored.
 
         FIFO      is a synonym for STACK FIFO.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     205
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                             QUERY (CMS and CP)
 
         LIFO      is a synonym for STACK LIFO.
 
         STACK [FIFO|LIFO]
                   stacks the responses from the QUERY command (rather than
                   typing them).  Error messages are never stacked and are
                   typed even if STACK is specified.  The default stacking
                   order is FIFO.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Only one function may be specified.
 
          2.  The QUERY command must be prefixed by "CP" to use the CP QUERY
              functions from an EXEC, unless a STACK option is specified and
              SET IMPCP is ON.
 
          3.  Both the CP and CMS QUERY commands have additional functions.
              For more information refer to the VM/SP CP Command Reference for
              General Users, the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro Reference, or
              online HELP.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Messages may be produced by either the CP or the CMS QUERY command.
         If the command is processed by CP, the return code is set to either
         zero or the message number of the error message issued.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     206
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          RATES
 
         Use the RATES command to obtain the current rate period and rates.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RATEs     | [(  [Type] [Stack] [)]]                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Options
 
         Type      specifies that the rate data is to be typed on the terminal.
                   This is the default.
 
         Stack     specifies that the rate data is to be placed on the console
                   stack in a last in, first out order.
 
         Usage Note
 
         When the STACK option is specified a single line containing five items
         is stacked:
 
           +                                    +
         * |Internal [day|night|holiday|weekend]|  cpurate  iorate
           |External base                       |
           +                                    +
 
         The CPU rate is specified as dollars (and cents) per virtual CPU hour;
         the I/O rate is dollars (and cents) per 1000 I/O operations.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSRAT003E "string" is not a valid option.  RC=24
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     207
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        RBROWSE
 
         Use the RBROWSE command to examine a reader spool file from a
         3270-type display terminal.  RBROWSE is a read-only editor based on
         the BROWSE command and supports a similar set of subcommands.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RBrowse   | [spoolid] [( [options...] [)]]                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Help fn]  [Profile [([fn [ft [fm [)]]]]]]             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Noclear]                                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the reader spool file to be
                   examined.  If this parameter is not specified the first file
                   in the reader will be used.
 
         Options
 
         Help fn   specifies the name of an EXEC to be called by the /HELP
                   subcommand.  The default name is "HRBROWSE."
 
         Profile (fn ft fm)
                   specifies a file to be used as the RBROWSE  profile.  The
                   default is "RBROWSE $PROFILE *."
 
         Noclear   suppresses clearing the screen on entry to RBROWSE.
 
         Usage Notes
 
         RBROWSE supports an RBROWSE $PROFILE, subcommands, and keyboard
         functions like the BROWSE command.  RBROWSE does not have DICT, ENTER,
         and MEMBER subcommands.  It allows PURGE as a synonym for BURN.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         RBROWSE does not issue error messages, but uses these return codes:
 
            1  Console not a 3270-type terminal.
            2  Insufficient free storage available.
           28  File not found.
         1xxx  Error xxx reading input file.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     208
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 RDRCOST (EXEC)
 
         Use the RDRCOST command to display information and estimated charges
         for one or more reader spool files.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +       +                                              |
         | RDRCOST   | |ALL    |                                              |
         |           | |spoolid|                                              |
         |           | |*      |                                              |
         |           | +       +                                              |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ALL       indicates that information about all reader files is to be
                   displayed.  This is the default.
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the reader file to be displayed.
 
         *         indicates that information on the first reader file is to be
                   displayed.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The block count and charges given by the RDRCOST command are
              estimates determined by the number of lines in the file and an
              estimated average line length based on the type of the file
              (print, punch, etc.).  Obtaining more accurate figures entails so
              much system overhead that it is impractical.
 
          2.  RDRCOST will not find a held reader file unless ALL is specified.
 
          3.  If a specific spool file number is given, the specified file
              becomes the first file in your reader.
 
          4.  RDRCOST uses the STKXRDR command with the COST parameter to
              obtain information about spool files.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSKXR070E "parm" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
         DMSRDR655E There are no files in your reader.  RC=28
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     209
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         RENAME
 
         Use the RENAME command to change the fileid of a CMS disk file.  This
         is only a summary of the most frequently needed function of the RENAME
         command, not a complete description.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RENAME    | fileid1 fileid2                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fileid1   is the filename, filetype, and filemode of the file to be
                   renamed.  Any part of the fileid may be specified as "*" to
                   indicate a group of files matching the other parts of the
                   fileid.
 
         fileid2   is the new filename, filetype, and filemode.  Equal signs
                   may be used to indicate portions of the fileid that are to
                   remain unchanged.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The RENAME command cannot be used to change the filemode letter
              of a file, although it can be used to change the filemode number.
              The filemode letter is under the control of the ACCESS command.
              The filemode number of a CMS disk file indicates certain
              attributes.  Use the filemode number with care!  The following
              values can be used:
 
       |       0  General use, but filemode number 0 makes a file generally
                  inaccessible to users with a read-only link to the disk.
               1  General use.  This is the default.
               2  General use.
               3  Scratch file.  CMS erases a file with filemode number 3
                  after it has been read once.
               4  OS simulation file.  Don't use filemode number 4 unless you
                  have an understanding of OS simulation.
               5  General use.
       |       6  Update-in-place.
 
          2.  RENAME has other options and functions.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS
              Command and Macro Reference or the online HELP command for
              details.
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     210
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        REPRINT
 
         Use the REPRINT command to create a printer spool file from the first
         file in your reader, retaining the carriage control information.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | REPRINT   | [name [type]]  [( [HOLD] [PRINTABLE] [)]]              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         name [type]
                   specify a new spool file name and type for the printer spool
                   file.  The defaults are the spool file name and type of the
                   original reader file.
 
         Options
 
         HOLD      retains the original reader spool file.  The default is to
                   purge the original file unless an error occurs.
 
         PRINTABLe restricts the data in the output file to an all-uppercase
                   64-character set.  All unprintable characters and lowercase
                   letters are translated to blanks.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  REPRINT takes one reader spool file (the first PRT or CON file)
              and creates a printer spool file.  The new file is sent to the
              current printer destination (set with the SETPRT command).  The
              OUTPUT command is much more efficient if you want simply to
              transfer a file.  REPRINT has the ability to retain the original
              file, which OUTPUT cannot do.  REPRINT can also be used to gather
              several reader files into a single file for printing (see the
              GATHER command).
 
          2.  REPRINT can process only PRT (print) and CON (console) files.  It
              can't handle PUN files or files that have been held with the
              CHANGE RDR command.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         THE TAG FOR PRINTER FILE nnnn WAS: text
         mm LINES WITH UNPRINTABLE CHARACTERS WERE FOUND.
         NO INPUT PRINT FILE FOUND.  RC=4
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     211
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  RETRIEVE (CP)
 
         Use the RETRIEVE command to retrieve input lines on a 3101 or
         3270-type terminal.  The RETRIEVE command can be used only from a
         Program Function (PF) key.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RETrieve  |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  RETRIEVE can be used only on 3101 or 3270-type terminals equipped
              with Program Function (PF) keys.  To use RETRIEVE, issue the CP
              SET command in the following form:
 
                   CP SET PFn RETRIEVE
 
              where "n" is a PF key number.  Do not specify the DELAY or
              IMMEDIATE parameters of the SET PF command.
 
              When a PF key set to RETRIEVE is pressed, the previous input line
              will be placed in the input area of the screen.  The most
              recently entered input lines are recorded for possible recall; if
              the PF key is pressed again, the preceding line will be
              retrieved.  After all of the retained lines are retrieved,
              pressing the PF key again will recall the first saved line.  Null
              (empty) input lines, duplicated lines, and lines entered with
              display off (such as passwords) are not saved.  Programs which
              manage the screen and PF keys themselves (such as BROWSE, FLIST,
              XEDIT, and XMENU) override the RETRIEVE feature; it will not
              function while they are in control.
 
          2.  The CMS recall function (?) may be used on any terminal to
              display the last command entered at the terminal or through the
              CMS program stack.  Lines entered in CP mode or using #CP cannot
              be recalled with the CMS function.
 
       |  3.  On local 3270-type terminals TEST REQ (Test Request) and all
       |      unassigned PF keys function as RETRIEVE.  You cannot change the
       |      function of the TEST REQ key.
 
          4.  The keyword "RECALL" is also supported for this function to
              provide compatibility with previous releases of VM/SP.
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     212
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                             RH
 
         Use the RH (Resume Help) command to return to the Yale HELP (YHELP)
         system at the point you last left it during this terminal session.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RH        |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         NO ACTIVE HELP ENVIRONMENT
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     213
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                             RT (CMS Immediate Command)
 
         Use the RT (Resume Typing) command to resume terminal output during a
         CMS command after HT has been issued.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RT        |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  CMS immediate commands are accepted only from the terminal.  They
              may not be issued from an EXEC.  The SET CMSTYPE RT command can
              be used to resume terminal output within an EXEC.
 
          2.  The SET IMMEDIATE command can be used to disable the CMS
              immediate commands.  QUERY IMMEDIATE to determine the current
              setting.  The initial setting is SET IMMEDIATE ON.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         None.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     214
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          RUNID
 
         Use the RUNID command to obtain information about OS batch jobs and
         HASP printed output routed to CENTRAL that were submitted from your
         userid.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RUNID     | [ALL]                                                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ALL       causes all information retained by the system for jobs you
                   have submitted to be displayed.  The RUNID FILE is updated
                   with those jobs which have not previously been displayed.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  RUNID displays the runid, the job name, and other information for
              each job.  The information is also placed in a file on your A-
              disk called "RUNID FILE".  If the RUNID command detects errors
              while writing the information into the RUNID FILE, an error
              message will be issued and the information will be displayed on
              your terminal.  The ALL parameter can be used to redisplay the
              job information.
 
          2.  You are responsible for maintaining your RUNID FILE.  The file
              can be modified as desired, although it should be left in
              variable-length format.  You may want to occasionally erase the
              file to conserve disk space.
 
          3.  RUNID can be used to obtain information about a job after it has
              been read by the OS batch system.  This information will be
              retained for at least twenty-four hours or through a weekend.
              Once a job has been displayed by RUNID, this information will not
              be displayed again unless the ALL parameter is specified.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSRID037E DISK 'A' IS READ/ONLY.  RC=28
         DMSRID069E DISK 'A' NOT ACCESSED.  RC=28
         DMSRID070E INVALID PARAMETER 'parameter'.  RC=24
         DMSRID105S ERROR 'n' WRITING FILE 'fn fm ft' ON DISK.  RC=100
         DMSRID107S DISK 'A' IS FULL.  RC=100
         DMSRID934S FATAL RUNID ERROR.
         DMSRID939I NO RUNIDS FOUND.
         DMSRID940I RUNID FACILITY TEMPORARILY OVERLOADED -- TRY AGAIN LATER.
         DMSRID941I RUNID FACILITY TEMPORARILY OUT OF SERVICE.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     215
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  RXEDIT (EXEC)
 
         Use the RXEDIT command to examine a reader spool file with the System
         Product editor (XEDIT).  The spool file cannot be modified, but it can
         be erased or saved as a CMS disk file, with or without modifications.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +           +                                          |
         | RXedit    | |spoolid [*]|  [file] [( options [)]]                  |
         |           | |name [type]|                                          |
         |           | | *     *   |                                          |
         |           | +           +                                          |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the reader spool file to be
                   processed.  The default is "*", the first file in your
                   reader.
 
         name [type]
                   specify an input file by spool file name and type rather
                   than number.  Spool files do not necessarily have names and
                   types.  The default type is "*," the first file that matches
                   the specified name.
 
         options   are INPUT command options.  Except for the file destination
                   options (APPEND, DISK, REPLACE, SELECT, STACK, and XEDIT),
                   any INPUT option may be specified.  The NOHOLD option is
                   ignored.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  RXEDIT assigns a filename using the spool file type and the spool
              file number.  This special name is used by the BURN subcommand.
              The filetype is "LISTING" and the filemode is "A1."
 
          2.  The BURN subcommand purges the reader file if you have not
              altered the XEDIT filename and filetype.  If the file still
              exists when you have completed your editing session, you will be
              asked if you want to keep the file.
 
          3.  You can write the file to disk under another name by issuing the
              FILE or SAVE subcommand with a fileid (e.g., "FILE SOME OUTPUT").
 
          4.  RXEDIT will use your XEDIT profile.
 
          5.  RXEDIT uses an XEDIT macro named RINPUT that uses the CMS command
              INPUT to read the spool file.  The RINPUT macro can be used alone
              from within XEDIT to read another spool file.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     216
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                             SAS (EXEC)
 
         Use the SAS command to execute the CMS Statistical Analysis System.
         This is not a complete description of SAS; refer to the manuals listed
         in the Usage Notes for details.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | SAS       | [filename [filename...]]  [( options... [)]]           |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +      +   +      +   +      +                         |
         |           | |LDisk |   |PDisk |   |NOTLog|                         |
         |           | |LPrint|   |PPrint|   |TLog  |                         |
         |           | |LType |   |PType |   +      +                         |
         |           | +      +   +      +                                    |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +           +                                          |
         |           | |TMSG NOTEs |    NAme filename                         |
         |           | |     ERRORs|                                          |
         |           | |     OFF   |    SASLIB filename                       |
         |           | +           +                                          |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the name of a CMS disk file containing SAS program
                   statements.  More than one filename can be specified.  The
                   filetypes must be "SAS," and the files must contain fixed-
                   length 80-byte records.  If no filenames are specified, SAS
                   executes in interactive mode.
 
         Options
 
         LDisk     writes the SAS log to a CMS disk file with filetype
                   "SASLOG."  The filename of the SASLOG file is determined by
                   the name of the first SAS source file (in interactive mode
                   the filename "SAS" is used), or by the NAME option.
 
         LPrint    sends the SAS log to a printer spool file.
 
         LType     types the SAS log at the terminal.
 
         NAme filename
                   is the filename assigned to printed procedure output
                   (LISTING file), SAS log (SASLOG file), and TLOG output (SAS
                   file).  "SAS" is the default filename.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     217
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                             SAS (EXEC)
 
         NOTLog    suppresses recording of SAS statements in a CMS disk file.
                   This is the default.
 
         PDisk     writes the printed procedure output to a CMS disk file with
                   filetype "LISTING."  The filename of the LISTING file is
                   determined by the name of the first SAS source file (in
                   interactive mode the filename "SAS" is used), or by the NAME
                   option.
 
         PPrint    sends the printed procedure output to a printer spool file.
 
         PType     types the printed procedure output at the terminal.
 
         SASLIB filename
                   issues a FILEDEF with DD name "SASLIB" for the specified
                   TXTLIB.  This TXTLIB is added to the TXTLIB's searched by
                   SAS.
 
         TLog      records SAS statements entered at the terminal in a CMS disk
                   file with a filetype of "SAS."  The filename of the LISTING
                   file is determined by the NAME option.  TLOG is only valid
                   in interactive mode.
 
         TMSG level
                   controls which messages are typed at the terminal when not
                   in interactive mode.  The default message level is ERRORS,
                   which displays only error messages.  You can specify NOTES,
                   for notes and error messages, or OFF, to suppress all
                   messages.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  SAS has its own online help.  Enter "help;" in interactive mode.
              Also refer to SAS User's Guide: Basics, SAS Companion for the
              VM/CMS Operating System, and SAS/FSP User's Guide.
 
          2.  End interactive SAS by entering "/*."
 
          3.  The SAS command links to and accesses the disk containing the SAS
              modules and related files, then drops the link before completing.
              If SAS ABEND's (or if you stop it with an HX) the link is not
              dropped.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSSAS985E SAS requires at least 1M of storage.  Use the STORAGE
                    command to increase your storage size.  RC=25
 
         Messages can be produced by SAS, and by the LINK and ACCESS commands.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     218
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           SCAN
 
         Use the SCAN command to check OS Job Control Language (JCL) syntax
         without submitting a batch job.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |    +     +    ++                                       |
         | SCAN      | fn | ft  | fm ||  [(options... [)]]                    |
         |           |    | JOB | *  ||                                       |
         |           |    | JCL +    +|                                       |
         |           |    +           +                                       |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +         +  +        +  +          +                  |
         |           | | NOPRint |  | TErm   |  | SOurce   |                  |
         |           | | TYpe    |  | NOTErm |  | NOSOurce |                  |
         |           | | DIsk    |  +        +  +          +                  |
         |           | | PRint   |                                            |
         |           | +         +                                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +     +  +        +  +          +  +         +         |
         |           | | MVT |  | UKcc   |  | PROClib  |  | NOSYsin |         |
         |           | | MFT |  | NOUKcc |  | NOPROCli |  | SYsin   |         |
         |           | +     +  +        +  +          +  +         +         |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        specifies the filename of the file to be scanned and the
                   filename of the listing output file, if any.
 
         ft        specifies the filetype of the file to be scanned.  If
                   omitted, "JOB" and "JCL" will be used, in that order.
 
         fm        specifies the filemode of the file to be scanned.  If not
                   specified, "*" will be assumed and all accessed disks
                   searched.
 
         Options
 
         DIsk      writes the LISTING file on your A-disk.
 
         NOPRint   suppresses generation of the listing file.
 
         NOTErm    suppresses the TERM output.
 
         MFT       uses OS/360-MFT JCL syntax.
 
         MVT       uses OS/360-MVT JCL syntax.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     219
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           SCAN
 
         NOPROCli  suppresses procedure library processing.
 
         NOSOurce  suppresses the JCL listing.
 
         NOSYsin   suppresses data listing.
 
         NOUKcc    will not process HASP or INCLUDE records.
 
         PRint     writes the LISTING file to a printer spool file.
 
         PROClib   causes a procedure library to be searched for referenced
                   procedures.
 
         SOurce    produces a JCL listing.
 
         SYsin     causes input stream data (DD * and DD DATA) to be listed.
 
         TErm      writes the diagnostic messages on the terminal.
 
         TYpe      writes the LISTING file to the terminal.
 
         UKcc      will cause HASP /* and SUBMIT command ..INCLUDE records to
                   be processed.  Syntax is not checked for HASP control
                   records.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  If the DISK or SYSIN options are specified a write-accessed A-
              disk is necessary for the "fn LISTING A1" and "SCAN SYSUT1 A3"
              files.
 
          2.  Unless the NOPROC option is specified a procedure library will be
              used.  The default libraries are SYS4.PROCLIB and SYS2.PROCLIB.
              Since these are assumed by default to reside on OS disks, OS
              formatted disks containing these files must be accessed.
              Currently both default proclib's are on volume UKC004.  This disk
              must be accessed before the SCAN command is issued (the OSDISKS
              command should be used for this purpose).
 
          3.  It is possible to override the default proclib's used by SCAN.
              The DD name used by SCAN for the proclib is IEFPDSI, so by
              defining IEFPDSI with one or more FILEDEF commands and issuing a
              GLOBAL command it is possible to specify any desired combination
              of user and system libraries.  The libraries may be on OS or CMS
              disks, or both.  The following example demonstrates this
              capability:
 
                OSDISK
                FILEDEF IEFPDSI DISK MYLIB MACLIB * DSN MYLIB PROCLIB ( CONCAT
                FILEDEF IEFPDSI DISK SYS4 MACLIB * DSN SYS4 PROCLIB ( CONCAT
                GLOBAL MACLIB MYLIB SYS4
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     220
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           SCAN
 
                SCAN MYJOB
 
              This would cause MYLIB.PROCLIB and SYS4.PROCLIB to be used as
              proclib's.  Note that the CONCAT option must be used if more than
              one proclib is to be used.
 
          4.  SCAN will clear all non-permanent FILEDEF's at completion.
 
          5.  There are several minor differences between the results obtained
              from SCAN and those from the OS batch system:
 
                   (a)  The CLASS parameter on the JOB card will not be
                        accepted as valid if it contains X or Z.
 
                   (b)  The DLM parameter on the DD card must be enclosed
                        in single quotes if it contains special characters.
 
                   (c)  The UKCC project number on the job card is not
                        checked for validity.
 
          6.  A null JCL statement will be generated at the end of a listing.
 
          7.  The //PROCLIB DD for user proclib's is not supported.  A
              //PROCLIB DD referring to a cataloged dataset will cause a
              warning message to be issued; other forms will cause SCAN to
              ABEND.  To refer to other than the default system proclib's, use
              the procedure above to define IEFPDSI.
 
          8.  SCAN checks only the syntax of JCL statements.  There are many
              other JCL-related errors that will not be caught.  For example:
 
                   (a)  Specifying a nonexistent program in the PGM
                        parameter of the EXEC card.
 
                   (b)  Specifying a nonexistent dataset or volume.
 
                   (c)  Specifying a nonexistent or inconsistent
                        unit in the UNIT parameter of the DD card.
 
          9.  The MSGLEVEL parameter on the JOB card can be used to control the
              output produced by SCAN.
 
         10.  The message IEF110I will be issued if SCAN has insufficient
              working storage to process your JCL.  You can try breaking your
       |      JCL into smaller segments or redefining your storage size with
       |      the STORAGE command to circumvent this problem.
 
         11.  Help information is available for OS JCL.  Enter "HELP JCL" for
              details.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     221
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           SCAN
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSJCL001E NO FILENAME SPECIFIED  RC=24
         DMSJCL002E INPUT FILE "fn ft fm" NOT FOUND  RC=28
         DMSJCL002E PROCLIB FILES NOT FOUND  RC=28
         DMSJCL003E INVALID OPTION "option"  RC=24
         DMSJCL004W WARNING MESSAGES ISSUED  RC=4
         DMSJCL006E NO READ/WRITE "A" DISK ACCESSED FOR "fn LISTING A1" RC=36
         DMSJCL008W ERROR MESSAGES ISSUED  RC=8
         DMSJCL012W SEVERE ERROR MESSAGES ISSUED  RC=12
         DMSJCL016W TERMINAL ERROR MESSAGES ISSUED  RC=16
         DMSJCL032E INVALID FILETYPE "ft"  RC=24
         DMSJCL044E RECORD LENGTH EXCEEDS ALLOWABLE MAXIMUM  RC=32
         DMSJCL048E INVALID MODE "fm"  RC=24
         DMSJCL062E INVALID "*" IN FILEID  RC=20
         DMSJCL062E INVALID CHAR IN FILEID "fn ft fm"  RC=20
         DMSJCL069E DISK "fm" NOT ACCESSED  RC=36
         DMSJCL104S ERROR "nn" READING FILE "fn ft fm" FROM DISK  ABEND 001
         DMSJCL105S ERROR "nn" WRITING FILE "fn ft fm" TO DISK  ABEND 001
         DMSJCL901T UNEXPECTED ERROR AT "address"  ABEND 999
         DMSJCL901T UNEXPECTED ERROR: PLIST "function", RC "nn"  RC=256
 
         IEE345I COMMAND AUTHORITY INVALID  NON-FATAL
         IEF110I Q MGR I/O ERR - JOBQUE FULL  ABEND 1B0
         IEF440I I/O ERROR IN THE JOB QUEUE 0042  ABEND 0B0
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     222
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SCRIPT
 
         Use the SCRIPT command to format documents and other text.  SCRIPT
         accepts text and control words as input and produces output suitable
         for printing on a line printer or terminal.  This is not a complete
         description of the options available with the SCRIPT command.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |              +       +  +          +                   |
         | SCript    | filename  [( |FFTOp n|  |PLength nn|  [)]]             |
       | |           | ?            |      4|  |        66|                   |
         |           |              +       +  +          +                   |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the input file containing text and SCRIPT
                   control words.  The filetype of the file must be "SCRIPT".
 
         ?         causes a complete list of SCRIPT options to be displayed at
                   the terminal.
 
         Options
 
         FFTOp n   is useful when the output will be printed on a line printer.
                   FFTOP indicates to SCRIPT which line on the page the printer
                   will be positioned to when SCRIPT issues a page eject.  This
       |           may range from line 1 to 175.  The default is 4; HASP
       |           printers at the UKCC are positioned to the fourth line of
                   the page by a page eject.
 
         PLength nn
                   specifies the length of the output page in lines.  This is
                   used to allow for different types of printers or terminals
                   and various paper sizes.  This should be used to specify the
                   actual physical page size.  The value of the .PL control
                   word is set by this option.  The value may range from 10
                   lines to 32,767.  The default is 66 (the normal value for 11
                   inch paper at 6 lines per inch).
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  To print on every line on the page (including the top three
              lines), output to be printed at the UKCC Computer Room (CENTRAL)
              should be processed with "FFTOP 4" and "PLENGTH 66", and output
              to be printed on the UKCC hands-on (HOT) printer should be
              processed with "FFTOP 4" and "PLENGTH 68".
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     223
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SCRIPT
 
          2.  When printing SCRIPT output, specify "PAGESIZE 0" and "SPACE W"
              on the SETPRT or OUTPUT command.  For more information on these
              options, and for information on special forms, consult the OUTPUT
              command description.
 
          3.  Before producing printed output from SCRIPT at a terminal (such
              as an AJ833) you may want to suppress messages that could
              interrupt your output.  This could be done in a short EXEC:
 
       |           /* Suppress messages and SCRIPT */
 
       |           address command
       |           "CP SET ACNT OFF"
       |           "CP SET IMSG OFF"
       |           "CP SET MSG OFF"
       |           arg parms
       |           "SCRIPT" parms
       |           xc = rc
       |           "CP SET MSG ON"
       |           "CP SET IMSG ON"
       |           "CP SET ACNT ON"
       |           exit xc
 
              This sample EXEC is available online in "PSCRIPT EXEC Y2."
 
          4.  The hyphenation exception dictionary is always included and does
              not reduce the working storage available to SCRIPT.  It is not
              necessary to imbed SYSHYPH (".im syshyph" will be ignored), but
              it is necessary to specify ".hy on" to enable hyphenation.
 
          5.  For more information about the SCRIPT command, refer to the
              Waterloo SCRIPT Reference Manual, or issue the command "SCRIPT ?"
              for a list of options at your terminal.  Options are available to
              direct SCRIPT output to a disk file, printer, or terminal, and to
              control other aspects of SCRIPT processing.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     224
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SELECT
 
         Use the SELECT command to search one or more CMS disk files for lines
         containing a specified character string.  The selected lines may be
       | typed, stacked, or written to another CMS disk file.  Some of these
       | functions are available from the EXECIO command.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | SELECT    | fileid1 [fileidn...] [( [options...] [)]]              |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | STARTRec n   STARTCol n   DATAColumn n   ALl           |
         |           | SRecord n    SColumn n    DColumn n      ANchor        |
         |           | ENDRecord n  ENDColumn n  DATAEnd n      ORDer         |
         |           | ERecord n    EColumn n    DEnd n         BInary        |
         |           |                                                        |
       | |           | Counts       FINd n       Key string          +      + |
       | |           | Cnts         DISPlay n    IGnore Case         |char  | |
       | |           | STKCounts    NODISPlay    NOIGnore Case  SKip |BLanks| |
       | |           | STKCnts                                       |NUlls | |
       | |           |                                               |ZEros | |
       | |           | +             +           Prefix              +      + |
         |           | |Append fileid|                                        |
         |           | |DISk fileid  |           NOMessage                    |
         |           | |FIFo         |           NOMsg                        |
         |           | |LIfo         |           NOPrompt                     |
         |           | |Terminal     |                                        |
         |           | |Type         |           Header                       |
         |           | |NOTerminal   |           Hdr                          |
         |           | |NOType       |                                        |
         |           | |STACk        |                                        |
         |           | +             +                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fileid1   is the fileid of the first file to be searched.  The default
                   filemode is "*."
 
         fileidn   is one or more additional input files.  Any part of these
                   fileids may be specified as "=" to use the corresponding
                   part of the pervious fileid.
 
         Options
 
         ALl       selects all lines in the specified file or files.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     225
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SELECT
 
         ANchor    checks only one substring in each line.  The substring
                   checked begins at STARTCOL (default 1) and is the length of
                   the selector (KEY) string.  The line is rejected if this
                   doesn't match.
 
         Append fileid
                   specifies the CMS disk file to which selected lines will be
                   appended.  If the file does not exist it will be created.
                   The APPEND and DISK options may not be specified together.
 
         BInary    is used for searching files sorted in ascending order.
                   Specifying BINARY implies ORDER, ANCHOR, and FIND 1.  If the
                   file contains more than one line containing the key, the
       |           first occurrence will be returned.  You should use the
       |           STARTCOL and ENDCOL options to define the field to be
                   checked in each line.  BINARY searching can significantly
                   reduce the time and resources used by SELECT.
 
         Cnts      causes a count of the selected lines to be displayed.
 
         Counts    is a synonym for CNTS.
 
         DATAColu n
                   is the first column of the data to be used for output from
                   selected lines.  The default is 1.
 
         DATAEnd n is the last column of the data to be used for output from
                   selected lines.  The default is "*", the end of the line.
 
         DColumn   is a synonym for DATACOLUMN.
 
         DISk fileid
                   specifies the CMS disk file to which selected lines will be
                   written.  If the file already exists it will be replaced.
                   The APPEND and DISK options may not be specified together.
 
         DISPlay n specifies the number of selected lines to be output.  The
                   default is "*," all of the selected lines.
 
         DEnd n    is a synonym for DATAEND.
 
         EColumn n specifies the last column of the input lines to be searched.
                   The default is "*", the entire line.
 
         ERecord n specifies the last line of each input file to be searched.
                   The default is "*", the entire file.
 
         ENDColum n
                   is a synonym for ECOLUMN.
 
         ENDRecor n
                   is a synonym for ERECORD.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     226
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SELECT
 
         FIFo      indicates that selected lines are to be stacked first-in,
                   first-out.  FIFO overrides the default TYPE option.
 
         FINd n    specifies the number of lines to be selected from each input
                   file.  Searching ends when the limit is reached.  The
                   default is "*," no limit.
 
         Hdr       will cause each input file to be identified at the terminal.
 
         Header    is a synonym for HDR.
 
         IGnore Case
                   causes the difference between uppercase and lowercase
                   letters to be ignored during the search.  This is the
                   default.
 
         Key string
                   specifies the target string for searching.  The string is
                   limited to eight non-blank characters and is translated to
                   uppercase before use.  If the KEY option is not used, the
                   target string will be read from the CMS program stack or
                   console (unless the ALL option was specified).  Strings read
                   this way may contain up to 130 characters (255 characters
       |           for input from the stack), may include blanks, and are not
       |           translated to uppercase.
 
         LIfo      causes selected lines to be stacked last-in, first-out.
                   This option overrides the default TYPE option.
 
         NODISPlay is the same as specifying "DISPLAY 0."  This will suppress
                   the output of selected lines.
 
         NOIGnore Case
                   will cause the difference between uppercase and lowercase
                   letters to be significant during the search.
 
         NOMessag  suppresses the warning message if no lines are selected.
 
         NOMsg     is a synonym for NOMESSAGE.
 
         NOPrompt  suppresses the prompt for the target string.  The prompt is
                   only issued if the KEY and ALL options were not specified
                   and the stack is empty.
 
         NOTermin  suppresses the default TYPE output of selected lines.
 
         NOType    is a synonym for NOTERMINAL.
 
         ORDer     causes searching in a file to stop when a string in a line
                   is "greater than" the selector (KEY) string.  This is used
                   in combination with the ANCHOR option for faster searches of
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     227
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SELECT
 
                   files that are kept in ascending order by some field (such
                   as a list of names in alphabetic order).  See also the
                   BINARY option.
 
         Prefix    causes each output line to be prefixed by its line number in
                   the file in which it was found.  The PREFIX number will be
                   eight digits followed by one space.
 
         SColumn n specifies the first column to be searched in each input
                   line.  The default is one.
 
       | SKip char causes lines beginning with the specified character to be
       |           skipped.  Specify a single character, BLANKS, NULLS, or
       |           ZEROS.
 
         SRecord n specifies the first line to be searched in each input file.
                   The default is one.
 
         STACk     specifies that selected lines are to be stacked.  This
                   option overrides the default TYPE output.  STACK is a
                   synonym for FIFO.
 
         STARTCol n
                   is a synonym for SCOLUMN.
 
         STARTRec n
                   is a synonym for SRECORD.
 
         STKCnts   causes a line containing the number of selected lines to be
                   stacked.  If the selected lines are being stacked, this line
                   will precede any data lines.
 
         STKCounts is a synonym for STKCNTS.
 
         Terminal  causes selected lines to be typed on the terminal.  This is
                   the default unless another output option is selected.
 
         Type      is a synonym for TERMINAL.
 
         Usage Note
 
         SELECT searchs every specified line in each input file between the
         specified columns for the target (KEY) string.  Every possible
         substring in the lines searched is examined.  If the target string is
         known to begin in a specific column, use the ANCHOR and column options
         to limit the search to the single substring beginning in that column.
         This can result in considerable savings of resources required for the
         search.  If the file is sorted in ascending order by the specified
         field, the ORDER option can be used to stop searching after passing
         the target string or the position where it would be in the file.  The
         BINARY option provides the best performance for sorted files.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     228
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SELECT
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSSEL001E No input data file name was specified.  RC=24
         DMSSEL002E The input file "fileid" could not be found.  RC=28
         DMSSEL002E No input file was found.  RC=28
         DMSSEL003E "name" is not an option.  RC=24
         DMSSEL019E Input and output files are the same.  RC=24
         DMSSEL029E "name" is not a valid argument for the name option.  RC=24
         DMSSEL054E Incomplete fileid beginning with "string".  RC=24
         DMSSEL066E "APPEND" and "DISK" are conflicting options.  RC=24
         DMSSEL104S Error n occurred while reading the file "fileid".  RC=100
         DMSSEL105S Error n occurred while writing the file "fileid".  RC=100
         DMSSEL973E No entry containing the key was found.  RC=1
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     229
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                SENDFILE (EXEC)
 
         Use the SENDFILE command to send CMS disk files to other users.  The
         receiving users can use the PEEK and ACCEPT commands to examine and
         save the files.  This is a description of the simplest form of the
         SENDFILE command; other functions and options are available.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | SENDFile  | fn ft [fm] [TO] name [name...] [( options... [)]]      |
         | SFile     |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +     +  +          +  +     +                         |
         |           | |NOAck|  |NOFilelist|  |Log  |                         |
         |           | |Ack  |  |Filelist  |  |NOLog|                         |
         |           | +     +  +          +  +     +                         |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        is the filename of the file to be sent.
 
         ft        is the filetype of the file to be sent.
 
         fm        is the filemode of the file to be sent.  The filemode may be
                   omitted if the first name would not be misinterpreted as a
                   filemode, or if the TO parameter is specified.  The default
                   filemode is "*" (search all accessed minidisks).
 
         TO        marks the beginning of the names.  This parameter is not
                   required if the first name is not "TO".
 
         name      is the name of a user to receive the file.  A "name" may be
                   a userid or a nickname (from a NAMES file).  You may specify
                   more than one name, and a nickname may refer to more than
                   one userid.
 
         Options
 
         Ack       requests that an acknowledgment be returned to you when a
                   recipient receives your file (with the ACCEPT, PEEK, BURN,
                   or RECEIVE command).  No acknowledgment is sent if the
                   recipient purges the file with the PURGE RDR command, or if
                   the system purges the file.
 
         Filelist  indicates that the file specified in the parameters contains
                   a list of file identifiers.  This file must be in the format
                   of the CMS EXEC file produced by the LISTX and LISTFILE
                   commands with their EXEC options specified.  The file
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     230
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                SENDFILE (EXEC)
 
                   containing the list of file identifiers is transmitted in
                   addition to the files named.
 
         Log       specifies that the recipients and time of this transmission
                   are to be logged in a file called "userid NETLOG" (where
                   "userid" is your userid).  This file is also updated when
                   acknowledgments are received.  LOG is the default.
 
         NOAck     requests that no acknowledgment be returned to you.  This is
                   the default.
 
         NOFilelist
                   indicates that only the single file specified is to be sent.
                   This is the default.
 
         NOLog     suppresses transmission logging.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The files sent by the SENDFILE command are sent as reader spool
              files in NETDATA format.  The recipients may examine the files
              with the PEEK command, or copy them to permanent CMS disk files
              with the ACCEPT command.
 
          2.  The default options of the SENDFILE command can be changed with
              the DEFAULTS command.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro
              Reference or to the online HELP command for more information.
 
          3.  The nicknames used by the SENDFILE command are kept in a CMS disk
              file named "userid NAMES", where "userid" is your userid.  This
              file can be maintained with the NAMES command, or edited directly
              with XEDIT.  The NAMES file is also used by the TELL, NOTE, and
              NAMEFIND commands.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro
              Reference or to the online HELP command for more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     231
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       SENTRIES
 
         Use the SENTRIES command to determine the number of lines in the CMS
         program stack.  The number of lines in the program stack (this does
         not include lines entered from the terminal) is returned as a return
         code.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | SENTRIES  |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Use the CHECKBUF command to determine the number of lines in the
              most recently created program stack buffer.
 
       |  2.  When SENTRIES is executed in an EXEC with an &ERROR or SIGNAL ON
       |      ERROR in effect, the non-zero return code will cause the error
              action to be taken if there are lines in the stack.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         SENTRIES produces no messages.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     232
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                               SET (CMS and CP)
 
         Use the SET command to control CMS and CP options.  There are distinct
         CMS and CP commands named "SET", but the CMS command will pass
         unrecognized parameters to the CP command if IMPCP is ON.  In most
         cases SET can be considered to be a CMS command.  This description
         includes the most often needed parameters of both commands.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | SET       | function                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | CP Functions:                 CMS Functions:           |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | EMSG [ON|TEXT|OFF]            ABBREV [ON|OFF]          |
         |           | IMSG [ON|OFF]                 AUTOREAD [ON|OFF]        |
         |           | LINEDit [ON|OFF]              BLIP [ON|OFF|string]     |
         |           | MSG [ON|OFF]                  CMSTYPE [HT|RT]          |
       | |           | PFnn [IMMed|DELayed] [data]   EXECTRACE [ON|OFF]       |
         |           | PFnn RETrieve                 IMMEDIATE [ON|OFF]       |
         |           |                               IMPCP [ON|OFF]           |
         |           |                               IMPEX [ON|OFF]           |
         |           |                               INPUT char1 char2        |
         |           |                               OUTPUT char1 char2       |
         |           |                               RDYMSG [$MSG|SMSG|LMSG]  |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         (Each function is marked "CMS" or "CP" to indicate the command used.)
 
         ABBREV [ON|OFF]
                   (CMS) controls whether abbreviations are accepted for CMS
                   command names.  The initial setting is "ON".  Use the
                   SYNONYM command to define your own command synonyms and
                   abbreviations.
 
         AUTOREAD [ON|OFF]
                   (CMS) controls whether a console read will be issued after
                   each command.  The initial setting for 3270-type terminals
                   is OFF; for others it is ON.  The setting is not
                   automatically changed if you disconnect from one kind of
                   terminal and reconnect with another kind.  The default
                   setting is generally the more convenient.
 
         BLIP [ON|OFF|string]
                   (CMS) controls the display of a "blip" after each two
                   seconds of virtual CPU time.  The initial setting for
                   3270-type terminals is OFF; for others it is ON.  The
                   default BLIP is a two character string that is not visible
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     233
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                               SET (CMS and CP)
 
                   on most terminals.  You will probably want to SET BLIP OFF
                   (this could be placed in your PROFILE EXEC).
 
         CMSTYPE [HT|RT]
                   (CMS) is used to control CMS terminal output from an EXEC.
                   SET CMSTYPE HT will halt typing at the terminal until a SET
                   CMSTYPE RT (resume typing) or the end of the EXEC.  Severe
                   error messages (code S and T) cannot be suppressed.  This
                   command provides functions similar to the CMS immediate
                   commands HT and RT.
 
         EMSG [ON|CODE|OFF]
                   (CP) controls the display of error messages at your
                   terminal.  The initial setting is TEXT, which causes only
                   the text of error messages to be displayed.  Setting EMSG to
                   ON will cause the message code and text to be displayed.
                   You may want to place a CP SET EMSG ON command in your
                   PROFILE EXEC.  You can use the OFF setting to suppress error
                   messages during an EXEC.  Some messages (severity codes R,
                   S, and T) will always be displayed as if EMSG were ON.  The
                   description of the CMSEMSG command contains more information
                   about message severity codes.
 
       | EXECTRACe [ON|OFF]
       |           (CMS) controls interactive tracing for EXEC's written in
       |           REXX or EXEC 2.
 
         IMMEDIATE [ON|OFF]
                   (CMS) controls the CMS immediate commands (HT, HX, etc.).
                   The initial setting is ON, which  allows the immediate
                   commands to operate.  Setting IMMEDIATE to OFF will cause
                   the immediate commands to be ignored.
 
         IMPCP [ON|OFF]
                   (CMS) controls whether commands not recognized by CMS are
                   implied to be CP commands.  The initial setting is ON.  When
                   IMPCP is OFF, CP commands must be prefixed with "CP", or be
                   issued from the CP environment.  CP commands in an EXEC file
                   must be prefixed by "CP" regardless of the IMPCP setting
                   (except for QUERY with a stacking option specified).
 
         IMPEX [ON|OFF]
                   (CMS) controls whether all commands are implied to be EXEC
                   names.  The initial setting is ON.  When IMPEX is OFF, EXEC
                   names must be prefixed with "EXEC".  Regardless of the IMPEX
                   setting, all EXEC names must be prefixed with "EXEC" when
                   called from another EXEC.
 
         IMSG [ON|OFF]
                   (CP) controls the display of some informational messages
                   from CP, including the message that is issued when you
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     234
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                               SET (CMS and CP)
 
                   receive a spool file.  The initial setting is ON.  The
                   commands affected include ORDER, PURGE, and TRANSFER.  You
                   can use CP SET IMSG OFF in an EXEC to suppress unwanted
                   informational messages.
 
         INPUT char1 char2
                   (CMS) causes all occurrences of "char1" in input from the
                   terminal to be translated to "char2".  You may use either a
                   character or a hexadecimal value for "char1"; "char2" must
                   always be specified in hexadecimal.  CP may perform
                   additional translations before presenting input characters
                   to CMS (translating from ASCII to EBCDIC, for example).
 
         LINEDIT [ON|OFF]
                   (CP) controls the use of CP line editing characters.  The
                   initial setting is ON.  The actual line editing characters
                   are defined with the CP command TERMINAL.  Refer to the
                   description of the TERMINAL command for more information.
 
         MSG [ON|OFF]
                   (CP) controls the display of messages from other users.  The
                   initial setting is ON.  Other users can use the TELL and
                   MESSAGE commands to send messages to you.  You may want to
                   suppress messages from other users when you are producing
                   output (such as from SCRIPT) at a printing terminal.
                   Setting MSG to OFF will also suppress messages from the OS
                   batch system, HASP, RSCS, AUTOLINK, and some other system
                   services.  This will not affect warnings from the system
                   operator.
 
         OUTPUT char1 char2
                   (CMS) causes all occurrences of "char1" in output to the
                   terminal to be translated to "char2".  You must use
       |           hexadecimal to specify "char1"; "char2" must be a single
       |           character.  The CMS command CASE can also be used to define
                   output translations.  CP may perform additional translations
                   before actually writing to your terminal (translating from
                   EBCDIC to ASCII, for example).
 
         PFnn [IMMed|DELayed] [data]
         PFnn RETrieve
                   (CP) defines a Program Function (PF) key setting for a 3101
                   or 3270-type terminal.  In the first form of the command the
                   specified "data" will be entered when the specified PF key
                   is pressed.  The "data" can be entered immediately (IMM), or
                   after pressing the ENTER key (DELAY).  The default mode is
                   DELAY.  Refer to the description of the RETRIEVE command for
                   more information about that function.
 
         RDYMSG [$MSG|SMSG|LMSG]
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     235
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                               SET (CMS and CP)
 
                   (CMS) controls the format of the CMS ready message displayed
                   at the completion of each CMS command.  The initial setting
                   is $MSG, which displays the time and the cost of executing
                   the command.  The LMSG setting displays the virtual and
                   total CPU times instead of the cost.  The SMSG setting
                   displays only "R;".  With any setting, a non-zero return
                   code from a command will also be displayed.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Only one function may be specified.
 
          2.  The SET command must be prefixed by "CP" to use the CP SET
              functions from an EXEC.
 
       |  3.  Use the QUERY command to determine the current value of most SET
              functions.  The CP QUERY SET command will display all of the CP
              SET values.
 
          4.  Both the CMS and CP SET commands have additional functions.  For
              more information refer to either the online HELP command or to
              the VM/SP CP Command Reference for General Users and the VM/SP
              CMS Command and Macro Reference.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Messages may be produced by either the CP or the CMS SET command.  If
         the command is processed by CP, the return code is set to either zero
         or the message number of the error message issued.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     236
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SETCON
 
         Use the SETCON command to control recording of the console log and to
         prepare it for printing.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +     +  +     +  +            +  +           +        |
         | SETCON    | |STart|  |CLose|  |CONTinuous  |  |User userid|        |
         |           | |STOp |  |PUrge|  |NOCONTinuous|  |To userid  |        |
         |           | |OFf  |  +     +  +            +  |Route dest |        |
         |           | +     +                           +           +        |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Pagesize n]  [Space x]  [Forms nnnn]  [Copies n]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [DOCument]    [Name name [type]]                       |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         CLose     closes the console log.  Recording continues if started.
                   The closed console log becomes a spool file that is sent to
                   the user specified by the USER option.  The default is to
                   send the file to HASP to be printed at the UKCC.
 
         CONTinuo  causes CLOSE requests to be ignored until NOCONTINUOUS is
                   specified.
 
         Copies n  is the number of copies to be printed.  The default is one
                   copy.  This option applies only to output routed to a HASP
                   printer (except the HOT printer).
 
         DOCument  has the effect of specifying PAGESIZE 0 and FORMS NT.  This
                   option applies only to output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         Forms nnnn
                   specifies the printer forms to be used.  The default is
                   standard (STD.) forms.  This option applies only to output
                   routed to a HASP printer.  Refer to the description of the
                   OUTPUT command FORMS option for more information.
 
         K n       is a synonym for PAGESIZE.
 
         Linect n  is a synonym for PAGESIZE.
 
         N n       is a synonym for COPIES.
 
         Name name [type]
                   is used with the CLOSE option to set the spool file name and
                   type.  This identifier is used by HASP when assigning job
                   names and by the ACCEPT and INPUT commands when assigning
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     237
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SETCON
 
                   CMS disk fileids.  The second part of the name is optional
                   if NAME is the last option specified.
 
         NOCONTin  resets the continuous spooling option.  NOCONT is the
                   initial setting.
 
         OFf       stops console spooling and purges any already spooled lines.
                   OFF is equivalent to specifying STOP and PURGE.
 
         Pagesize n
                   is the number of lines per page.  The default is 61, and the
                   maximum is 255.  If zero is specified, automatic page
                   skipping is not provided.  This option applies only to
                   output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         PUrge     purges the console log.  Recording continues if started.
                   Specify OFF to stop recording and purge any recorded data.
 
         Route dest
                   specifies the destination of the printed output.  The
                   default routing is to CENTRAL.  Any of the following may be
                   specified:
 
                        Central   HASP Printer in the UKCC Computer Room
                        Hot       HASP Hands-on (HOT) Printer at the UKCC
                        Local     Synonym for CENTRAL (This option is not
                                  recommended and is provided only for
                                  compatibility with older applications.)
                        Pnnnn     RSCS Remote Printer "nnnn"
                        RMTnn     HASP Remote Site "nn"
       |                Terminal  Is the same as specifying "TO *"
                        userid    Any VM/SP Userid (Reader Spool File)
 
         Space x   determines the carriage control used.  SPACE S causes single
                   spacing of output, SPACE W allows normal carriage control.
                   The default is SPACE S unless special forms are used.  This
                   option applies only to output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         STart     causes console recording to begin.  Recording continues
                   until STOP is specified.
 
         STOp      stops console recording, but does not close or purge any
                   already recorded console log.  Use OFF top STOP and PURGE.
 
         To userid will cause the console log to be sent to the specified user
                   as a reader spool file rather than to be printed.  Specify
                   "*" to send the file to your own reader.  Specify "SAME" to
                   leave the destination userid unchanged.  SAME should not be
                   specified the first time SETCON is issued during a terminal
                   session.
 
         User      is a synonym for TO.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     238
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SETCON
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Issuing the SETCON command will cause the system to record input
              from and output to the terminal for later examination or
              printing.  This is useful for display terminals to provide a
              record of the session, and is very useful when trying to diagnose
              errors that may have occurred during the session.  BROWSE, FLIST,
              XEDIT, and other commands that operate in a full-screen mode on a
              3270-type terminal are exceptions to this rule; little or no
              recording is done for these programs.  Data entered when display
              is suppressed (such as passwords) are not recorded.
 
              A useful technique is to issue the command "SETCON TO *" at the
              beginning of a terminal session (possibly in the PROFILE EXEC).
              Then logging off or issuing a "SETCON CLOSE TO *" command will
              cause the console log to be sent to your own reader.  The reader
              spool file can then be examined with the PEEK, RBROWSE, or RXEDIT
              command, printed or sent to another user with the OUTPUT command,
              or copied into a CMS disk file with the ACCEPT command.
 
          2.  You will receive a message when the console is closed and the
              file is accepted by HASP or RSCS for printing.  This message will
              contain the identifier assigned to the printed output.  If the
              output was routed to the UKCC hands-on (HOT) printer in McVey
              Hall, another message is sent when it begins printing.
 
              If you log off, the console will automatically be closed by the
              system.  (The CMS LOGOFF command will ask if the spooled console
              log should be kept.  If not needed it can be purged.)  The RUNID
              command can later be used to recover the runid assigned if the
              console was routed CENTRAL.
 
          3.  Refer to the OUTPUT command description for restrictions
              regarding the FORMS, ROUTE, and COPIES options.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSSCN003E "name" is not a valid option.  RC=24
         DMSSCN029E Invalid parameter "parm" in the option field.  RC=24
 
         Messages may also be produced by the CLOSE, SPOOL, and TAG commands.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     239
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SETPRT
 
         Use the SETPRT command to prepare your printer for hardcopy output.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +     +  +        +  +            +  +           +     |
         | SETPRT    | |CLose|  |GRoup   |  |CONTinuous  |  |User userid|     |
         |           | |PUrge|  |ENdgroup|  |NOCONTinuous|  |To userid  |     |
         |           | +     +  +        +  +            +  |Route dest |     |
         |           |                                      +           +     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Pagesize n]  [Space x]  [Forms nnnn]  [Copies n]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           |                      +        +  +           +         |
         |           | [Name name [type]]   |DOCument|  |Device addr|         |
         |           |                      |LABels  |  |       00E |         |
         |           |                      +        +  +           +         |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         CLose     causes the printer to be closed.  This is used in
                   conjunction with the NOCONT or GROUP options.
 
         CONTinuo  causes CLOSE requests to be ignored until NOCONT or ENDGROUP
                   has been specified.  This includes automatic closes
                   performed by commands such as PRINT and SCRIPT.
 
         Copies n  is the number of copies to be printed.  The default is one
                   copy.  This option only applies to output routed to a HASP
                   printer (except the HOT printer).
 
         Device 00E
                   specifies the virtual address of the printer device.  This
                   option is present for special purposes and should not
                   normally be used.
 
         DOCument  has the effect of specifying PAGESIZE 0 and FORMS NT.  This
                   option applies only to output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         ENdgroup  is used to indicate the end of a printing group.  This is
                   equivalent to specifying NOCONT and CLOSE.  Any options
                   specified with ENDGROUP will override those specified on the
                   SETPRT GROUP command.
 
         Forms nnnn
                   specifies the printer forms to be used.  The default is
                   standard (STD.) forms.  This option applies only to output
                   routed to a HASP printer.  Refer to the description of the
                   OUTPUT command FORMS option for more information.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     240
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SETPRT
 
         GRoup     is used for setting the printer to print a group of files
                   together.  This is equivalent to specifying CONTINUOUS.
                   CLOSE requests, including automatic closes performed by the
                   PRINT and SCRIPT commands, are ignored until NOCONT or
                   ENDGROUP is specified.  Any other options specified with
                   GROUP will be overridden by the options specified on the
                   SETPRT ENDGROUP command.
 
         K n       is a synonym for PAGESIZE.
 
         LABels    will cause PAGESIZE 0 and FORMS LT to be used.  This option
                   is used for printing labels and only applies to output
                   routed to a HASP printer.  Refer to the description of the
                   OUTPUT command for more information.
 
         Linect n  is a synonym for PAGESIZE.
 
         N n       is a synonym for COPIES.
 
         Name name [type]
                   is used with the CLOSE and ENDGROUP options to set the spool
                   file name and type.  This identifier is used by HASP when
                   assigning job names and by the ACCEPT and INPUT commands
                   when assigning disk fileids.  The second part of the name is
                   optional if NAME is the last option specified.
 
         NOCONTin  resets the continuous spooling option.  NOCONT is the
                   initial setting.
 
         Pagesize n
                   is the number of lines per page.  The default is 61, and the
                   maximum is 255.  If zero is specified, automatic page
                   skipping is not provided.  This option applies only to
                   output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         PUrge     causes any printed lines generated but not yet closed to be
                   deleted.  PURGE forces the CLOSE and NOCONT options.
 
         Route dest
                   specifies the destination of the printed output.  The
                   default routing is to CENTRAL.  Any of the following may be
                   specified:
 
                        Central   HASP Printer in the UKCC Computer Room
                        Hot       HASP Hands-on (HOT) Printer at the UKCC
                        Local     Synonym for CENTRAL (This option is not
                                  recommended and is provided only for
                                  compatibility with older applications.)
                        Pnnnn     RSCS Remote Printer "nnnn"
                        RMTnn     HASP Remote Site "nn"
       |                Terminal  Is the same as specifying "TO *"
                        userid    Any VM/SP Userid (Reader Spool File)
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     241
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SETPRT
 
         Space x   determines the carriage control used.  SPACE S causes single
                   spacing of output.  SPACE W allows normal carriage control.
                   The default is SPACE S unless special forms are used.  This
                   option only applies to output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         To userid will cause print files to be sent to the specified user
                   rather than to be printed.  Specify "*" to send the file to
                   your own reader.  Specify "SAME" to leave the destination
                   userid unchanged.  SAME should not be specified the first
                   time SETPRT is issued during a terminal session.
 
         User      is a synonym for TO.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Issuing the SETPRT command will set your printer so that all
              printed output you generate (such as from the PRINT and SCRIPT
              commands) will be sent to the specified printer or user.
 
              A useful technique is to issue the command "SETPRT TO *" at the
              beginning of a terminal session (possibly in the PROFILE EXEC).
              This will cause printed files to be sent to your own reader.  The
              reader spool file can then be examined, copied into a CMS disk
              file with the ACCEPT or INPUT commands, or sent to another user
              with the OUTPUT command.
 
          2.  You will receive a message when the console is closed and the
              file is accepted by HASP or RSCS for printing.  This message will
              contain the identifier assigned to the printed output.  If the
              output was routed to the UKCC hands-on (HOT) printer in McVey
              Hall, another message is sent when it begins printing.
 
          3.  You should always specify DOCUMENT or PAGESIZE 0 when using
              SCRIPT, since SCRIPT will control page skipping itself.
 
          4.  Refer to the description of the OUTPUT command for restrictions
              on the FORMS, ROUTE, and COPIES options.
 
          5.  Refer to the description of the PRINT command for some examples
              of the use of the SETPRT command.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSSPT003E "name" is not a valid option.  RC=24
         DMSSPT029E "name" is not valid in the option field.  RC=24
 
         Messages may also be produced by the CP commands CLOSE, TAG, and
         TRANSFER.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     242
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SETPUN
 
         Use the SETPUN command to prepare your punch for hardcopy printed
         output.  Output processed in this manner will be printed, not punched.
         An OS batch job must be used to produce punched output on cards.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +     +  +        +  +            +  +           +     |
         | SETPUN    | |CLose|  |GRoup   |  |CONTinuous  |  |User userid|     |
         |           | |PUrge|  |ENdgroup|  |NOCONTinuous|  |To userid  |     |
         |           | +     +  +        +  +            +  |Route dest |     |
         |           |                                      +           +     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Pagesize n]  [Space x]  [Forms nnnn]  [Copies n]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           |                      +        +  +           +         |
         |           | [Name name [type]]   |DOCument|  |Device addr|         |
         |           |                      |LABels  |  |       00D |         |
         |           |                      +        +  +           +         |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         CLose     causes the punch to be closed.  This is used in conjunction
                   with the NOCONT or GROUP options.
 
         CONTinuo  causes CLOSE requests to be ignored until NOCONT or ENDGROUP
                   has been specified.  This includes automatic closes
                   performed by commands such as DISK DUMP, PUNCH, and SUBMIT.
 
         Copies n  is the number of copies to be printed.  The default is one
                   copy.  This option only applies to output routed to a HASP
                   printer (except the HOT printer).
 
         Device 00D
                   specifies the virtual address of the punch device.  This
                   option is present for special purposes and should not
                   normally be used.
 
         DOCument  has the effect of specifying PAGESIZE 0 and FORMS NT.  This
                   option applies only to output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         ENdgroup  is used to indicate the end of a punch group.  This is
                   equivalent to specifying NOCONT and CLOSE.  Any options
                   specified with ENDGROUP will override those specified on the
                   SETPUN GROUP command.
 
         Forms nnnn
                   specifies the printer forms to be used.  The default is
                   standard (STD.) forms.  This option applies only to output
                   routed to a HASP printer.  Refer to the description of the
                   OUTPUT command FORMS option for more information.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     243
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SETPUN
 
         GRoup     is used for setting the punch to print a group of files
                   together.  This is equivalent to specifying CONTINUOUS.
                   CLOSE requests, including automatic closes performed by the
                   SUBMIT and other commands, are ignored until NOCONT or
                   ENDGROUP is specified.  Any other options specified with
                   GROUP will be overridden by the options specified on the
                   SETPUN ENDGROUP command.
 
         K n       is a synonym for PAGESIZE.
 
         LABels    will cause PAGESIZE 0 and FORMS LT to be used.  This option
                   is used for printing labels and only applies to output
                   routed to a HASP printer.  Refer to the description of the
                   OUTPUT command for more information.
 
         Linect n  is a synonym for PAGESIZE.
 
         N n       is a synonym for COPIES.
 
         Name name [type]
                   is used with the CLOSE and ENDGROUP options to set the spool
                   file name and type.  This identifier is used by HASP when
                   assigning job names and by the ACCEPT and INPUT commands
                   when assigning CMS disk fileids.  The second part of the
                   name is optional if NAME is the last option specified.
 
         NOCONTin  resets the continuous spooling option.  NOCONT is the
                   initial setting.
 
         Pagesize n
                   is the number of lines per page.  The default is 61, and the
                   maximum is 255.  If zero is specified, automatic page
                   skipping is not provided.  This option applies only to
                   output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         PUrge     causes any punched lines generated but not yet closed to be
                   deleted.  PURGE forces the CLOSE and NOCONT options.
 
         Route dest
                   specifies the destination of the printed output.  The
                   default routing is to CENTRAL.  Any of the following may be
                   specified:
 
                        Central   HASP Printer in the UKCC Computer Room
                        Hot       HASP Hands-on (HOT) Printer at the UKCC
                        Local     Synonym for CENTRAL (This option is not
                                  recommended and is provided only for
                                  compatibility with older applications.)
                        Pnnnn     RSCS Remote Printer "nnnn"
                        RMTnn     HASP Remote Site "nn"
       |                Terminal  Is the same as specifying "TO *"
                        userid    Any VM/SP Userid (Reader Spool File)
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     244
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SETPUN
 
         Space x   determines the carriage control used.  SPACE S causes single
                   spacing of output.  SPACE W allows normal carriage control.
                   The default is SPACE S unless special forms are used.  This
                   option applies only to output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         To userid will cause punch files to be sent to the specified user
                   rather than to be printed.  Specify "*" to send the file to
                   your own reader.  Specify "SAME" to leave the destination
                   userid unchanged.  SAME should not be specified the first
                   time SETPUN is issued during a terminal session.
 
         User      is a synonym for TO.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Issuing the SETPUN command will set your punch so that all
              punched output you generate (such as from the DISK DUMP or PUNCH
              commands) will be sent to the specified printer or user.
 
              A useful technique is to issue the command "SETPUN TO *" at the
              beginning of a terminal session (possibly in the PROFILE EXEC).
              This will cause punched files to be sent to your own reader.  The
              reader spool file can then be examined, copied into a CMS disk
              file with the ACCEPT command, or sent to another user with the
              OUTPUT command.
 
          2.  You will receive a message when the console is closed and the
              file is accepted by HASP or RSCS for printing.  This message will
              contain the identifier assigned to the printed output.  If the
              output was routed to the UKCC hands-on (HOT) printer in McVey
              Hall, another message is sent when it begins printing.
 
          3.  Refer to the description of the OUTPUT command for restrictions
              on the FORMS, ROUTE, and COPIES options.
 
          4.  Refer to the description of the PRINT command for some examples
              of the use of the SETPUN command.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSSPN003E "name" is not a valid option.  RC=24
         DMSSPN029E "name" is not valid in the option field.  RC=24
 
         Messages may also be produced by the CP commands CLOSE, TAG, and
         TRANSFER.
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     245
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          SORTF
 
         Use the SORTF command to create a file sorted in a specified order.
       | SORTF is from 3 to 90 times faster than the CMS command SORT.  SSORT
       | (SyncSort) is usually faster than either SORT or SORTF.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | SORTF     | ifileid1  ofileid                                      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ifileid   is the fileid of the input file.  The records may be fixed-
                   length or variable-length.
 
         ofileid   is the fileid of the output file.  Parts of the fileid may
                   be specified with "=" and the output file may be the same as
                   the input file.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  After entering the command you will be prompted to enter the sort
              field descriptions.  The sort fields are entered in the form:
 
                   s e [type] [seq]  [s e [type] [seq]] ...
 
              where "s" is the starting sort column, "e" is the ending sort
              column, "type" is an optional description of the data type, and
              "seq" is an optional sort sequence indicator.  The sort types
              supported are:
 
                   CH   Character (default)      PD   Packed Decimal
                   FI   Fixed Binary             ZD   Zoned Decimal
                   FL   Floating-Point
 
              The sort sequence may be specified as:
 
                   A    Ascending (default)
                   D    Descending
                   E    Alphabetic (ignores uppercase/lowercase distinction,
                                    blanks, and special characters)
 
              Multiple sort fields may be entered (on one line), limited to a
              total width of 256 characters.  All sort fields must be in the
              first 256 characters of the input records.  If the "type" and
              "seq" specifications are both used they must be entered in the
              order shown.  Floating-point data must be normalized to obtain a
              correct sort.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     246
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          SORTF
 
          2.  SORTF can use reader spool files for input and punch spool files
              for output, but this feature is not supported.  Use RDR1 for the
              input fileid to indicate that input is from a reader file, and
              PUN1 for the output fileid to indicate that output is a punch
              file.  Spool file input and output may not function correctly in
              all cases.  Sorting from a CMS disk file with variable-length
              records to the punch will sometimes cause a large number of
              extraneous blank records to be produced in the output file.
 
              If the input file is not a CMS disk file and SORTF cannot
              determine the length of the input records, you will be prompted
              to enter the input record length and the number of input records.
              If you know the number of records enter the exact value;
              otherwise enter a value that is larger than the actual count.
              The sort will fail if you underestimate the number of records.
 
         Messages
 
         MWCSRT2E   FILE 'fileid' NOT FOUND
         MWCSRT5E   INVALID PARAMETER 'name'
         MWCSRT9E   COLUMN 'nn' EXCEEDS RECORD LENGTH
         MWCSRT37E  DISK 'mode' IS READ/ONLY
         MWCSRT53E  INVALID SORT FIELD PAIR DEFINED
         MWCSRT55E  INVALID SORT TYPE 'type'
         MWCSRT56E  INVALID SEQUENCE SPECIFICATION 'spec'
         MWCSRT58E  END-OF-FILE OR END-OF-TAPE
         MWCSRT62E  INVALID '*' IN FILEID 'fileid'
         MWCSRT63E  NO LIST ENTERED
         MWCSRT70E  INVALID PARAMETER 'name'
         MWCSRT71E  INVALID PARAMETER LIST
         MWCSRT104S ERROR 'nn' READING FILE 'fileid'
         MWCSRT105S ERROR 'nn' WRITING FILE 'fileid'
         MWCSRT109S VIRTUAL STORAGE CAPACITY EXCEEDED
         MWCSRT110S ERROR READING device
         MWCSRT111S ERROR WRITING device
         MWCSRT113S device NOT ATTACHED
         MWCSRT205W READER EMPTY OR NOT READY
         MWCSRT215E SORT TOO LARGE - INCREASE MACHINE SIZE BY nnnK
         MWCSRT390E INPUT BLOCKSIZE nnn NOT INTEGRAL MULTIPLE OF LRECL
         MWCSRT391E INVALID RETURN CODE nn FROM exit FLAGS xxxx
         MWCSRT393E INVALID NUMERIC FIELD 'field'
         MWCSRT604R ENTER SORT FIELDS:
         MWCSRT650R ENTER INPUT LRECL:
         MWCSRT651E SENSE DATA xxxx
         MWCSRT652I INPUT TAPE UNLOADED; CR WHEN OUTPUT TAPE IS READY
         MWCSRT653R ENTER ESTIMATED NUMBER OF RECORDS:
         MWCSRT654I OUTPUT BLOCKSIZE nnn
         MWCSRT658E NUMBER OF INPUT RECORDS EXCEEDS ESTIMATE
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     247
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   SPELL (EXEC)
 
         Use the SPELL command to check the spelling of one or more words
       | entered as parameters on the command line.  A list of alternative
       | spellings is displayed.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | SPELL     | word [word...]                                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         word      is one or more words to be checked.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  SPELL cannot detect an incorrectly used word, and some
              misspellings can result in a correctly spelled, but spurious,
              word.  There is currently no checking for capitalization.  SPELL
       |      has a limited vocabulary (currently about 90,000 words) and will
       |      flag as incorrect any word not known to it.
 
          2.  Lexicon files named JARGON and USER will automatically be used if
              they are present.  A default JARGON LEXICON file containing
              computer-related and locally used words and abbreviations is
              supplied.  You may supply your own version of these lexicons (a
              JARGON LEXICON file containing words related to your own field or
              specialty, for example), or you can create a dummy file to
              prevent the default file from being used.  You also can supply an
              additional USER LEXICON file.
 
          3.  Please report any errors or omissions that you discover in our
              lexicons.  Contact the Systems Programming group at the UKCC.
 
          4.  SPELL uses the SPELLCHK command to check the specified words.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
       | DMSSPE070E You didn't supply a word to be checked.  RC=24
 
         Messages may also be produced by the SPELLCHK command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     248
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       SPELLCHK
 
         Use the SPELLCHK command to search a CMS disk file or stack and
         terminal input for words that are misspelled, or to generate
         alternative spellings for a given word.  The incorrect words can be
         typed, stacked, or written to another CMS file.  SPELLCHK is the basis
         for the SPELL and SPELLFIX commands.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +            +                                         |
         | SPELLCHK  | |fn [ft [fm]]|  [( [options...] [)]]                   |
         |           | |?           |                                         |
         |           | +            +                                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +     +  +       +  +       +  +        +  +         + |
         |           | |CHEck|  |SLAng  |  |IGnore |  |NOSingle|  |NOSTutter| |
         |           | |Guess|  |NOSLAng|  |REspect|  |SINgle  |  |STUtter  | |
         |           | +     +  +       +  |FIRst  |  +        +  +         + |
         |           |                     +       +                          |
         |           |                                           +          + |
         |           | [ABBreviate]  [NUmber]  [All]             |APpend    | |
         |           |                                           |Disk      | |
       | |           | [User (fn [fn...])]  [ONLYUser]           |FIFo      | |
         |           |                                           |LIfo      | |
       | |           | [FRom n]  [TO n]  [FOR n]                 |Stack     | |
         |           |                                           |Terminal  | |
         |           | +       +  +        +  +    +             |Type      | |
       | |           | |Counts |  |PRompt  |  |NOCC|  [Xedit]    |NOTerminal| |
         |           | |Cnts   |  |NOPrompt|  |CC  |             |NOType    | |
         |           | |NOCOunt|  +        +  +    +             +          + |
         |           | +       +                                              |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ?         signals interactive mode.  Words are read from the stack (or
                   the terminal if the stack is empty).  One or more words may
                   be entered on each line.  An empty line indicates the end of
                   the input.  The FROM, TO, FOR, and CC options are ignored in
                   interactive mode.  This is the default.
 
         fn        is the filename of the file to be examined.
 
         ft        is the filetype of the file to be examined.  If none is
                   specified the default is "SCRIPT."
 
         fm        is the filemode of the file to be examined.  The default
                   filemode is "*."
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     249
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       SPELLCHK
 
         Options
 
         ABBreviate
                   makes periods valid characters in a word (periods are
                   otherwise considered to be word separators).  A word ending
                   with a period will be checked first with the period, and
                   then, if necessary, checked without the period.
 
         All       specifies that if a word is entirely in uppercase the case
                   must match as well as the letters.  This option may be used
                   with IGNORE and FIRST.
 
         APpend    appends output to a CMS disk file named "fn XCEPTION A1."
                   The output filename is the same as the input filename (in
                   interactive mode the filename is "INTERACT").  If the file
                   does not already exist it is created.  The APPEND and DISK
                   options may not be specified together.  This option requires
                   a write-accessed A-disk.
 
         CC        indicates that the input file contains carriage control
                   characters and that word scanning is to start with the
                   second character in each line.  The CC option is assumed if
                   the filetype is LISTING, DOCUMENT, MANUAL, or LABELS.
 
         CHEck     causes the words read by SPELLCHK to be checked for correct
                   spelling.  This is default mode.  Output produced in this
                   mode is incorrectly spelled words found in the input data.
 
         Cnts      is a synonym for COUNTS.
 
         Counts    displays statistics at the terminal.
 
         Disk      writes output into a CMS disk file named "fn XCEPTION A1."
                   The output filename is the same as the input filename (in
                   interactive mode the filename is "INTERACT").  An existing
                   file with that fileid is replaced.  The DISK and APPEND
                   options may not be specified together.  This option requires
                   a write-accessed A-disk.
 
         FIFo      stacks output (first-in, first-out).
 
         FIRst     causes the case of the first letter of each word to be
                   ignored.  The case of the other letters is respected.
 
       | FOR n     is the number of lines of the input file to be examined.
       |           The default is "*," the entire file.
 
         FRom n    is the first line to be checked in the file.  The default is
                   "1."
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     250
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       SPELLCHK
 
         Guess     reads a single input word and generates alternative
                   spellings.  The correctly spelled alternatives are sent to
                   the specified output destination.  Output consists of
                   multiple words per line separated by blanks.  GUESS is only
                   valid in interactive mode and will only process one input
                   word.  GUESS implies the IGNORE, NOCOUNT, and NOSTUTTER
                   options.  The ALL, ABBREVIATE, FIRST, and NUMBER options are
                   ignored in this mode.  Alternative spellings are generated
                   by substituting, deleting, inserting, and transposing
                   letters in the input word.
 
         IGnore    causes the difference between uppercase and lowercase
                   letters to be ignored when checking words.  This is the
                   default.
 
         LIfo      stacks output (last-in, first-out).
 
         NOCC      causes word scanning to begin with the first character in
                   each line.  The NOCC option is assumed if the filetype is
                   not LISTING, DOCUMENT, MANUAL, or LABELS.
 
         NOCOunt   suppresses the display of statistics.
 
         NOPrompt  suppresses the prompt for input in interactive mode.
 
         NOSingle  See the SINGLE option.  NOSINGLE is the default.
 
         NOSLAng   treats slang and non-standard words as incorrect.
 
         NOSTutter See the STUTTER option.  NOSTUTTER is the default.
 
         NOTermin  is a synonym for NOTYPE.
 
         NOType    suppresses the default TYPE output.
 
         NUmber    makes the digits valid characters in a word.  Numbers are
                   usually treated as word separators.
 
       | ONLYUser  ignores SPELLCHK's internal lexicons.  Only the lexicons
       |           specified by the USER option are used.
 
         PRompt    prompts for words in interactive mode.  This is the default
                   in interactive mode.
 
         REspect   respects the difference between uppercase and lowercase
                   letters when checking words.
 
         SINgle    assumes that all single-letter words correct.
 
         SLAng     allows all words in the internal lexicon to be recognized.
                   This is the default option.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     251
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       SPELLCHK
 
         Stack     stacks output (first-in, first-out).
 
         STUtter   checks for repeated consecutive occurrences of a word A
                   stutter is not indicated if there is a non-blank character
                   between the repeated words, but line boundaries are ignored.
 
         Terminal  is a synonym for TYPE.
 
         TO n      specifies the last line of the input file to be examined.
                   The default is "*," the entire file.
 
         Type      types output at the terminal.  This is the default.
 
         User (fn [fn...])
                   specifies the filenames of user lexicon files.  The filetype
                   of each must be "LEXICON."  The files must contain variable-
                   length records with one word per line.  Words may be in
                   uppercase, lowercase, or mixed.
 
       | Xedit     reads input lines directly from XEDIT storage.  An input
       |           fileid should not be specified when using this option.
       |           SPELLCHK terminates after the first incorrect word when this
       |           option is used.  This option is only valid when SPELLCHK is
       |           called from XEDIT and is intended for use in XEDIT macros.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  SPELLCHK is not a substitute for careful proofreading.  An
              incorrectly used word cannot be detected, and some misspellings
              can result in a correctly spelled, but spurious, word.  SPELLCHK
       |      has a limited vocabulary (currently about 90,000 words) and flags
       |      as incorrect any word not known to it.
 
          2.  SPELLCHK can check words containing as many as 100 characters.
              Longer words are considered misspelled.
 
          3.  Hyphenated words are broken after the hyphen and each part is
              checked separately.  The first part will be checked first with
              the hyphen, and then, if necessary, without the hyphen.
 
          4.  If a word ending with 'S or 's is not found in the lexicons the
              suffix is removed and another search is made.
 
          5.  SPELLCHK output can be displayed at the terminal, put on the
              program stack, written to a CMS disk file, or any combination of
              these options.  The information consists of the following: line
              number, column number, type of error, and the word.  The type of
              error is "X" for incorrect, "S" for stutter, and "L" for a long
              word (more than 100 characters).  The line and column numbers are
              not included in interactive mode.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     252
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       SPELLCHK
 
          6.  Please report any errors or omissions that you discover in our
              lexicons.  Contact the Systems Programming group at the UKCC.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Return code 1 (with no message) is set by the GUESS option if no
         alternatives are generated.
 
         Record n incorrect in "fileid".
         Correct -- "word".
         Incorrect -- "word".
         Stutter -- "word".
         Too long -- "word".
         Rec=n Col=n X|S|L "word"
         DMSSPE002E Input file "fileid" not found.  RC=28
         DMSSPE003E "name" is not an option.  RC=24
         DMSSPE004E User option specified incorrectly.  RC=24
         DMSSPE005E User lexicon "fileid" not found.  RC=28
         DMSSPE006E Records in user lexicon "fileid" are not variable-
                    length.  RC=24
         DMSSPE007E Insufficient storage to initialize user lexicon.  RC=28
         DMSSPE029E "name" is not a valid argument for the "name" option.
                    RC=24
         DMSSPE044E Record length of "fileid" exceeds the allowable maximum
                    of "nn".  RC=24
         DMSSPE062E Invalid "*" in fileid.  RC=20
         DMSSPE070E "name" is not a parameter.  RC=24
         DMSSPE104S Error n reading file "fileid".  RC=100
         DMSSPE105S Error n writing file "fileid".  RC=100
         DMSSPE106E Output disk not accessed r/w.  RC=100
         DMSSPE933I Total words n; correct n; incorrect n.
         DMSSPE933I Words found: common n; other n; user n.
         DMSSPE979R Enter word(s) or null line to exit:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     253
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                SPELLFIX (EXEC)
 
         Use the SPELLFIX command to search a CMS disk file for words that are
         incorrectly spelled and then edit the file (using XEDIT) with the
         possible misspellings indicated for correction.  SPELLFIX can be used
         only on 3270-type display terminals with Program Function (PF) keys.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |    +       +  ++                                       |
         | SPELLFIX  | fn |ft     |fm|| [( options... [)]]                    |
         |           |    |SCRIPT |* ||                                       |
         |           |    +       +  ++                                       |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        is the filename of the CMS disk file to be examined.
 
         ft        is the filetype of the CMS disk file to be examined.  The
                   default is "SCRIPT."
 
         fm        is the filemode of the CMS disk file to be examined.  The
                   default is "*," which will search all accessed disks.
 
         options   are options for the SPELLCHK command.  A number of options
                   are supplied by the SPELLFIX EXEC (refer to the Usage
                   Notes).
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  If no errors are detected, the file is not edited.  If XEDIT is
              used, SPELLFIX will use your XEDIT PROFILE.
 
          2.  SPELLFIX is also an XEDIT subcommand.  While using XEDIT you may
              issue SPELLFIX (with no operands) to check the spelling in the
              file that you are editing.
 
          3.  SPELLFIX will temporarily change the Program Function (PF) key
              definitions used by XEDIT, and will display the definitions at
              the bottom of the screen.  The PF keys are used to indicate how a
              possibly misspelled word should be handled, to display
              alternative spellings, and insert corrections.
 
          4.  You must use PF3 (or PF15) to stop SPELLFIX.  You will still be
              in the XEDIT environment.  After pressing PF3 (or PF15) to stop
              SPELLFIX, you may enter KEEP to retain the exception file ("fn
              XCEPTION A1") produced by the SPELLCHK command.  Be certain to
              use the FILE subcommand to retain any corrections made to the
              file.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     254
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                SPELLFIX (EXEC)
 
          5.  SPELLFIX is not a substitute for careful proofreading.  An
              incorrectly used word cannot be detected, and some misspellings
              can result in a correctly spelled, but spurious, word.  There is
              no checking for capitalization.  SPELLFIX has a limited
       |      vocabulary (currently about 90,000 words) and will consider any
       |      word not known to it to be incorrect.
 
          6.  Lexicon files named ABBR, SCRIPT, JARGON, and USER will
              automatically be used if they are present (default ABBR, SCRIPT,
              and JARGON lexicons are supplied).  The supplied SCRIPT LEXICON
              file contains SCRIPT control words and some common SCRIPT
              variable names.  The ABBR LEXICON file contains some common
              abbreviations.  The JARGON LEXICON file contains computer-related
              and locally used words and abbreviations.  You may supply your
              own versions of these lexicons (a JARGON LEXICON file containing
              words related to your own field or specialty, for example), or
              you may want to create dummy files to prevent the default files
              from being used.  You may also supply an additional USER LEXICON
              file.
 
          7.  Please report any errors or omissions that you discover in our
              lexicons.  Contact the Systems Programming group at the UKCC.
 
          8.  SPELLFIX uses the SPELLCHK and XEDIT commands to check and edit
              the specified file.  The SPELLCHK command is issued using several
              options, including the ABBREV, SINGLE, and STUTTER options.  This
              allows abbreviations to appear in the lexicon files, causes all
              single letter words to be considered correct, and flags repeated
              words.  Additional SPELLCHK options may be specified.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSFIX001E No filename specified.  RC=24
         DMSFIX529E Spellfix can only be used on a 3270-type display.  RC=24
 
         Messages may also be produced by the SPELLCHK and XEDIT commands.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     255
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        SPITBOL
 
         Use the SPITBOL command to compile and execute a program using the
         Illinois Institute of Technology SPITBOL compiler.  SPITBOL is not
         supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | SPITBOL   | filename [filename...] [( [options...] [)]]            |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +       +  +       +  +      +  +      +               |
         |           | |NOPRint|  |NOPUnch|  |TErm  |  |NOTYpe|               |
         |           | |PRint  |  |PUnch  |  |NOTErm|  |TYpe  |               |
         |           | +       +  +       +  +      +  +      +               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +       +                                              |
         |           | |NOXtype|  [DECK]     [compiler options]               |
         |           | |Xtype  |                                              |
         |           | +       +                                              |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is one or more input filenames.  The filetype of these files
                   must be "SPITBOL," and they must contain fixed-length,
       |           80-byte records.  These files must be on the A-disk or an
       |           extension of the A-disk.
 
         Options
 
         DECK      produces an object file.  There is no information available
                   on how to use an object file produced in this way, so this
                   option is not recommended.
 
         NOPRint   writes the program listing and execution output into a CMS
                   disk file named "filename LISTING."  This is the default.
 
         NOPUnch   discards punched output from the program.  This is the
                   default.
 
         NOTErm    suppresses display of compiler error messages at the
                   terminal.
 
         NOTYpe    suppresses display of the program listing at the terminal.
                   This is the default.
 
         NOXtype   suppresses display of execution time output at the terminal.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     256
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        SPITBOL
 
         PRint     sends the program listing and execution output to the
                   spooled printer.
 
         PUnch     writes punched output from the program into a CMS disk file
                   named "filename PUNCH."
 
         TErm      displays compiler error messages at the terminal.  This is
                   the default.
 
         TYpe      displays the program listing at the terminal.
 
         Xtype     displays execution time output at the terminal.
 
         In addition, the following compiler options may also be specified:
 
         C nnn     is the maximum number of lines to be written to the PUNCH
                   file.  The default is zero.
 
         D nn      is the maximum number of dumps to be produced.
 
         H nnK     is the maximum amount of storage to be used by the compiler.
                   The default is 1000K.
 
         L nnK     is the minimum amount of storage which must be available for
                   the compiler.  The default is 16K.
 
         N nnn     is the number of lines per page of LISTING.  The default is
                   63.
 
         P nnn     is the maximum number of pages to be printed in the LISTING.
                   The default is 999.
 
         R nnK     is the amount of storage to be reserved for CMS.  The
                   default is 8K.
 
         T nnn     is the maximum amount of CPU time to be used by the
                   compiler.  The default is 999.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The SPITBOL language is similar to the SNOBOL4 language described
              in The SNOBOL4 Programming Language.  Some additional information
              is available in the UKCC Consulting Room in McVey Hall.
 
          2.  SPITBOL uses OS simulation input and output.  The following DD
              names are defined by default:
 
                   SYSIN      Input
                   SYSPRINT   Printed Output
                   SYSPUNCH   Punched Output
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     257
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        SPITBOL
 
              If you wish to use other files with a SPITBOL program, you must
              issue FILEDEF commands for these files before the program is
              executed.  A file with one of the DD names given above can be
              overridden with a FILEDEF before the program is executed.  The
              record format and block size of the file must be specified in the
       |      FILEDEF command.  You may need to specify a larger value for the
       |      R compiler option if you define additional files.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     258
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                  SSORT
 
         Use the SSORT command to create a file sorted in a specified order.
         SSORT uses SyncSort and is considerably more efficient than SORTF or
         SORT.  This is a summary of the most frequently needed options and
         functions of SyncSort.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                + +     + +        +                  |
         | SSORT     | |ifile [ifile...]| |ofile| |PROmpt  | [( options...    |
         |           | |RDR             | |PRT  | |NOPrompt|                  |
         |           | +                + |PUN  | |cfile   |                  |
         |           |                    +     + +        +                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +              +   +                             +     |
         |           | |OUTput CANcel |   | WORK Tnnnn primary secondary|     |
         |           | |       REPlace|   |      address                |     |
         |           | |       APPend |   +                             +     |
         |           | +              +                                       |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ifile     is the fileid of the input file.  You can specify more than
                   one input fileid.  You can specify "RDR" to indicate input
                   from a reader spool file.  The default fileid is "SORTIN1
                   FILE A1."
 
         ofile     is the fileid of the output file.  The default is "= = =,"
                   which causes the input file to be replaced.  You can specify
                   "PRT" for output to a printer spool file, or "PUN" for
                   output to a punch spool file.  The default fileid is
                   "SORTOUT FILE A1."
 
         cfile     is the fileid of the file containing SyncSort control
                   statements (the SYSIN file).  The default is "PROMPT," which
                   will read the control statements from the terminal.
                   Specifying "NOPROMPT" will read the control statements from
                   the terminal, but without prompting.  The last statement
                   must be "END" in this case.  The default fileid is "SYSIN
                   FILE A1."
 
         Options
 
         OUTput    controls output to a CMS disk file.  OUTPUT CANCEL causes
                   SSORT to stop if the output file already exists.  OUTPUT
                   REPLACE causes an existing file to be replaced.  OUTPUT
                   APPEND causes the output to be appended to an existing file,
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     259
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                  SSORT
 
                   if one exists.  REPLACE is the default when the input and
                   output fileid's are the same.
 
         WORK      controls the device used for work space (SORTWK) by the
                   sort.  "Tnnnn" is the device type, and can be T3330, T3350,
                   or T3380.  "Primary" and "secondary" are the number of
                   cylinders.  "Address" is the virtual device address to be
                   used.  The SORTWK device is formatted by SyncSort and must
                   be reformatted with the CMS FORMAT command to be used for
                   CMS disk files.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  SyncSort supports a number of control statements.  The most
              frequently needed is the SORT statement:
 
                   SORT FIELDS=(p,l,c,o,...)
                        FIELDS=(p,l,o,...),FORMAT=c
 
              where "p" is the starting position of the sort field, "l" is the
              length, "c" is the collating method, and "o" is the order ("A"
              for ascending, "D" for descending).  If all of the fields are in
              the same format, the FORMAT= parm can be used.  When sorting a
              file with variable-length records, the first data position is 5
              (to allow for a record descriptor word).  Some frequently used
              collating methods are:
 
                   AC    Characters (ASCII)
                   BI    Binary (unsigned)
                   CH    Characters (EBCDIC)
                   FI    Fixed-point
                   FL    Floating-point (Normalized)
                   PD    Packed decimal
 
              As many as 64 fields can be specified.  Use the "END" statement
              to mark the end of the control statements.
 
          2.  SyncSort provides many other functions and can be called from
              COBOL, PL/I, and assembler programs.  Refer to the SyncSort CMS
              Programmer's Guide for more information.  (Note that tapes are
              not available to CMS users at the UKCC.)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     260
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         STATUS
 
         Use the STATUS command to determine the status of an OS batch job or
         HASP printed output that was submitted from your userid.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | STATUS    | [job|ALL]                                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         job       is the job name, number, or HASP runid of the OS batch job
                   or HASP print job to be checked.
 
         ALL       checks all jobs submitted from this userid.  This is the
                   default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  If the job is found and was submitted from your userid a message
              containing the following is returned:
 
                 JOBNAME  RUNID  QUE  POS  STEP/PROC NAME   CPUTIME  LINES
                 jobname  runid  que  pos  step procstep    seconds  lines
 
                 jobname   job name
                 runid     HASP runid
                 que       PRTn, PUN, XEQn,  or  blank (between queues)
                 pos       position of the job in queue, or BUSY
                 step      current job step name (if executing)
                 procstep  current procedure step name (if executing)
                 seconds   seconds of CPU time used by an executing job
                 lines     estimated print lines, number of lines
                           generated, or number of lines left to print
 
              If the specified job is not in the system or was not submitted
              from your userid, HASP returns a message that the job was not
              found.  You may receive this indication if you issue the STATUS
              command immediately after submitting a job, especially when the
              system is heavily loaded.
 
          2.  The responses from HASP are suppressed if you have SET MSG OFF.
 
          3.  Allow at least thirty minutes after completion before coming to
              the UKCC Data Center to pick up printed output; allow an hour for
              plotted output.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     261
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         STATUS
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSSTA070E Invalid parameter "parm".  RC=24
         DMSSTA930E [batch] is not available.  RC=101
         DMSSTA931E No job specified.  RC=24
       | DMSSTA943E Error "[code]" from VMCF [function].  RC=100
 
         Messages are also sent by HASP.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     262
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                     STK (EXEC)
 
         Use the STK command to execute a command and display the contents of
         the CMS program stack.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | STK       | [command  [operands...]]                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         command   can be any CMS or CP command or EXEC name.  The specified
                   command will be executed by STK.
 
         operands  are operands to be passed to the executed command.  STK does
                   no checking of the operands.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  STK executes the specified command, and displays the contents of
              the CMS program stack.  If no command is specified, the stack is
              left unchanged.  The return code from the executed command will
              also be displayed.
 
          2.  STK is useful in examining the operation of the STKxxx commands
              (STKDATE, STKID, STKRDR, etc.).  For example, the following would
              demonstrate the operation of the STKDATE command:
 
              stk stkdate
       |      STKDATE completed with RC=0 and stacked 1 lines.
       |      Contents of stack (word count begins each line):
       |      12 : THU 02/09/84 12:13:06 Thursday THU 02/09/84 09:54:39
       |           Thursday 000008307 February 09 1984
       |      R;  $0.01 12:13:06
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSSTK915E "name" is not a command.  RC=24
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     263
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        STKDATE
 
       | Use the STKDATE command to put the current day, date, and time onto
       | the CMS program stack.  Most of this information is available from the
       | QUERY TIME command and the DATE functions of REXX and EXEC 2.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | STKDATE   | [LIFO|FIFO]                                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         LIFO      stacks last-in, first-out.  This is the default.
 
         FIFO      stacks first-in, first-out.
 
         Usage Notes
 
       |  1.  STKDATE stacks a line containing the following:
 
                    1.  Abbreviated Day (MON,TUE,WED,THU,FRI,SAT,SUN)
                    2.  Date (mm/dd/yy)
                    3.  Time (hh:mm:ss, using a 24-hour clock)
                    4.  Day (Monday, Tuesday, etc.)
                    5.  IPL Abbreviated Day (MON,TUE,WED,THU,FRI,SAT,SUN)
                    6.  IPL Date (mm/dd/yy)
                    7.  IPL Time (hh:mm:ss, using a 24-hour clock)
                    8.  IPL Day (Monday, Tuesday, etc.)
                    9.  Seconds since IPL
       |           10.  Month
       |           11.  Day
       |           12.  Year
 
              The IPL time information is set at CMS IPL.  IPL occurs
              automatically when you log on and is usually not done again
              during a terminal session.
 
          2.  Lexington local time is either Eastern Standard Time (EST) or
              Eastern Daylight Time (EDT).  The time is usually correct to
              within a few minutes.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSKDT070E "string" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
 
         Return code 25 will be set (with no error message) if there is no room
         on the program stack.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     264
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        STKDISK
 
         Use the STKDISK command to put information describing accessed
       | minidisks onto the CMS program stack.  Some of this information is
       | available from the QUERY DISK command.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +       +                                              |
         | STKDISK   | |FIrst  |                                              |
         |           | |MOst   |                                              |
         |           | |mode   |                                              |
         |           | |address|                                              |
         |           | |ALl    |                                              |
         |           | +       +                                              |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         address   stacks information about the minidisk at address "address"
                   (if it is accessed).
 
         ALl       stacks information about all accessed minidisks.
 
         FIrst     stacks information about the first accessed minidisk
                   (usually the A-disk).  This is the default.
 
         mode      stacks information about the minidisk accessed as "mode."
 
         MOst      stacks information about the write-accesses CMS minidisk
                   with the most space available.
 
         Usage Notes
 
         STKDISK checks the specified disk or disks and sets a return code of 0
         (if the disk is accessed) or 36 (if the disk is not accessed).  No
         message is issued with return code 36.  One or more lines containing
         the following are stacked when the return code is zero:
 
               1. Asterisk ("*")
               2. Disk label
               3. Device address
               4. Primary access mode
               5. Access mode with extension
               6. R/W or R/O
               7. Disk size (cylinders)
               8. Device type
               9. Format (CMS, OS, or DOS)
       |      10. (CMS Disks Only) Disk block size
       |      11. (CMS Disks Only) Number of files
              12. (CMS Disks Only) Total blocks
              13. (CMS Disks Only) Free blocks
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     265
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        STKDISK
 
              14. (CMS Disks Only) Used blocks
              15. (CMS Disks Only) Used percentage
              16. (CMS Disks Only) Date formatted
              17. (CMS Disks Only) Time formatted
 
         Stacking is LIFO unless ALL, which uses FIFO, is specified.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSKDK070E "name" is not a parameter.  RC=24
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     266
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          STKID
 
       | Use the STKID command to put system identification information onto
       | the CMS program stack.  Most of this information is available from the
       | QUERY CPLEVEL or IDENTIFY commands.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | STKID     | [LIFO|FIFO]                                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         LIFO      stacks last-in, first-out.  This is the default.
 
         FIFO      stacks first-in, first-out.
 
         Usage Note
 
         STKID places a line containing from 11 to 13 words on the stack:
 
               1. System Control Program Name
               2. SCP Version
               3. SCP Level
       |       4. SCP Service Level
               5. Real CPU Model
               6. Real CPU Version
               7. Real CPU Address
               8. Virtual CPU Serial Number
               9. Userid
              10. IPL Name or Address
              11. Subsystem Name
              12. Userid (2nd level VM, not normally present)
              13. Userid (3rd level VM, not normally present)
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSKDT070E "string" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
 
         Return code 25 will be given (with no error message) if there is no
         room in the CMS program stack.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     267
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         STKRDR
 
         Use the STKRDR command to put the spool file numbers of your reader
         spool files onto the CMS program stack.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | STKRDR    | [LIFO|FIFO]                                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         LIFO      stacks last-in, first-out.  This is the default.
 
         FIFO      stacks first-in, first-out.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  STKRDR stacks a line containing up to 30 reader spool file
              numbers.  If you have no reader spool files, an empty line is
              stacked.
 
          2.  The following EXEC demonstrates how STKRDR could be used:
 
       |           /* Look for reader files */
 
       |           "makebuf"
       |           "stkrdr"
       |           pull files
       |           say "There are" words(files) "reader files."
       |           say "Spool file numbers:" files
       |           "dropbuf"
 
          3.  STKRDR returns punch files before print and console files.  Spool
              file numbers of held reader files are not returned.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSKDT070E "string" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
 
         Return code 25 will be given (with no error message) if there is no
         room on the program stack.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     268
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        STKTERM
 
         Use the STKTERM command to put information about your terminal onto
         the CMS program stack.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | STKTERM   | [LIFO|FIFO]                                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         LIFO      stacks last-in, first-out.  This is the default.
 
         FIFO      stacks first-in, first-out.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  STKTERM stacks a line containing the following items:
 
                    1. Virtual Device Address
                    2. Virtual Device Type
                    3. Real Device Type
                    4. Real Model
                    5. CP LINESIZE
                    6. "DISPLAY" or "TYPEWRITER"
                    7. Number of lines on a display screen
                    8. Number of columns on a display screen
 
              The LINESIZE is controlled by the CP TERMINAL LINESIZE command.
              The sixth item distinguishes between 3270-type terminals
              (DISPLAY) and asynchronous ASCII terminals (TYPEWRITER).  Even if
              it has a display screen, an asynchronous ASCII terminal is
              treated as a typewriter unless you are using the 3270 Simulator
              (S3270).  A terminal using S3270 is treated by VM/SP as a 3278
              model 2, and STKTERM indicates "DISPLAY" in this case.  The real
              model, line count, and column count are only meaningful if the
              terminal is a 3270 display or an ASCII display using S3270.
 
          2.  The virtual device address is set to "FFF" if there is no virtual
              console.  This is not a normal condition.
 
          3.  The real device type is set to one of the following:
 
                Type    Description
                TTY     Any asynchronous ASCII (TeleVideo, DECwriter, etc.)
                2741    IBM 2741
                3066    IBM 3066
                3215    IBM 3215
                3277    IBM 3277, Memorex 1377, Telex 277, etc.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     269
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        STKTERM
 
                3278    IBM 3278, IBM 3276, ASCII S3270
                3279    IBM 3279
                NONE    No real terminal (disconnected)
                ????    Unknown type  (not normal)
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSKDT070E "name" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
 
         Return code 25 will be given (with no error message) if there is no
         room on the program stack.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     270
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        STKTIME
 
       | Use the STKTIME command to put timing information onto the CMS program
       | stack.  Some of this information is available from the QUERY TIME
       | command and the TIME functions available in REXX and EXEC 2.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | STKTIME   | [LIFO|FIFO]                                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         LIFO      stacks last-in, first-out.  This is the default.
 
         FIFO      stacks first-in, first-out.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  STKTIME stacks a line containing the following items:
 
                    1. Date (mm/dd/yy)
                    2. Time (hh:mm:ss, using a 24-hour clock)
                    3. Milliseconds of virtual CPU time used
                    4. Milliseconds of real CPU time used
 
          2.  The real CPU time is the sum of the virtual CPU time and the
              system overhead caused by your userid.  You are billed for
       |      virtual CPU time only.  The CPU times are for this terminal
       |      session during the current rate period.
 
          3.  The maximum value for CPU time that can be returned is 99999999
              ms (99,999 seconds or 1,666 hours).  It is unlikely that you
              could exceed that limit in one terminal session.
 
          4.  The date and time returned are local time in Lexington, Kentucky,
              either Eastern Standard Time (EST) or Eastern Daylight Time
              (EDT).  The time is usually correct to within a few minutes.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSKDT070E "string" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
 
         Return code 25 will be given (with no error message) if there is no
         room on the program stack.
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     271
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        STKXRDR
 
         Use the STKXRDR command to put information describing selected reader
       | spool files onto the CMS program stack.  Most of this information is
       | available from the QUERY RDR command.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +          +    ++                                     |
         | STKXRDR   | |*         |LIFO||                                     |
         |           | |spoolid   |FIFO||                                     |
         |           | |All       +    +|                                     |
         |           | |                |                                     |
         |           | |          [COST]|                                     |
         |           | +                +                                     |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         *         stacks information describing the first reader file.  This
                   is the default.
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of a selected reader file.
 
         All       stacks information about all reader files.
 
         LIFO      stacks last-in, first-out.  This is the default unless ALL
                   is specified.
 
         FIFO      stacks first-in, first-out.  This is the default when ALL is
                   specified.
 
         COST      adds an estimated spool block count and cost to the data
                   stacked for each file.  Charges for spool files are based on
                   their size and age.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  If the specified file is not found, or if there are no reader
              files, an empty line is stacked.  If the file is found, a line
              containing from 8 to 15 words is stacked.  Word 0 (the file
              number) is not present if a "spoolid" was specified.  Words 9
              through 11 are not always present.  If COST is specified, words 9
              through 11 are set to "NONE" if they would otherwise be blank.
              The output format is:
 
                    0. Spool File Number (only if * or ALL specified)
                    1. Origin Userid
                    2. Spool Class  (one character)
                    3. Spool Type  (PRT, PUN, CON, etc.)
                    4. Number of Records
                    5. Copy Count
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     272
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        STKXRDR
 
                    6. Hold  (will always be "NONE")
                    7. Creation Date  (mm/dd/yy)
                    8. Creation Time  (hh:mm:ss)
                    9. Distribution Code  (may be blank or "NONE")
                   10. Spool File Name  (may be blank or "NONE")
                   11. Spool File Type  (may be blank or "NONE")
                   12. Estimated Spool Block Count (only if COST specified)
                   13. Estimated Current Charge (only if COST specified)
                   14. Estimated Cost Per Day (only if COST specified)
 
          2.  The specified reader spool file is ordered (placed at the head of
              the reader spool queue) if a "spoolid" was specified.
 
          3.  STKXRDR will not find a held reader file unless ALL is specified.
              Specifying the "spoolid" of a held reader file will cause an
              empty line to be stacked.
 
          4.  The estimated spool block count is based on the type of file
              (print, punch, etc.) and an estimated average line length.
              Obtaining an accurate count entails too much system overhead to
              be practical.
 
          5.  This EXEC demonstrates how STKXRDR can be used:
 
       |           /* Display reader file info */
 
       |           arg file .
       |           if file="" then file = "*"
       |           "makebuf"
       |           "stkxrdr" file "cost"
       |           if rc=0 then do
       |              "checkbuf"
       |              n = rc
       |              do n
       |                 pull info
       |                 say info
       |                 end
       |              end
       |           "dropbuf"
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSKDT070E "string" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
 
         Return code 25 will be given (with no error message) if there is no
         room on the program stack.
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     273
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 STORAGE (EXEC)
 
         Use the STORAGE command to redefine your virtual machine size and re-
         IPL CMS.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | STORAGE   | [size]                                                 |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         size      is the new storage size.  The value is assumed to be in
                   kilobytes unless a suffix of "M" is used to indicate
                   megabytes.  The default is 512K.  Values may range from 8K
                   through 2M, although CMS cannot be used in a virtual machine
                   smaller than 256K.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  CMS will not be reloaded if the storage size specified is not
              valid.
 
          2.  The STORAGE command is ignored in a CMS Batch job.  Use a /SET
              SIZE statement to specify storage size in a batch job.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMKDEG025E STORAGE SIZE MISSING OR INVALID.
         DMKDEG094E STORAGE SIZE EXCEEDS ALLOWED MAXIMUM.
 
         Messages will also be produced during the re-IPL of CMS.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     274
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SUBMIT
 
         Use the SUBMIT command to send a CMS disk file (or files) containing a
         job to the OS batch system.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |     +    +  ++                                         |
         | SUBMIT    | fn  |ft  |fm||  [(options... [)]]                      |
         |           |     |JOB |* ||                                         |
         |           |     |JCL +  +|                                         |
         |           |     +        +                                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +                 +    +          +                    |
         |           | |PRint destination|    |Terminal  |   [For userid]     |
         |           | |PRT destination  |    |Central   |                    |
         |           | |Route destination|    |Hot       |   [Ignore]         |
         |           | +                 +    |RMTnn     |                    |
         |           |                        |PRMTnn    |   [COunts]         |
         |           | [PUnch destination]    |Prtcentral|                    |
         |           |                        +          +                    |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        is the filename of the CMS disk file to be submitted.
 
         ft        is the filetype of the file.  The defaults are "JOB" and
                   "JCL," in that order.
 
         fm        is the filemode of the file.  The default is "*."
 
         Options
 
         Central   routes printed and punched output to the UKCC Computer Room.
                   CENTRAL is equivalent to PRT CENTRAL PUN CENTRAL.  The runid
                   assigned by the OS batch system when the job is submitted is
                   required to claim output.  The RUNID command can be used to
                   display runids.
 
         COunts    displays the number of lines read from disk and the number
                   of lines transmitted.
 
         For userid
                   makes the specified userid the owner of the job.  This
                   userid receives the messages from the OS batch system
                   describing the progress of the job, and can use the STATUS
                   and CANCEL commands to control the job.  The TERMINAL
                   routing options refer to this userid rather than your own.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     275
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SUBMIT
 
                   You will not receive messages regarding the job, and STATUS
                   and CANCEL cannot be used from your userid for this job.
 
         Hot       routes printed output to the hands-on (HOT) printer at the
                   UKCC and punched output back to your userid.  HOT is
                   equivalent to PRT HOT PUN TERM.
 
         Ignore    causes SUBMIT control statements to be ignored (treated as
                   data) in included files.
 
         Local     is a synonym for CENTRAL.  This option is provided for
                   compatibility with earlier versions SUBMIT and is not
                   recommended.
 
         PRint destination
                   is the destination for printed output from the job.  (This
                   does not affect the routing of punched output.)  The
                   destination may be any of:
 
                        Central   HASP Printer in the UKCC Computer Room
                        Hot       HASP Hands-on (HOT) Printer at the UKCC
                        Pnnnn     RSCS Remote Printer "nnnn"
                        RMTnn     HASP Remote Site "nn"
                        Terminal  Your Userid (Reader Spool File)
                        userid    Any VM/SP Userid (Reader Spool File)
 
         PRMTnn    routes printed output to HASP remote site "nn" and punched
                   output back to your userid.  Specifying a non-existent
                   remote number will cause the printed output to be lost.
                   PRMTnn is equivalent to PRT RMTnn PUN TERM.
 
         Prt       is a synonym for PRINT.
 
         Prtcentr  routes printed output to the UKCC Computer Room and punched
                   output back to your userid.  PRTCENTRAL is equivalent to PRT
                   CENTRAL PUN TERM.  The runid assigned by the OS batch system
                   when the job is submitted is required to claim output.
 
         PRTHot    is a synonym for HOT.  This option is provided for
                   compatibility with earlier versions of SUBMIT and is not
                   recommended.
 
         Prtlocal  is a synonym for PRTCENTRAL.  This option is provided for
                   compatibility with earlier versions of SUBMIT and is not
                   recommended.
 
         PUnch destination
                   is the destination for punched output from the job.  (This
                   does not affect the routing of printed output.)  You cannot
                   route your punched output to CENTRAL unless your printed
                   output is also routed to CENTRAL.  Not all HASP remote sites
                   have punches.  The destination may be any of:
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     276
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SUBMIT
 
                        Central   HASP Punch in the UKCC Computer Room
                        RMTnn     HASP Remote Site "nn"
                        Terminal  Your Userid (Reader Spool File)
                        userid    Any VM/SP Userid (Reader Spool File)
 
         RMTnn     routes printed and punched output to HASP remote site "nn."
                   Not all remote sites are equipped with punches.  Specifying
                   a non-existent remote number will cause the output to be
                   lost.  RMTnn is equivalent to PRT RMTnn PUN RMTnn.
 
         Route     is a synonym for PRINT.
 
         Terminal  routes printed and punched output back to your userid as
                   reader spool files.  TERMINAL is equivalent to PRT TERM PUN
                   TERM.  Output routed to a CMS userid can be processed with
                   the ACCEPT, RBROWSE, PEEK, and OUTPUT commands.
 
         SUBMIT Control Statements
 
       | SUBMIT supports several control statements that may be placed in
       | submitted and included files.  All SUBMIT control statements begin
         with two dots starting in column one and a keyword beginning in column
         three.  All keywords and options must be in uppercase.
 
          ..*      is a SUBMIT comment.  The entire line is ignored and is not
                   included in the submitted job.
 
          ..END    marks the end of a submitted or included file.  If no END
                   statement is found, SUBMIT continues to the end of the file.
                   Anything after an END statement is ignored.
 
          ..EOF    is a synonym for END.
 
          ..INClude fn [ft [fm]] [( [Variable] [Ignore] [)]]
       |           includes the file named "fn ft fm" in the submitted job.
       |           Any part of the fileid can be specified with equal signs to
       |           indicate the corresponding value from the including file
                   (this is the default).  The VARIABLE option can be specified
                   to process files with long variable-length records (refer to
                   the Usage Notes for details).  The VARIABLE option is reset
                   when an INCLUDE statement is encountered in an included
                   file.  The IGNORE option causes SUBMIT control statements in
                   the included file to be ignored (treated as data).
 
          ..READ [MASK]
                   reads a line from the stack (or terminal if the stack is
                   empty) and inserts it into the submitted job.  This could be
                   thought of as an INCLUDE from the terminal.  The entered
                   line is restricted to eighty characters and is not
                   translated to uppercase or edited in any way (except CMS SET
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     277
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SUBMIT
 
                   INPUT translation).  If MASK is specified, the input at the
                   terminal is masked.  READ can be used to enter passwords or
                   small amounts of variable data.
 
          ..TYPE text
                   types the specified text on the terminal.  The text is
                   assumed to begin in column eight and may extend through
                   column 72.  The text is not edited in any way (except CMS
                   SET OUTPUT or CASE translation).  TYPE can be used to prompt
                   a user before a READ.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  SUBMIT removes any /*ROUTE statements from the job and generates
              new statements that conform to the specified routing option.  If
              more than one routing option is specified, the last one
              encountered on the command line is used.
 
          2.  Submitted and included files may contain either fixed- or
              variable-length records up to 80 bytes long.  If the VARIABLE
              option of the INCLUDE statement is specified the included file
       |      may contain lines up to 65,531 bytes long.
 
          3.  INCLUDE loops are not permitted (A includes B, B includes A) and
              cause SUBMIT to terminate and issue an error message.
 
          4.  The VARIABLE option of the INCLUDE statement causes the lines of
              the included file to be punched in a special format that allows
              lines up to 65,531 bytes long.  This special format consists of
              fixed-length 80-byte records.  The CJSPREP command and CJSPREP OS
              batch program are used to recreate the original data. CJSPREP
              output records are always variable-length, regardless of the
              original format.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSSUB001E No filename specified.  RC=24
         DMSSUB002E File not found.  RC=28
         DMSSUB003E Invalid option "option".  RC=24
         DMSSUB003E Invalid option "option" on ..INCLUDE.  RC=24
         DMSSUB044E Record length exceeds allowable maximum.  RC=32
         DMSSUB062E Invalid character "*" in fileid.  RC=20
         DMSSUB070E Invalid parameter "parameter". RC=24
         DMSSUB104S Error n reading file "fn ft fm" from disk.  RC=100
         DMSSUB901T Unexpected error at "address".  RC=256
         DMSSUB910E Missing or invalid job statement.  RC=99
         DMSSUB911E Include card in error.  RC=99
         DMSSUB932I n records read, m records punched.
         DMSSUB984E INCLUDE in "fileid" refers to active file "fileid".  RC=24
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     278
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SUBMIT
 
         You will also receive messages tracking the progress of your job
         through the OS batch system.  HASP or RSCS will send messages if they
         process your printed or punched output.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     279
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          SYSID
 
         Use the SYSID command to display information about the system and your
         userid.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | SYSID     |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Note
 
         SYSID will display information describing the real computing system,
         the system control program, and your userid.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         SYSID produces no error messages or non-zero return codes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     280
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   TDISK (EXEC)
 
         Use the TDISK command to define and format temporary disk space.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | TDISK     | [size [mode [address [type]]]] [(options...]           |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         size      is the amount of space requested.  The value is assumed to
                   be in kilobytes unless a suffix of "M" is used to indicate
                   megabytes.  The default is 200K (you can change the default
                   with the DEFAULTS command).  Depending on the available disk
                   devices, you may be given slightly more space than you
                   request.
 
         mode      is the disk mode used to access the disk.  The default is
                   the first unused mode (usually "B").
 
         address   is the virtual device address of the temporary disk.  The
                   default is the first available address (beginning with 195).
                   Any address not already in use by your virtual machine may
                   be specified.
 
         type      is the device type to be used.  The default is to use any
                   available device.  The valid device types are 3330, 3350,
                   and 3380.
 
         options   are FORMAT command options.  The BLKSIZE 2K option is
                   supplied by default.  Refer to the description of the FORMAT
                   command for more information.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Temporary disks are discarded when you log off, when the system
              is shut down, or if there is a system failure.  It is not
              possible to recover data that was on temporary disk space after
              it has been discarded.
 
          2.  You are charged for temporary disk space at a rate three times
              the current rate for permanent rental disk space.
 
          3.  The specified size is used to determine the number of cylinders
              of disk space defined.  The following cylinder capacities (which
              assume 2K blocks) are used in the calculation:
 
                   3330   228K/Cylinder
                   3350   480K/Cylinder
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     281
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   TDISK (EXEC)
 
                   3380   540K/Cylinder
 
          4.  There is a limited amount of disk space available for t-disk, and
              it is shared by all users.  Use the DROP command to discard t-
              disk space that you no longer need.
 
          5.  The temporary disk is formatted with 2K blocks by default.  You
              may use the BLKSIZE option to specify other block sizes.  Refer
              to the description of the FORMAT command for more information.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Device [address] is already accessed as the [mode]-disk.
         The existing device [address] will be accessed as the [mode]-disk.
         T-disk [mode] ([address]) defined and accessed.
 
         DMSTDI070E Not enough space is available.  RC=24
         DMSTDI070E [string] is not a valid size.  RC=24
         DMSTDI070E [string] is not a valid disk filemode.  RC=24
         DMSTDI070E [string] is not a valid disk address.  RC=24
         DMSTDI070E [string] is not a valid type.  RC=24
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     282
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                    TELL (EXEC)
 
         Use the TELL command to send a brief message to one or more logged on
         users.  This is a description of the simplest use of the TELL command;
         other functions are available.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | TELL      | name message                                           |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         name      is the name of the user to receive the message.  A "name"
                   may be a userid or a nickname (from a NAMES file).  A
                   nickname may refer to more than one userid.
 
         message   is the text of the message to be sent.  The text is not
                   translated to uppercase.  If the first word of the message
       |           is "at" you must use "TELL name AT UKCC message."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  To receive a message, a user must be logged on (and not
              disconnected) and must not have SET MSG OFF.  You will receive a
              warning if the message cannot be sent.
 
          2.  The nicknames used by the TELL command are kept in a CMS disk
              file named "userid NAMES", where "userid" is your userid.  This
              file can be maintained with the NAMES command, or edited directly
              with XEDIT.  The NAMES file is also used by the NOTE, SENDFILE,
              and NAMEFIND commands.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro
              Reference or to the online HELP command for more details about
              these commands.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSWTL647E Userid not specified for 'nickname' in 'userid names'
                    file.  RC=32
         DMSWTL648E Userid [name] not found. No message sent.  RC=32
         DMSWTL676E Invalid character '*' for network id.  RC=20
 
       | Messages may also be produced by the CP command MESSAGE, and by RSCS
       | for network messages.
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     283
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  TERMINAL (CP)
 
         Use the TERMINAL command to control functions associated with your
         terminal.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | TERMinal  | function [functions...]                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Functions:                                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | APL [ON|OFf]               LINESize [nnn|OFF]          |
         |           | APLT [ON|OFf]              Mask [ON|OFf]               |
         |           | ATtn [ON|OFf]              MODE [VM|NOCP|CP]           |
         |           | AUTocr [ON|OFf]            NUlls [ON|OFf|char]         |
         |           | BREakin [IMmed|GUESTctl]   PROMpt [ON|OFf|char|VM|TTY] |
         |           | BRKkey [PA1|PFn]           PROTOCOL [n x|OFF]          |
         |           | BUrst [ON|OFf]             RUbs [nnn|AUTO|NOAUTO]      |
         |           | BYpass [ON|OFf]            SCRNsave [ON|OFf]           |
         |           | CHardel [ON|OFf|char]      SCROll [nnn|CONT]           |
       | |           | CONMODE [3215|3270]        TABchar [ON|OFf|char]       |
         |           | EScape [ON|OFf|char]       TEXT [ON|OFf]               |
         |           | HIlight [ON|OFf]           TIMEstmp [ON|OFf]           |
         |           | IDles [nnn|AUTO|NOAUTO]    TYpe [TTY|3101]             |
         |           | LINEDel [ON|OFf|char]      XOFF [ON|OFf]               |
         |           | LINEnd [ON|OFf|char]       XON [ON|OFf]                |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         APL       controls the use of APL character translation tables.  If ON
                   is specified, the APL bit-paired character set will be used.
                   If OFF is specified, the normal character set will be used.
                   APL ON will force APLT and TEXT OFF.  APL OFF is the initial
                   setting unless the APL option of the LOGON command is used.
 
         APLT      controls the use of APL character translation tables.  If ON
                   is specified, the APL typewriter-paired character set (used
                   by DECwriters) will be used.  If OFF is specified, the
                   normal character set will be used.  APLT ON will force APL
                   and TEXT OFF.  APLT OFF is set at logon unless the APLT
                   option of the LOGON command is used.
 
         ATtn      controls the signaling of an attention interrupt.  If ON is
                   specified, an exclamation point and carriage return is sent
                   to the terminal when an attention interrupt occurs.  If OFF
                   is specified, the exclamation point and carriage return are
                   suppressed.  ATTN is valid only on ASCII terminals.  ATTN ON
                   is the initial setting.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     284
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  TERMINAL (CP)
 
         AUTocr    controls the transmission of the carriage return/linefeed
                   sequence at the end of a line.  If ON is specified, the
                   sequence is not sent if the number of characters in a line
                   is exactly equal to the current LINESIZE setting.  This is
                   useful for terminals (such as the TeleVideo model 920) that
                   generate an automatic new line sequence.  AUTOCR is valid
                   only for asynchronous ASCII terminals.  AUTOCR OFF is the
                   initial setting.
 
         BREakin   controls when CP will display messages on a local 3270-type
                   terminal.  The initial value (IMMED) will cause CP messages
                   to be displayed when the BRKKEY (see below) is pressed, or
                   when a full-screen read or write is performed with an
                   inactive keyboard.  Specifying GUESTCTL will cause CP
                   messages to be displayed only when you press the BRKKEY or
                   request a CP function.  Priority messages will override
                   GUESTCTL.
 
         BRKkey    allows you to specify the key used to control break-in by CP
                   when using full-screen support (see BREAKIN).  The initial
                   value is PA1.  Any Program Function key (PF1 through PF24)
                   may be used.  Specifying a PF key that does not actually
                   exist on your terminal may cause CP mode to be locked out.
                   PA1 will still be interpreted as the BRKKEY in line (not
                   full-screen) mode.
 
         BUrst     controls the transmission of the linefeed, carriage return,
                   XOFF sequence after the completion of a read from the
                   terminal.  If ON is specified, the sequence is transmitted.
                   If OFF is specified, it is not.  This option is used only
                   with asynchronous ASCII terminals.  BURST ON is the initial
                   setting.
 
         BYpass    controls the translation of output data.  If ON is
                   specified, a string beginning with a hexadecimal FF will not
                   be translated and will be transmitted without change.  If
                   OFF is specified, normal translation will be performed.
                   This option is useful for some terminals that have plotting
                   or graphics display features, and can be used only with
                   asynchronous ASCII terminals.  BYPASS OFF is the initial
                   setting.
 
         CHardel   defines the logical character delete symbol.  If ON is
                   specified, the symbol will be "@."  If OFF is specified, no
                   logical character delete symbol is allowed.  If "char" is
                   specified, then that character becomes the logical delete
                   symbol.  The symbol chosen should be one that is not common
                   in the input data, since that would require frequent use of
                   the logical ESCAPE character.  Users of ASCII terminals
                   might want to use the ASCII backspace (BS) character as the
                   logical delete symbol.  CHARDEL ON is the initial setting.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     285
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  TERMINAL (CP)
 
       | CONMODE [3215|3270]
       |           selects 3215 or 3270 console support for local 3270-type
       |           display terminals.  CONMODE 3215 allows 3215-type CCW's to
       |           be used, CONMODE 3270 allows 3270-type CCW's.  CONMODE 3215
       |           is the default and is required to run CMS.  CMS sets CONMODE
       |           3215 during IPL, and if you set CONMODE 3270 while CMS is
       |           running the results are unpredictable.
 
         EScape    defines the logical escape character.  If ON is specified,
                   the symbol will be '"'.  If OFF is specified, no logical
                   escape character is allowed.  If "char" is specified, then
                   that character becomes the logical escape character.  The
                   character chosen should not be common in the input data.
                   ESCAPE ON is the initial setting.
 
         HIlight   controls highlighting of input data when it is redisplayed
                   on the terminal.  This option is valid only for 3270-type
                   terminals.  HILIGHT OFF is the initial setting.
 
         IDles     specifies the number of idle characters to be appended to
                   each line transmitted to the terminal and cancels any
                   previous RUBS specification.  If "nnn" is specified, that
                   number of idles will be used.  The maximum allowed is 240.
                   If AUTO is specified, the number of idles used will depend
                   on the length of the line transmitted, with a full line
                   using the full number of idles.  This will allow the
                   terminal to receive data at a higher rate.  If NOAUTO is
                   specified, the full number of idles will always be
                   transmitted.  To specify both a number of idles and AUTO,
                   the IDLES keyword must be given twice:  "TERM IDLES nnn
                   IDLES AUTO."  If no count is specified with the AUTO or
                   NOAUTO option, the last count set will be used.  IDLES are
                   only used with asynchronous ASCII terminals.
 
         LINEDel   defines the logical line delete symbol.  If ON is specified,
                   the symbol will be "¢".  If OFF is specified, no logical
                   line delete symbol is allowed.  If "char" is specified, then
                   that character becomes the logical delete symbol.  The
                   symbol chosen should be one that is not common in the input
                   data, since that would require frequent use of the logical
                   ESCAPE character.  LINEDEL ON is set at logon.  Note that
                   the symbol "¢" is not available on ASCII terminals.
 
         LINEnd    defines the logical line end symbol.  If ON is specified,
                   the symbol will be "#".  If OFF is specified, no logical
                   line end symbol is allowed.  If "char" is specified, then
                   that character becomes the logical line end symbol.  The
                   symbol chosen should be one that is not common in the input
                   data, since that would require frequent use of the logical
                   ESCAPE character.  LINEND ON is set at logon.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     286
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  TERMINAL (CP)
 
         LINESize  specifies the maximum allowable line length for terminal
                   output.  A value from 1 to 255 may be specified.  OFF will
                   suppress all checking of the line length by CP.  The line
                   size is ignored when APL is ON.  The initial setting is 80.
 
         Mask      controls the typing of a masking line at a hardcopy terminal
                   that is not equipped with a print-inhibit feature, when a
                   password is to be entered.  MASK OFF inhibits the masking
                   line.  MASK ON is set at logon.
 
         MODE      controls the terminal attention environment.  MODE CP
                   specifies that one or more attentions will force you into
                   the CP environment.  MODE VM specifies that one attention is
                   passed to CMS, and more than one attention forces you into
                   the CP environment.  MODE VM is set when you log on.  MODE
                   NOCP prevents you from entering the CP environment.  MODE
                   NOCP also provides an automatic re-IPL of CMS if CMS
                   terminates because of a severe error.  A second severe error
                   will cause you to be logged off.  MODE NOCP forces SET RUN
                   OFF.
 
         NUlls     defines the character to replace nulls (X'00') received in
                   the input stream.  If ON is specified, nulls will not be
                   changed.  If OFF is specified, nulls will be removed from
                   the input stream.  If "char" is specified, then that
                   character will replace nulls on input.  NULLS is most useful
                   when another processor or device other than a keyboard is
                   being used as the terminal input device.  The NULLS setting
                   is used only with asynchronous ASCII terminals.  NULLS ON is
                   the initial setting.
 
         PRompt    defines the character to be issued as a prompt when the
                   system is ready for input from an ASCII terminal.  If ON is
                   specified, the symbol will be the current prompt character
                   (initially ".").  If OFF is specified, no prompt will be
                   issued.  If "char" is specified, then that character becomes
                   the current prompt character.  VM may be specified if TERM
                   TYPE 3101 is in effect; this will position the cursor to
                   column one of the input line for each read.  The prompt is
                   used only on asynchronous ASCII terminals.  PROMPT ON is the
                   initial setting.
 
         PROTOCOL  specifies the communication protocol used with asynchronous
                   ASCII terminals.  The initial setting (OFF) sends data to
                   the terminal as it is produced.  If "PROTOCOL 1 x" is
                   specified, an ETX/ACK protocol will be used.  The value "x"
                   is the size of a buffer in the terminal (it may be from 64
                   bytes to 32,768 bytes).  Data for the terminal will be sent
       |           in blocks of up to the size specified, terminated with an
       |           ETX.  VM/SP will then wait for a character to be sent from
                   the terminal (usually an ACK) indicating that it is ready
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     287
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  TERMINAL (CP)
 
                   for the next buffer.  This PROTOCOL is supported by several
                   kinds of ASCII terminals, including the Anderson Jacobson
                   model 833 and the Diablo model 1640.
 
         RUbs      specifies the number of rubout (DEL, delete) characters to
                   be appended to each line transmitted to the terminal and
                   cancels any previous IDLES specification.  If "nnn" is
                   specified, that number of rubouts will be used.  The maximum
                   allowed is 240.  If AUTO is specified, the number used will
                   depend on the length of the line transmitted, with a full
                   line using the full number of rubouts.  This will allow the
                   terminal to receive data at a higher rate.  If NOAUTO is
                   specified, the full number will always be transmitted.  To
                   specify both a number of rubouts and AUTO, the RUBS keyword
                   must be given twice:  "TERM RUBS nnn RUBS AUTO."  If no
                   count is specified with the AUTO or NOAUTO option, the last
                   count set will be used.  RUBS are only used with
                   asynchronous ASCII terminals.  RUBS 2 is the initial
                   setting.
 
         SCRNsave  controls the saving and restoring of the screen image for a
                   local 3270-type terminal operating in CONMODE 3270.  With
                   SCRNSAVE ON, CP will save and restore the screen when
                   entering and leaving CP mode.  OFF is the default.
 
         SCROll    is used to define the number of lines to be displayed on
                   each screen of an IBM 3101 display terminal.  This option
                   may only be specified if TERMINAL TYPE 3101 is in effect.
                   The initial setting is CONT.
 
         TABchar   defines a logical tab character for 3270-type terminals.  If
                   ON is specified, the symbol will be the one used by the
                   system.  If OFF is specified, then the character will be
                   X'00'.  If "char" is specified, that character becomes the
                   logical tab character.  The TABCHAR may be entered by using
                   a Program Function (PF) key set to TAB.  Refer to the Usage
                   Notes for more information.  TABCHAR is only valid for
                   3270-type terminals.
 
         TEXT      controls the use of the TEXT character translation tables.
                   If ON is specified, the TEXT character set will be used. If
                   OFF is specified, the normal character set will be used.
                   TEXT ON will force APL and APLT OFF.  TEXT ON should only be
                   used at 3270-type terminals with the TEXT feature.  TEXT OFF
                   is the initial setting.
 
         TIMEstmp  controls display of the current time with each line of CP
                   output to the terminal.  TIMESTMP OFF is the initial
                   setting.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     288
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  TERMINAL (CP)
 
         TYpe      enables support for some of the features of the IBM 3101
                   ASCII display terminal, including the use of the TERMINAL
                   PROMPT VM and TERMINAL SCROLL commands.  TYPE may be used
                   only on asynchronous ASCII terminals.  TYPE TTY is the
                   initial setting.
 
         XOFf      controls transmission of an ASCII XOFF at the end of each
                   output line.  The XOFF character is used by some terminals
                   to control their operating mode.  This option is valid only
                   on asynchronous ASCII terminals.  The initial setting is
                   OFF.
 
         XON       controls the transmission of an ASCII XON prior to each
                   read.  The XON character is used by some terminals to
                   control their operating mode.  This option is valid only on
                   asynchronous ASCII terminals.  The initial setting is ON.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  More than one function may be specified with the TERMINAL
              command.  If an error occurs during the processing of the
              command, all functions preceding the first error are performed.
              When specifying a "char" operand the letters "A" through "Z" and
              the digits "0" through "9" cannot be used.
 
          2.  The settings specified with the TERMINAL command are in effect
              only for the duration of a terminal session.  When you log on the
              initial settings are based on the kind of terminal you are using.
              Many settings are reset at a log on after a disconnect.  Some
              that are not reset are the line editing symbols, MODE, NULLS,
              IDLES, RUBS, XON, and XOFF.  More information about reconnecting
              can be found in the Usage Notes for the LOGON command in this
              manual.
 
          3.  Line editing is also under the control of the SET LINEDIT
              command.
 
          4.  Use the QUERY TERMINAL command to display the settings of the
              TERMINAL command.
 
          5.  A detailed description of the protocols used with asynchronous
              ASCII terminals is available in another section of this manual.
 
          6.  The function of the tab key found on many typewriter terminals
              may be simulated on a 3270-type terminal by using a combination
              of the SET PF TAB command and the TERMINAL TABCHAR command.
              TERMINAL TABCHAR sets the character to be entered by the PF key
              set to TAB.  The initial value is an HT (Horizontal Tab, X'05')
              character.  The tab stops are set by issuing the following
              command:
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     289
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  TERMINAL (CP)
 
                   SET PFnn TAB c1 c2 c3 ...
 
              where "nn" is the PF key number and "c1 c2 c3 ..." are the tab
              stop columns.  Be sure that the keyword "TAB" is preceded and
              followed by exactly one blank.
 
              Pressing the TAB PF key will cause the TABCHAR character to be
              inserted into the line and the cursor to be moved to the next tab
              column.  The intervening columns are unchanged and existing data
              will not be affected.  The TABCHAR character will not overlay any
              non-blank character.
 
              This method of tabbing may be used with a CMS editor in
              typewriter (non-display) mode.  The editor's tab settings should
              match those used on the TAB PF key.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     290
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                TESTCOB
 
         Use the TESTCOB command to execute a program using COBOL Interactive
         Debug.  The program must have been compiled with the IBM VS COBOL
         compiler with the TEST option.  See also the COBDCG and COBDG
         commands.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | TESTCOB   | filename (program debug [options]) [PRINT(print)]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           |                                    [PARMS(parms)]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the COBOL
                   object program produced by the VS COBOL compiler.  The
                   filetype of the file must be "TEXT."  This can also refer to
                   a member of a TXTLIB.
 
         program   is the name of the program to be executed.  This is the name
                   used on the PROGRAM-ID in the COBOL program.
 
         debug     is the DD name that refers to the debug data file produced
                   by the VS COBOL compiler.  The file is usually named
                   "filename SYSUT5."
 
         options   are TESTCOB options.
 
         PRINT(print)
                   is the DD name used for output from the PRINT subcommand.
 
         PARM(parms)
                   are parameters passed to the executed program.
 
         Debug Subcommands
 
         AT stmt                 Unconditional interrupt
         DROP symbol             Delete the established symbols
         DUMP                    System dump
         END                     End a debugging session
         EQUATE symbol dataname  Establish symbols
         GO stmt                 Start  program  execution
         IF expr HALT/GO         Create contingency situations
         LIST addr               Display contents of data
         LISTBRKS                List active breakpoints
         LISTFILE filename       Display status of files
         NEXT                    Unconditional interrupt
         OFF stmt                Remove unconditional breakpoints
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     291
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                TESTCOB
 
         OFFWN identifier        Remove conditional breakpoints
         QUALIFY prog name       Qualify program line numbers & data names
         RUN stmt                Ignore breakpoints
         SET addr1 = addr2       Initialize and modify data
         SOURCE line number      Display selected source statements
         TRACE option            Trace program execution
         WHEN identifier         Conditional interrupt
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  A more comprehensive explanation of the TESTCOB command and its
              subcommands can be found in the IBM OS COBOL Interactive Debug
              Terminal User's Guide and Reference or the COBOL Debug manual
              available from the manual command.
 
          2.  Before executing a program with TESTCOB, you must define all DD
              names and subroutine libraries (including the COBOL libraries).
              For example:
 
                   FILEDEF DEBUG DISK program SYSUT5 A
                   FILEDEF SYSPRINT TERMINAL
                   FILEDEF SYSOUT TERMINAL
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB PTF8LIB COBLIBVS
                   TESTCOB program (program DEBUG)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     292
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         TKPLOT
 
         Use the TKPLOT command to display a CMS file created by the Tektronix
         plot preview routines on a Tektronix graphic display terminal.  Plots
         produced with the standard Zeta plot subroutines may be drawn on a
         Tektronix graphics terminal with the PLOTTEK command.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |     +     +  ++                                        |
         | TKPLOT    | fn  |ft   |fm||                                        |
         |           |     |PLOT |A1||                                        |
         |           |     +     +  ++                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        is the filename of the file to be plotted.
 
         ft        is the filetype of the file to be plotted.  The default is
                   "PLOT."
 
         fm        is the filemode of the file to be plotted.  The default
                   value is "A1."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  TKPLOT will read the specified file and display it on the
              terminal without a carriage return/linefeed (CR LF) sequence
              between lines.  When a page erase sequence (ESC FF SYN) is
              detected, a read will be issued to the terminal before erasing
              the screen.  Output resumes when RETURN is pressed.
 
          2.  Since a terminal read will cause a prompt character to be
              displayed, the beam should be moved to an unused part of the
              screen before calling NEWPAG or NEWPLT.  As an alternative the
              prompt character could be changed with the CP TERMINAL command to
              one that is non-displayable, such as a "bell" (CTL/G).
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSTKP002E  "fileid" NOT FOUND.  RC=28
         DMSTKP104S  ERROR n READING FILE 'fn ft fm' FROM DISK.  RC=100
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     293
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         TPRINT
 
         Use the TPRINT command to print a CMS disk file on your terminal.
         TPRINT supports a subset of American National Standard (ANS) carriage
         control characters.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +     +         +  +++                                 |
         | TPRINT    | |fn   |ft       |fm|||   [( options... [)]]            |
         |           | |LAST |LISTING  |* |||                                 |
         |           | |     |DOCUMENT |  |||                                 |
         |           | |     |MANUAL   |  |||                                 |
         |           | |     |LABELS   |  |||                                 |
         |           | +     +         +  +++                                 |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +       +  +        +  +     +                         |
         |           | |FROm n |  |TO n    |  |FOR n|                         |
         |           | |STArt n|  |FINish n|  +     +                         |
         |           | +       +  +        +                                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +          +  +          +  +    +                     |
         |           | |LINESIZE n|  |PAGESIZE n|  |CC  |                     |
         |           | |LS n      |  |PS n      |  |NOCC|                     |
         |           | +          +  |LINECoun n|  +    +                     |
         |           |               +          +                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +       +  +      +  +      +  +    +                  |
         |           | |PAUse  |  |NOSTop|  |WAit  |  |FF  |                  |
         |           | |NOPAUse|  |STop  |  |NOWAit|  |NOFF|                  |
         |           | +       +  +      +  +      +  +    +                  |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        is the filename of the CMS disk file to be printed at the
                   terminal.  The default is "LAST."
 
         ft        is the filetype of the file.  The defaults are "LISTING,"
                   "DOCUMENT," "MANUAL," and "LABELS."
 
         fm        is the filemode of the file.  The default is "*."
 
         Options
 
         CC        interprets the first character of each record as a carriage
                   control character.  The CC option is assumed if the filetype
                   is LISTING, DOCUMENT, MANUAL, or LABELS.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     294
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         TPRINT
 
         FF        causes ASCII Form Feed characters to be used to start each
                   output page.  This is the default unless PAUSE or STOP is
                   specified.
 
         FINish n  is a synonym for TO.
 
         FOR n     is the number of pages to be printed.  This option should be
                   specified after the FROM or START option, if one of them is
                   used.
 
         FROm n    is the number of the first page to be printed at the
                   terminal.  The default is one.  This page number refers to
                   the physical page of the output.  Files containing carriage
                   control will often have title pages or other pages before
                   the numbered pages of text.  The page numbers in these
                   documents will not correspond directly to the page numbers
                   used by this option.
 
         LINECoun  is a synonym for PAGESIZE.
 
         LINESIZE  is the maximum length of the lines printed at the terminal.
                   The minimum value is two, the maximum is 252, and the
                   default is the current CP TERMINAL LINESIZE setting.  You
                   should have the CP TERMINAL LINESIZE set large enough for
                   your output data.  Generally it should be set to OFF to
                   eliminate all line breaks by the Control Program (CP).
 
         LS n      is a synonym for LINESIZE.
 
         NOCC      does not interpret the first character of each record as a
                   carriage control character.  TPRINT will start a new page
                   every PAGESIZE lines and print a header line that includes
                   the page number and fileid.  NOCC is assumed if the filetype
                   is not LISTING, DOCUMENT, MANUAL, or LABELS.
 
         NOFF      suppresses the use of ASCII Form Feed characters to start
                   new output pages.  This is the default when PAUSE or STOP is
                   specified.  When NOFF is in effect you must manually
                   position the paper to the top of each new page.
 
         NOPAUse   combines the NOSTOP and NOWAIT options.
 
         NOSTop    will not stop before each page.  This is the default.
 
         NOWAit    will cause TPRINT to begin printing immediately.
 
         PAGESIZE  is the number of lines per page.  The default value is 66.
                   This option is generally needed only when NOCC is in effect.
 
         PAUse     combines the NOFF, STOP, and WAIT options.
 
         PS n      is a synonym for PAGESIZE.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     295
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         TPRINT
 
         STArt n   is a synonym for FROM.
 
         STop      causes TPRINT to stop before printing each page at the
                   terminal, to allow the next page to be prepared.  Printing
                   is resumed by pressing RETURN.  STOP is usually used when
                   printing on cut sheets rather than continuous forms.  STOP
                   implies the NOFF option.
 
         TO n      is the number of the last page to be printed at the
                   terminal.  The default is "*", the last page in the file.
                   The FOR option may also be used to set a page limit.  Refer
                   to the FROM option for information about page numbering.
 
         WAit      will cause TPRINT to stop before printing the first page at
                   the terminal.  This is the default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  TPRINT uses standard ASCII Line Feed (LF) and Form Feed (FF)
              control characters to control the output at the terminal.  Some
              terminals will not eject a page when a formfeed character is
              received.  The PAUSE and STOP options can be used with these
              terminals to allow time for manual forms positioning between
              pages.  The PAUSE option is also useful when printing on cut
              sheets, since the formfeed at the start of each page would eject
              the sheet.  Before using TPRINT with PAUSE or STOP, you should
              use the TERMINAL PROMPT command to set the prompt character to
              something that won't print.  A good choice is the BELL (CTL/G)
              character.
 
          2.  Most terminals will require some preliminary forms alignment
              before printing the file.  Usually this will require positioning
              the paper at the first line of a page and pressing some control
              keys to indicate to the terminal that this is the top of the
              page.  Anderson Jacobson 832 and 833 terminals use the sequence
              ESC (escape) F.  Some DECwriters have a special SET TOP OF FORM
              button.  Some terminals have a switch or other means to set the
              form length.  Refer to the terminal manufacturer's documentation
              for details.
 
          3.  TPRINT supports a subset of the American National Standard (ANS)
              carriage control characters in the input file.  The single space
              (blank), double space (0), triple space (-), overprint (+), and
              new page (1) characters are supported.  All other characters are
              currently treated as triple spaces.
 
          4.  Be certain that you have set the CP TERMINAL LINESIZE large
              enough to print the widest data line in your file, allowing for
              three additional characters added to each line for carriage
              control.  Generally you should set the CP TERMINAL LINESIZE to
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     296
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         TPRINT
 
              OFF to eliminate line breaks.  This can be done automatically in
              a PROFILE EXEC.
 
          5.  Output from TPRINT may be interrupted with the HT or HX commands,
              but this is more complicated if the PAUSE or STOP options are
              used.  With these options HT will only halt typing for the
              current page.  Either HT or HX may be entered at the pause before
              a page is printed by first causing an attention.  On an ASCII
              terminal this is done by pressing the BREAK key.  On a 3270-type
              terminal move the cursor to the left of the input area (it should
              be on the last column of the previous line), press ENTER, and
              move the cursor back to the input area.
 
          6.  You should issue the AJ833 command before using TPRINT on an
              Anderson Jacobson 833 terminal.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSTPR002E Input file "fileid" not found.  RC=28
         DMSTPR003E "name" is not an option.  RC=24
         DMSTPR029E "value" is not valid in the [name] option field.  RC=24
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     297
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           TYPE
 
         Use the TYPE command to display a CMS disk file on your terminal.
         This is only a summary of the most frequently needed functions of the
         TYPE command, not a complete description.  The TYPE command does not
         support carriage control; use the TPRINT command to type a file with
         carriage control.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                   +         +      +     +++           |
         | Type      | filename filetype |filemode |start |stop |||           |
         |           |                   |A        |1     |*    |||           |
         |           |                   +         +      +     +++           |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the file to be typed.
 
         filetype  is the filetype of the file to be typed.
 
         filemode  is the filemode of the file to be typed.  The default is
                   "A."
 
         start     is the number of the first line in the file to be typed.
                   The default is "1."
 
         stop      is the number of the last line in the file to be typed.  The
                   default is "*," the end of the file.
 
         Usage Note
 
         TYPE has other options and capabilities.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS
         Command and Macro Reference or the online Help information for
         details.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     298
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  UNPACK (EXEC)
 
         Use the UNPACK command to convert a CMS disk file in packed format to
         its original format.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |     +    +    +    +    +   +++++                      |
         | UNPACK    | ifn |ift |ifm |ofn |oft |ofm|||||                      |
         |           |     |*   |A   |=   |=   |=  |||||                      |
         |           |     +    +    +    +    +   +++++                      |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ifn       is the filename of the CMS disk file to be unpacked.
 
         ift       is the filetype of the file.
 
         ifm       is the filemode of the file.  The default is "A."
 
         ofn       is the filename of the unpacked output file.  The default is
                   "=," the input filename.
 
         oft       is the filetype of the output file.  The default is "=," the
                   input filetype.
 
         ofm       is the filemode of the output file.  The default is "=," the
                   input filemode.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the description of the PACK command for more information
         about packed files.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Messages may be generated by the CMS command COPYFILE.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     299
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  VERIFY (EXEC)
 
         Use the VERIFY command to write a message to the terminal and read a
         response.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | VERIFY    | [text...]                                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
       | text      is the text of the message to be typed.  When called from
       |           EXEC (but not REXX or EXEC 2) the text is tokenized.  The
       |           text is always truncated to a length of 130 characters.  If
                   no text is specified, no message is displayed.
 
         Usage Note
 
         VERIFY is intended to aid EXEC writers when a "yes" or "no" response
         is needed from the user at the terminal.  The specified message text
         is displayed and a response read from the terminal (or stack).  The
         return code depends on the user's response.  Return code 0 indicates a
         positive response, 100 indicates a negative response, and 101
         indicates a bypass response.  The following responses are accepted:
 
              Response  Code     Response  Code     Response  Code
                Yes       0        Non      100      ESCape    101
                ON        0        OFf      100      BYPASS    101
                GO        0        STOP     100
                OK        0        NOPE     100
                SURE      0
                OUI       0
 
         Other responses cause the user to be prompted again.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     300
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        WAITRDR
 
         Use the WAITRDR command to cause execution to stop until a reader
         spool file arrives.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | WAITRDR   |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
       |  1.  The wait may be terminated prematurely by issuing a CP READY 00C
              command or the CMS immediate command HX (Halt Execution).  READY
              00C causes execution to continue as if a file had arrived.
 
          2.  The following EXEC demonstrates how the WAITRDR command might be
              used.  The EXEC attempts to read a file with the ACCEPT command,
              and if none is found uses WAITRDR to wait until one arrives.  The
              file is then read with ACCEPT the cycle is repeated.
 
       |           /* Wait for reader files */
       |           do forever
       |              "close rdr"
       |              do until rc¬=0
       |                 "accept"
       |                 end
       |              "waitrdr"
       |              end
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSWAI927I Waiting for reader.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     301
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         WATFIV
 
         Use the WATFIV command to run a FORTRAN program with WATFIV.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | WATFIV    | filename [filename...] [( [options...] [)]]            |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +     +  +        +  +       +  +       +              |
         |           | |DIsk |  |Concat  |  |NODebug|  |NOXtype|              |
         |           | |Print|  |NOConcat|  |Debug  |  |XType  |              |
         |           | |TYpe |  +        +  +       +  |NOWarn |              |
         |           | +     +                         |Ext    |              |
         |           |                                 +       +              |
         |           | +      +  +       +                                    |
         |           | |Term  |  |NOStats|                                    |
         |           | |NOTerm|  |Stats  |                                    |
         |           | +      +  +       +                                    |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the name of the input file.  The filetype of this file
                   must be "WATFIV" or "FORTRAN," and it must contain fixed-
                   length, 80-byte records.  Multiple input files may be
                   specified.  If you specify an asterisk for a filename, input
                   is be read from the terminal.
 
         Options
 
         Concat    causes WATFIV to treat all input files as one continuous job
                   stream.  All output is written to a disk file named
                   "filename LISTING".  If "*" is specified, the filename
                   defaults to "WATFIV" and a $JOB card is be generated.
 
         Debug     enables the interactive debugger.
 
         DIsk      sends the program listing and  all unit 6 output to a disk
                   file.  If CONCAT is in effect, all output will be directed
                   to a single file named "filename LISTING."  If NOCONCAT is
                   in effect, each input file will cause a separate output file
                   to be created.  A filename of "*" (terminal input) causes
                   "WATFIV" to be used as the output filename.
 
         Ext       causes extension messages to be typed at the terminal.
 
         NOConcat  causes each input file to be treated as a separate batch.
                   Input for each filename is compiled separately.  Each input
                   file should contain at least one complete WATFIV job.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     302
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         WATFIV
 
         NODebug   disables the interactive debugger.  This is the default.
 
         NOStats   suppresses job statistics at the terminal.
 
         NOTerm    suppresses error, warning, and extension messages at the
                   terminal (except in debug mode).
 
         NOWarn    suppresses all but error messages at the terminal.
 
         NOXtype   See the XTYPE option.  NOXTYPE is the default.
 
         Print     sends the program listing and unit 6 output to the printer.
 
         Prt       is the same as PRINT.
 
         Stats     displays job statistics at the terminal.
 
         Term      displays error and warning messages at the terminal.
 
         TYpe      sends the program listing and unit 6 output to the terminal.
                   This is the default when the input file is "*."
 
         XType     duplicates unit 6 output on the terminal.
 
         Interactive Debugger Subcommands
 
         EXIT                 Terminate WATFIV
         GOTO stmt-no         Resume execution at "stmt-no"
         OFF                  End tracing
         RUN                  Resume execution
         STOP isn             Stop at statement "isn"
         TRACE isn-range      Begin tracing
         variable ?           Display a variable
         variable = value     Set a variable
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to WATFIV Under CMS (available from the MANUAL command) for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     303
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         WBASIC
 
         Use the WBASIC command to run a program with Waterloo BASIC.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | WBASIC    | [filename] [( [options...] [)]]                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +    +  +     +  +     +  +       +                    |
         |           | |LOAD|  |RUN  |  |BYE  |  |VERBOSE|                    |
         |           | |OLD |  |NORUN|  |NOBYE|  |TERSE  |                    |
         |           | |EXEC|  +     +  +     +  +       +                    |
         |           | +    +                                                 |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of an input file.  The filetype must be
                   either "WBASIC" or "WSTORE," depending on the options
                   specified.
 
         Options
 
         BYE       specifies that WBASIC should terminate after program
                   execution.  This is the default when a filename is
                   specified.
 
         EXEC      specifies that commands are to be read and processed from a
                   WBASIC file.
 
         LOAD      specifies that a program is to be loaded into the workspace
                   from a WSTORE file.  This is the default if a filename is
                   specified and a WSTORE file with the given name is found.
 
         OLD       specifies that a program is to be compiled into the
                   workspace from a WBASIC file.  This is the default if a
                   filename is specified, no WSTORE file is found, and a WBASIC
                   file with the given name is found.
 
         NOBYE     specifies that WBASIC should not terminate after program
                   execution.
 
         NORUN     specifies that the loaded or compiled program should not be
                   run.  The program remains available in the workspace.
 
         RUN       specifies that the loaded or compiled program should be run.
                   This is the default when a filename is specified.
 
         TERSE     will suppress informational messages.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     304
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         WBASIC
 
         VERBOSE   specifies that all informational messages should be
                   displayed.  This is the default.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Additional information can be found in the Introduction to Waterloo
         BASIC for VM/370 CMS (available from the MANUAL command).
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     305
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         Use the XEDIT command to invoke the System Product Editor to create,
         examine, and modify CMS disk files.  XEDIT can also be used to examine
         OS disk data sets and can be used to copy them to CMS disk files.
         Once XEDIT has been invoked, the XEDIT environment is entered and
         XEDIT subcommands and macros, CP commands, and CMS commands and EXEC's
         can be entered.  XEDIT is the editor used by the PEEK, NOTE, OSXEDIT,
         and RXEDIT commands.
 
       | Return control to the CMS environment with the CANCEL, QUIT, QQUIT,
       | FILE, or FFILE subcommands.
 
         This is not a complete description of the facilities available from
         XEDIT.  Consult the VM/SP System Product Editor Command and Macro
         Reference, the VM/SP System Product Editor User's Guide, and the
         online HELP command for more information.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | Xedit     | [fn  [ft  [fm]]]  [(options... [)]]                    |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Width n]   [NOSCreen]   +                 +           |
         |           |                          |PROFile macroname|           |
         |           | [NOCLear]                |NOPROFile        |           |
         |           |                          +                 +           |
       | |           | [NOMsg]                                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | UPDATE Mode Options:                                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +        +  +      +  +             +                  |
         |           | |Update  |  |Seq8  |  |Ctl cntrlname|                  |
         |           | |NOUpdate|  |NOSeq8|  |NOCtl        |                  |
         |           | +        +  +      +  +             +                  |
         |           |                                                        |
       | |           | [Merge]  [Incr n]  [SIDcode string]   [UNtil filetype] |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        is the filename of the file to be edited or created.  If not
                   specified, it must be provided by the LOAD subcommand in the
                   XEDIT PROFILE.
 
         ft        is the filetype of the file.  If not specified, it must be
                   provided by the LOAD subcommand in the XEDIT profile.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     306
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         fm        is the filemode of the file.  If no filemode is specified,
                   all accessed disks are searched for an existing file with a
                   matching name and type.  If none is found, a new file is
                   created using filemode "A1."
 
         Options
 
         Ctl cntrlname
                   controls the XEDIT multi-level update facility.  Use of the
                   CTL option implies the UPDATE and SEQ8 options.  Consult the
                   description of the CMS UPDATE command in the VM/SP CMS
                   Command and Macro Reference for details.
 
         Incr n    specifies the minimum serial number increment between two
                   adjacent lines used by XEDIT when assigning numbers to new
                   lines.  The default is one.  This option implies the UPDATE
                   option.
 
         Merge     specifies that all the updates made using the control file
                   and all the changes made while editing will be merged and
                   written into the most recent update file.  This option
                   implies the UPDATE option.
 
         NOCLear   specifies that the screen is not to be cleared by XEDIT.
                   The screen will be placed in "MORE..." status and any
                   messages on the screen will still be visible.  Either press
                   CLEAR or wait one minute to clear the screen and begin
                   normal XEDIT processing.  This option is useful only on
                   3270-type display terminals.
 
       | NOMsg     causes XEDIT to start with MSGMODE OFF.
 
         NOPROFil  suppresses execution of the profile macro.
 
         NOSCreen  forces XEDIT to operate in line (typewriter) mode when used
                   on a 3270-type terminal.
 
         NOSeq8    If NOSEQ8 is specified, columns 73 through 75 are assumed to
                   contain a label field, and columns 76 through 80 are assumed
                   to contain sequence numbers.  Specifying NOSEQ8 will force
                   the UPDATE option and cause XEDIT to operate in update mode.
 
       | NOUpdate  disables the XEDIT update facility.  This is the default
       |           unless CTL, NOSEQ8, SIDCODE, SEQ8, or UNTIL are specified.
 
         PROFile macroname
                   specifies the name of the XEDIT profile.  The profile is an
                   XEDIT macro (filetype must be XEDIT) executed each time the
                   XEDIT command or subcommand is issued.  It can be used to
                   tailor the XEDIT environment to your own needs and
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     307
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
                   preferences.  The Usage Notes contain more information about
                   writing a profile macro.  If this option is not specified
                   the macro name "PROFILE" will be used.
 
         Seq8      if SEQ8 is specified, columns 73 through 80 are assumed to
                   contain sequence numbers.  SEQ8 is the default in update
                   mode.  Specifying SEQ8 also implies the UPDATE option and
                   will cause XEDIT to operate in update mode.
 
         SIDcode string
                   specifies an identifier used to mark all new or changed
                   lines in an update file.  The string is placed in columns 64
                   through 71 (padded on the right with blanks to a length of
                   eight), overlaying any other data in these columns, unless
                   column 72 contains a non-blank character.  This option
                   implies the UPDATE option.
 
       | UNtil filetype
       |           specifies the filetype of the last update to be applied.
       |           The filetype cannot be that of an UPDATE AUX file.  This
       |           option implies the UPDATE option.
 
         Update    enables the XEDIT update facility.  XEDIT supports an update
                   mode which is compatible with all of the features of the CMS
                   UPDATE command, including multi-level updating.  Consult the
                   VM/SP CMS Command and Macro Reference and the VM/SP System
                   Product Editor Command and Macro Reference for details.
 
         Width n   sets the maximum length used to store one record from the
                   file.  The WIDTH may also be specified with the LOAD
                   subcommand in an XEDIT profile.  If no value is specified,
                   the default is either the actual record length of the file,
                   or the default record length for the filetype, whichever is
                   larger.  The WIDTH is used to set the default values for
                   LRECL and TRUNC.  Specifying a width less than the actual
                   record length of an existing file can cause records to be
                   truncated.
 
         Display and Typewriter Modes
 
         XEDIT supports all terminal types supported by CMS.  When used from a
         3270-type display terminal it will operate in DISPLAY mode.  On other
         types of terminals it will operate in TYPEWRITER (line) mode.
         Typewriter mode can be forced on a 3270-type terminal with the
         NOSCREEN option or the SET TERMINAL subcommand.  This may be desirable
         on a remote 3270-type terminal when the line transmission rate is low.
         Some XEDIT subcommands will function only in display mode.
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     308
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         The XEDIT Display Screen Format
 
         When operating in display mode, XEDIT will control the format of the
         screen.  The display screen will appear as follows:
 
         +-----------------------------------------------------+
         | fn ft fm  V 80 TRUNC=n SIZE=n LINE=n COLUMN=n ALT=n |<--File Id Line
         |                                                     |<--Message Line
         |===== * * * TOP OF FILE * * *                        |
         |=====                                                |
         |=====                                                |
         |=====                                                |<--Current Line
         |      |...+....1....+....2... ... ...6....+....7..>  |<--Scale
         |=====                                                |
         |=====                                                |
         |===== * * * END OF FILE * * *                        |
         |                                                     |
         |===>                                                 |<--Command Line
         |                                  X E D I T  1 FILE  |<--Status Area
         +-----------------------------------------------------+
          |   | |                                             |
          +---+ +---------------------------------------------+
            |                         |
         Prefix Area              File Area
 
         The first line of the display is the File Identification Line.  It
         contains the filename, filetype, and filemode of the file being
         edited.  The next two items are the record format (V for variable-
         length, F for fixed-length, VP for packed variable-length, or FP for
         packed fixed-length)  and the maximum record length.  Following these
         are the truncation column (TRUNC), the number of lines in the file
         (SIZE), the current line number (LINE), and the column pointer
       | (COLUMN).  The last item on this line is the alteration count (ALT).
       | The count is incremented for each subcommand that causes a change in
         the file and for every line that is directly modified.  When the
         alteration count reaches the SET AUTOSAVE value (if you have set one),
         the file is automatically saved.  The alteration count is reset to
       | zero after an automatic save and by the SAVE subcommand.  You may use
       | the QUERY ALT subcommand to determine the alteration count at any
         time.  You cannot type on the File Id Line.
 
         Following the File Id Line is the Message Line.  This line is used to
         display XEDIT error and informational messages.  You can't type on
         this line either.
 
         Following the Message Line is the File Area.  The lines in this area
         are used to display and enter data.  You may type directly in this
         area to enter new lines or modify existing lines.  One line in the
         File Area is designated the Current Line.  This line appears in the
         middle of the screen and will be highlighted to make it easy to find.
         Many XEDIT subcommands perform their functions on the current line or
         on a group of lines beginning with the current line.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     309
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         Each line in the File Area is preceded by a special command area
         called the Prefix Area (marked with "=====").  The commands entered in
         the Prefix Areas are called prefix subcommands and generally operate
         on or following the line on which they are entered.  Prefix
         subcommands can be used to add, delete, duplicate, move, and copy
         lines in the file.  The SET PREFIX subcommand can be used to move the
         Prefix Areas to the right of the screen, or remove them entirely.  The
         SET NUMBER subcommand can be used to cause line numbers to be
         displayed in the Prefix Areas.
 
         The Command Line is actually about one and three-quarters of a line at
         the bottom of the screen.  XEDIT subcommands and macros, CP commands,
         and CMS commands and EXECs can be entered on the Command Line.  The
         SET CMDLINE subcommand can be used to move the Command Line to the top
         of the screen, where it will share the space occupied by the Message
         Line.
 
         The Status Area is on the right at the bottom of the screen, following
         the Command Line.  The Status Area indicates the current operating
         mode (XEDIT, COPY/MOVE PENDING, BLOCK INCOMPLETE, INPUT-MODE, UPDATE-
         MODE, or MACRO-READ) and the number of files currently being edited.
         The SET CMDLINE subcommand can be used to remove the Status Area from
         the display.
 
         The Scale Line appears under the current line and indicates the column
         numbers, the position of the column pointer (marked "|"), the left and
         right zone columns (marked "<" and ">"), and the truncation column
         (marked "T").  The Scale Line can be repositioned on the screen (or
         removed entirely) with the SET SCALE subcommand.
 
         Keyboard Functions (for 3270 Displays)
 
         CLEAR     will clear the screen and cause the display to be rebuilt as
                   it was after the last time ENTER or a PF key was pressed.
                   CLEAR also clears the CMS stack.
 
         ERASE INPUT
                   will erase everything in the input and command areas.
 
         ERASE EOF will erase everything from the cursor to the end of the
                   line.  In power or long input mode ERASE EOF will erase
                   everything from the cursor to the end of the screen.
 
         ENTER     causes XEDIT to read the screen and analyze its contents.
 
         PA1       will transfer control to CP and clear the screen.  A CP READ
                   status will be displayed.  Enter BEGIN to return to XEDIT.
 
         PA2       will have the effect of setting nulls on for the line that
                   contains the cursor.  This allows insert mode (see INS MODE
                   below) to be used on the line.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     310
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         Cursor Movement
                   keys are available to move the cursor forward, backward, up,
                   and down on the screen.  A cluster of four keys marked with
                   arrows are used to move the cursor one space at a time.  The
                   New Line key (marked <- is used to move the cursor to the
                   beginning of the next line.  Tabbing between input and
                   command areas can be done with the forward and backward tab
                   keys (marked ->| and |<-).
 
         PFnn      will cause the information associated with the Program
                   Function key pressed to be processed.  This data is stacked
                   and may contain commands or data or some combination.  The
                   data associated with each PF key may be set with the SET PFn
                   subcommand.  The current settings may be displayed with the
                   QUERY PF subcommand.  Initially, the PF keys have the
                   following assignments:
 
       |                PF1  BEFORE HELP MENU        PF7  BEFORE BACKWARD
       |                PF2  BEFORE SOS LINEADD      PF8  BEFORE FORWARD
       |                PF3  BEFORE QUIT             PF9  ONLY =
       |                PF4  BEFORE TABKEY           PF10 BEFORE RGTLEFT
       |                PF5  BEFORE SCHANGE 6        PF11 BEFORE SPLTJOIN
       |                PF6  ONLY ?                  PF12 BEFORE CURSOR HOME
 
         INS MODE  places the terminal in insert mode.  This causes typed
                   characters to be inserted at the cursor position and shifts
                   other characters on the line to the right.  To use insert
                   mode on a data line requires that SET NULLS ON be in effect,
                   or that PA2 be pressed while the cursor is on the line.  To
                   leave insert mode, press RESET.  You should not use INS MODE
                   while in long input mode.
 
         DEL       will delete the character at the cursor position and shift
                   any following characters to the left.  You should not use
                   DEL while in long input mode.
 
         RESET     will reset insert mode and error conditions.  You should not
                   use this key to reset an "INPUT INHIBITED" condition caused
                   by slow system response time.  This can confuse XEDIT and
                   may cause loss of data.
 
         FIELD MARK
                   will enter a unique character (hexadecimal 1E, an EBCDIC
                   Record Separator).  A FIELD MARK will appear on most screens
                   as either ";" or a right-arrow.  FIELD MARK is entered as a
                   shifted PA2.
 
         DUP       will enter a unique character (hexadecimal 1C, an EBCDIC
                   Field Separator) and physically move the cursor to the start
                   of the next field (usually the start of the next line or
                   Prefix Area).  On most terminals the DUP character will be
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     311
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
                   displayed as either "*" or "/" until the field is rewritten.
                   DUP is entered as a shifted PA1.
 
         XEDIT Subcommands
 
         XEDIT has two types of subcommands: subcommands entered on the Command
         Line and those entered in Prefix Areas.  Those entered on the command
         line are generally called subcommands, while those entered in Prefix
         Areas are known as prefix subcommands.  The Command Line may also be
       | used to enter XEDIT macros, CP commands, and CMS commands and EXEC's.
       | XEDIT macros are REXX or EXEC 2 files with a filetype of "XEDIT."
       | These can be used to combine XEDIT subcommands and macros, CP
         commands, CMS commands and EXEC's, and EXEC functions to create new
         functions.  Macros are executed by entering their name on the Command
         Line just like a subcommand.
 
         Commands on the Command Line may be preceded by the character "&" in
         column one; this will cause XEDIT to leave the string on the screen.
         The command, or commands, may then be repeated by simply pressing the
         ENTER key.  Multiple subcommands may be entered on the Command Line by
         separating them with a line end character.  The default line end
         character is a pound sign (#).  If any error occurs when processing a
         command, the command will be left on the Command Line for correction.
 
         Prefix subcommands generally correspond to similar subcommands that
         would be entered on the Command Line.  While subcommands generally
         operate on or following the current line, prefix subcommands usually
         operate on or following the line on which they are entered.  Prefix
         subcommand arguments may either precede or follow the subcommand in
       | the Prefix Area.  Prefix subcommands also can be executed with the
       | LPREFIX subcommand.
 
         When the ENTER key or a PF key is pressed, XEDIT will read and process
         the screen.  Processing proceeds in the following order:
 
             1.  Record any changes made in the data display area.
             2.  Process any prefix commands.
             3.  Process any commands from a Program Function key.
             4.  Process any commands found on the command line.
 
         If a PF key is set to a special PF key function (like TABKEY),
         pressing the PF key will not cause commands on the screen to be
         processed.  When all processing is complete, the file will be written
         to disk if the number of lines altered, added, or deleted since the
         last SAVE has reached or exceeded the SET AUTOSAVE threshold (see
         Usage Note 2).  The new screen is then displayed.
 
         XEDIT commands make use of several important concepts.  Most important
         is the concept of the current line.  Many subcommands operate either
         on or beginning on the current line, and several subcommands exist to
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     312
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         make some specified line the current line.  In display mode the
         current line is highlighted and appears in the center of the display;
         on other kinds of terminals the current line is generally the line
         most recently typed.
 
         Another important concept is that of targets.  A target is used to
         identify a particular line to XEDIT.  Targets may be absolute line
         numbers (in the form ":n"), relative line numbers (either "n", "+n",
         or "-n"), names (".name" assigned with the SET POINT subcommand or the
         "." prefix subcommand), or string expressions.  A string expression is
         from one to four character strings delimited by any non-blank
         character that does not appear in the string.  The string expression
         may be preceded with a "+" or "-" to indicate the search direction (a
         "+" is assumed).  As many as four separate delimited strings
         (separated with vertical bars) may be included in the expression.
         This will match a line containing any one of the strings.  Each string
         may also be preceded with a "¬" to locate a line that does not contain
         the string.  String expressions may also make use of several SET
         subcommand options.  SET ARBCHAR allows a string of unknown characters
         to be specified.  SET CASE specifies whether or not the difference
         between upper and lowercase is significant.  SET HEX ON allows the
         characters to be specified as hexadecimal values.  SET SPAN can be
         used to allow targets to span multiple lines in the file.  SET
         VARBLANK specifies whether or not the number of blanks between words
         is significant.  Targets are used as arguments by some subcommands
         (particularly LOCATE), as subcommand prefixes, or may be entered alone
         to make the line specified by the target the current line.
 
         XEDIT also makes use of a column pointer and column targets, which are
         similar in some respects to the current line and targets.  Column
         pointer movement is controlled and used by a set of special column-
         oriented subcommands (CLOCATE, CINSERT, CDELETE, etc.).  In display
         mode the current line and column pointer is indicated in the header
         line and the scale line.  On other types of terminals the column
         pointer position is marked by underscoring.  Column-targets may be
         absolute or relative column numbers, or string expressions.  Use -* to
         refer to the left zone column and * or +* to refer to the right zone
         column.
 
         The following describes the XEDIT subcommands and supplied macros.
         Default parameter values are listed immediately following the general
         form.
 
         &[command]
                   causes the specified command to be retained in the input
                   area on a 3270-type terminal.  The command may be repeated
                   by pressing ENTER.
 
         = [command]
                   repeats the execution of the last command entered for this
                   file, or executes a specified command and then repeats the
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     313
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
                   last command.  The = buffer may be changed with the SET =
                   subcommand.
 
         ?         displays the last command entered for this file.  Repeated
                   execution of the ? subcommand displays previous commands.  ?
                   cannot be used from a macro, and cannot have a synonym.
 
         Add [n]   adds lines after the current line.  The number of lines
                   added is specified by "n."  The default is one line.  ADD is
                   allowed only in display mode.
 
         ALL target
                   displays the target lines and excludes all others.  ALL is a
                   macro.
 
         ALter char1 char2 [target|1 [n|1|* [p|1]]]
                   changes a single character to another character.  The
                   characters can be specified as two hexadecimal digits.  The
                   remaining arguments correspond to those of the CHANGE
                   subcommand.  ALTER is a macro.
 
         BAckward [n]
                   scrolls backward (toward the top of the file) the indicated
                   number of screens.  The default is one screen.
 
         Bottom    makes the last data line of the file or range the new
                   current line.
 
         BURN      erases the current file from disk and issues a QUIT
                   subcommand.  If you are using RXEDIT to edit a reader spool
                   file the spool file is purged.  This will completely destroy
                   the file you are editing.  BURN is a macro.
 
         CANCEL    immediately terminates XEDIT.  It is equivalent to entering
                   QUIT for each file being edited.  CANCEL is a macro.
 
         CAPPEND [text]
                   appends the specified text to the end of the current line.
                   The column pointer is moved to the first appended character,
                   or the first trailing blank if no text is given.  CAPPEND is
                   a macro.
 
         CDELETE [column target|1]
                   deletes characters from the current line, beginning at the
                   column pointer and deleting up to the column target.  SET
                   STREAM ON (the initial setting) allows text on multiple
                   lines to be deleted.
 
         CFIRST    moves the column pointer to the beginning of the ZONE.
 
         Change /string1 [/string2/  [target|1 [n|1|* [f|1]]]]
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     314
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
                   replaces occurrences of "string1" with "string2."  The
                   delimiter (/) may be any non-blank character that does not
                   appear in the strings.  If "string2" is omitted, a null
                   string is used.  The target specifies the number of lines to
                   be searched.  Lines are searched beginning with the current
                   line and ending before the target line.  The value "n" is
                   the number of occurrences of "string1" that may be changed
                   on each line, and "f" is the relative number of the first
                   occurrence on each line to be changed.  The search for
                   string1 is limited by the current ZONE columns, but the
       |           change may affect data from the left ZONE column to the
       |           TRUNC column.  SET SPILL controls what happens to characters
       |           pushed past the TRUNC column.  SET STAY controls current
                   line positioning after multiple line changes.  SET VERIFY ON
                   causes all changed lines to be displayed.  The strings may
                   make use of the ARBCHAR.  SPAN and VARBLANK settings are
                   ignored.
 
         CINSERT text
                   inserts text immediately before the column pointer in the
                   current line.
 
         CLAST     moves the column pointer to the end of the ZONE.
 
         CLocate column-target
                   makes the column specified by the column target the column
                   pointer value.  Searching begins at the column pointer
                   position in the current line.  If SET STREAM ON (the initial
                   setting) is in effect searching continues beyond the current
                   line.
 
         CMS [text]
                   will pass "text" to CMS as a command.  If "text" is not
                   specified CMS subset mode is entered.  Use the RETURN
                   command to return to XEDIT.
 
         CMSG [text]
                   puts a message on the command line of a 3270-type terminal.
                   CMSG is intended for use in macros.
 
         COMMAND [text]
                   executes "text" as an XEDIT subcommand, without checking for
                   synonyms or macros.  If "text" is not an XEDIT subcommand,
                   and SET IMPCMSCP is ON, it is passed to CMS or CP as a
                   command.  The & and ?  subcommands cannot be used.
 
         COMPRESS [target|1]
                   replaces blank (or FILLER) characters immediately preceding
                   the current tab columns with a single tab character.  The
                   SET TABS and EXPAND subcommands are used to align the
                   compressed text to new columns.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     315
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         COpy target1 target2
                   copies one or more lines, beginning with the current line
                   and ending before the "target1" line, to the "target2" line.
                   The last line copied becomes the current line.
 
         COUnt /string[/target|1]
                   counts the occurrences of "string," beginning with the
                   current line and ending before the target.  The count is the
                   number of strings that would be affected by a CHANGE
                   subcommand specifying the same string.
 
         COVerlay text
                   overlays the current line (starting at the column pointer)
                   with the non-blank characters in "text."  Use underscores in
                   "text" to force blanks on the current line.
 
         CP [text] passes "text" to the Control Program (CP) as a command.  If
                   "text" is not specified, control transfers to CP mode; use
                   the BEGIN command to return to XEDIT.
 
         CReplace text
                   replaces the characters in the current line (starting at the
                   column pointer) with the "text."  This is similar to
                   COVERLAY, except blanks and underscores have no special
                   significance.
 
       | CURsor CMdline [column|1] [Priority n]
       |        Column [Priority n]
       |        File line [column] [Priority n]
       |        Home [Priority n]
       |        Screen line [column] [Priority n]
       |           moves the cursor to the specified column on the command
       |           line, the current line and column pointer position, a file
       |           line, switches between a screen line and the command line,
       |           or moves to a screen line.  It also assigns a priority to
       |           the new position.  This subcommand is allowed only in
                   display mode.
 
         DBLANK    removes all of the blank lines from a file.  DBLANK is a
                   macro.
 
         DELete [target|1]
                   deletes one or more lines, beginning with the current line
                   and ending before the target.
 
         Down [n|1|*]
                   advances the current line "n" lines toward the end of the
                   file.
 
         DUPlicat [n|1 [target|1]]
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     316
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
                   duplicates one or more lines, beginning with the current
                   line and ending before the target, "n" times.
 
         EMSG [code] [text]
                   displays an error message.  Refer to the description of the
                   CMSEMSG command elsewhere in this manual for a description
                   of the optional message identifier code.  If the code is not
                   supplied, or if the severity is E, S, or T, the alarm will
                   be sounded.  EMSG is intended for use in macros.
 
         EXPAND [target|1]
                   replaces tab characters in the specified lines with blanks
                   (or the SET FILLER character) to align to the current tab
                   columns.  EXPAND can be used in conjunction with COMPRESS
                   and SET TABS to realign tables and other text.
 
         EXPLAIN   displays the HELP information for the most recently issued
                   XEDIT error message.  For EXPLAIN to work properly, CP SET
                   EMSG must be ON before the error occurs.  This can be done
                   automatically with a CP SET EMSG ON command in your PROFILE
                   EXEC or XEDIT PROFILE.  EXPLAIN is a macro.
 
       | EXTract /operand[/operands...
       |           returns information to an EXEC or XEDIT macro by setting
       |           variables in the EXEC or macro.  EXTRACT can obtain
       |           information not obtainable with TRANSFER.  Refer to the
       |           XEDIT Reference or online HELP for more information.
 
       | FFile     is a synonym for COMMAND FILE.  See FILE and PFILE for more
       |           information.
 
         FILE [fn [ft [fm]]]
               =   =   =
                   puts the current file into a CMS disk file and removes it
                   from the set of files being edited.  If only one file was
                   being edited XEDIT terminates.  Optionally, a fileid may be
                   specified to override the current fileid.  An "=" may be
                   used in place of "fn", "ft", or "fm" to specify that the
       |           current setting for this identifier is to be used.  A FILE
       |           issued from a macro when only one file is being edited is
       |           not executed until the macro ends.  FILE cannot be used from
       |           a prefix macro.  By default, FILE is a synonym of PFILE.
 
         Find text searches forward from the line following the current line
                   for a line beginning with "text."  Columns containing blanks
                   in "text" are not checked; columns containing underscores
                   are matched for blanks.  The search starts at the first tab
                   position in each line.  The first line containing "text"
                   becomes the current line.  SET WRAP controls wraparound from
                   the bottom of the file.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     317
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         FINDUp text
         FUp       is similar to FIND, but searches up (toward the top of the
                   file), rather than down.
 
         FLOW [target|2 [l|1 [r|70]]]
                   reformats lines beginning with the current line and ending
                   before the target.  The lines are concatenated and then
                   broken at word boundaries to fit within the specified left
                   and right column margins.  FLOW is a macro that uses SCRIPT
                   to format the text, and SCRIPT control words in the text are
                   processed (.AD, .CO, .FO, .JU, .LL, and .NF should not be
                   used).
 
         FOrward [n|1|*]
                   scrolls toward the end of the file the specified number of
                   screens.  FORWARD is allowed only in display mode.
 
         GET [fn|= [ft|= [fm|*|=] [f|1 [n|*]]]]
                   inserts lines after the current line.  The lines come from
                   the PUT/PUTD buffer, or a specified CMS file.  When a CMS
                   fileid is specified, "f" (the first record to be read) and
                   "n" (the number of records to be read) may also be
                   specified.  The new records are truncated or filled to the
                   required record length.  Packed files are not unpacked.
 
         HELP [MENU|topic]
                   displays information about XEDIT subcommands and macros.
                   The "topic" may not use abbreviations.  MENU displays a list
                   of all XEDIT subcommands and macros.  The "topic" can also
                   be anything accepted by the CMS HELP command.
 
         HEXTYPE [target|1]
                   displays lines beginning with the current line and ending
                   before the target in both hexadecimal and character form.
                   HEXTYPE is a macro.
 
         INLong    enters long input mode.  In this mode you can enter data
                   lines as wide as the display screen (or to the current
                   truncation column, whichever is shorter).  Each line on the
                   screen is entered into the file as a data line.  Pressing
                   the ENTER key causes the lines to be entered and a new input
                   screen to be displayed.  Pressing the ENTER key with no new
                   data on the screen terminates input mode.  The last line
                   entered becomes the current line.  The current line and the
                   SCALE and TABLINE indicators are displayed at the top of the
                   screen in protected form.  The remaining lines on the screen
                   can be used for input.  Each input line contains the current
                   SET MASK data (initially all blank).  VERIFY is forced to
                   begin with column one and end at the truncation column or
                   the end of the screen line.  The normal operation of the
                   Program Function (PF) keys and PA2 key are suspended; these
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     318
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
                   keys are ignored with the exception of PF keys set to
                   TABKEY, SOS TABF, or SOS TABB.  The multiple tab features of
                   SOS TABF and TABB are not supported.  Tabbing beyond the
                   last tab column moves the cursor to the first tab column of
                   the next line.  Backward tabbing will not move to the left
                   of the first tab column.  The LINEND character is treated as
                   a normal data character.  XEDIT SET CASE and CMS SET INPUT
                   translations are made.  Use the insert (INS MODE) and delete
                   (DEL) keys with care; the entire screen is one long field
                   and inserting or deleting characters causes the input data
                   to become aligned to other than the normal line boundaries.
                   INLONG is allowed only in display mode.
 
         Input [text]
                   enters new lines into a file after the current line.  If
                   "text" is specified, one line containing "text" is inserted;
                   otherwise, XEDIT enters input mode and new lines may be
       |           entered.  Only data typed within the VERIFY columns is
       |           accepted.  In display mode, press ENTER once for a new input
                   screen, twice to return to edit mode.  In typewriter mode,
                   enter an empty line to return to edit mode.  The last line
                   entered becomes the current line.
 
       | Join [ALigned] [Column|CURSOR]
       |      [ALigned] [column|/string/]...
                   joins two or more lines, beginning with the current line,
                   into one new line, and deletes the original lines from the
       |           file.  ALIGNED attempts to correct for leading blanks on the
       |           lines being joined.  If no operand is specified the current
       |           line and the following line are joined following the last
                   non-blank on the current line.  COLUMN can be specified to
                   join two lines at the column pointer position.  Column
                   numbers will append additional lines at the specified
                   columns.  "String" will append the specified string to the
                   current line and then append a line.  CURSOR is used to join
                   the line containing the cursor and the following line (for
                   display mode only).  The new line will be truncated to fit
       |           within the current record length.  JOIN is a macro.  See
       |           also SPLTJOIN.
 
         JUSTIFY [target|* [l|1 [r|70]]]
                   reformats lines beginning with the current line and ending
                   before the target.  The lines are concatenated, broken at
                   word boundaries, and aligned to the left and right column
                   margins.  JUSTIFY is a macro that uses SCRIPT to format the
                   text, and SCRIPT control words in the text are be processed
                   (although .AD and .LL should not be used).
 
         LEft [n|1]
                   changes the columns displayed so that data to the left of
                   the first column on the screen is visible.  The data appears
       |           to move to the right.  See also RGTLEFT.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     319
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         LOAD [fn [ft [fm]]] [(options... [)]]
                   is used from a profile macro to load the file into storage
                   for editing.  The format of the LOAD subcommand is the same
                   as that of the XEDIT command.  All XEDIT parameters and
                   options may be specified, although options specified on the
                   XEDIT command will override those specified on the LOAD
                   subcommand.  If used, LOAD must be the first XEDIT
                   subcommand in the XEDIT profile.  The WIDTH option of the
                   LOAD subcommand is overridden if it would cause truncation
                   of existing file lines.  The default SET LRECL, SET TRUNC,
                   and SET ZONE values are assigned when LOAD is executed.
 
         [Locate] target [subcommand]
                   searches the file, starting after the current line, for the
                   specified target.  The first line containing the target
                   becomes the new current line.  A subcommand may be specified
                   to be executed after positioning at the new current line.
                   SET STAY and SET WRAP control the operation of LOCATE.
 
         LOWercas [target|1]
                   converts uppercase letters to lowercase, beginning with the
                   current line and ending before the target line.
 
       | LPrefix text
       |           executes "text" as a prefix subcommand on the current line.
       |           This can be used in display or typewriter mode.
 
         MACRO [text]
                   executes "text" as an XEDIT macro, without checking for
                   synonyms or subcommands.
 
       | MErge target1 target2 [column|1]
       |           overlays the second group of lines with data from the first
       |           group and then deletes the first group.  The first group of
       |           lines contains the lines from the current line and ending
       |           before "target1."  The second group begins with "target2."
       |           The data from the first group can be shifted with the
       |           "column" parameter.  MERGE treats underscores as ordinary
       |           data characters.
 
         MODify keyword
                   displays a subcommand and its current setting on the command
                   line where it can be modified (if desired) and entered.
                   MODIFY is allowed only in display mode.  Refer to the XEDIT
                   Reference or online HELP for a list of valid keywords.
 
         MOVE target1 target2
                   moves one or more lines, beginning with the current line and
                   ending before the "target1" line, to the "target2" line.
                   The original lines are deleted.  The last line moved becomes
                   the current line.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     320
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         MSG [text]
                   displays a message.  MSG is intended for use in macros.
 
         Next [n]  is the same as the DOWN subcommand.
 
         NFind text
                   searches forward from the line following the current line
                   for a line not beginning with "text".  Columns containing
                   blanks in "text" are not checked; columns containing
                   underscores are matched for blanks.  Searching begins at the
                   first tab position in each line.  The first line not
                   containing "text" becomes the current line.  SET WRAP
                   controls wraparound from the bottom of the file.
 
         NFINDUp text
         NFUp      is similar to NFIND, but searching is up (toward the top of
                   the file), rather than down.
 
         Overlay text
                   overlays the current line with "text."  Blanks in the text
                   do not change existing characters, and underscores in the
                   text cause blanks to be placed in the current line.
 
         PARSE column keyword ...
                   is a macro used for parameter processing in macros.  Refer
                   to the XEDIT Reference or online HELP for details.
 
       | PFILE [fn [ft [fm]]]
       |        =   =   =
       |           saves the current file in a CMS disk file and removes it
       |           from the ring of files being edited.  XEDIT ends if this was
       |           the last file in the ring.  If you changed the identifier of
       |           the file, and a with the new name already exists, you will
       |           be prompted to enter FFILE to overwrite the file on disk.
       |           By default, FILE is a synonym of PFILE.
 
         POWerinp  enters "power input" mode.  The entire display screen is
                   treated as one line, and text may be entered without regard
                   to physical line boundaries on the screen.  Pressing ENTER
                   once causes a new input screen to be displayed, twice
                   returns to edit mode.  When input mode ends lines entered
                   are broken to fit within the current truncation setting, and
                   words broken over line boundaries are reassembled.  Use the
                   LINEND character to force data to the beginning of a line.
                   The last line entered becomes the current line.  POWERINP is
                   allowed only in display mode.
 
         PQUIT [n] terminates editing of the current file and returns control
                   to CMS if there is only one file being edited.  If the file
                   has been altered you will be prompted to enter QQUIT.  The
                   optional argument is a return code for use with macros.  By
                   default, QUIT is a synonym of PQUIT.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     321
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
       | PSAVE [fn [ft [fm]]]
       |        =   =   =
       |           saves the current file in a CMS disk file.  If you changed
       |           the identifier of the file, and a with the new name already
       |           exists, you will be prompted to enter SSAVE to overwrite the
       |           file on disk.  By default, SAVE is a synonym of PSAVE.
 
       | PREServe  saves the current settings of several XEDIT SET subcommand
       |           variables for later restoration with the RESTORE command.
       |           The current line pointer, column pointer, and some SET
       |           values are not saved.  Refer to the XEDIT Reference or
       |           online HELP for more information.
 
       | PURge macroname
                   purges the current copy of the named macro from storage.
 
         PUT [target|1 [fn|= [ft|= [fm|=]]]]
                   saves records beginning with the current line and ending
                   before the target line.  If no fileid is specified the lines
                   are placed in a special buffer for later use by the GET
       |           subcommand.  (The buffer is cleared by each PUT and PUTD).
       |           If a CMS fileid is specified, a CMS disk file will be
                   created.  If the file already exists, the lines will be
                   added to the end.  The target line becomes the current line.
 
         PUTD [target|1 [fn|= [ft|= [fm|=]]]]
                   is similar to PUT, except the specified lines are deleted
                   from the current file.
 
         QQUIT [n] terminates editing of the current file and ends XEDIT if
                   only one file is being edited.  The optional argument is a
       |           return code for use with macros.  By default, QQUIT is a
       |           synonym for COMMAND QUIT, and QUIT is a synonym for PQUIT.
 
         Query keyword
       |           displays the current value of the specified XEDIT setting.
       |           Use EXTRACT (or TRANSFER) to obtain these values in an EXEC
       |           or macro.  Refer to the XEDIT Reference or online HELP for a
       |           list of keywords.
 
         QUIT [n]  terminates editing of the current file and ends XEDIT if
                   there is only one file being edited.  The optional argument
       |           is a return code for use with macros.  By default, QUIT is a
       |           synonym for COMMAND PQUIT, and QQUIT is a synonym for
                   COMMAND QUIT.  PQUIT also clears the stack.
 
         RBLANK target
                   changes all multiple blanks to single blanks, beginning with
                   the current line and ending before the target.
 
       |      Cmdline
       | READ All [Number]      [Tag|Notag]
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     322
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
       |      Nochange [Number]
                   stacks the specified information.  CMDLINE (the default)
                   stacks the command input area.  ALL stacks all changed lines
                   on the screen, followed by the CMDLINE.  NOCHANGE is similar
                   to ALL, but the changes on the screen are not made to the
                   file.  The NUMBER operand causes stacked lines to be
                   prefixed with their file line number.  Specifying TAG causes
       |           each line to include additional information.  READ is
       |           intended for use in macros.  Refer to the XEDIT Reference or
       |           online HELP for more information.
 
       | RECover [n|1|*]
                   recovers lines deleted by DELETE, MERGE, or PUTD.  The
                   recovered lines are inserted before the current line.  All
                   deleted lines (within the limits of available storage) are
                   saved in one buffer and are moved from this buffer by the
       |           RECOVER subcommand.  RECOVER usually can't be used in UPDATE
       |           mode.
 
       | REFRESH   updates the display.  It can be used from a macro to update
       |           the display without ending the macro or waiting for input.
       |           REFRESH is allowed only in display mode.
 
         RENum [start|10 [incr]]
                   renumbers the lines in files with a filetype of BASIC,
                   COBOL, FREEFORT, VSBASIC, or WBASIC.  The default increment
                   is the value of the starting number.
 
         REPEat [target|1]
                   will advance the current line and repeat the last command.
                   REPEAT is equivalent to entering =UP or =DOWN until the
       |           target is reached, or a non-zero return code occurs.
 
         Replace [text]
                   replaces the current line with "text," or deletes the
                   current line and enters input mode.
 
         RESet     removes all pending prefix subcommands.
 
         RESTore   restores the settings saved by the PRESERVE subcommand.
 
       | RGTLEFT [n]
       |           changes the view columns to display data currently not
       |           visible on the screen.  You can specify the number of
       |           columns to move.  SET VERSHIFT controls the direction of the
       |           shift.  RGTLEFT is a macro and is allowed only in display
       |           mode.
 
         RIght [n] changes the columns displayed so that data to the right of
                   the last column on the screen is visible.  The data will
       |           appear to move to the left.  See also RGTLEFT.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     323
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         RINPUT id1 id2 [(options...]
                   uses the CMS command INPUT to read a reader spool file into
                   the file being edited.  The parameters and options are the
                   same as those of the CMS command INPUT.  Except for the file
                   destination options (APPEND, DISK, DSTACK, REPLACE, SELECT,
                   and XEDIT), any INPUT option may be specified.  The NOHOLD
                   option is ignored and the spool file is be retained in your
                   reader.  RINPUT inserts the file after the current line (or
                   at the end of the file if the current line is the EOF
       |           indicator).  The current line does not change and the
       |           alteration count is incremented by one.  RINPUT is a macro.
 
         SAVE [fn [ft [fm]]]
               =   =   =
       |           saves the current file in a CMS disk file.  By default, SAVE
       |           is a synonym of PSAVE.
 
         SCHANGE [pfkey]
                   locates and selectively changes occurrences of a specified
                   string.  SCHANGE can only be used in display mode and only
                   from a Program Function key.  To use SCHANGE, place a CHANGE
                   or CLOCATE subcommand in the command area and press the
                   SCHANGE PF key instead of ENTER.  The cursor is placed under
                   the specified string (if found).  Pressing the PF key again
                   will move the cursor to the next occurrence of the string.
                   Pressing the key indicated by "pfkey" on the SCHANGE command
                   will execute the CHANGE subcommand.  Searching begins with
       |           the current line and column pointer.  If you press the
       |           SCHANGE PF key without a CHANGE subcommand on the command
       |           line the subcommand in the LASTLORC buffer is used.  SCHANGE
       |           is a macro.
 
         SET keyword [operands...]
       |           is used to control an assortment of XEDIT options.  The
       |           various settings can be examined with the QUERY, EXTRACT,
       |           and TRANSFER subcommands.  The SET subcommand name is only
                   required with the SET =, SET ALT, SET MACRO, and SET MSGLINE
                   subcommands.
 
         SET = text
                   sets the command reuse (=) buffer.  This is intended for use
                   in macros.
 
       | SET ALT n [m]
       |           sets the alteration count to the specified value.  The first
       |           value is the number of alterations since the last autosave,
       |           the second value is the number since the last SAVE.
 
         [SET] APL ON|OFF
                   controls support for the 3270 APL character set.  The
                   initial setting is determined by the CP TERMINAL APL
                   command.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     324
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         [SET] ARBchar ON [char]
                       OFF
                   defines a character to represent an arbitrary character in a
                   target.  The initial setting is ARBCHAR OFF $.
 
         [SET] AUtosave n [fm|A]
                        OFF
                   causes a SAVE subcommand to be issued automatically when "n"
                   lines have been added, changed, or deleted.  A filemode may
                   be specified.  The file is written to a special CMS disk
       |           file named "rrrnnnnn AUTOSAVE fm."  The SAVE and FILE
       |           subcommands erase the autosave file; QUIT does not.  See the
                   Usage Notes for more information on AUTOSAVE.  The initial
                   setting is AUTOSAVE OFF.
 
         [SET] CASE Uppercase [Respect|Ignore]
                    Mixed [Respect|Ignore]
                   determines how alphabetic characters are treated when
                   entered as data and when used in targets.  UPPERCASE causes
                   all data to be translated to uppercase when entered;  MIXED
                   bypasses this translation.  Data is always displayed with
                   mixed case.  RESPECT causes the case of alphabetic
                   characters to be significant during target searches; IGNORE
                   causes the difference to be ignored ("a" matches both "a"
                   and "A").  The default is CASE MIXED RESPECT for LISTING,
                   MEMO, and SCRIPT files; CASE UPPER RESPECT for all other
                   filetypes.
 
       | [SET] CMDline On|OFf|Top|Bottom
                   sets the location of the command line in display mode.
                   CMDLINE TOP causes the command line and default message line
                   to share the same space, and messages must be cleared before
       |           you can enter commands.  CMDLINE OFF removes the command
       |           line.  The status are is not displayed with CMDLINE OFF,
       |           BOTTOM, or TOP.  The initial setting is CMDLINE ON.
 
       | [SET] COLOR field [color] [exthi] [High|Nohigh]
       |           controls color and highlighting used for some areas of the
       |           screen.  Refer to the XEDIT Reference or online HELP for
       |           details.
 
         [SET] COLPtr ON|OFF
                   controls marking the column pointer position in typewriter
                   mode.  The column pointer position is marked with an
                   underscore, and requires that the terminal have a backspace-
                   and-overstrike capability.  The initial setting is COLPTR
                   ON.
 
         [SET] CTLCHAR OFF
                       char Escape
       |               char OFF
       |               char [Protect] [color] [exthi] [High|Nohigh|Invisible]
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     325
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
       |               char [Noprotect] [color] [exthi] [High|Nohigh|Invisible]
                   defines screen formatting control characters for display
                   mode.  The SET RESERVE subcommand can be used to display
                   data on the screen using these characters.  CTLCHAR is
                   intended to be used in macros.  Refer to the XEDIT Reference
                   or online HELP for details.
 
       | [SET] CURLine ON [M] [n|+n|-n|]
       |           specifies the line on a display screen where the current
       |           line will appear.  The current line is highlighted.  M
       |           refers to the middle of the screen; CURLINE ON M is the
       |           initial setting.  CURLINE is allowed only in display mode.
 
       | [SET] DISPlay n [m|*]
       |           specifies the selection levels of lines to be displayed.
       |           SET DISPLAY is used in conjunction with SET SELECT, SCOPE,
       |           and SHADOW.  DISPLAY 0 0 is the initial setting.  Refer to
       |           the XEDIT Reference or online HELP for details.
 
       | [SET] ENTer [BEFORE|AFTER|ONLY|IGNORE]|[string|NULLKEY|COPYKEY|TABKEY]
       |           defines the function of the ENTER key.  ENTER IGNORE COMMAND
       |           CURSOR CMDLINE 1 PRIORITY 30 is the initial setting.  Refer
       |           to the XEDIT Reference or online HELP for details.
 
         [SET] ESCape ON [char]
                      OFF
                   defines the input-mode subcommand escape character.
                   Preceding a line with the escape character in column one
                   while in input mode will cause the line to be treated as a
                   command rather than data.  This function is not provided in
       |           display mode.  The initial setting is ESCAPE ON + for BATCH,
       |           JCL, and JOB files, and ESCAPE ON / for other filetypes.
 
         [SET] FILler [char]
                   defines the character used to expand tab characters.  The
                   initial value is a blank.
 
         [SET] FMode fm
               FName fn
               FType ft
                   changes the current fileid.  The new fileid is used by the
                   SAVE and FILE subcommands.  A copy of the file already on
                   disk with the old name is not affected.  No warning is given
                   if a file with the new fileid already exists on disk.
 
       | [SET] FULLread [ON|OFF]
       |           controls the way nulls are treated on a 3270-type display
       |           screen.  Do not use FULLREAD ON when using the 3270
       |           Simulator (S3270).  FULLREAD OFF is the initial setting.
       |           Refer to the XEDIT Reference or online HELP for details.
 
         [SET] HEX ON|OFF
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     326
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
                   specifies whether subcommand string operands and targets can
                   be specified in hexadecimal notation.  XEDIT will convert
                   the hexadecimal notation to the equivalent EBCDIC
                   characters.  The initial setting is HEX OFF.
 
         [SET] IMage ON|OFF|Canon
                   specifies how backspace and tab characters are handled when
                   entered.  IMAGE ON causes backspaces to be interpreted as
                   corrections (deleting the preceding character from the line)
                   and tabs to be expanded with the FILLER character.  IMAGE
                   OFF causes both characters to be treated as normal data
                   characters.  IMAGE CANON causes tabs to be unchanged, but
                   sequences using backspaces will be sorted into canonical
                   order (the characters in collating sequence separated by
                   single backspaces).  The IMAGE setting affects the operation
                   of FIND (and FINDUP, NFIND, and NFINDUP), input mode,
                   OVERLAY, and targets.  Use the SET TABS subcommand when
                   IMAGE ON is in effect to set the columns used for tab
       |           expansion.  The initial setting is IMAGE CANON for SCRIPT
       |           files, and IMAGE ON for most other filetypes.
 
         [SET] IMPcmscp ON|OFF
                   controls how entries not recognized as XEDIT subcommands are
                   handled.  IMPCMSCP ON causes unrecognized entries to be
                   passed to CMS and CP as commands.  IMPCMSCP OFF inhibits
                   this action.  The initial setting is IMPCMSCP ON.
 
       | [SET] LASTLorc text
       |           sets the LASTLORC (Last Locate or Change) buffer.  The
       |           buffer is set by each CHANGE, LOCATE, CLOCATE, and FIND-type
       |           command.  The initial setting is a null string.  LASTLORC is
       |           intended to be used in macros.
 
         [SET] LINENd ON [char]
                      OFF
                   defines a logical line end character.  The line end
                   character can be used to separate multiple subcommands
                   entered on one line, and to mark new lines when entering
                   data.  The initial setting is LINEND ON #.
 
         [SET] LRecl n
                   changes the current logical record (line) length.  The value
                   cannot exceed the WIDTH option value.  For files with
                   variable-length records, the LRECL is the maximum line
                   length.  For files with fixed-length records, the LRECL is
                   the length of all lines.  Setting an LRECL value less than
                   the current value may cause the settings of TRUNC and ZONE
                   to be reduced and can cause truncation of existing data.
                   The initial setting depends on the filetype.
 
         SET MACRO ON|OFF
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     327
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
                   controls the search order for macros and subcommands.  MACRO
                   ON causes macros to be searched for first.  MACRO OFF causes
                   subcommands to be searched for first.  The initial setting
                   is SET MACRO OFF.
 
         [SET] MASK Immed [text]
                    Define
                    Modify
                   sets the initial contents of new lines added to the file.
                   MASK IMMED sets the mask to the specified text.  MASK DEFINE
                   displays a scale in the command line on which the mask is
                   entered.  MASK MODIFY writes the current mask into the
                   command line to be modified.  The initial setting is a blank
                   line.  DEFINE and MODIFY can be used only in display mode.
 
       | SET MSGLine ON [M[+n|-n]|[+n|-n] [m|1] [Overlay]
       |             OFF
       |           defines the location of the message line.  The second value
       |           (m) defines the number of lines used for messages.  If
       |           OVERLAY is specified the message lines are used for data
       |           until needed for a message.  SET MSGLINE ON 2 2 is the
       |           initial setting.
 
         [SET] MSGMode ON [Short|Long]
                       OFF
                   controls the display of XEDIT messages.  MSGMODE ON SHORT
                   suppresses informational (I) and warning (W) messages, and
                   shortens error (E) messages to the not-sign (¬).  MSGMODE ON
                   LONG displays all of every message.  MSGMODE OFF suppresses
                   the display of all messages.  The initial setting is MSGMODE
                   ON LONG.  The CP command SET EMSG controls the format of the
                   message when MSGMODE ON LONG is in effect.
 
         [SET] NONDisp [char]
                   specifies the character to be used to represent characters
                   that cannot be displayed in display mode.  Avoid using the
                   character insert (INS MODE) and delete (DEL) functions of a
                   3270-type terminal on lines containing non-displayable
                   characters, since XEDIT will not always be able to determine
       |           the correct positions of the characters.  NONDISP " is the
       |           initial setting.
 
         [SET] NULls ON|OFF
                   controls how trailing blanks are represented on a 3270-type
                   screen.  NULLS ON causes the blanks at the end of lines to
                   be represented as nulls, thus allowing the use of the
                   character insert function (INS MODE) of the terminal.  NULLS
                   OFF fills lines with blanks, which disables the insert
       |           function.  The PA2 key (or any key set to NULLKEY) sets
                   NULLS ON for the line containing the cursor.  The initial
                   setting is NULLS OFF.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     328
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         [SET] NUMber ON|OFF
                   controls the display of file line numbers in the prefix
                   area.  NUMBER ON causes the prefix area to contain a five-
                   digit file line number.  NUMBER OFF causes five equal signs
       |           to be displayed (unless the prefix area has been set to
       |           NULLS).  The initial setting is NUMBER OFF.
 
       | [SET] PAn [BEFORE|AFTER|ONLY|IGNORE]|[string|NULLKEY|COPYKEY|TABKEY]
       |           defines the function of a PA (Program Attention) key.  PA1
       |           BEFORE COMMAND CP,  PA2 BEFORE NULLKEY, and PA3 ONLY ?  are
       |           the initial settings.  The setting of the CP break key
       |           overrides the XEDIT PA settings.  Refer to the TERMINAL
       |           command for details about the break key.  Refer to the XEDIT
       |           Reference or online HELP for more about SET PAn.
 
         [SET] PACK ON|OFF
                   specifies how the file is written to disk.  PACK ON causes
                   the file to be written in packed format.  Packed format is
                   also used by the CMS commands PACK and UNPACK.  PACK OFF
                   causes the file to be written in normal format.  PACK OFF is
                   the initial setting.  Refer to the Usage Notes for more
                   information.
 
       | [SET] PENDing [ON|BLOCK|ERROR] string
       |               OFF
       |           controls the execution of prefix macros and the status
       |           display.  PENDING is intended to be used from macros.  Refer
       |           to the XEDIT Reference or online HELP for details.
 
       | [SET] PFn [BEFORE|AFTER|ONLY|IGNORE]|[string|NULLKEY|COPYKEY|TABKEY]
       |           defines the function of a PF (Program Function) key.  The
       |           initial settings are listed under Keyboard Functions.  Refer
       |           to the XEDIT Reference or online HELP for details.
 
         [SET] Point .name [OFF]
                   assigns a name to the current line.  This name can then be
                   used as a target to refer to this line, even if its position
                   in the file changes.  The name must be in the form of a
                   period followed by from one to eight characters.  The OFF
                   operand removes the name.  You must remove a name before it
                   can be assigned to a new line.
 
       | [SET] PREfix ON [Left|Right]
                      Nulls [Left|Right]
                      OFF
                      Synonym new old
                   controls the position of the prefix areas, and defines
                   synonyms for prefix subcommands.  PREFIX ON LEFT displays
                   the prefix areas on the left side of the screen, PREFIX ON
       |           RIGHT on the right side.  PREFIX NULLS fills the prefix
       |           areas with nulls.  PREFIX OFF removes the prefix areas.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     329
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
                   PREFIX SYNONYM is used to define synonyms for existing
                   prefix subcommands.  Prefix subcommand names can be up to
                   five characters (numbers cannot be used).  The initial
       |           setting is PREFIX ON LEFT.
 
         [SET] RANge target1 target2
                   defines limits for movement within the file.  The top range
                   (target1) acts as the new top-of-file, the bottom range
                   (target2) as the end-of-file.  Only the SAVE and FILE
                   subcommands can act outside of the defined range.  The
                   initial range is the entire file, which is equivalent to
                   RANGE :1 *.
 
         [SET] RECFm V|VP|F|FP
                   changes the record format of the file.  "V" indicates
                   variable-length records, "VP" indicates packed variable-
                   length records, "F" indicates fixed-length records, and "FP"
                   indicates packed fixed-length records.  Trailing blanks are
                   discarded when variable-length records are written to disk,
                   which saves a great deal of disk space for most files.
                   Setting RECFM VP or FP will also set PACK ON.  The initial
                   value of RECFM depends on the filetype.  Refer to the Usage
                   Notes for more information about packed files.
 
       | [SET] REMote [ON|OFF]
       |          controls data transmission to a terminal in display mode.
       |           REMOTE ON reduces the amount of data transmitted, but
       |           increases the overhead.  Initially, REMOTE ON is set for
       |           remote terminals, REMOTE OFF for locally attached terminals.
 
         [SET] RESERved [M][+|-]n [color] [exthi] [High|Nohigh] [text]
                                  Off
                   reserves the specified line on the screen in display mode.
                   XEDIT will not use reserved lines.  The OFF operand returns
                   the line to XEDIT for its use.  Use SET CTLCHAR to define
                   attribute characters for use on reserved lines.  RESERVE is
                   intended for use in macros, and is allowed only in display
                   mode.  Refer to the XEDIT Reference or online HELP for
                   details.
 
       | [SET] SCALe ON [n]|[M][+n|-n]
                     OFF
                   controls the display of a scale line in display mode.  SCALE
                   ON places the scale under a specified line or the current
       |           line.  SCALE OFF suppresses the scale display.  SCALE ON M+1
       |           is the initial setting.  SCALE is allowed only in display
                   mode
 
       | [SET] SCReen n [Horizontal|Vertical]
       |              Size s [s...]
       |              Width w [w...]
       |              Define ...
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     330
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
                   defines the logical screens displayed on the physical
                   screen.  The first form divides the physical screen into "n"
       |           logical screens of equal size.  The screen can be divided
       |           horizontally or vertically.  The screen can be divided into
       |           unequal parts, and with both horizontal and vertical
       |           divisions.  Refer to the XEDIT Reference or online HELP for
                   details.  The initial setting is one logical screen using
                   the entire physical screen.  SCREEN is allowed only in
                   display mode.
 
       | [SET] SELect [+|-] [target]
       |           sets the selection level for the specified lines.  SET
       |           SELECT is used in conjunction with SET DISPLAY, SCOPE, and
       |           SHADOW.  SELECT 0 is the initial setting.  Refer to the
       |           XEDIT Reference or online HELP for details.
 
         [SET] SERial ON [incr|10 [start|10]]
                      ALL [incr|1000 [start|1000]]
                      string [incr|10 [start|10]]
                      OFF
                   puts sequence numbers in the last columns of each line in
                   the current file when the file is written to disk with SAVE
                   or FILE.  Only files with fixed-length records can be
                   serialized.  SERIAL ON uses the first three characters of
                   the filename and five digits to create the serial numbers,
                   SERIAL ALL uses eight digits, and SERIAL string uses the
                   string as a prefix and as many digits as will fit in an
                   eight-character field.  The initial setting depends on the
                   filetype.
 
       | [SET] SHADow [ON|OFF]
       |           controls the display of shadow lines to indicate lines
       |           excluded from display.  SHADOW ON is the initial setting.
 
       | [SET] SIDcode [string]
       |           sets the string placed in columns 64 through 71 of update
       |           lines.  The initial setting is blanks unless overridden by
       |           the SIDCODE option of the XEDIT command.
 
         [SET] SPAN ON [Blank|Noblank [n|*]]
                    OFF
                   specifies the number of lines which a string may span and
                   still match a string target.  SPAN OFF requires that a
                   string be contained within one line.  SPAN ON defines the
                   number of lines that may be concatenated for searching
                   purposes.  The BLANK operand will cause a blank to be
                   inserted between lines for search purposes.  NOBLANK will
                   concatenate lines with no intervening blank.  The initial
                   setting is SPAN OFF BLANK 2.
 
       | [SET] SPILL [ON|OFF|WORD]
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     331
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
       |           controls what happens to characters that would be truncated
       |           as the result of a CHANGE, CINSERT, SHIFT, and other
       |           subcommands.  ON creates a new line containing spilled
       |           characters, OFF discards spilled characters, and WORD breaks
       |           spilled characters at a word boundary (blank).  The initial
       |           setting depends on the filetype.
 
         [SET] STAY ON|OFF
                   specifies how the current line will be set after a failed
                   target search or FIND-type subcommand.  ON leaves the
                   current line position unaffected, and OFF causes the top or
                   end of the file or range to become the current line.  The
                   initial setting is STAY OFF.
 
         [SET] STReam ON|OFF
                   controls string column target searching.  STREAM ON allows
                   multiple lines to be searched, beginning with the current
                   line and column pointer.  OFF restricts the search to the
                   current line.  The initial setting is STREAM ON.
 
         [SET] SYNonym ON
       |               OFF
       |               [LINEND char] syn [n] cmd
       |               [LINEND char] syn [n [form...] cmd [parms...]]
                   both controls searching for subcommand synonyms and defines
                   synonyms.  SYNONYM OFF disables synonyms.  Refer to the
                   XEDIT Reference or online HELP for details.  The initial
                   setting is SYNONYM ON.
 
       | [SET] TABLine ON [n]|[M][+n|-n]
                       OFF
                   controls the display of a tab ruler in display mode.  ON
       |           places the ruler under a specified line or the current line.
       |           OFF suppresses the line.  TABLINE OFF -3 is the initial
                   setting.  TABLINE is allowed only in display mode
 
         [SET] TABS n [n...]
                   defines logical tab columns.  IMAGE ON must be set for tabs
                   in the input data to be expanded in the file.  The TABKEY PF
                   key function is also controlled by the tab settings.  As
                   many as 28 tab stops may be specified.  The FIND subcommands
                   are affected by the first tab column.  The initial setting
                   depends on the filetype.
 
         [SET] TERMinal Typewriter
                        Display
                   controls the mode in which XEDIT will operate.  DISPLAY is
                   the full-screen mode used by default with 3270-type
                   terminals.  TYPEWRITER is the line mode used on other types
       |           of terminals.  DISPLAY is allowed only on 3270-type
       |           terminals.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     332
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
         [SET] TEXT ON|OFF
                   controls support for the 3270 TEXT character set.  The
                   initial setting is determined by the CP TERMINAL TEXT
                   command.
 
         [SET] TOFEOF ON|OFF
                   controls the display of the top and end of file and range
                   indicators.  ON displays the indicators, OFF suppresses the
                   display.  The initial setting is TOFEOF ON.
 
       | [SET] TRANSLat char1 char2 [char1 char2...]
       |                OFF
       |           defines an uppercase/lowercase pair of characters.  This
       |           subcommand is provided to support non-English language
       |           keyboards.  The initial setting defines uppercase/lowercase
       |           pairs of English letters.
 
         [SET] TRUNC n|*
       |           sets the truncation column.  Data entered (or already
       |           existing) beyond the truncation column will be spilled (see
       |           SET SPILL).  The setting may not exceed the record length
                   (LRECL). The initial setting is based on the filetype.
 
         [SET] VARblank ON|OFF
                   specifies whether or not the number of blanks between words
                   is significant in string target searches.  ON ignores the
                   number of blanks between words, OFF requires that the number
                   of blanks between words match.  The initial setting depends
                   on the filetype.
 
         [SET] Verify [ON|OFF] [[Hex] start end] ...
                   controls the display of lines changed by subcommands, and
                   the manner in which data is displayed in display mode.  The
                   ON and OFF operands control the display of changed lines.
                   ON displays them, OFF does not.  HEX causes all data to be
                   displayed in hexadecimal rather than the normal graphic
                   character form.  "Start" and "end" are starting and ending
                   columns that define an area to be displayed.  Multiple pairs
                   of column numbers, optionally preceded by HEX, may be
                   specified.  The same area may be displayed more than once,
                   and in both graphic and hexadecimal form.  The initial
                   VERIFY settings depend on the terminal type and the
                   filetype.
 
         [SET] WRap ON|OFF
                   controls wraparound during target searches.  ON causes
                   searching to wrap around when the top or end of the file or
                   range is encountered, and stop at the line preceding the
                   current line (and in some cases the column pointer).  OFF
                   suppresses wraparound.  The initial setting is WRAP OFF.
 
         [SET] Zone start end|*
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     333
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
                   specifies the starting and ending zone columns.  Target
                   searching and column pointer movement is confined to within
                   the zone.  The end column may not exceed the truncation
       |           column.  The initial setting is from the first tab to the
       |           truncation column.
 
         SHift Left|Right [cols [target]]
                   shifts data in the current zone either left or right the
                   number of columns specified by "cols."  Lines are shifted
                   beginning with the current line and ending before the
       |           target.  Data shifted past the left zone is lost.  Data
       |           shifted past the right zone is spilled (see SET SPILL).
 
         SORT target [A|D] start end ...
                   sorts lines beginning with the current line and ending
                   before the target in either ascending (A) or descending (D)
                   order, based on the contents of the fields described by the
                   starting and ending column pairs.  The total length of the
                   sort fields cannot exceed 255 characters.  If CASE is set to
                   IGNORE, sorting is alphabetic, with the difference between
                   uppercase and lowercase letters ignored.  Changes made with
       |           the SORT subcommand are not retained in update mode.  SORT
       |           operates outside of the current SCOPE.  SORT is a macro.
 
         SOS operands
                   provides screen operation simulation that can be used from a
                   macro or PF key.  Refer to the XEDIT Reference or online
                   HELP for details.
 
         SPELL [word]
                   checks the spelling of a word.  If no word is specified on
                   the command line, the word beginning at the cursor position
       |           is used (in display mode).  SPELL displays a list of
       |           alternative spellings.  SPELL is a macro and uses the
                   SPELLCHK command.
 
         SPELLFIX  checks the spelling in the current file.  The file is first
                   saved on disk (using SAVE) and then each error detected is
                   indicated for correction.  The SPELLFIX subcommand operates
                   in the same manner as the CMS command SPELLFIX.  SPELLFIX is
                   a macro, and is allowed only in display mode
 
         SPlit [ALigned] Column
                         CURSOR
                         col
                         [Before|After] /string/
                   splits a line into two or more lines.  COLUMN splits the
                   current line at the column pointer position.  CURSOR splits
                   the line containing the cursor at the cursor position (only
                   valid in display mode).  The "col" form specifies a column
                   number at which to split the current line.  The /string/
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     334
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
       |           form splits the current line either BEFORE or AFTER the
       |           string.  ALIGNED causes created lines to have the same
       |           number of leading blanks as the original line.  See also
       |           SPLTJOIN.  SPLIT is a macro.
 
       | SPLTJOIN  splits a line or joins two lines, based on the cursor
       |           position.  SPLTJOIN is a macro
 
       | SSave     is a synonym for COMMAND SAVE.  See SAVE and PSAVE for more
       |           information.
 
         STack target [start [length]]
                   stacks lines beginning with the current line and ending
                   before the target in first in, first out (FIFO) order.  The
                   starting column and length of the data from each line to be
                   stacked may be specified.  The maximum length is 256
                   characters.  STACK is intended for use in macros.
 
         STATus [filename]
                   displays some SET subcommand settings, or creates a macro
                   named "filename" that will contain the SET subcommands and
       |           their values.  Not all settings are included.
 
         TOP       makes a null line preceding the first data line in the file
                   (or range) the current line.  TOP does not alter the column
                   pointer position.
 
         TRAnsfer keyword...
       |           is used within a macro to stack the values of specified
       |           XEDIT variables.  EXTRACT should be used instead of TRANSFER
       |           for new applications.  Refer to the XEDIT Reference or
       |           online HELP for details.
 
         Type [target|1]
                   displays data lines beginning with the current line and
                   ending before the target line.  The format of the data is
                   determined by the SET VERIFY subcommand.  The last line
       |           displayed becomes the current line.  Typed output is limited
       |           to 160 columns.
 
         Up [n|*|1]
                   advances the current line "n" lines toward the top of the
                   file.
 
         UPPercas [target|1]
                   converts lowercase to uppercase beginning with the current
                   line and ending before the target line.  The last line
                   converted becomes the current line.
 
         Xedit [fn|= [ft|= [fm|=]]] [(options...[)]]
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     335
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
                   begins editing for another file, or resumes editing a file
                   already in storage.  If a fileid is specified, a file not
                   being edited is added to a ring of files in storage.  In any
                   case, editing switches to the new file.  If no fileid is
                   specified on the XEDIT subcommand, the next file in the ring
                   is edited.  The FILE and QUIT subcommands remove the current
                   file from the ring and editing resumes with the preceding
                   file (if any).  The SET SCREEN subcommand can be used on a
                   3270-type terminal to allow several files to be viewed
                   simultaneously on the screen, or to view several parts of a
                   single file.  The options are the same as those of the XEDIT
                   CMS command.  Care must be taken when using this subcommand,
                   because issuing the CMS XEDIT command causes XEDIT to be
                   entered recursively and create a new file ring.  The number
                   of files currently being edited is displayed in the status
                   area in display mode, or may be obtained with the QUERY
                   NBFILE subcommand.
 
       | Prefix Subcommands and Macros (For Display Mode Only)
 
       | [n]<  or  <[n]  or  [n]<<  or  <<[n]
       |           shifts the data on the indicated lines left one or more
       |           columns.
 
       | [n]>  or  >[n]  or  [n]>>  or  >>[n]
       |           shifts the data on the indicated lines right one or more
       |           columns.
 
         [n]/  or  /[n]
                   marks the line to become the next current line.  The column
                   pointer may be set by specifying "n".
 
         [n]"  or  "[n]  or  [n]""  or  ""[n]
                   marks a line or block of lines to be duplicated.  Specifying
                   "n" will cause the lines to be duplicated "n" times.  "" is
                   used to mark the first and last lines of a block of lines to
                   be duplicated.
 
         .name     assigns a name to a line.  The name can later be used as a
                   target.  This function is identical to the SET POINT
                   subcommand, except that the name is limited to four
                   characters and replaces an existing name.
 
         [n]A  or  A[n]
                   marks the line after which one or more new lines are to be
                   added.
 
         [n]C  or  C[n]  or  CC
                   marks one or more lines to be copied.  Specifying "n" will
                   cause "n" lines to be copied.  CC is used to mark the first
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     336
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
                   and last lines of a block of lines to be copied.  The
                   destination line is marked with the F (following) or P
                   (preceding) prefix subcommand.
 
         [n]D  or  D[n]  or  DD
                   marks one or more lines to be deleted.  Specifying "n" will
                   cause "n" lines to be deleted.  DD is used to mark the first
                   and last lines of a block of lines to be deleted.
 
       | E         extends a logical line by one additional screen line.  You
       |           cannot extend a line on a vertically-split screen.
                   Extension is limited by the SET VERIFY subcommand.
 
         F         marks the destination for a copy or move prefix subcommand.
                   The new lines follow the line marked.
 
         [n]I  or  I[n]
                   inserts new lines into the file.  The I prefix subcommand
                   has the same function as the A prefix subcommand.
 
         [n]M  or  M[n]  or  MM
                   marks one or more lines to be moved.  Specifying "n" will
                   cause "n" lines to be moved.  MM is used to mark the first
                   and last lines of a block of lines to be moved.  The
                   destination line is marked with the F (following) or P
                   (preceding) prefix subcommand.  The original lines are
                   deleted.
 
         P         marks the destination for a copy or move prefix subcommand.
                   The new lines precede the line marked.
 
       | [n]S  or  S[n]
       |           (show) causes the specified lines to be displayed after
       |           having been excluded by the X prefix macro, ALL macro, SET
       |           DISPLAY subcommand, or SET SELECT subcommand.  The S prefix
       |           macro can only be used in the prefix area of a shadow line.
 
         SCALE     causes the scale line to be displayed on the marked line.
 
         TABL      causes the tab line to be displayed on the marked line.
 
       | [n]X  or  X[n] or XX
       |           excludes the indicated lines from the display and the scope
       |           of editing subcommands.
 
         The XEDIT Profile
 
         When the XEDIT command (or subcommand) is executed, it will cause an
         XEDIT macro named "PROFILE" to be executed (if one exists).  You may
         supply an alternate name for the profile with the XEDIT option
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     337
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
       | PROFILE.  The filetype must always be "XEDIT" (this is true of all
       | XEDIT macros).  The profile macro may contain REXX or EXEC 2
         statements, CP commands, CMS commands and EXECs, and XEDIT subcommands
         and macros.  These statements and commands can be used to tailor the
         XEDIT environment to your requirements.  For example, Program Function
         keys can be defined, the screen layout altered, the file format set,
         and so on.
 
         The arguments passed to the profile macro are the arguments that were
         specified on the XEDIT command or subcommand.  Additional operands
         (including the fileid) and options may be specified by the profile
         with the LOAD subcommand.  The LOAD subcommand must be the first XEDIT
         subcommand issued by the profile.
 
         The following example demonstrates what sort of things might be placed
         in a "PROFILE XEDIT:"
 
       |      /* Sample XEDIT Profile */
 
       |      address command "MAKEBUF"
 
       |      /* Default filetype will be SCRIPT */
 
       |      arg fn ft fm . "(" options
       |      if ft="" then ft = "SCRIPT"
 
       |      /* Load the file (and exit in case of error) */
 
       |      address xedit
       |      "COMMAND LOAD" fn ft fm
       |      if rc¬=0 then exit rc
 
       |      /* Common Setup */
 
       |      "COMMAND SET AUTOSAVE 25"
       |      "COMMAND SET CASE MIXED IGNORE"
       |      "COMMAND SET ESCAPE OFF"
       |      "COMMAND SET IMAGE ON"
       |      "COMMAND SET RECFM V"
       |      "COMMAND SET SPAN ON BLANK 2"
       |      "COMMAND SET STAY ON"
       |      "COMMAND SET VARBLANK ON"
       |      "COMMAND SET VERIFY OFF 1 *"
       |      "COMMAND SET WRAP ON"
 
       |      /* Determine what sort of terminal we are using.
       |         If it's not a 3270, exit now. */
 
       |      "COMMAND EXTRACT/TERMINAL/"
       |      if terminal.1¬="DISPLAY" then exit
 
       |      /* Additional setup for 3270-type terminals. */
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     338
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
       |      "COMMAND SET CURLINE ON 2"
       |      "COMMAND SET MSGLINE ON 2 15 OVERLAY"
       |      "COMMAND SET PF1 SPELL"
       |      "COMMAND SET PF4 SPLTJOIN"
       |      "COMMAND SET PF10 ?"
       |      "COMMAND SET PF11 SOS TABB"
       |      "COMMAND SET PF12 TABKEY"
       |      "COMMAND SET NULLS ON"
       |      "COMMAND SET NUMBER ON"
       |      "COMMAND SET PREFIX ON RIGHT"
       |      "COMMAND SET SCALE OFF"
 
         This file is available as "SAMPLE XEDIT Y2" for use as a base for your
         own profile.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The XEDIT SET AUTOSAVE subcommand provides an automatic
              checkpoint to ease recovery in case of system failure during an
              edit session.  The facility is enabled with the XEDIT "SET
              AUTOSAVE n" command.  The value "n" specifies how often a
              checkpoint should be taken.  When the specified number of lines
              have been added, changed, or deleted, a SAVE subcommand will be
       |      issued to write the AUTOSAVE file.  AUTOSAVE files are named
       |      "rrrnnnnn AUTOSAVE," where "rrr" is the number of times XEDIT was
       |      called recursively and "nnnnn" is the current AUTOSAVE number.
       |      These numbers begin with 100001 and are incremented when multiple
              files are edited, or if an AUTOSAVE file already exists on your
              disk.  The AUTOSAVE files are automatically erased when you issue
              a FILE or SAVE subcommand, but not if you QUIT, so you may want
              to eliminate these files with the CMS command ERASE.
 
              If the system should fail during a session, the most recent copy
       |      of the file being edited will be the file named "rrrnnnnn
       |      AUTOSAVE".  You may edit this file to determine if it contains
              information that you want; if it does, you can replace the older
              version of the file with the AUTOSAVE file by erasing the
              original file and renaming the AUTOSAVE file.  This can also be
              used to recover from erroneous global changes made to a file.
              Immediately QUIT, erase the original file, and rename the
              AUTOSAVE file.
 
              Most users will find that setting AUTOSAVE to 20 or 30 will
              provide sufficient protection against loss of data.  This can be
              done automatically at the beginning of each session in an XEDIT
              profile.
 
          2.  XEDIT can directly manipulate files that are in packed format.
              Packed files are kept on disk in a special compressed format that
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     339
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
              generally requires much less disk space than files in normal
              format.  Files may be converted to this format with the CMS PACK
              command, or with XEDIT by specifying SET PACK ON or SET RECFM VP
              or FP.  Files can be restored to normal format with the CMS
              UNPACK command, or with XEDIT by specifying SET PACK OFF or SET
              RECFM V or F.  Packed files cannot be processed by most CMS
              commands (like SCRIPT, PRINT, SUBMIT, etc.).  Only XEDIT should
              be used to modify a packed file.  Modifying a packed file
              improperly will make it impossible to unpack the file or recover
              the data.  Refer to the description of the CMS PACK command for
              more information.
 
          3.  Remember that a 3270-type terminal is a buffered device; data is
              only read after ENTER or a PF key is pressed.  This allows a
              great deal of data to be entered or changed on a screen without
              any interaction with the computing system, which is especially
              desirable during periods of heavy system load.  However, since
              data is not read until one of these keys is pressed, pressing the
              CLEAR or ERASE INPUT keys will destroy any new data on the
              screen.
 
          4.  Since XEDIT controls a 3270-type terminal's screen and PF keys
              while it is operating, normal system messages cannot be
              displayed.  When the system has a message waiting to display on
              your terminal, it will wait until an interrupt-producing key
              (such as ENTER) is pressed to display the message.  After you
              have read the message, press the CLEAR key once to return to
              XEDIT.  Pressing any other key or pressing CLEAR more than once
              may cause data on the screen to be lost.  Warning messages from
              the system operator will cause the screen to be cleared
              immediately.
 
       |  5.  Refer to the Appendix "XEDIT Default Filetype Attributes" for the
       |      default values of RECFM, WIDTH, LRECL, TRUNC, SPILL, CASE,
       |      SERIAL, and TABS.
 
          6.  XEDIT may be used to examine an OS disk data set.  The data set
              cannot be modified, but it can be saved as a CMS disk file, with
              or without modifications.  To edit an OS data set you must first
              access the OS disk volumes and then define a name to be used by
              XEDIT to refer to the file.  The following commands could be
              used:
 
              OSDISKS
              FILEDEF SYSIN DISK filename filetype H DSN data set name (options
              XEDIT filename filetype H
 
              The OSXEDIT command simplifies this process.
 
          7.  XEDIT has a feature that allows you to create your own XEDIT
              subcommands by combining existing commands and subcommands into
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     340
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XEDIT
 
              XEDIT macros.  A macro is a file with a filetype of "XEDIT" and
       |      is very similar to an EXEC (REXX and EXEC 2 are used by XEDIT to
       |      process macros).  Refer to the VM/SP System Product Editor User's
              Guide, the VM/SP System Product Editor Command and Macro
       |      Reference, the VM/SP System Product Interpreter Reference, and
       |      the VM/SP EXEC 2 Reference for more information.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         XEDIT subcommands use the following return codes (to be checked in
         XEDIT macros):
 
           0  Normal.
           1  Error.  Meaning depends on subcommand.
           2  Target not found.
           3  Operand is valid only in display mode, or other error.
           4  Error.  Meaning depends on subcommand.
           5  Missing or invalid operand.
       |   6  Rejected in profile due to LOAD error, or QUIT subcommand
       |      issued in macro called from last file being edited.
           7  Error building update file.
           8  Pending or incomplete prefix subcommand.
          12  Disk is read-only.
          13  Disk is full.
          20  Invalid character in fileid.
          24  Invalid filemode, or invalid parameter.
          28  File not found.
          32  Error during update.
          36  Disk not accessed.
          88  File too large to fit in storage.
         100  Error writing file to disk.
         104  No storage available.
 
         Details on return codes and messages may be found in the VM/SP System
         Product Editor Command and Macro Reference and VM/SP System Messages
         and Codes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     341
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          XMENU
 
       | Use XMENU to create and modify panel definitions for use with the
       | MENUEXEC command and programs using XMENU functions.  XMENU can only
         be used with 3270-type display terminals.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +        +                                             |
         | XMENU     | |menuname|   [( options... [)]]                        |
         |           | |?       |                                             |
         |           | +        +                                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [LIB library]  [USING menu]  [ULIB library]            |
         |           | [EXT]          [ALT]         [SIZE n]                  |
         |           | [CHAR c1 c2]   [SKIP]        [MDT]                     |
         |           | [ALARM]        [NOALARM]     [UPCASE]                  |
         |           | [MENTEXT]      [TEXT]        [DSECT]                   |
         |           | [NAME]         [AUTONAME]    [TRUNC]                   |
         |           | [FNUM n]       [FNAME name]  [FGROUP n1 n2]            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         menuname  is the filename of the panel to be created or modified.  The
                   filetype will always be "MENU".  Refer to the Usage Notes
                   for more information about the files used by XMENU.  If no
                   name is specified the XMENU option menu is displayed.
 
         ?         displays online HELP information for XMENU.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  XMENU creates or modifies a file named "menuname MENU."
              Specifying the TEXT or MENTEXT option causes a TEXT file to be
              generated.  Specifying DSECT or MENTEXT causes a COPY file
              containing a DSECT description of the menu to be generated.
 
          2.  Use the MENUEXEC command to display a panel defined with XMENU
              from an EXEC.
 
          3.  Use the XMENULIB command to create and maintain XMENULIB
              libraries.
 
       |  4.  Refer to XMENU and DMSCVT User's Guide and XMENU Subroutine
       |      Library User Reference and online HELP for more information.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     342
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       XMENULIB
 
         Use the XMENULIB command to create and maintain XMENU menu libraries.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                                          +           |
         |           | | +       +                                |           |
         | XMENULIB  | | |GEN    |                                |           |
         |           | | |ADD    | library menuname [menuname...] |           |
         |           | | |REP    |                                |           |
         |           | | |EXTRACT|                                |           |
         |           | | +       +                                |           |
         |           | |                                          |           |
         |           | | DEL library membername [membername...]   |           |
         |           | |                                          |           |
         |           | | MAP  library [( option [)]]              |           |
         |           | +                                          +           |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +     +                                                |
         |           | |DISK |                                                |
         |           | |PRINT|                                                |
         |           | |TERM |                                                |
         |           | +     +                                                |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Use the XMENU command to create and modify menu definitions.
              XMENU can read a menu from a menu library, but only the XMENULIB
              command can update the contents of the library.
 
       |  2.  Refer to XMENU and DMSCVT User's Guide and XMENU Subroutine
       |      Library User Reference for more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     343
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                           YCALC (EXEC)
 
         YCALC is a spreadsheet calculator much like the personal computer
         "CALC" programs.  YCALC uses a matrix of cells to hold values,
         formulas, and labels to organize financial or other data that use
         tables of information.  Worksheets may be saved and reloaded later
         when you wish to work on the same worksheet again.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | YCALC     | [filename [filemode]]                                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the name of a YCALC worksheet  file.   If no filename is
                   specified an empty worksheet will be used.   The filetype of
                   worksheet files is "YCALC."
 
         filemode  is the filemode of the worksheet file.  The default is "*"
                   which will search all accessed disks.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  YCALC will not operate in a virtual machine smaller than 800K.
              You can use the STORAGE command to define a larger virtual
              machine size.
 
          2.  You can enter "HELP YCALC TOPICS" for more information.  Within
              YCALC (when a worksheet is displayed on the screen), you may use
              the /H command to get additional information.  A YCALC manual is
              available from the MANUAL command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     344
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         Section 3:  Command Return Codes
 
 
 
         Commands issued under CMS set a return code to indicate success or
         failure.  The return code is displayed in the CMS ready message unless
         it is zero, and may be tested in an EXEC.  This section describes some
         codes used by CMS and CMS commands.  The return codes set by XEDIT
         subcommands are documented elsewhere in this manual under the XEDIT
         command.
 
         A non-zero return code is usually set by a command to indicate an
         error or unusual condition.  Some commands (like MAKEBUF and RANDOM)
         return a result as a return code.  If the command was entered from the
       | terminal, the return code is displayed in the CMS ready message.  In
       | REXX this sets the RC variable, in EXEC 2 it sets &RC and &RETCODE,
       | and in EXEC it sets &RETCODE.  If you explicitly set these variables
       | in EXEC 2 or EXEC they will no longer have this special function.  You
         may set the return code to any desired value with the RETCODE command.
 
         CP commands issued through CMS set a return code that is the message
         number of the CP message issued.  A special code of -1 indicates that
         no CP command with the specified name exists.
 
         Some CMS commands set a return code that indicates the general class
         of the error.  Generally an error message is issued when a non-zero
         return code is set.  The following return code values are used by many
         CMS commands:
 
          -5 Wrong environment.                   (valid characters are
          -4 LOADMOD (module load) failed.        uppercase and lowercase
          -3 No CMS command with this name        letters, numbers, $, @, and
             was found.                           #).
          -2 The CMS command could not be      24 Invalid or missing parameter
             issued from CMS subset mode.         or option.
          -1 No CP command with this name      28 Error accessing or
             was found.                           manipulating a file.  Usually
           1 Requested item or record not         means file not found.
             found.                            32 Error in input file.
           4 Not enough information was        36 Device error.  Usually means
             supplied, or a non-fatal             disk not accessed.
             error (warning) condition         40 Error during processing.
             occurred.                         41 Insufficient storage to
           8 A device warning condition           execute the command.
             occurred, or the command          88 Command could not execute
             completed but the output may         because of a restriction.
             not be correct.                  100 Device error.
          12 Errors in the input file.        101 Userid not available.
          16 Serious errors in the input      104 System error.
             file.                            256 Serious system error.
          20 Invalid character in a fileid
 
 
 
                                       Section 3:  Command Return Codes     345
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         Section 4:  Communicating With Asynchronous ASCII Terminals
 
 
 
         Asynchronous ASCII terminals may communicate with the VM/SP system at
         the UKCC through individual switched telephone lines, through short
         direct cables (over limited distances), or as part of a cluster
         sharing a single multiplexed communication line.
 
         There are hundreds of kinds of ASCII terminals, but they can be
         divided into two general types:  typewriter (printing) terminals and
         display terminals.  VM/SP treats all ASCII terminals as typewriter
         terminals unless they are connected through S3270, the 3270 simulator.
         A number of kinds of ASCII terminals are supported by S3270.
 
         Personal computers and other systems with appropriate software can be
       | used as terminals with VM/SP, and some can be used with S3270.  The
       | UKCC also provides KERMIT, HOSTCM, and FSEND to exchange files with a
         personal computer or other system connected as an ASCII terminal.
 
 
 
         4.A Asynchronous Protocols
 
         All asynchronous ASCII terminals must use the following protocol to
         communicate with VM/SP:
 
              Line Speed          Data  Stop
                (Baud)    Parity  Bits  Bits
       |          110      Even     7     2
       |          300      Even     7     1
                 1200      Even     7     1
 
         VM/SP always transmits with even parity, but accepts both even or mark
         parity.  Control characters handled by the terminal control hardware
         (such as Carriage Return) will not be recognized unless they have even
         parity.
 
         VM/SP always uses half-duplex, so your terminal should be set to half-
         duplex mode.  Some terminals will not transmit control characters to
         the host system when in half-duplex, and it may be necessary to
         operate such terminals in duplex mode with a special connector or a
         modem that will provide local character echo.
 
         Since VM/SP uses EBCDIC internally, all data to and from ASCII
         terminals must be translated.  Most users need not be aware of this
         process, but it can cause problems a few special cases.  EBCDIC is an
         eight-bit code, so it has 256 unique characters.  ASCII is usually a
         seven-bit code, so it only has 128 unique characters.  Furthermore,
 
 
 
            Section 4:  Communicating With Asynchronous ASCII Terminals     346
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         each code has some characters that are not found in the other.  The
         most common characters (letters, digits, simple punctuation) appear in
         both codes, so they don't present a translation problem.  However, a
         number of control and special graphic characters cannot be correctly
         translated from one code to the other.  An Appendix in this manual
         describes in detail the translations performed by VM/SP.
 
         All communication with asynchronous terminals is controlled by
         terminal control units (TCU) at the UKCC.  A CR (Carriage Return)
         entered from an ASCII terminal is treated as an end-of-input signal by
         the TCU.  The ACK, CAN, ENQ, and EOT characters also act as end-of-
         input signals, but should not normally used as such.  Ending a line
         with any character other than CR will usually cause the entire line to
         be ignored.  No data will be read following an end-of-input character
         until after the next prompt is issued by VM/SP.
 
       | DEL characters from an ASCII terminal are removed by the TCU and are
       | not passed to VM/SP as data.  NUL characters from an ASCII terminal
         may be deleted or translated to another character under the control of
         the TERMINAL NULLS command.  CMS uses NUL to indicate the end of the
         data on an input line; the NUL and any following characters are
         ignored.
 
         The BREAK key found on most ASCII terminals does not transmit a
         character, but rather causes a special condition on the communication
         line which is recognized by the TCU and VM/SP as an attention request.
         To cause a break, a SPACE condition (not a SPACE character!) must be
         placed on the line for at least 200 milliseconds.
 
 
 
         4.B ASCII Typewriter Mode
 
         When operating in typewriter mode (not using S3270), VM/SP sends a
         prompt sequence to an asynchronous ASCII terminal before issuing a
         read command.  The form of this prompt sequence is:
 
              General Form:     CR  LF  xoff prompt xon
              Initial Setting:  CR  LF         .    DC1
 
              where:
 
              CR       Carriage Return
              LF       Line Feed
              DC1      Device Control 1 (also called XON)
              DC3      Device Control 3 (also called XOFF)
              prompt   The PROMPT character (initially ".")
              xon      XON character (DC1)
              xoff     XOFF character (DC3)
 
 
 
 
            Section 4:  Communicating With Asynchronous ASCII Terminals     347
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         The XOFF, XON, and PROMPT parameters of the TERMINAL command can be
         used to modify this sequence.
 
         When the TCU senses an end-of-input character (usually CR) the read
         operation is completed and VM/SP will quickly respond with the
         following sequence:
 
              CR LF xoff
 
         where "xoff" is an optional XOFF (DC3) character.  This sequence may
         be suppressed by specifying TERMINAL BURST OFF.
 
         Each output line sent to an ASCII terminal is followed by the
         sequence:
 
              CR LF xoff pad
 
         where "pad" indicates one or more rubout (DEL) or idle characters.
         The initial setting is two rubouts.  This is controlled with the
         TERMINAL RUBS and TERMINAL IDLES commands.  The CR and LF can be
         suppressed for some lines with the TERMINAL AUTOCR command.
 
         VM/SP provides a simple block-oriented protocol (sometimes called
         ETX/ACK protocol) intended for use with buffered printing terminals
         operating at 1200 baud.  Since few letter-quality printing mechanisms
         can operate at 120 characters/second some terminals provide buffers
         that can be filled at 1200 baud and keep the printing mechanism
         operating at its top speed.  To use this feature specify:
 
              TERMINAL PROTOCOL 1 n
 
         where "n" is the size of the terminal's buffer (up to 32768 bytes).
         VM/SP sends a block of data (possibly as large as the buffer) ending
         with an ETX character.  When the terminal is ready for more data it
         must send a character (usually ACK) to VM/SP.  The Anderson Jacobson
         model 833 terminal supports this protocol and the AJ833 command is
         available for starting and stopping this mode of operation.
 
 
 
         4.C ASCII Display Mode Using S3270
 
         S3270 is a facility that provides most of the functions of a 3270-type
         display terminal on an ASCII display terminal.  Software simulation in
         combination with the functions provided by the terminal hardware allow
         many ASCII display terminals to be used in a full-screen mode with
         XEDIT, BROWSE, RBROWSE, FLIST and other CMS commands.  There is a
         connection surcharge for this service to pay for the system overhead
         caused by the software simulation.
 
 
 
 
            Section 4:  Communicating With Asynchronous ASCII Terminals     348
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         No ASCII terminal can support all 3270 functions, and support for
         various brands and models must differ to allow for different keyboard
         arrangements and control mechanisms.
 
         To use S3270, first connect to VM/SP in the usual manner.  Once you
         have established a connection you will receive the message:
 
              VM/370 ONLINE
 
         Then, instead of logging on, enter the command:
 
              dial s3270
 
         The normal response from the system is:
 
              CONNECTED TO S3270 nnn
              ENTER YOUR TERMINAL TYPE OR "?":
 
         You may type a question mark and press the RETURN key for a list of
         supported terminal types and their corresponding numbers.  Enter the
         number that corresponds to the type of terminal you are using and
         press the RETURN key.  Your screen will then be cleared and the VM/370
         logo displayed.  You may then log on as if you were using a 3270-type
         terminal.
 
         When you are ready to end your terminal session be sure to LOGOFF or
         DISCONNECT before turning off or leaving your terminal.  Failure to
         follow this procedure can cause your userid to become "stuck" at that
         terminal, preventing you from logging on again.
 
         A number of kinds of ASCII terminals are supported by S3270, including
         models made by DEC, IBM, Lear Siegler, and TeleVideo.  Support is also
         available for the IBM Personal Computer and Commodore SuperPET.  Other
         brands and models that are compatible with one of these terminals may
         also work.  If your terminal is not listed on the S3270 menu contact a
         UKCC consultant for more information.
 
         While you are using S3270 several keys on your keyboard have special
         meanings.  All ASCII terminals use the RETURN key in place of the 3270
         ENTER key.  The 3270 New Line key (crooked arrow) is simulated by
         pressing ESC followed by RETURN.  The ERASE INPUT function is
         simulated by pressing the BREAK key twice.  Almost all ASCII terminals
         have cursor movement keys that correspond to the 3270 cursor keys.
         The PF and PA keys and the forward and backward field tab keys of the
         3270 are simulated in various ways on different ASCII terminals
         (online HELP is available for each terminal type).  Not all ASCII
         terminals provide all of these functions.
 
         Most ASCII terminals do not support protected and highlighted fields
         in a manner compatible with the 3270, so you may type in areas of the
         screen that would ordinarily be protected.  S3270 will detect this,
         discard the invalid data, and rewrite the entire screen.
 
 
 
            Section 4:  Communicating With Asynchronous ASCII Terminals     349
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         S3270 attempts to minimize transmission time by rewriting only the
         changed portions of the screen when possible.  If your screen becomes
         garbled because of transmission errors or other problems the entire
         current buffer can be displayed by pressing the CLEAR key on your
         keyboard, typing RESHOW (in uppercase), and pressing RETURN.  S3270
         also provides two special commands: #### and ##BACK.  Entering "####"
         causes your terminal to be immediately disconnected.  Entering
         "##BACK" redisplays the previous screen buffer.  (Note that you must
         then use CLEAR-RESHOW to return to the current buffer.)
 
         Remember that all communication with VM/SP is in half-duplex mode.
         This means that you must not type when the system is updating your
         screen, and the system cannot update your screen while you are typing.
         Violation of this rule will cause some loss of data, either your
         input, the output from the system, or both.  Usually CLEAR/RESHOW will
         recover at least some of the lost data.  Using S3270 is not exactly
         like using a real 3270, and each kind of ASCII terminal has its own
         set of idiosyncrasies, but with experience you can become acclimated
         to the imperfections and acquire a feel for the use of the facility.
 
       | Do not use the XEDIT FULLREAD ON feature with S3270.  S3270 does not
       | simulate the function used by this feature, and when FULLREAD is ON
       | XEDIT and VM/SP ignore your keyboard.  Use the #### command to
       | disconnect if you get into this state.
 
 
 
         4.D Exchanging Files With Personal Computers
 
         Several methods can be used to exchange data with a personal computer
         (or any other computer system) that can act as an asynchronous ASCII
         terminal.  The simplest method is to use XEDIT to copy data from the
         other system into a CMS disk file.  A program on the other system must
         issue the XEDIT command, the INPUT subcommand, transmit each line of
         data, transmit an empty line (just a CR) to indicate the end of the
         data, and issue the FILE subcommand.  The FSEND command is available
         to transmit a CMS disk file to a personal computer, one line at time.
         The personal computer software must wait for prompts from VM/SP and
         end each of its data lines with a Carriage Return (CR).  VM/SP
         performs no error checking during this process, so characters garbled
         by line noise or other errors will not be detected.
 
       | A more elaborate mechanism is provided by KERMIT (KL10 Error-free
       | Reciprocal Micro Interface Transfer).  This requires a program running
       | under CMS (the KERMIT command) and a version of KERMIT running on the
       | other system.  KERMIT provides two-way file transmission and provides
       | error checking and automatic retransmission in case of error.  KERMIT
       | is available without charge for the IBM Personal Computer and a number
       | of other systems.  More information is available from UKCC consultants
       | and online from the MANUAL command.
 
 
 
            Section 4:  Communicating With Asynchronous ASCII Terminals     350
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         Another method is provided by the Waterloo Computing Systems
         microSoftware packages and the HOSTCM command.  These allow programs
         running on the other system to read and write CMS disk files directly
         and provide error checking and automatic retransmission in case of
         error.  You must purchase the microSoftware from Waterloo Computing
         Systems for your system.  The IBM Personal Computer, the Commodore
         SuperPET, and the Northern Digital microWAT are currently supported.
         You could also write your own software to use with HOSTCM.  Detailed
         specifications for HOSTCM are available online from the MANUAL
         command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
            Section 4:  Communicating With Asynchronous ASCII Terminals     351
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         APPENDIX A:   XEDIT Default Filetype Attributes
 
 
 
         Use the XEDIT profile to alter these settings.  Note: The "Format"
         column lists the RECFM and WIDTH; the LRECL defaults to the WIDTH.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |Filetype|Format|TRUNC|SPILL|CASE|SERIAL|SET TABS Columns            |
         |--------|------|-----|-----|----|------|----------------------------|
       | |$EXEC   | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |2 5 10 15 20 25 30 35       |
       | |$XEDIT  | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |2 5 10 15 20 25 30 35       |
         |AMSERV  | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |2 5 10 15 20 25 30 35       |
         |        |      |     |     |    |      |40 45 50 55 60              |
         |ASM3705 | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |1 10 16 30 35 40 45 50      |
         |        |      |     |     |    |      |55 60 65 70                 |
         |ASSEMBLE| F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |1 10 16 30 35 40 45 50      |
         |        |      |     |     |    |      |55 60 64 72                 |
         |BASDATA | F 80 |  80 | OFF | U R|  OFF |see BASIC                   |
         |BASIC   | F 80 |  80 | OFF | U R|  OFF |7 10 15 20 25 30 80         |
       | |BATCH   | V 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  OFF |see DIRECT                  |
         |CNTRL   | F 80 |  80 | OFF | U R|  OFF |1 5 8 17 27 31              |
         |COBOL   | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |1 8 12 20 28 36 44 68       |
         |        |      |     |     |    |      |72 80                       |
         |COPY    | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |see ASSEMBLE                |
         |DIRECT  | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35       |
         |        |      |     |     |    |      |40 45 50 55 60 65 70        |
         |ESERV   | F 80 |  71 | OFF | U R|  ON  |see AMSERV                  |
         |EXEC    | V 80 |  80 | OFF | U R|  OFF |1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35       |
         |        |      |     |     |    |      |40 45 50 55 60 65 70        |
         |FORTRAN | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |1 7 10 15 20 25 30 80       |
         |FREEFORT| V 81 |  81 | OFF | U R|  OFF |9 15 18 23 28 33 38 81      |
         |JCL     | V 80 |  80 | OFF | U R|  OFF |1 3 12 16 18 72 80          |
         |JOB     | V 80 |  80 | OFF | U R|  OFF |see JCL                     |
         |LISTING | V 121| 121 | OFF | M R|  OFF |1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35       |
         |        |      |     |     |    |      |40 45 50 55 60 65 70        |
         |        |      |     |     |    |      |75 80 85 90 95 100 105      |
         |        |      |     |     |    |      |110 115 120                 |
         |MACLIB  | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |see ASSEMBLE                |
         |MACRO   | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |see ASSEMBLE                |
       | |MEMO    | V 80 |  80 | WORD| M R|  OFF |see LISTING                 |
       | |MODULE  | V 80 |  80 | WORD| M R|  OFF |see LISTING                 |
       | |NAMES   | V 255| 255 | OFF | M R|  OFF |see LISTING                 |
       | |NETLOG  | V 255| 255 | OFF | M R|  OFF |see LISTING                 |
       | |NOTE    | V 132| 132 | WORD| M R|  OFF |see LISTING                 |
       | |NOTEBOOK| V 132| 132 | WORD| M R|  OFF |see LISTING                 |
       | |PASCAL  | V 72 |  72 | OFF | U R|  OFF |see DIRECT                  |
         |PLI     | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |2 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25     |
         |        |      |     |     |    |      |31 37 43 49 55 79 80        |
         |PLIOPT  | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |see PLI                     |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
                         Appendix A:  XEDIT Default Filetype Attributes     352
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |Filetype|Format|TRUNC|SPILL|CASE|SERIAL|SET TABS Columns            |
         |--------|------|-----|-----|----|------|----------------------------|
       | |SAS     | F 80 |  80 | OFF | M R|  OFF |see DIRECT                  |
         |SCRIPT  | V 80 |  80 | WORD| M R|  OFF |see LISTING                 |
         |SYNONYM | F 80 |  80 | OFF | U R|  OFF |see CNTRL                   |
       | |TEXT    | F 80 |  80 | OFF | U R|  OFF |see CNTRL                   |
         |UPDATE  | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |see ASSEMBLE                |
         |UPDT    | F 80 |  72 | OFF | U R|  ON  |see ASSEMBLE                |
         |VSBASIC | F 80 |  80 | OFF | U R|  OFF |see BASIC                   |
         |VSBDATA | V 132| 132 | OFF | U R|  OFF |see LISTING                 |
       | |WATFIV  | F 80 |  80 | OFF | U R|  OFF |see FORTRAN                 |
         |WBASIC  | V 80 |  80 | OFF | U R|  OFF |see BASIC                   |
         |XEDIT   | V 80 |  80 | OFF | U R|  OFF |see EXEC                    |
         |other   | V 80 |  80 | OFF | U R|  OFF |see LISTING                 |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                         Appendix A:  XEDIT Default Filetype Attributes     353
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         APPENDIX B:   Character Translation for ASCII Communication
 
 
 
         The tables on the following pages describe the translations performed
         on data sent to or received from an ASCII terminal.  Data (such as
         data in a CMS disk file) is generally represented as EBCDIC characters
         within VM/SP and must be translated to ASCII when sent to an ASCII
         terminal.  Conversely, input data from an ASCII terminal must be
         translated to EBCDIC.  These translations are performed automatically
         by the VM/SP Control Program, and users do not generally need to be
         aware of the process.  However, users with special requirements may
         need this information.
 
         The input translations described are performed before any CMS SET
         INPUT translations; the output translations described are performed
         after any CMS SET OUTPUT or CMS CASE translations.  The translations
         for the APL character set support are not shown here.  ASCII input is
         accepted with even or mark parity; all output will be even parity.
 
         Each character is given both by its graphic representation and
         hexadecimal value.  The following special names are used in the tables
         for control characters and some special characters:
 
         acc Accent               ENQ Enquiry              RES Restore
         ACK Acknowledge          EOT End Transmission     RLF Reverse LF
         bar Broken Vertical Bar  ESC Escape               RS  Record Separator
         BEL Bell (Alarm)         ETB End Trans. Block     SI  Shift In
         BS  Back Space           ETX End Text             SM  Set Mode
         bsl Back-Slash           FF  Form Feed            SMM Start Manual Msg
         BYP Bypass               FS  File Separator       SO  Shift Out
         CAN Cancel               GE  Graphic Escape       SOH Start of Header
         car Caret or Up-Arrow    GS  Group Separator      SOS Start Signature
         CC  Cursor Control       HT  Horizontal Tab       SP  Space or Blank
         CR  Carriage Return      IFS Int. Field Sep.      STX Start of Text
         CU1 Customer Use 1       IGS Int. Group Sep.      SUB Substitute
         CU2 Customer Use 2       IL  Idle                 SYN Synchronous Idle
         CU3 Customer Use 3       IRS Int. Record Sep.     til Tilde
         DC1 Device Control 1     IUS Int. Unit Sep.       TM  Tape Mark
         DC2 Device Control 2     LC  Lower Case           UC  Uppercase
         DC3 Device Control 3     LF  Line Feed            US  Unit Separator
         DC4 Device Control 4     NAK Negative Ack.        VT  Vertical Tab
         DEL Delete               NL  New Line             XOF Punch Off (DC3)
         DLE Data Link Escape     NUL Null                 XON Punch On (DC1)
         DS  Digit Select         PF  Punch Off
         EM  End of Medium        PN  Punch On
 
         Not all ASCII terminals will perform the functions indicated by all
         control characters.  Refer to the section on Asynchronous ASCII
         Terminals for a description of the control characters used by VM/SP.
 
 
 
             Appendix B:  Character Translation for ASCII Communication     354
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
 
         Input Translation
 
         +-------------+  +-------------+  +-------------+  +-------------+
         |ASCII |      |  |ASCII |      |  |ASCII |      |  |ASCII |      |
         | Input|EBCDIC|  | Input|EBCDIC|  | Input|EBCDIC|  | Input|EBCDIC|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |NUL©00|NUL 00|  |SP  20|SP  40|  | @  40| @  7C|  |acc 60|acc 79|
         |SOH 01|SOH 01|  | !  21| !  5A|  | A  41| A  C1|  | a  61| a  81|
         |STX 02|STX 02|  | "  22| "  7F|  | B  42| B  C2|  | b  62| b  82|
         |ETX 03|ETX 03|  | #  23| #  7B|  | C  43| C  C3|  | c  63| c  83|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |EOT£04|EOT 37|  | $  24| $  5B|  | D  44| D  C4|  | d  64| d  84|
         |ENQ£05|ENQ 2D|  | %  25| %  6C|  | E  45| E  C5|  | e  65| e  85|
         |ACK£06|ACK 2E|  | &  26| &  50|  | F  46| F  C6|  | f  66| f  86|
         |BEL 07|BEL 2F|  | '  27| '  7D|  | G  47| G  C7|  | g  67| g  87|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |BS  08|BS  16|  | (  28| (  4D|  | H  48| H  C8|  | h  68| h  88|
         |HT  09|HT  05|  | )  29| )  5D|  | I  49| I  C9|  | i  69| i  89|
         |LF  0A|LF  25|  | *  2A| *  5C|  | J  4A| J  D1|  | j  6A| j  91|
         |VT  0B|VT  0B|  | +  2B| +  4E|  | K  4B| K  D2|  | k  6B| k  92|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |FF  0C|FF  0C|  | ,  2C| ,  6B|  | L  4C| L  D3|  | l  6C| l  93|
         |CR£ 0D|CR  0D|  | -  2D| -  60|  | M  4D| M  D4|  | m  6D| m  94|
         |SO  0E|SO  0E|  | .  2E| .  4B|  | N  4E| N  D5|  | n  6E| n  95|
         |SI  0F|SI  0F|  | /  2F| /  61|  | O  4F| O  D6|  | o  6F| o  96|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |DLE 10|DLE 10|  | 0  30| 0  F0|  | P  50| P  D7|  | p  70| p  97|
         |DC1 11|DC1 11|  | 1  31| 1  F1|  | Q  51| Q  D8|  | q  71| q  98|
         |DC2 12|DC2 12|  | 2  32| 2  F2|  | R  52| R  D9|  | r  72| r  99|
         |DC3 13|TM  13|  | 3  33| 3  F3|  | S  53| S  E2|  | s  73| s  A2|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |DC4 14|DC4 3C|  | 4  34| 4  F4|  | T  54| T  E3|  | t  74| t  A3|
         |NAK 15|NAK 3D|  | 5  35| 5  F5|  | U  55| U  E4|  | u  75| u  A4|
         |SYN 16|SYN 32|  | 6  36| 6  F6|  | V  56| V  E5|  | v  76| v  A5|
         |ETB 17|ETB 26|  | 7  37| 7  F7|  | W  57| W  E6|  | w  77| w  A6|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |CAN£18|CAN 18|  | 8  38| 8  F8|  | X  58| X  E7|  | x  78| x  A7|
         |EM  19|EM  19|  | 9  39| 9  F9|  | Y  59| Y  E8|  | y  79| y  A8|
         |SUB 1A|SUB 3F|  | :  3A| :  7A|  | Z  5A| Z  E9|  | z  7A| z  A9|
         |ESC 1B|ESC 27|  | ;  3B| ;  5E|  | [  5B| [  AD|  | »¶ 7B| »  C0|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |FS  1C|IFS 1C|  | <  3C| <  4C|  |bsl 5C|bsl E0|  |bar½7C| |  4F|
         |GS  1D|IGS 1D|  | =  3D| =  7E|  | ]  5D| ]  BD|  | º¶ 7D| º  D0|
         |RS  1E|IRS 1E|  | >  3E| >  6E|  |car¼5E| ¬  5F|  |til 7E|til A1|
         |US  1F|IUS 1F|  | ?  3F| ?  6F|  | _  5F| _  6D|  |DEL 7F|Note 2|
         +-------------+  +-------------+  +-------------+  +-------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
             Appendix B:  Character Translation for ASCII Communication     355
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
 
         Output Translation
 
         +-------------+  +-------------+  +-------------+  +-------------+
         |      |ASCII |  |      |ASCII |  |      |ASCII |  |      |ASCII |
         |EBCDIC|Output|  |EBCDIC|Output|  |EBCDIC|Output|  |EBCDIC|Output|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
       | |NUL 00|NUL 00|  |DS  20|DEL 7F|  |SP  40|SP  20|  | -  60| -  2D|
         |SOH 01|SOH 01|  |SOS 21|DEL 7F|  |    41|DEL 7F|  | /  61| /  2F|
         |STX 02|STX 02|  |FS  22|FS  1C|  |    42|DEL 7F|  |    62|DEL 7F|
         |ETX 03|ETX 03|  |    23|DEL 7F|  |    43|DEL 7F|  |    63|DEL 7F|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |PF  04|DEL 7F|  |BYP 24|DEL 7F|  |    44|DEL 7F|  |    64|DEL 7F|
         |HT  05|HT  09|  |LF  25|LF  0A|  |    45|DEL 7F|  |    65|DEL 7F|
         |LC  06|DEL 7F|  |ETB 26|ETB 17|  |    46|DEL 7F|  |    66|DEL 7F|
         |DEL 07|DEL 7F|  |ESC 27|ESC 1B|  |    47|DEL 7F|  |    67|DEL 7F|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |GE  08|DEL 7F|  |    28|DEL 7F|  |    48|DEL 7F|  |    68|DEL 7F|
         |RLF 09|DEL 7F|  |    29|DEL 7F|  |    49|DEL 7F|  |    69|DEL 7F|
         |SMM 0A|DEL 7F|  |SM  2A|DEL 7F|  | ¢  4A| [  5B|  |bar½6A|bar 7C|
         |VT  0B|VT  0B|  |CU2 2B|DEL 7F|  | .  4B| .  2E|  | ,  6B| ,  2C|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |FF  0C|FF  0C|  |    2C|DEL 7F|  | <  4C| <  3C|  | %  6C| %  25|
         |CR  0D|CR  0D|  |ENQ 2D|ENQ 05|  | (  4D| (  28|  | _  6D| _  5F|
         |SO  0E|SO  0E|  |ACK 2E|ACK 06|  | +  4E| +  2B|  | >  6E| >  3E|
         |SI  0F|SI  0F|  |BEL 2F|BEL 07|  | |½ 4F|bar 7C|  | ?  6F| ?  3F|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |DLE 10|DLE 10|  |    30|DEL 7F|  | &  50| &  26|  |    70|DEL 7F|
         |DC1 11|DC1 11|  |    31|DEL 7F|  |    51|DEL 7F|  |    71|DEL 7F|
         |DC2 12|DC2 12|  |SYN 32|SYN 16|  |    52|DEL 7F|  |    72|DEL 7F|
         |TM  13|DC3 13|  |    33|DEL 7F|  |    53|DEL 7F|  |    73|DEL 7F|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |RES 14|DEL 7F|  |PN  34|DEL 7F|  |    54|DEL 7F|  |    74|DEL 7F|
         |NL  15|LF  0A|  |RS  35|RS  1E|  |    55|DEL 7F|  |    75|DEL 7F|
         |BS  16|BS  08|  |UC  36|DEL 7F|  |    56|DEL 7F|  |    76|DEL 7F|
         |IL  17|DEL 7F|  |EOT 37|EOT 04|  |    57|DEL 7F|  |    77|DEL 7F|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |CAN 18|CAN 18|  |    38|DEL 7F|  |    58|DEL 7F|  |    78|DEL 7F|
         |EM  19|EM  19|  |    39|DEL 7F|  |    59|DEL 7F|  |acc 79|acc 60|
         |CC  1A|DEL 7F|  |    3A|DEL 7F|  | !  5A| !  21|  | :  7A| :  3A|
         |CU1 1B|DEL 7F|  |CU3 3B|DEL 7F|  | $  5B| $  24|  | #  7B| #  23|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |IFS 1C|FS  1C|  |DC4 3C|DC4 14|  | *  5C| *  2A|  | @  7C| @  40|
         |IGS 1D|GS  1D|  |NAK 3D|NAK 15|  | )  5D| )  29|  | '  7D| '  27|
         |IRS 1E|RS  1E|  |    3E|DEL 7F|  | ;  5E| ;  3B|  | =  7E| =  3D|
         |IUS 1F|US  1F|  |SUB 3F|SUB 1A|  | ¬¼ 5F|car 5E|  | "  7F| "  22|
         +-------------+  +-------------+  +-------------+  +-------------+
 
         (Continued on Following Page)
 
 
 
 
 
             Appendix B:  Character Translation for ASCII Communication     356
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
 
         Output Translation (Continued)
 
         +-------------+  +-------------+  +-------------+  +-------------+
         |      |ASCII |  |      |ASCII |  |      |ASCII |  |      |ASCII |
         |EBCDIC|Output|  |EBCDIC|Output|  |EBCDIC|Output|  |EBCDIC|Output|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |    80|DEL 7F|  |    A0|DEL 7F|  | »¶ C0| »  7B|  |bsl E0|bsl 5C|
         | a  81| a  61|  |til A1|til 7E|  | A  C1| A  41|  |    E1|DEL 7F|
         | b  82| b  62|  | s  A2| s  73|  | B  C2| B  42|  | S  E2| S  53|
         | c  83| c  63|  | t  A3| t  74|  | C  C3| C  43|  | T  E3| T  54|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         | d  84| d  64|  | u  A4| u  75|  | D  C4| D  44|  | U  E4| U  55|
         | e  85| e  65|  | v  A5| v  76|  | E  C5| E  45|  | V  E5| V  56|
         | f  86| f  66|  | w  A6| w  77|  | F  C6| F  46|  | W  E6| W  57|
         | g  87| g  67|  | x  A7| x  78|  | G  C7| G  47|  | X  E7| X  58|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         | h  88| h  68|  | y  A8| y  79|  | H  C8| H  48|  | Y  E8| Y  59|
         | i  89| i  69|  | z  A9| z  7A|  | I  C9| I  49|  | Z  E9| Z  5A|
         |    8A|DEL 7F|  |    AA|DEL 7F|  |    CA|DEL 7F|  |    EA|DEL 7F|
         | ¶  8B| »  7B|  |    AB|DEL 7F|  |    CB|DEL 7F|  |    EB|DEL 7F|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |    8C|DEL 7F|  |    AC|DEL 7F|  |    CC|DEL 7F|  |    EC|DEL 7F|
         |    8D|DEL 7F|  | [  AD| [  5B|  |    CD|DEL 7F|  |    ED|DEL 7F|
         |    8E|DEL 7F|  |    AE|DEL 7F|  |    CE|DEL 7F|  |    EE|DEL 7F|
         |    8F|DEL 7F|  |    AF|DEL 7F|  |    CF|DEL 7F|  |    EF|DEL 7F|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |    90|DEL 7F|  |    B0|DEL 7F|  | º¶ D0| º  7D|  | 0  F0| 0  30|
         | j  91| j  6A|  |    B1|DEL 7F|  | J  D1| J  4A|  | 1  F1| 1  31|
         | k  92| k  6B|  |    B2|DEL 7F|  | K  D2| K  4B|  | 2  F2| 2  32|
         | l  93| l  6C|  |    B3|DEL 7F|  | L  D3| L  4C|  | 3  F3| 3  33|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         | m  94| m  6D|  |    B4|DEL 7F|  | M  D4| M  4D|  | 4  F4| 4  34|
         | n  95| n  6E|  |    B5|DEL 7F|  | N  D5| N  4E|  | 5  F5| 5  35|
         | o  96| o  6F|  |    B6|DEL 7F|  | O  D6| O  4F|  | 6  F6| 6  36|
         | p  97| p  70|  |    B7|DEL 7F|  | P  D7| P  50|  | 7  F7| 7  37|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         | q  98| q  71|  |    B8|DEL 7F|  | Q  D8| Q  51|  | 8  F8| 8  38|
         | r  99| r  72|  |    B9|DEL 7F|  | R  D9| R  52|  | 9  F9| 9  39|
         |    9A|DEL 7F|  |    BA|DEL 7F|  |    DA|DEL 7F|  |    FA|DEL 7F|
         |    9B| º¶ 7D|  |    BB|DEL 7F|  |    DB|DEL 7F|  |    FB|DEL 7F|
         |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|  |------|------|
         |    9C|DEL 7F|  |    BC|DEL 7F|  |    DC|DEL 7F|  |    FC|DEL 7F|
         |    9D|DEL 7F|  | ]  BD| ]  5D|  |    DD|DEL 7F|  |    FD|DEL 7F|
         |    9E|DEL 7F|  |    BE|DEL 7F|  |    DE|DEL 7F|  |    FE|DEL 7F|
         |    9F|DEL 7F|  |    BF|DEL 7F|  |    DF|DEL 7F|  |    FF|DEL 7F|
         +-------------+  +-------------+  +-------------+  +-------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
             Appendix B:  Character Translation for ASCII Communication     357
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
         Notes:
 
          1.  A CR (Carriage Return) entered from an ASCII terminal is treated
              as an end-of-input signal by the terminal control hardware.  ACK,
              CAN, ENQ, and EOT also act as end-of-input signals, but are not
              normally used as such.  Ending a line with any character other
              than CR will usually cause data on the line to be lost.  No data
              will be read following an end-of-input character until after the
              next prompt is issued.
 
          2.  DEL characters from an ASCII terminal are removed by the terminal
              control hardware and are not passed to VM/SP as data.
 
          3.  The BREAK key found on most ASCII terminals does not transmit a
              character, but rather causes a special condition on the
              communication line which is recognized as an attention request.
 
          4.  NUL characters entered from an ASCII terminal may be deleted or
              translated to another character under the control of the TERMINAL
              NULLS command.  CMS uses NUL to indicate the end of the data on
              an input line; the NUL and any following characters are ignored.
 
          5.  The ASCII left and right braces are translated to the EBCDIC
              brace characters on input.  Both the EBCDIC and TN braces are
              translated to ASCII braces on output.
 
          6.  An EBCDIC "not" (¬) is translated to an ASCII caret (or up-
              arrow), and an ASCII caret is translated to an EBCDIC "not".
              ASCII does not have a "not" character.
 
          7.  The EBCDIC vertical bar and broken vertical bar are both
              translated to the ASCII broken vertical bar.  The ASCII broken
              vertical bar becomes an EBCDIC vertical bar.  ASCII does not have
              a vertical bar.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
             Appendix B:  Character Translation for ASCII Communication     358
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         APPENDIX C:   Glossary
 
 
 
         This appendix contains definitions for a number of important terms
         used in connection with CMS.  These terms are frequently used in this
         manual and others.  This is not intended to be a general computer-
         related dictionary, but rather a summary of terms that have specific
         meanings when used in the context of CMS and are important for an
         understanding of the CMS documentation.
 
 
 
         attention
              You can interrupt the execution of a command at your terminal by
              causing an attention.  This allows you to stop output from the
              command by entering HT (halt typing), or terminate the command by
       |      entering HX (halt execution) or HI (halt interpretation).  Other
       |      commands can also be entered.  These commands are stacked and are
       |      executed after the current command completes.  Note that HX and
       |      HI clear the stack.
 
              An attention can be caused at an ASCII terminal by pressing the
              BREAK key.  At a 3270-type terminal press ENTER to cause an
              attention if the terminal is in RUNNING status.  If the terminal
              is in VM READ status you must move the cursor to the left of the
              input area (to the last column of the previous line), press
              ENTER, and move the cursor back to the input area.
 
       |      You can usually enter commands on a 3270 when RUNNING is
       |      displayed.
 
              On an ASCII terminal, pressing BREAK twice will cause the
              terminal to enter CP mode.  On a 3270-type terminal, pressing PA1
              will enter CP mode.  Use the BEGIN command to return to normal
              CMS execution.
 
         byte A data item containing eight bits.  A byte usually represents one
              character.
 
         CJS  The Conversational Job System.  CJS was a subset of CMS provided
              at the UKCC from 1976 through 1983.  CJS was used to submit batch
              jobs, examine output, and format documents with SCRIPT.
 
         CMS  The Conversational Monitor System.  CMS is the interactive
              terminal system that is supplied with the IBM Virtual Machine
              System Product (VM/SP).
 
         CP   The Control Program.  CP is the part of the IBM Virtual Machine
              System Product (VM/SP) that manages the computing system.
 
 
 
                                                  Appendix C:  Glossary     359
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         display terminal
              Only 3270-type terminals and asynchronous ASCII terminals using
              the S3270 facility are supported as display terminals.  All other
              kinds of terminals, including ASCII display terminals not using
              S3270, are treated as typewriter (or line mode) terminals.  The
              CMS editors support full-screen modes on display terminals.
 
         EDF  The Extended Disk Format is the recommended format for all CMS
              minidisks.  EDF minidisks are formatted to contain physical
       |      blocks of 512, 1K, 2K, or 4K bytes (the default is 1K).  A number
       |      of restrictions that existed under the old format (which used
              800-byte blocks) have been removed under EDF.  The old format is
              still supported.  EDF has been used for all new users at the UKCC
              since 1979.
 
         EXEC A CMS disk file with a filetype of "EXEC" that contains commands
              and EXEC control statements.  This allows existing commands to be
              combined by the user to build new commands.  An EXEC is executed
              from the terminal by entering its name.
 
       |      CMS has three EXEC interpreters.  The oldest is known simply as
              EXEC.  A newer version is called EXEC 2 and supports a more
              powerful language.
 
       |      The newest EXEC interpreter is called the System Product
       |      Interpreter or REXX (for Restructured Extended Executor).  It
       |      provides a much more powerful language and should be used for new
       |      applications.
 
         file A collection of records kept together on a disk.  CMS users can
              manipulate three kinds of files: CMS disk files, spool files, and
              OS data sets.  CMS disk files are the files that may be created
              and examined with the CMS editors and are used for permanent data
              storage.  CMS disk files are identified with a fileid.  Spool
              files are special files that represent printed or punched output
              and are used for temporary storage or for transferring data
              between users.  Spool files are identified with a spool file
              number.  OS data sets are files that are created under the OS
              batch system and may be examined from CMS.  OS data sets are
              identified with a data set name.
 
         fileid
              A three-part CMS disk file identifier.  The three parts are the
              filename, the filetype, and the filemode.  In many cases a fileid
              may be specified using only the first two parts.
 
         filemode
       |      The third part of the CMS fileid.  It always consists of one
       |      letter and one digit (0 through 6).  The filemode letter is
              determined by the ACCESS command and indicates on which disk the
              file resides.  The filemode number may be set by the user.
              Usually it is only necessary to specify the letter and a default
              number will be supplied.  Some commands will also supply a
              default letter.
 
 
                                                  Appendix C:  Glossary     360
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         filename
              The first part of the CMS fileid.  The name may consist of from
              one to eight characters (limited to letters, digits, $, #, @, -,
              +, _ and :).
 
         filetype
              The second part of the CMS fileid.  It may consist of from one to
              eight characters (limited to letters, digits, $, #, @, -, +, _
              and :).  Some CMS commands attach special significance to certain
              filetypes.  For example, the SCRIPT command uses only files with
              a filetype of "SCRIPT," and the PLOT command uses a default
              filetype of "PLOT."  The CMS editors set certain default file
              attributes based on the filetype (refer to the XEDIT filetype
              Appendix for details).
 
         HASP Houston Automatic Spooling Program.  HASP runs with the OS batch
              system and controls the printers on the computer system, both at
              the Computing Center and at remote sites around the state.
 
       | HPO  is the High Performance Option of VM/SP.  HPO is required for
       |      some processors, including the IBM 3083 used at the UKCC.
 
         minidisk
              A permanent area of disk storage used to contain CMS disk files.
              Every CMS user has write-access to a least one minidisk for
              permanent data storage.
 
         program stack
              See "stack."
 
       | REXX The Restructured Extended Executor language supported by the
       |      System Product Interpreter.  REXX is the new EXEC language
       |      provided with Release 3 of VM/SP.  Also see "EXEC."
 
         RSCS Remote Spooling Communication Subsystem.  RSCS is a subsystem
              that runs under VM/SP and controls the transfer of data across
              communication lines.  RSCS controls 328x printers.
 
         spool file
              See "file."
 
         stack
       |      The CMS stack (or program stack) is a series of buffers used to
       |      hold data lines.  Lines are placed in the stack with REXX PUSH
       |      and QUEUE statements, the EXEC &STACK function, and by a number
       |      of CMS commands.  Stacked lines may be read with REXX PULL and
       |      PARSE statements, and the EXEC &READ function.  CMS will also
       |      read commands from the stack.  The stack may be controlled with
              the MAKEBUF and DROPBUF commands.  Lines entered at the terminal
              pass through console buffers and for most purposes may be
              considered an extension to the stack.
 
 
 
 
                                                  Appendix C:  Glossary     361
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       | supported
       |      This means that the organization that originally supplied a
       |      command, program, or other software will investigate and correct
       |      problems, and that the UKCC probably will be able to supply
       |      consulting assistance.  Unsupported software can often be used
       |      successfully, but if you encounter a problem you are on your own.
       |      You use unsupported software at your own risk!
 
         token
       |      An eight-character string.  The old EXEC processor (this is not
       |      true of REXX or EXEC 2) tokenizes each line by truncating each
       |      group of non-blank characters (words) to a length of eight.
              Characters after the first eight are discarded.  CP and CMS
              command parameters are often tokenized (and converted to
              uppercase).
 
         typewriter terminal
              A terminal that produces printed (hardcopy) output, rather than a
              display.  VM/SP treats all asynchronous ASCII terminals as
              typewriter terminals unless they are using the S3270 facility.
              Compare this with "display terminal."
 
         virtual
              Something that appears to be there, but really isn't.  VM/SP
              simulates the functions of a real computer for each user by
              creating a "virtual machine."  Each virtual machine has virtual
              memory, virtual input/output devices, and a virtual console
              (terminal).  These facilities are provided by software simulation
              and sharing the resources of the computing system among all of
              the logged on users.
 
       | word A group of characters.  REXX and  EXEC 2 consider contiguous
              strings of non-blank characters to be a word.  CMS limits words
              to eight characters in some situations (see "token").
 
         3270-type terminal
              See "display terminal."
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                  Appendix C:  Glossary     362
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         BIBLIOGRAPHY
 
 
 
 
 
         CMS
 
         VM/SP CMS Primer (IBM Order No. SC24-5236)
 
         VM/SP Introduction (IBM Order No. GC19-6200)
 
       | VM/SP HPO System Messages and Codes (IBM Order No. SC19-6226)
 
         VM/SP Terminal User's Guide (IBM Order No. GC19-6206)
 
         VM/SP CMS Command and Macro Reference  (IBM Order No. SC19-6209)
 
         VM/SP CMS User's Guide (IBM Order No. SC19-6210)
 
       | VM/SP HPO CP Command Reference for General Users
       |     (IBM Order No. SC19-6227)
 
         VM/SP System Product Editor Command and Macro Reference
             (IBM Order No. SC24-5221)
 
         VM/SP System Product Editor User's Guide (IBM Order No. SC24-5220)
 
         VM/SP System Product Interpreter Reference
             (IBM Order No. SC24-5239)
 
         VM/SP System Product Interpreter User's Guide
             (IBM Order No. SC24-5238)
 
         VM/SP System Product Interpreter Language Reference Summary
             (REXX Reference Card, IBM Order No. SC24-5238)
 
         VM/SP EXEC 2 Reference (IBM Order No. SC24-5219)
 
         VM/SP System Product Editor Command Language Reference Summary
             (XEDIT Reference Card, IBM Order No. SX24-5122)
 
         VM/SP EXEC 2 Language Reference Summary
             (EXEC 2 Reference Card, IBM Order No. SX24-5124)
 
 
         Programming Languages
 
         OS/VS-DOS/VSE-VM/370 Assembler Language
             (IBM Order No. GC33-4010)
 
 
 
                                                              Bibliography  363
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         Introduction to Waterloo BASIC for VM/370 CMS
 
         IBM VM/370 CMS User's Guide for COBOL (IBM Order No. SC28-6469)
 
         IBM VS COBOL for OS/VS (IBM Order No. GC26-3857)
 
         IBM OS/VS COBOL Compiler and Library Programmer's Guide
             (IBM Order No. SC28-6483)
 
         IBM OS COBOL Interactive Debug Terminal User's Guide and Reference.
             (IBM Order No. SC28-6465)
 
         VS FORTRAN Application Programming: Language Reference
             (IBM Order No. GC26-3986)
 
         VS FORTRAN Application Programming: Guide
             (IBM Order No. SC26-3985)
 
         VS FORTRAN Application Programming: System Services Reference
         Supplement  (IBM Order No. SC26-3989)
 
         VS FORTRAN Application Programming: Library Reference
             (IBM Order No. SC26-3989)
 
         IBM System/360 and System/370 FORTRAN IV Language
             (IBM Order No. GC28-6515)
 
         IBM System/360 OS FORTRAN IV (G and H) Programmer's Guide
             (IBM Order No. GC28-6817)
 
         IBM FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler for OS and VM/370 (CMS)
         Program Logic  (IBM Order No. LY28-6403)
 
         IBM OS FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler Programmer's Guide
             (IBM Order No. SC28-6852)
 
         UKCC CMS Pascal P4 User's Guide
 
         Pascal User Manual and Report, Kathleen Jensen and Niklaus Wirth,
             Springer-Verlag
 
         Waterloo Pascal User's Guide
 
         OS PL/I Optimizing Compiler: CMS User's Guide (IBM Order No. SC33-0037)
 
         OS and DOS PL/I Language Reference Manual (IBM Order No. GC26-3977)
 
         PL/CT User's Guide for CMS
 
         The SNOBOL4 Programming Language, Griswold, Poage, and Polonsky,
             Prentice-Hall
 
         WATFIV Under CMS
 
 
 
                                                              Bibliography  364
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         Other
 
         Guide to Typesetting at the UKCC
 
         KERMIT Protocol Manual
 
         KERMIT User's Guide
 
         MATLAB User's Guide
 
         SAS User's Guide: Basics
 
         SAS Companion for the VM/CMS Operating System
 
         SAS/FSP User's Guide
 
         SyncSort CMS Programmer's Guide
 
         UKCC CMS Batch User's Guide
 
         UKCC Plotting Manual (Third Edition)
 
         Waterloo SCRIPT GML User's Guide
 
         Waterloo SCRIPT Reference Manual
 
         Waterloo SCRIPT User's Guide
 
         XMENU and DMSCVT User's Guide
 
         XMENU Subroutine Library User Reference
 
         YCALC Spreadsheet Manual
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                              Bibliography  365
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          INDEX
 
 
 
         -&-                                  AUTOLINK, 22, 133, 204
         &, 11, 313                           AUTOSAVE, 325
         &JOBSTAT, 34
         &RC, 345                             -B-
         &RETCODE, 345                        BACKWARD, 314
         &SYSJOBID, 34                        BALANCE, 25
         &USRJOBID, 34                        BASIC, 28, 304
                                              BATCH, 29, 35
         -/-                                  batch jobs, 44, 275
         /, 336                               batch macros, 34
                                              batch server, 33
         -?-                                  BATKILL, 35
         ?, 10, 314, 336                      baud, 346
                                              BOTTOM, 314
         -=-                                  break, 347
         =, 12, 314, 324                      break key, 329, 358-359
                                              BREAKIN, 285
         -"-                                  BRKKEY, 285
         ", 336                               BROWSE, 36
         "", 336                              BURN, 41, 121, 314
                                              BURST, 285
         -A-                                  BYPASS, 285
         A, 336                               byte, 359
         abbreviations, 80, 203, 233
         ACCEPT, 13, 230                      -C-
         ACCESS, 15, 75, 133, 160, 204        C, 337
         account balance, 25                  CALC, 42
         acknowledgment, 13, 41, 175, 230     calculator, 42
         ADD, 314                             CALL/OS BASIC, 28
         address, 111                         CANCEL, 44, 314
         ADDRESS function, 80                 CAPPEND, 314
         AJ833, 17, 297, 348                  carriage control, 119, 198-199,
         ALL, 314                                   294
         ALT, 324                             CASE, 45, 205, 235, 325, 354
         ALTER, 314                           CC, 46, 337
         alteration count, 309                CDELETE, 314
         APL, 284, 324                        Central, 163, 238, 241, 244
         APLT, 284                            CFIRST, 314
         ARBCHAR, 325                         CHANGE, 315
         ASCII, 346, 354                      characters, 354
         ASMXC, 18                            CHARDEL, 285
         ASMXCG, 19                           CHECKBUF, 47
         ASMXG, 20                            CINSERT, 315
         ASSEMBLE, 18-21                      CJS, 359
         asynchronous communication, 346      CJSPREP, 48, 278
         attention, 358-359                   CLAST, 315
         ATTN, 284                            CLEAR, 49
         AUTOCR, 285                          CLEAR key, 310
 
 
                                                                  Index     366
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         CLOCATE, 315                         -D-
         CMDLINE, 325                         D, 337
         CMS, 315, 359                        data bits, 346
         CMS Batch, 29, 35                    date, 80
         CMSCMSG, 50                          DBLANK, 316
         CMSDIO, 51                           DD, 337
         CMSG, 315                            DEFAULTS, 74, 159, 231
         CMSPMSG, 54                          DEL, 311
         CMSREAD, 55                          delete, 311, 316
         CMSTIO, 56                           desk calculator, 42
         COBDC, 57                            DETACH, 75
         COBDCG, 58                           device address, 111
         COBDG, 59                            disconnect, 145
         COBOL, 57-60, 66-68, 291             disk files, 33
         COBOL Interactive Debug, 57-59,      DISPLAY, 326
               291                            display mode, 308, 348
         COBVC, 66                            display terminal, 360
         COBVCG, 67                           DOWN, 316
         COBVG, 68                            DROP, 75, 134
         codes, 32, 354                       DROPBUF, 76
         CODETRAN, 69                         DUP key, 312
         COLOR, 325                           duplex, 346
         COLPTR, 325                          DUPLICATE, 317
         column pointer, 313
         column targets, 313                  -E-
         COMMAND, 315                         E, 337
         commands, 79                         EBCDIC, 346, 354
         Commodore SuperPET, 350              EDF, 360
         communications, 107, 115, 124        editor, 36, 129, 161, 175, 208,
         COMPARE, 150                               216, 290, 306
         COMPRESS, 315                        EMSG, 317
         console buffer, 147                  end-of-input, 347
         console log, 144, 237                ENTER, 326
         console spooling, 144                ENTER key, 310
         control characters, 354              ENVIRON, 77
         COPY, 316                            ERASE, 41, 78
         COPYFILE, 71, 82                     ERASE EOF key, 310
         cost, 46, 73                         ERASE INPUT key, 310
         COUNT, 316                           ESCAPE, 286, 326
         COVERLAY, 316                        ETX/ACK, 348
         CP, 316, 359                         even parity, 346
         CP mode, 359                         EXEC, 8, 79, 204, 234, 345, 360
         CREPLACE, 316                        EXEC 2, 8, 114, 345
         cross-reference, 63-64, 97, 103,     EXEC 2, 79
               168, 171, 184                  EXECTRACE, 234
         CTL, 307                             EXPAND, 317
         CTLCHAR, 326                         EXPLAIN, 81, 317
         CURLINE, 326                         EXTRACT, 317
         Current Cost, 46
         current line, 313                    -F-
         cursor, 311, 316                     F, 337
                                              FCOPY, 71, 82
                                              FFILE, 317
                                              FIELD MARK key, 311
 
 
                                                                  Index     367
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         field separator, 312                 HELP, 9, 113, 318
         FILE, 317, 360                       HEX, 327
         file sharing, 33                     HEXTYPE, 318
         file transmission, 107, 115, 124,    HI, 114
               350                            highlighting, 325
         FILEDEF, 204                         HILIGHT, 286
         fileid, 360                          HOSTCM, 115, 350
         filemode, 110, 360                   HOT, 163, 238, 241, 244
         filemode number, 210                 HPO, 361
         filename, 361                        HT, 116, 234, 359
         filetype, 361                        HX, 117, 359
         FILLER, 326
         FIND, 317                            -I-
         FINDUP, 318                          I, 337
         FLIST, 84                            IBM Personal Computer, 350
         FLOW, 318                            IDLES, 286
         FMODE, 326                           IMAGE, 327
         FNAME, 326                           immediate commands, 204, 234
         forms, 164                           IMPCMSCP, 79, 327
         FORTG, 90                            IMPCP, 204, 234
         FORTGC, 92                           IMPEX, 204, 234
         FORTGCG, 93                          implied CP, 79, 204, 234
         FORTGG, 94                           implied EXEC, 79, 204, 234
         FORTHX, 95                           IMSG, 235
         FORTRAN, 90, 92-95, 98-101,          INLONG, 319
               104-106, 302                   INPUT, 118, 319
         FORTVC, 98                           input translations, 204, 235
         FORTVCG, 99                          INS MODE, 311
         FORTVG, 100                          insert mode, 311
         FORTVS, 101                          Interactive Debug (COBOL), 57-59,
         FORTXC, 104                                291
         FORTXCG, 105                         interpreter, 79
         FORTXG, 106                          IPL, 123, 146
         FORWARD, 318
         FSEND, 107, 350                      -J-
         FTYPE, 326                           job status codes, 32
         full-screen, 348                     JOIN, 319
         FULLREAD, 326, 350                   JUSTIFY, 319
         FUP, 318
                                              -K-
         -G-                                  Kentucky Register, 125
         GATHER, 109                          KERMIT, 124, 350
         GET, 318                             keyboard, 310
         GETFMODE, 110                        KYREG, 125
         GETVADDR, 111
         GLOBAL, 21, 64, 184                  -L-
         GRIPE, 112                           LABELS, 126
                                              LASTLORC, 327
         -H-                                  LEDIT, 129
         half-duplex, 346                     LEFT, 319
         Halt Execution, 117, 359             libraries, 64, 184
         Halt Interpretation, 114             line editing, 235, 289
         Halt Typing, 116, 234, 359           line mode, 308
         HASP, 361                            line speed, 346
 
 
                                                                  Index     368
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         LINEDEL, 286                         NFIND, 321
         LINEND, 286, 327                     NFINDUP, 321
         LINESIZE, 287, 297                   NFUP, 321
         LINK, 22, 75, 133, 204               nicknames, 159, 231, 283
         LISP, 136                            NONDISP, 328
         LISTDS, 137                          Northern Digital microWAT, 350
         LISTX, 139                           NOSEQ8, 307
         LOAD, 320                            NOTE, 13, 159
         LOCATE, 320                          NOUPDATE, 307
         LOGIN, 145                           null, 358
         LOGOFF, 144                          NULLS, 287, 328
         LOGON, 145                           NUMBER, 329
         LOGOUT, 144
         long input, 319                      -O-
         LOWERCASE, 320                       online news, 158
         LPREFIX, 320                         OS batch jobs, 44, 275
         LRECL, 327                           OS data sets, 160-161, 306, 340
                                              OSDISKS, 160
         -M-                                  OSXEDIT, 161, 306
         M, 337                               OUTPUT, 162
         MACLIB, 21, 64, 184                  output translations, 205, 235
         MACRO, 320, 328, 337                 OVERLAY, 321
         macro libraries, 21
         macros, 34, 80, 341                  -P-
         MAKEBUF, 147                         P, 337
         MANUAL, 148                          PA keys, 329
         mark parity, 346                     PACK, 165, 329
         MASK, 287, 328                       packed files, 165, 329, 340
         MATCH, 150                           PAn, 329
         MATLAB, 156                          parity, 346, 354
         matrix arithmetic, 156               PARSE, 321
         member, 161                          partitioned data set, 161
         MENUEXEC, 157                        PASCAL, 166, 171-174, 201-202
         MERGE, 320                           PASSWORD, 169
         messages, 235                        PASXREF, 171
         microcomputers, 107, 115, 124,       PAS4C, 172
               350                            PAS4CG, 173
         microSoftware, 350                   PAS4G, 174
         microWAT, 350                        PA1 key, 37, 310, 359
         minidisk, 75, 361                    PA2 key, 37, 310
         MM, 337                              PDS, 161
         mode, 110, 287                       PEEK, 175, 230, 306
         MODIFY, 320                          PENDING, 329
         MOVE, 320                            personal computers, 107, 115,
         MSG, 321                                   124, 350
         MSGLINE, 328                         PF, 329
         MSGMODE, 328                         PF keys, 37, 205, 212, 235, 289,
                                                    311, 329
         -N-                                  PFILE, 321
         NETDATA, 13, 159, 175, 231           PL/CT, 176
         new line, 311                        PL/I, 176-177, 179-180, 186-188
         NEWS, 158, 204                       PLC, 176
         newsletter, 125                      PLIC, 177
         NEXT, 321                            PLICR, 179
 
 
                                                                  Index     369
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         PLIOPT, 180                          QUERY LOGMSG, 204
         PLIXC, 186                           QUERY NAMES, 204
         PLIXCG, 187                          QUERY OUTPUT, 205
         PLIXG, 188                           QUERY PF, 205
         PLOT, 189                            QUERY RATE, 205
         PLOTAJ, 191                          QUERY RDR, 205
         PLOTHP, 193                          QUERY READER, 205
         PLOTTEK, 195, 293                    QUERY SEARCH, 205
         POINT, 329                           QUERY SET, 205
         POWERINP, 321                        QUERY SYNONYM, 205
         PQUIT, 321                           QUERY TERMINAL, 205, 289
         PREFIX, 330, 336                     QUERY TIME, 205
         prefix subcommands, 312, 320         QUERY USER, 205
         PRESERVE, 322                        QUERY USERID, 205
         PRHELP, 197                          QUIT, 322
         PRINT, 119, 198, 294
         printing, 2                          -R-
         printing terminals, 348              RANGE, 330
         PROFILE, 308                         RATES, 207
         PROFILE EXEC, 80, 146, 239, 242,     RBLANK, 322
               245, 297, 317                  RBROWSE, 208
         PROFILE XEDIT, 337                   RDRCOST, 209
         program attention keys, 329          READ, 323
         program function keys, 205, 212,     READY command, 301
               235, 289, 311, 329             ready message, 236
         program stack, 47, 76, 147, 232,     RECALL, 212, 314
               263, 361                       recall function, 10
         programming languages, 5             RECFM, 330
         PROMPT, 287                          reconnect, 145, 289
         prompts, 347                         record separator, 311
         PROTOCOL, 288, 348                   RECOVER, 323
         PSAVE, 322                           RELEASE, 75
         PSCRIPT, 224                         REMOTE, 330
         PUBLIC, 200                          RENAME, 210
         Public disk, 200                     RENUM, 323
         PURGE, 41, 322                       REPEAT, 323
         PUT, 322                             REPLACE, 323
         PUTD, 322                            REPRINT, 211
         PW, 201                              RESERVED, 330
         P4 Pascal, 166, 172-174              RESET, 311, 323
         P8000, 171, 202                      RESTORE, 323
                                              Resume Typing, 214, 234
         -Q-                                  retain, 313
         QQUIT, 322                           retain function, 11
         QUERY, 203, 236, 322                 RETCODE, 345
         QUERY ABBREV, 203                    RETRIEVE, 205, 212, 235
         QUERY DISK, 204                      return codes, 345
         QUERY FILEDEF, 204                   reuse, 314
         QUERY FILES, 204                     reuse function, 12
         QUERY IMMEDIATE, 204                 REXX, 8, 79, 114, 345, 361
         QUERY IMPCP, 204                     RGTLEFT, 323
         QUERY IMPEX, 204                     RH, 213
         QUERY INPUT, 204                     RIGHT, 323
         QUERY LINKS, 204                     RINPUT, 324
 
 
                                                                  Index     370
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         RSCS, 163, 238, 241, 244, 276,       special characters, 354
               361                            SPELL, 248, 334
         RT, 214, 234                         SPELLCHK, 249
         RUBS, 288                            SPELLFIX, 254, 334
         RUNID, 215                           SPILL, 332
         RXEDIT, 216, 306                     SPITBOL, 256
                                              SPLIT, 335
         -S-                                  SPLTJOIN, 335
         S, 337                               spool file, 41, 109, 175, 204,
         SAS, 217                                   208-209, 211, 216, 361
         SAVE, 324                            spooling console, 144
         SCALE, 330, 337                      spreadsheet, 344
         SCAN, 219                            SSAVE, 335
         SCHANGE, 324                         SSORT, 259
         SCREEN, 331                          stack, 47, 76, 147, 232, 263,
         SCRIPT, 223, 318                           335, 361
         SCRNSAVE, 288                        STATE, 8
         SCROLL, 288                          STATEW, 8
         SELECT, 225, 331                     Statistical Analysis System, 217
         SENDFILE, 13, 230                    STATUS, 261, 335
         SENTRIES, 232                        status codes, 32
         SEQ8, 308                            STAY, 332
         SERIAL, 331                          STK, 263
         SET, 205, 233, 324                   STKDATE, 264
         SET =, 324                           STKDISK, 265
         SET ABBREV, 203, 233                 STKID, 267
         SET AUTOREAD, 146, 233               STKRDR, 268
         SET BLIP, 146, 234                   STKTERM, 269
         SET CMSTYPE, 116, 214, 234           STKTIME, 271
         SET EMSG, 234, 328                   STKXRDR, 272
         SET EXECTRACE, 234                   stop bits, 346
         SET IMMEDIATE, 204, 234              storage, 6, 274
         SET IMPCP, 79, 204, 234              STREAM, 332
         SET IMPEX, 79, 204, 234              SUBMIT, 275
         SET IMSG, 235                        SuperPET, 350
         SET INPUT, 204, 235                  supported, 362
         SET LINEDIT, 235, 289                SyncSort, 259
         SET MACRO, 79                        SYNONYM, 80, 205, 233, 332
         SET MSG, 235                         SYSID, 280
         SET OUTPUT, 205, 235                 System Product Editor, 306
         SET PF, 205, 235                     System Product Interpreter, 79
         SET RDYMSG, 236                      S3270, 269, 326, 348
         SETCON, 237
         SETPRT, 198, 240                     -T-
         SETPUN, 243                          TABCHAR, 288
         SFILE, 230                           TABL, 337
         SHADOW, 331                          TABLINE, 332
         SHIFT, 334                           tabs, 288-289, 332
         SIDCODE, 308, 331                    targets, 313
         SNOBOL4, 256                         TCU, 347
         SORT, 246, 259, 334                  TDISK, 75, 281
         SORTF, 246                           TELL, 283
         SOS, 334                             temporary disk, 75, 281
         SPAN, 331                            TERMINAL, 205, 284, 332, 354
 
 
                                                                  Index     371
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         terminal control unit, 347           -Y-
         TERMINAL LINESIZE, 146, 297          YCALC, 344
         TERMINAL PROTOCOL, 348
         TESTCOB, 57-59, 291                  -Z-
         TEXT, 288, 333                       ZETALIB, 3
         time, 80                             ZONE, 334
         TIMESTMP, 288
         TKPLOT, 293                          -3-
         TOFEOF, 333                          3101, 289
         token, 362                           3270 simulation, 269, 348
         TOP, 335                             3270 simulator, 326
         TPRINT, 119, 294                     3270-type terminal, 362
         tracing, 234
         TRANSFER, 335
         TRANSLAT, 333
         translation, 354
         TRUNC, 333
         TYPE, 289, 294, 298, 335
         typewriter mode, 308, 347
         typewriter terminal, 362
 
         -U-
         UNPACK, 299
         UP, 335
         UPDATE, 308
         UPPERCASE, 335
 
         -V-
         VARBLANK, 333
         VERIFY, 300, 333
         virtual, 362
         virtual address, 111
         VS COBOL, 57-60, 66-68, 291
         VS FORTRAN, 98-99
 
         -W-
         WAITRDR, 301
         Waterloo microSoftware, 115, 350
         WATFIV, 302
         WBASIC, 304
         WIDTH, 308
         word, 362
         word processing, 2
         WRAP, 333
 
         -X-
         X, 337
         XEDIT, 79, 161, 175, 216, 306,
               336
         XEDIT macros, 80, 341
         XMENU, 157, 342
         XMENULIB, 343
         XOFF, 289
         XON, 289
 
 
                                                                  Index     372